Category: English Literature

  • Learn all the Tenses in English: Complete Course

    Learn all the Tenses in English: Complete Course

    These texts present a comprehensive guide to understanding and mastering English tenses. The series focuses on both basic and advanced tenses, providing step-by-step instructions and practical exercises. Rebecca, the instructor, emphasizes clear explanations of when and how to use each tense, along with common mistakes to avoid. The materials cover the nuances of the present simple and present continuous tenses, highlighting differences in usage related to permanent vs. temporary actions, routines, facts, and schedules. Spelling changes, contractions, and short answers are also addressed for practical application. Overall, the goal is to provide learners with the structure needed to communicate fluently and confidently in English.

    Mastering English Tenses: A Study Guide

    Quiz: Short Answer Questions

    1. What is the main purpose of understanding English tenses, according to the source?
    2. How many tenses are there in the English language?
    3. What are the six basic tenses that Rebecca refers to in the text?
    4. What does the present simple tense generally describe? Give an example.
    5. What does the present continuous tense generally describe? Give an example.
    6. According to the text, what are the five situations in which we can use the present simple tense?
    7. How do you form the present simple tense in positive sentences for the subjects he, she, and it?
    8. When is the present continuous tense also called the present progressive tense?
    9. What is the difference between an action verb and a stative verb? Give one example of each.
    10. When is it acceptable to use a present simple tense to speak of something in the future?

    Quiz Answer Key

    1. According to the source, the main purpose of understanding English tenses is to make a big improvement in English by being able to communicate more fluently and confidently. It allows you to use the right tense to convey when something happened.
    2. In the English language, there are twelve different tenses. They are often divided into basic and advanced tenses.
    3. The text does not specifically name the six basic tenses. Instead, it indicates that they are the ones usually learned first when starting to learn English.
    4. The present simple tense generally describes something that is true in general, more or less permanent, or a routine activity. An example is “I work at the bank.”
    5. The present continuous tense generally describes something that is happening right now or something temporary. An example is “I am teaching.”
    6. The five situations in which we can use the present simple tense are to talk about things which are permanent, routines, facts, schedules, and to use adverbs of frequency.
    7. In positive present simple sentences, for the subjects he, she, and it, you need to add an “s” to the end of the verb (e.g., he works, she works, it works).
    8. The present continuous tense is also called the present progressive tense because both names refer to the same grammatical concept and can be used interchangeably.
    9. An action verb describes an action, such as “run,” while a stative verb describes a state or condition, such as “understand”. The use of stative verbs is generally limited in continuous tenses.
    10. It is acceptable to use the present simple tense to speak of something in the future when referring to a regularly scheduled event. In such cases, a time indicator like ‘tomorrow’ is necessary for clarity.

    Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the importance of mastering English tenses for effective communication. Use examples from the provided text to support your argument.
    2. Explain the differences between the present simple and present continuous tenses, providing specific examples of when each should be used and when errors are commonly made.
    3. Outline Rebecca’s suggestions for successfully completing the English tenses program. How do these recommendations align with effective language learning strategies?
    4. Analyze the role of “stative verbs” in the English language, discussing their impact on tense usage, particularly concerning the present continuous tense.
    5. Compare and contrast the uses of the present simple and present continuous tenses, explaining how the choice of tense affects the meaning and interpretation of a sentence.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Tense: A grammatical category that expresses time reference, indicating when an action or state occurs (past, present, or future).
    • Present Simple: A verb tense used to describe habits, general truths, permanent situations, and regularly scheduled events.
    • Present Continuous (Progressive): A verb tense used to describe actions happening at the moment of speaking, temporary situations, or trends.
    • Verb “To Be”: A verb that functions as a main verb or an auxiliary (helping) verb; its forms (am, is, are, was, were, being, been) are essential for constructing various tenses and sentences.
    • Adverb of Frequency: A word or phrase that indicates how often an action occurs (e.g., always, never, sometimes, often, rarely).
    • Contraction: A shortened form of a word or phrase, where letters are omitted and replaced with an apostrophe (e.g., “don’t” for “do not,” “I’m” for “I am”).
    • Action Verb: A verb that describes a physical or mental action (e.g., run, jump, think, read).
    • Stative Verb: A verb that describes a state, condition, feeling, or mental process, rather than an action (e.g., know, like, have, understand).
    • Routine: A sequence of actions regularly followed, often habitual or customary.
    • Schedule: A plan that indicates when events or activities are set to occur.

    Mastering English Tenses: A Comprehensive Guide

    Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided text excerpts about English tenses.

    Briefing Document: Mastering English Tenses

    Subject: Understanding and Utilizing English Verb Tenses (Present Simple vs. Present Continuous)

    Source: Excerpts from “Pasted Text” (engVid series on English verb tenses)

    Overview: The provided text focuses on English verb tenses, particularly the present simple and present continuous tenses. It emphasizes the importance of mastering tenses for clear and fluent communication and offers a structured approach to learning them. The presenter, Rebecca Ezekiel, highlights common mistakes and provides practical tips for effective learning and practice.

    Main Themes & Ideas:

    • Importance of Tenses: Tenses are fundamental to English communication. “Tenses tell us when something happened, and whenever you communicate in English, you’re using an English tense.” A strong grasp of tenses provides structure and clarity. “If your structure is weak, your English will be weak. But if your structure is strong, your English will be strong.”
    • Structured Learning Approach: The material promotes a systematic learning process, breaking down the 12 English tenses into basic and advanced categories. The approach focuses on understanding when and how to use each tense, with ample practice. “In this program, you will learn how to use each of the English tenses, step by step, so that you can communicate more powerfully and correctly and confidently in English.”
    • Present Simple vs. Present Continuous (Progressive): A significant portion of the text is dedicated to differentiating between the present simple and present continuous tenses, highlighting their distinct uses and common points of confusion.
    • Present Simple: Used for general truths, permanent situations, routines, facts, and schedules. Example: “I work at the bank” (permanent job). “The sun rises in the east” (fact). “Our class starts at 9:00.” (Schedule).
    • Present Continuous: Used for actions happening right now or temporary situations. Example: “I am working” (happening now). “We are staying at a hotel” (temporary). The use for a trend, describing a change or development, is also described: “The prices of homes are increasing”. It can also be used to complain about something “They’re always making noise.” It can sometimes be used to describe future events when a future time is specified “She’s flying to Mexico next week.”
    • Forming Tenses: The text provides detailed explanations on how to form the present simple and present continuous tenses, covering positive, negative, and question structures.
    • The “to be” verb is essential to the present continuous. “In order to use this tense correctly, you need to know two things: you need to be sure that you know the verb “to be” perfectly, and then you need to know how to add the verb + ing and any changes you need to make in spelling.”
    • Contractions: Contractions are used extensively in informal speaking.
    • “So, in English, sometimes, instead of saying, for example, “I am learning”, we shorten it or contract it and say, “I’m learning”. So, why do we do that? Usually, it’s faster, it’s easier, and we use it a lot in informal conversation and also in informal writing.”
    • However, contractions are inappropriate for use in formal business writing or academic writing.
    • Spelling Rules: Specific spelling rules are outlined for adding “-s,” “-es,” and “-ing” to verbs, including changes required for verbs ending in “e,” “ie,” and CVC (consonant-vowel-consonant) patterns.
    • Short Answers: Proper short answers are taught for real conversation, without unnecessary repetition of the full question. For example: “If someone says, “Do they need help?”, then you can just say, in short, either “Yes, they do” or “No, they don’t”.” “Is he working late?” you could simply say “Yes, he is”, or “No, he isn’t.” “
    • Common Mistakes: The material addresses common errors, such as confusing present simple and present continuous, incorrect verb forms, spelling mistakes, missing words, and using stative verbs in the continuous tense.
    • “So usually the mistakes are of four different kinds. Sometimes, the mistake is in the tense itself.”
    • “And with this tense, we cannot use stative verbs, and in fact, in any continuous tense in English, you cannot use stative verbs.”
    • Stative Verbs vs. Action Verbs: It is critical to be aware of Stative Verbs, which describe states of being, conditions, emotions or senses, rather than an action. Stative verbs cannot be used in continuous tenses.
    • Learning Tips: The presenter recommends making a plan/schedule, actively participating in lessons (taking notes, repeating phrases), and reviewing material regularly. “Really, it’s not just about wishing that you get better, or hoping that you get better in English. It’s about making a decision and then taking the actions.”
    • Limitations of the Present Continuous: This should not be used to describe permanent situations, like where someone lives, which should be present simple.

    Key Quote:

    “Remember, tenses give structure to the language. If your structure is weak, your English will be weak. But if your structure is strong, your English will be strong.”

    Target Audience: English language learners of all levels, particularly those struggling with English verb tenses.

    Call to Action: Begin with the first tense (present simple) and progress systematically through the series. Practice frequently and apply the rules to real-life situations.

    English Tenses: A Comprehensive Question and Answer Guide

    Frequently Asked Questions About English Tenses

    1. Why is mastering English tenses important?

    Mastering English tenses is crucial for clear and effective communication. Tenses provide the structure of the language and indicate when an action occurs (past, present, or future). A strong grasp of tenses allows you to express yourself fluently and correctly, avoiding misunderstandings. Without it, your English could appear weak or confusing.

    2. How many English tenses are there, and how are they categorized?

    There are twelve English tenses. These are often categorized into six basic tenses (usually learned first) and six advanced tenses. They can also be categorized as simple or continuous/progressive tenses. This categorization helps learners understand the patterns and rules that apply across the tense system.

    3. What is the difference between the present simple and the present continuous tenses?

    The present simple (e.g., “I work”) is used to describe things that are generally true, permanent situations, routines, facts, and schedules. The present continuous (e.g., “I am working”) is used to describe actions happening right now, temporary situations, and trends. The key difference is that present simple refers to general or habitual actions, while present continuous focuses on actions in progress or temporary states.

    4. Can the present continuous tense ever be used to talk about the future?

    Yes, the present continuous can be used to talk about the future, but only when you specify a time in the future (e.g., “She’s flying to Mexico next week“). Without a future time marker, the present continuous implies that the action is happening now.

    5. What are “stative verbs,” and how do they affect tense usage?

    Stative verbs describe a state, condition, mental state, emotion, or possession (e.g., “know,” “like,” “have”). These verbs generally cannot be used in continuous tenses, including the present continuous. So, it’s incorrect to say “I am needing help”; you should say “I need help.” However, stative verbs can be used in the present simple tense. Action verbs, on the other hand, can generally be used in both present simple and present continuous.

    6. What are some common mistakes that learners make when using the present simple tense?

    Common mistakes include:

    • Confusing it with the present continuous (using present continuous for permanent situations).
    • Incorrect verb forms (especially forgetting the “-s” for he/she/it).
    • Spelling errors (particularly with verbs ending in -s, -sh, -ch, -x, or -y).
    • Missing essential helping verbs (“do” or “does” in questions and negative sentences).

    7. What are some common mistakes that learners make when using the present continuous tense?

    Common mistakes include:

    • Missing the verb “to be”.
    • Using the incorrect form of the verb “to be.”
    • Using stative verbs.
    • Incorrect spelling when adding “-ing.”
    • Using it to describe permanent actions or activities.

    8. What is the best way to practice and improve my understanding of English tenses?

    To effectively learn and practice English tenses:

    • Create a study schedule and stick to it.
    • Take your time with each lesson.
    • Take detailed notes and review them regularly.
    • Think of and create examples that apply to your own life.
    • Repeat example sentences aloud.
    • Pay close attention when reading and listening to spoken English.
    • Practice making positive sentences, negative sentences, and questions to test yourself.

    Understanding English Present Simple and Continuous Tenses

    English tenses indicate when an event occurs, whether in the past, present, or future. There are twelve tenses in English, which can seem daunting, but they can be divided into six basic and six advanced tenses. Recognizing patterns in the English tense system can make learning easier.

    The source material highlights two basic tenses to describe the present in English:

    • Present Simple: Describes something that is generally true or more or less permanent. It can also describe routines, facts, and schedules.
    • Present Continuous: Describes something happening now or something temporary. It can also describe something happening around now or a trend.

    Here’s how to form the present simple and present continuous tenses:

    Present Simple:

    • Use the base form of the verb for subjects I, you, we, and they (e.g., I work).
    • For he, she, and it, add an “s” to the base form of the verb (e.g., he works).
    • To make a negative sentence, add “do not” before the verb (e.g. I do not work). With he/she/it, use “does not” (e.g. He does not work).
    • To ask a question, use “do” before the subject (e.g., Do you work?). With he/she/it, use “does” (e.g. Does he work?).

    Present Continuous:

    • Use a form of the verb “to be” (am, is, are) + the verb + “-ing” (e.g., I am working).
    • To make a negative sentence, add “not” after the verb “to be” (e.g. You are not working).
    • To ask a question, reverse the order of the subject and the verb “to be” (e.g. Are you working?).

    When learning the present continuous tense, it’s important to understand that stative verbs (verbs that describe a state or condition) generally cannot be used in the continuous form.

    To improve English tenses, the source suggests creating a study plan, watching lessons, participating actively by taking notes, repeating pronunciation, answering questions, doing exercises, and reviewing material.

    Present Simple Tense: Usage, Formation, and Common Mistakes

    The present simple tense is a basic English tense used to describe various situations. It is important to understand when to use it, how to use it, and what mistakes to avoid.

    When to use the present simple tense:

    • Permanent situations: Use the present simple to describe situations that are generally true or more or less permanent. For example, “We live in New York” or “He works at a bank”.
    • Routines: Use it to talk about regular activities or routines. For example, “I wake up at 6:00 every day”.
    • Facts: Use it to state facts or scientific truths. For example, “The sun rises in the east”.
    • Schedules: Use it to refer to regularly scheduled events. For example, “Our class starts at 9:00”.
    • Adverbs of frequency: Use it with adverbs of frequency to describe how often something happens. Examples of adverbs of frequency include always, never, sometimes, rarely, and often. For example, “She always takes the bus”.

    How to form the present simple tense:

    • Positive sentences: For the subjects I, you, we, and they, use the base form of the verb (e.g., I work). For he, she, and it, add an “s” to the base form of the verb (e.g., he works).
    • Negative sentences: For the subjects I, you, we, and they, use “do not” before the verb (e.g., I do not work). The contraction of “do not” is “don’t” (e.g. I don’t work). For the subjects he, she, and it, use “does not” before the verb (e.g., He does not work). The contraction of “does not” is “doesn’t” (e.g. He doesn’t work).
    • Questions: For the subjects I, you, we, and they, use “Do” before the subject and the base form of the verb (e.g., Do you work?). For the subjects he, she, and it, use “Does” before the subject and the base form of the verb (e.g., Does he work?). Question words (who, what, when, where, why, how, etc.) can be added at the beginning of the question (e.g. Where do you work?).

    Spelling changes in the present simple tense (for he, she, it):

    • Generally, add an “s” to the base form of the verb (e.g., dance becomes dances).
    • If the verb ends in s, sh, ch, or x, add “es” (e.g., kiss becomes kisses).
    • For verbs ending in a consonant and y, drop the y and add “ies” (e.g., study becomes studies).
    • Irregular verbs have different endings; for example, go becomes goes, do becomes does, and have becomes has.

    Short answers in the present simple tense:

    • If a question starts with “Do,” the short answer will include a form of “do” or “don’t,” depending on whether it’s a positive or negative answer (e.g., “Do they need help?” “Yes, they do” or “No, they don’t”).
    • If a question starts with “Does,” the short answer will include a form of “does” or “doesn’t” (e.g., “Does he speak French?” “Yes, he does” or “No, he doesn’t”).
    • In the affirmative or positive answer, do not use a contraction. In the negative form, it is common to use a contraction.

    Common mistakes to avoid:

    • Confusion between present simple and present continuous tenses. Present simple is for something permanent, and present continuous is for something temporary.
    • Incorrect verb form.
    • Spelling mistakes.
    • Missing words, such as a helping verb.

    Present Continuous Tense: Usage, Formation, and Common Mistakes

    The present continuous tense is a basic English tense that is often one of the first tenses learned by English students. It is also called the present progressive tense. The present continuous tense may not exist in all languages, so it is important to understand how to use it correctly.

    When to use the present continuous tense:

    • Something happening right now: For example, “The baby is sleeping” or “It’s raining outside”.
    • Something happening around now: The action may not be happening this minute but is happening around this time. For example, “He is writing a book” or “He’s working on a project”.
    • Something temporary: It is not something that happens all the time, but something temporary. For example, “We are staying at a hotel”.
    • A trend: Something that’s changing or developing. For example, “The prices of homes are increasing”.
    • Repeated action (usually negative): Used to complain about something. For example, “They’re always making noise”.
    • The future (in a special way): Use the present continuous to talk about something in the future by including a specific time, such as “next week,” “tomorrow,” or “next year”. For example, “She’s flying to Mexico next week”.

    How to form the present continuous tense:

    • Use the subject (I, you, we, they, he, she, it) + the verb “to be” (am, are, is) + the verb + “-ing”. For example, “I am working,” “You are working,” or “He is working”.
    • To make the sentence negative, add “not” after the verb “to be”. For example, “You are not working” or “He is not working”.
    • To form a question, reverse the order of the subject and the verb “to be”. For example, “Are you working?” or “Is he working?”. Question words (when, where, how long, why, etc.) can be added to the beginning of the question while keeping the same word order.

    Contractions in the present continuous tense:

    | Affirmative | | Negative | | | :————- | :——— | :———————– | :——— | | I am | I’m | I am not | I’m not | | You are | You’re | You are not | You’re not | | | | | You aren’t | | He is | He’s | He is not | He’s not | | | | | He isn’t | | She is | She’s | She is not | She’s not | | | | | She isn’t | | It is | It’s | It is not | It’s not | | | | | It isn’t | | We are | We’re | We are not | We’re not | | | | | We aren’t | | They are | They’re | They are not | They’re not| | | | | They aren’t|

    Spelling changes when adding “-ing”:

    • For most verbs, add “-ing” to the end of the verb (e.g., eat becomes eating).
    • For verbs ending in “e”, drop the “e” and add “-ing” (e.g., use becomes using).
    • For verbs ending in “ie”, drop the “ie” and add “y” and then “-ing” (e.g., lie becomes lying).
    • For some verbs ending in a consonant-vowel-consonant (CVC) pattern, double the last letter (e.g., clap becomes clapping).

    Short answers in the present continuous tense:

    • Answers take their cues from the question itself. For example, if someone asks, “Is he working late?” you can reply, “Yes, he is” or “No, he isn’t”.
    • In a positive answer, do not use a contraction. In a negative answer, it is acceptable to use a contraction.
    • If someone asks, “Are you studying?” you can reply, “Yes, I am” or “No, I’m not”.

    When NOT to use the present continuous tense:

    • Do not use the present continuous tense to talk about any permanent actions or activities.
    • Do not use the present continuous tense with stative verbs, which describe a state or condition. Action verbs can be used in the present continuous tense.

    Common Mistakes to Avoid:

    • Missing the verb “to be”.
    • Using the incorrect form of the verb “to be”.
    • Using the main verb incorrectly.
    • Making spelling mistakes.
    • Using a stative verb.
    • Using the present continuous tense to describe permanent situations.

    English Verb Tenses and Forms: A Comprehensive Guide

    Here’s a discussion of verb forms, drawing on information from the sources:

    English tenses rely on different verb forms to indicate when something happens.

    Present Simple Tense:

    • Base Form: For I, you, we, and they, use the base form of the verb. For example, “I work”.
    • Adding “s”: For he, she, and it, add an “s” to the base form of the verb. For example, “He works”. This is the only instance where an “s” is added to the verb.
    • Negative Form: Use “do not” (or “don’t”) before the base form for I, you, we, and they (e.g., “I don’t work”). Use “does not” (or “doesn’t”) for he, she, and it (e.g., “He doesn’t work”).
    • Question Form: Use “Do” before the subject for I, you, we, and they (e.g., “Do you work?”). Use “Does” before the subject for he, she, and it (e.g., “Does he work?”).

    Present Continuous Tense:

    • Formation: This tense combines a form of the verb “to be” (am, is, are) with the present participle (base form + “-ing”). For example, “I am working,” “You are working,” “He is working”.
    • Negative Form: Add “not” after the verb “to be”. For example, “You are not working”.
    • Question Form: Invert the subject and the “to be” verb. For example, “Are you working?”.

    Spelling Changes with -ing:

    • Generally, add “-ing” to most verbs (e.g., eat becomes eating).
    • Drop the “e” for verbs ending in “e” (e.g., use becomes using).
    • Replace “ie” with “y” then add “-ing” for verbs ending in “ie” (e.g., lie becomes lying).
    • Double the final letter for some verbs with a consonant-vowel-consonant (CVC) pattern (e.g., clap becomes clapping).

    Irregular Verbs:

    • Some verbs, especially irregular verbs, have unique forms in the present simple tense. Examples include “go” becoming “goes,” “do” becoming “does,” and “have” becoming “has”.

    Stative Verbs:

    • Stative verbs describe a state or condition, not an action. They often relate to mental or emotional states, possession, or senses.
    • Avoid using stative verbs in continuous tenses. For example, rather than saying “I am needing help?”, use “Do you need help?”.

    Common Present Simple and Continuous Tense Mistakes

    Here’s a discussion of common mistakes, drawing on information from the sources:

    Present Simple Tense Common Mistakes:

    • Confusion with present continuous: Mixing up present simple (for permanent situations) with present continuous (for temporary situations). For example, saying “I am living in Tokyo” when Tokyo is your permanent residence is incorrect; instead, say “I live in Tokyo”.
    • Incorrect verb form: Using the wrong verb form in positive, negative, or question sentences. For example, saying “We likes to travel” is incorrect; the correct form is “We like to travel”.
    • Spelling: Errors in spelling, particularly with the addition of “s,” “es,” or “ies” to verbs for he, she, and it. For example, writing “She trys to save money” is incorrect; the correct spelling is “She tries to save money”.
    • Missing words: Leaving out essential helping verbs. For example, “What time you finish work?” is missing the helping verb “do”; the correct question is “What time do you finish work?”.

    Present Continuous Tense Common Mistakes:

    • Missing the verb “to be”: Omitting “am,” “is,” or “are”. For example, “My brother watching the news” is incorrect; it should be “My brother is watching the news”.
    • Incorrect form of “to be”: Using the wrong form of “to be” (am, is, are). For example, “Bob and Maria is driving home” should be “Bob and Maria are driving home”.
    • Incorrect main verb: Using the main verb incorrectly. For example, “She is do her homework” is incorrect; it should be “She is doing her homework”.
    • Spelling: Making errors in spelling when adding “-ing” or changing the verb form.
    • Using stative verbs: Using stative verbs in the present continuous tense. For example, saying “I am needing some water” is incorrect because “need” is a stative verb; the correct sentence is “I need some water”.
    • Permanent situations: Using this tense to describe permanent situations. For example, “We are manufacturing cars” is incorrect if it’s not a temporary activity; the correct tense would be present simple: “We manufacture cars”.

    General Advice for Avoiding Mistakes:

    • Differentiate permanent and temporary: Remember that present simple is for permanent or general situations, while present continuous is for what is happening now or is temporary.
    • Know verb forms: Understand how to form positive, negative, and question sentences in both tenses.
    • Practice spelling: Pay attention to spelling changes when adding suffixes like “-s,” “-es,” or “-ing”.
    • Master “to be”: Ensure you know how to use the verb “to be” correctly as it is essential for the present continuous tense.
    • Recognize stative verbs: Learn to identify stative verbs and avoid using them in continuous tenses.
    • Review: Regularly review the rules and practice to reinforce correct usage.
    Learn all the Tenses in English: Complete Course

    The Original Text

    Do you want to make a big improvement in your  English? One of the best ways to do that is by   mastering English tenses. This means understanding  the difference between saying “I work” or “I am   working”, “I have worked”, or “I had worked”, and  so on. Tenses tell us when something happened,   and whenever you communicate in English, you’re  using an English tense. The only question is,   are you using the right tense? In this series, you will learn all   of the English tenses. These are full, complete  classes for anyone who wants to speak, write, or   understand English more easily and clearly. With  each tense, we will go step by step from beginning   to end. We’ll also go through the program from  beginner level to the advanced level of tenses.   And we’ll do lots of practice along the way. In addition, I will show you a special way to   understand these tenses, so you can really start  to use them more easily and quickly. Remember,   tenses give structure to the language. If your  structure is weak, your English will be weak.   But if your structure is strong,  your English will be strong.   So, join me in this program to master the  English tenses so that you can communicate   fluently and confidently in English. Hi, I’m Rebecca, and welcome to this series on   English tenses. In this program, you will learn  how to use each of the English tenses, step by   step, so that you can communicate more powerfully  and correctly and confidently in English.   Now, when we say English tenses, what does that  mean? Tenses are simply the way we talk about time   in any language. So, for example, when we want to  say when something happened, we’re using tenses.   If we’re talking about the past, the present, or  the future, we need to use tenses. And in English,   there are twelve tenses. Don’t let that frighten  you. I’m going to explain it to you in a way that   makes it much easier for you to understand and  start to use each of these tenses. And that’s   how you will progress in your English. Okay? So, first, I’ve divided the tenses into six basic   tenses and six advanced tenses. And I’m going to  show you exactly the kind of patterns that exist   throughout this tense system, so that as you  go forward, many parts of it will become easier   and easier. Okay? Alright. That’s first of all. Now, in terms of what are these lessons actually   like? In terms of the content – these are not  short lessons. These are full, complete classes   on each tense. Alright? Just as if – if you  were in a language school in North America   or England or Australia. That’s the kind of  class it’ll be. A solid class on each tense.   So, in these classes, I will explain, for each  tense, when to use it and how to use it. We   will do lots of practice so that you really feel  comfortable using that tense correctly in terms of   the grammar, in terms of when to use it. And also,  we’ll look at some common mistakes that students   often make so that you don’t make those mistakes.  I’ve also created some bonus lessons where we   compare different tenses. Because sometimes the  confusion is not within the tense but between   tenses. So, I’ve got some comparison lessons that  will help you understand the differences. Okay?   Next – so, how could you do this course?  Here are my suggestions. First, make a plan,   alright? Make a schedule for yourself.  When are you going to watch them? And then,   like any school, show up for class. Really, it’s  not just about wishing that you get better, or   hoping that you get better in English. It’s about  making a decision and then taking the actions. So,   you’ve already made the decision, because  you’re watching this, and that’s amazing. Now,   make the plan so you can take the action steps you  need to reach your goal. Okay? That’s first.   Next – watch the lesson. Alright? Take  your time with it. Don’t rush through it,   even if some part seems easy, watch it  anyway. Let your brain get really comfortable   and completely knowledgeable in that area,  okay? And while you’re watching, participate.   What does that mean? Be an active learner.  Make notes. Go get a special notebook,   a special binder, just for this course, this  program, alright? Take notes as you go along.   Participate and repeat after me when I’m – when  we’re doing the pronunciation sections. Answer me   when I’m asking questions, work on the exercises  with me so that you are fully engaged and   learning fully throughout that time, alright? Next – review. Whenever you have time or during   the week or something like that, between your  classes, review what you’ve learned. Go back – if   there’s any particular part you’re not sure  about, go back over it and just learn it again.   Review it so that you’ll feel really sure as you  go forward into the other tenses. And it will make   everything so much easier for you, okay? I know that this program will work for you.   Just stay with it and show up and keep going  through it, step by step, and I know that it   will lead you to a higher level of English. How  do I know that? Let me take just a few seconds   to tell you a little bit about myself. My  name’s Rebecca Ezekiel. I’ve been teaching   English for more than 30 years, and I’ve worked  with thousands of students from all over the world   to help them improve their English for  academic purposes, business purposes,   and all kinds of other reasons. Alright?  I’ve also created lots of training programs   for corporations and governments and schools and  colleges. So, I assure you, you’re in good hands.   I understand you. I understand your challenges,  but also your hopes and dreams in improving   your English to really expand your life. So, let’s go on this journey together and,   most important, let’s get started! In this video, I’m going to give you an   overview of all of the English tenses. And I’m  going to show you a special way to understand them   so that you can learn them more easily. So, this  video is part of the http://www.engvid.com series on   English verb tenses. But what are tenses anyway?   Tenses are just the way we refer to time in a  language. We could be talking about the past or   the present or the future. In English, there  are twelve different tenses, and they can be   explained in many different ways, but I’m going  to show you a simple way that I think will make   it much easier for you to learn, understand,  and start using them. So, let’s have a look.   So, on the board, I’ve written the twelve tenses.  In red are the names of the tenses, and in black   is an example each time of that tense. Alright?  But right now, you don’t have to worry about that.   This is just to give you the big picture,  alright? But don’t worry if you don’t know   the names of these tenses or the examples. It  doesn’t matter at all. Once we begin the program,   you will be learning one tense at a time  and you’ll learn everything you need to   know when you get to that tense. Alright? So, what do we need to see here, though, that is   helpful to us? So, even though there are twelve  tenses, I’ve divided them in a particular way.   The first six are what I call the basic tenses.  Because usually, these are the ones you learn   first when you start learning English. The  second part, the second six tenses are more   advanced tenses. Usually, you start learning those  a little bit later. That’s the first part.   Now, let’s look at it this way. On this side,  we see simple tenses. On this side, we see   continuous tenses, which are sometimes called  progressive tenses. But all those names, simple,   continuous, doesn’t matter right now. Because  when you get to that tense, you’ll understand it.   What is important, though, is that many of  the patterns and rules that you’ll learn here   will help you throughout this part of the tenses.  And many of the rules and patterns about grammar,   pronunciation, and spelling that you learn right  here with this continuous tense will help you all   the way through to the most advanced tense. What does that mean for you? It means that,   as you go forward in this program, from the  beginner tenses and the more basic tenses   to the more advanced tenses. It’s not –  everything is not going to get harder.   Many of the points will actually become easier,  because you will already have learned them up   here in the basic tenses, or here, because many of  these, as you can see – actually all of them have   some sort of continuous aspect, which you will  understand completely when you get there. Okay?   So, that’s the most important points that I think  you should take away right now from this. All   you need to do at this point now is to begin the  program with the first tense, which is the present   simple tense. So I wish you all the best. Hi, I’m Rebecca. Welcome to this series on   English tenses. In this class, we will look at the  present simple tense. I’ll show you exactly when   to use it, how to use it, and also what mistakes  to be careful of when you’re using this tense.   We’ll also go through lots of practice exercises  together, so you’ll learn exactly how to use   this tense correctly and confidently.  Are you ready? Let’s get started.   This series is about English tenses. But what  are tenses anyway? Tenses are simply the way   we talk about time in English. What do we mean by  time? We mean the past, the present, the future,   right? These are all different times and we have  different tenses to express or talk about those   times. So, in this lesson, we’re going to  look at the two basic ways that you – we can   speak about the present in English and they are:  the present simple and the present continuous,   or present progressive as it’s also called. Now, although we are focusing on the present   simple, I want to give you a little  overview so you understand the basic   differences between these two simple tenses,  alright? So, let me give you an example.   In present simple, we would say “I work”. And in  present continuous, we would say “I am working”.   So, what’s the difference? What’s the  difference between these two sentences?   What’s the difference, is there a difference?  I don’t know, what do you think? Well,   I do know. And there is a difference. Perhaps, in  your language, there isn’t any difference because   in many languages, there is no difference between  the way that these two ideas are expressed,   but in English, there is a difference in  the idea and the way that we say it.   So, let me explain what that difference is. When  we say “I am working”, which is that other tense,   present continuous, which we can learn later, that  is talking about something that is happening now,   or something temporary. What do I mean by now?  For example, I am teaching. You are listening,   right? All these things are happening right now.  So, when we are saying that, when I’m saying that,   I’m using present continuous. But when  I say “I work”, that is in general.   For example, I may not be working at this  moment, but I work somewhere. I have a job. So,   when we talk about something that’s true  in general, that’s present simple. Also,   present simple is for something that’s more or  less permanent. For example, if you have a job,   of course, no job or thing in life is necessarily  permanent. What does permanent mean, that it lasts   all the time, but let’s say you’re not  changing jobs every day. So, more or less,   this is the job you’ll always have. This is  your permanent job. So then, for those kind   of activities, we use present simple and we say  “I work at the bank”. “I work in the store” etc.   But, “I am working” would just be right now, or it  could also be for something temporary. “Temporary”   means only for a short period of time. This is  for always, this is for a short period of time.   This is true in general, and this one  is true for something happening now.   So, those are some basic differences  between these two tenses.   Now, let’s focus on the tense that we’re  working on today, which is present simple. So,   how does it sound? How does it actually work? It’s  like this – so these are the different subjects,   and this is the verb and the way we use it.  So just repeat it after me: I work. You work.   We work. They work. He works. She works. And:  It works. “It” meaning the air conditioner,   or the computer. “It” is for something which  is not a person but it’s for a thing.   And we saw some differences there.  Don’t worry about those changes now.   We’re going to learn all about  that in a later part of this   lesson, okay? So that’s what it sounds like. This  is a basic description of these two differences   which you can keep in mind as we now move  forward with the present simple tense.   Now, let’s look at when we use the  present simple tense, okay? So, we have   five different situations in which we can use  this tense. Let’s go through them one by one.   First of all, we can use the present simple tense   to talk about things which are permanent. Which  are more or less always true, okay? For example:   “We live in New York”. So, let’s suppose that  this is where you live, right? Not just for a   short time, but for a long time, and more or less,  it’s a permanent situation. It’s always true for   you. It doesn’t mean it’s completely true always,  but most of the time, this is where you live.   So, that’s what we consider permanent.  So, we could say “We live in New York”,   “He works at a bank”, so when we say, “He works  at a bank”, it means that’s his permanent regular   job, okay? It’s not a temporary job, it’s not  a job that he has just for a little while,   that’s where he works most of the time, okay?  So, we use this for permanent situations.   Think about yourself, okay? Whenever  you’re trying to learn a tense,   one of the great things you can do is to  think of an example that applies to your life,   or to people that you know. What is permanent  for you? So, you could say a sentence right now,   such as “I live in “, whichever city  you live in. Or, if you’re working somewhere,   and then you could say “I work  _“, okay? So, you,   by making these sentences are already using the  present simple tense. It’s that simple. Okay.   So, let’s look at another situation in  which you can use the present simple tense.   For routines. So, what’s a routine? A routine is  something you do regularly, okay? For example,   “I wake up at 6:00 every day.”, okay? “I go  to sleep at 11:00”. So, wake, go, these verbs   are in the present simple tense because they’re  talking about a regular activity, a routine.   We can also use this tense to talk about facts.  For example: “The sun rises in the east”.   It’s just a fact, it’s something that’s a  scientific truth. It’s not something that I   decided or you decided, it’s just true. We could  also say “The sun sets in the west”, okay?   Next, we can use this tense  to talk about schedules,   because think about it, what is a schedule? A  schedule tells us when something is going to   happen, and that’s kind of connected to this  point, right? A regularly scheduled event.   So, for example, we could say  “Our class starts at 9:00.”   Why are we using present simple? Because  our class always starts at 9:00, alright?   It’s kind of permanent, it’s kind of a routine,  it’s a schedule. Or, the flight leaves at noon.   Not just this time, but the flight  always leaves at noon. It has a schedule   and therefore we’re using the present  simple tense with the words “starts”   and “leaves”. Okay, got that? Now, let’s look at one other situation.   There are some words in English, and they’re  called adverbs of frequency, to describe how often   something is happening. And these words are shown  down here, but let’s look at this sentence first.   “She always takes the bus”. So, always is a  word that tells us how often something happens,   and all of these words down here are just like  that. So, if always is like 100% of the time,   we have other words. We have the word “never”,  which is 0%, it never happens. It doesn’t happen   at all. So, we could say he or she never takes  the bus. We could also say, let’s say, 50%   of the time, okay, she takes the bus. So,  we could say “She sometimes takes the bus”.   Or, once in a while, okay,  “She rarely takes the bus”.   Or, “She often takes the bus”. So, when you see  one of these words, which are called adverbs of   frequency, that also tells you that you should  be using the present simple tense, along with   these other situations. So, if you want to learn  it really well, as I said, apply it to yourself.   Say something about your routine. Say something  about what you always do, or what you never do,   and that way, you are already  using the present simple tense.   Now, let’s look at how to  form the present simple tense.   So, I’ve divided the board into three sections.  For positive sentences, negative sentences,   and for questions. And we’ll go through  each one step by step, okay? So,   for these subjects, I, You, We, and They,  we just say “work”. For example, “I work”.   You can say it after me, that way, you will  remember the grammar, you’ll also get the   pronunciation, and it’ll help you to learn and  remember. So, repeat after me: I work, you work,   we work, they work. Good. Now, look  what happens here. When it comes to he,   she, and it, we need to add an “s”, okay? That’s  all. We need to add an “s” for he, she, and it,   not because it’s plural, it’s not  plural, but from a grammar point of view,   in the present simple, we need to add an  “s” here. So, say it after me: He works,   she works, and it works. Okay? Very good. So,  that’s for a positive or affirmative sentence.   Now, let’s look at a negative sentence. So, what  we would say is “I don’t work” if we’re shortening   it, or we would say “I do not work”. So, what  happened here? How did we make it negative?   First, we have to add this word “do”, and  down here, we have to add the word “does”.   So, this is a helping verb that we have to use  in this negative form, alright? So just learn   it the way it is and then you’ll understand it  and you’ll get used to it. So, we say “I do not   work”. The “do not”, when we shorten it, becomes  “don’t”, and how does that happen? We take out the   “o” here and then we squeeze these words together,  we join them together, and it becomes “don’t”. So,   first, let’s say it with the contraction, with the  short form, because that’s how we usually speak.   It is correct to say, “I do not work”, but usually  we’ll say “I don’t work”, alright? But the most   important thing to remember is here we say, “I do  not work” but here it becomes “He does not work”,   and “does not” when we shorten it,  when we contract it, becomes “doesn’t”.   So, what happened here? We cancelled the “o” and  again, we joined these two words “does” and “not”   and it became “doesn’t”, and you can always know  how to spell this contraction or this short form   because of where we put the apostrophe. We put  the apostrophe, this little comma that’s in the in   the air, in the place where we take out a  letter. So, we put it here instead of the “o”   and we put it here instead of the “o”. So, let’s  go through these. I don’t work, You don’t work,   We don’t work, They don’t work. Now, let’s go  to he, she, and it. Remember, he, she, and it   is always going to be a little bit different.  Let’s hear it and say it: He doesn’t work,   She doesn’t work, It doesn’t work. Let’s say the  phone, the computer, it doesn’t work, okay?   Now, let’s go to the questions. So, what  happens in the questions? In the question,   we also have to use that helping verb: “do”.  “Do” here, and “does” down here, and we have to   change the order, so instead of saying “I do”,  we say “Do I?”, alright? So, repeat it after me:   Do I work? I don’t know, I don’t remember.  Do you work? Do we work? Do they work?   Down here, you would say, with he, she,  and it: Does he work? Does she work?   Does it work? Alright? Now usually, of course,  you’re not just going to say “Do you work?” You   might say something more than that. Do you work  on Fridays? Do you work Monday to Friday? Do   you work at the bank? Alright? So usually  there’s something more, but I’ve just put   the basic form here so that you understand  the structure of how to use this tense.   Now, another important point is that  sometimes, when we ask questions,   we don’t just start with “do” or “does”, but we  need to add a question word, right? So, maybe   you want to say “where”. What are the question  words, first of all: who, what, when, where, why,   how, how much, how many, how often, okay?  These are all what are called question words,   but if you have one of these question words,  all you have to do, it’s really easy, the only   thing you have to do is to put that question  word right before this structure. So, “Where   do you work?”, right? When do you work?  Why do you work? How much do you work?   How often do you work? But we’re keeping the same  structure and we still need to have that helping   verb “do”. The same down here: Where does he work?  When does she work? Okay? So, keep that structure   and even if you have a question word, don’t  worry, just put it at the beginning. So,   here we have some examples: Where do  you live? What do you do? Okay?   But the most important thing to remember is  this part, okay? He works. She works. It works.   This is the only place in the entire board  where we’re adding an “s” to the verb itself.   Everywhere else, we’re just using the base form  of the verb, right? So, let’s say our verb is   “to work”. So, here it’s “work”. I work, I don’t  work, Do you work? He works, here it’s different,   but after that, it goes back to the base form  of the verb, right? He doesn’t work. Does he   work? So even though with he, she, and it  in the positive sentence we add the “s”,   but here in the negative, no, go back to the  base form and in the question, go back to the   base form of the word “work”, but you do need  to remember that in that positive sentence,   add the “s”, okay? So, that’s the structure  of the present simple tense. It’s really   pretty straightforward, you just need  to practice it and you will get it.   Now, let’s look at some of the spelling changes  we need to make in the present simple tense.   We only need to make those changes, as I mentioned  earlier, when we’re using he, she, or it, because,   for example, we say “I work” but “He works”,  right? So what was the spelling change we needed   there? We had to add an “s”. And most of the  time, with most verbs, all you need to do is add   that “s”. For example, dance becomes dances. You  can say it after me as well, okay? Cook – cooks.   Sleep – sleeps. Alright? So there, all we did,  we just added the “s” for the he, she, or it.   Next, if the verb ends with  an s, or an sh, or a ch,   or an x, then we need to add “es”. And we can  almost hear it, okay? Just listen. For example,   kiss – kisses. You see that we’re hearing “kisses”  “es” a little bit – it’s a little bit longer,   so that tells us we need to add an “es”.  The next one, wash becomes washes. Teach –   teaches. Fix – fixes. Okay? So, that’s another  change. Another one is verbs ending in a consonant   and y. What do I mean by that? If we look at this  verb: study, it ends with a y, right? And just   before the y, we have a consonant. What’s  a consonant? Anything that’s not a vowel   is a consonant. So, what’s a vowel? A vowel in  English is a, e, i, o, or u. Everything else: b,   d, g, x, etc., these are all consonants. So,  d is a consonant. Or here, in the word try,   we have a y and before that, we have a consonant,  right? So, what happens in those cases? We have   to drop that last y and we have to add “ies”.  You’ve probably seen this lots of times, okay,   but this is actually what’s happening. So,  study becomes studies. Try becomes tries,   okay? You’ll get it, you’ll see. Fry – fries,  right? Like French fries, okay? Alright.   So, then, last of all, there are some other  verbs. They’re usually irregular verbs,   okay? These are the most common patterns, but  there are a few verbs where the ending might be   different in one way or another, okay? Sometimes  the verb really changes and you have to pay   attention to that. You may be familiar with many  of these already, but here are a few examples.   Go becomes like “I go”, “He  goes”. “I do”, “She does”.   “I have”, “It has”. So you see that in  some cases, the verb changed completely,   okay? So these are the most common patterns for  spelling changes in the present simple tense.   Now, let’s look at how to give short answers  in English. See, in real conversation,   when someone asks you a question, we don’t  usually repeat the whole question in our answer.   We just give what’s called like a short  answer. Let me give you an example.   If someone says, “Do they need help?”, then you  can just say, in short, either “Yes, they do” or   “No, they don’t”. So, we do not have  to say “Yes, they need help”, right?   You don’t have to repeat that whole question.  You just give what’s called the short answer.   And how do you know how to shorten it?  It’s really easy. So, if the question   starts with “Do”, like this, right? Then your  answer will include some form of “do” or “don’t”,   depending on if it’s a positive sentence or a  negative one. So, we see here “Do they need help?”   “Yes they do.”, right? Or “No, they don’t.”  Alright? So, the “do”, the way the question starts   is the way you will be able to answer it,  alright. It’s really pretty simple, it really is.   The important thing to remember is that  in the affirmative or positive answer,   we cannot shorten it, okay? There is no way  to shorten that correctly. So here, we have   to say “Yes, they do”, but here we can use the  short form, or that contraction that we learned,   and you can say “No, they don’t”. Alright? Let’s look at another example. This time, I think   you’ll be able to apply the principle yourself.  So, the question is “Does he speak French?”.   So, how did it start? With “does”. So, what  are our options? “Yes, he does.”, right?   Or “No, he doesn’t.” Okay? Again, the “does” is  used in the short answer. “Yes, he does.” “No,   he doesn’t.” Got it? Alright. So, based on that,  you can see that you could answer any question   that someone’s asking you in present simple  by just listening carefully to the question,   but you do have to pay attention also to the  subject here. So for example, in this last one,   “Do you like this song?”, somebody asks you,  “Do you like this song?”. So your answer –   they’re asking you, so you can’t say “Yes,  you”, you have you say “Yes, I”. “Yes, I do”,   the “do” comes into play again, or “No, I don’t.”  So again, you do see the same principle applied   all the way. And again, remember, in the  positive form, you cannot shorten it,   but in the negative form you can and you should  shorten it because that’s how we normally speak,   and these short answers are used a lot in normal  conversation, so it would be a good idea for you   to learn them and it’s really pretty fast and  I think you might have already learned them.   So, do you understand? You could say “Yes, I do!”  I hope that’s what you said, okay? Alright.   Now, let’s look at some common mistakes that  students often make when they start using the   present simple tense, and this way you’ll know  what to be careful of so that you don’t make   these kind of mistakes, alright? Let’s look. So  usually the mistakes are of four different kinds.   Sometimes, the mistake is in the tense itself. So  remember we mentioned at the beginning that there   can be present simple and present continuous, and  that present simple is for something permanent   and present continuous is for something  temporary. So sometimes, learners get mixed up   between these two tenses. So, let’s say in this  example that this person lives in Tokyo, right?   It’s not just for a little while, it’s where that  person lives. So, if that person said “I am living   in Tokyo”, that would be wrong. If that’s where  the person stays permanently, he or she should say   “I live in Tokyo”. They could say “I am living  in Tokyo” only if it’s something temporary,   alright? So, that is one mistake that’s  sometimes made with the present simple,   that confusion between it and present continuous.  Now, let’s look at another kind of mistake.   That’s when a mistake is made with the verb form.  You’ll find it because now you’re good at this,   okay? Ready, let’s read. These are all  mistakes, okay, so these are all wrong,   we’re going to correct them together. The  sentence right now says “We likes to travel.”   So, the verb is wrong. What should it be?   “We like to travel”. Say it after me: We  like to travel. Good. Here’s a mistake,   the same thing in the verb form, but in a  negative sentence: “They doesn’t eat vegetables.”   That’s wrong, you know that. What should it be?  “They don’t eat vegetables”. Say it after me:   “They don’t eat vegetables”. Good.  And here’s a mistake in the question:   “Does you talk to him often?” That’s wrong.  We can’t say that. We need to say what?   “Do you”. Say it after me: “Do you talk to him  often?” Good. Alright? So those are verb form kind   of mistakes. Another mistake that’s possible is in  spelling. We looked at the many kinds of spelling,   right, and you need to make the changes. So  here, the person wrote “She trys to save money”,   but the spelling of the verb is incorrect, because  here it’s a y and before that it’s a consonant,   remember? So what should it be? “Tries”.  They had to drop that “y” and add “ies”. So,   you’ll pick up those spelling changes, okay?  Just pay attention when you’re reading and so on   and it’ll come to you unnaturally. Next, sometimes an entire word is missing.   So, let’s look at this one. This is a  question: “What time you finish work?”.   It almost sounds right, but it’s not. It’s  wrong. Grammatically in English, that’s wrong.   Can you understand it? Yes, you can understand it,  but it’s still wrong. So, how do we correct it?   Did you find the mistake? So we should  say “What time do you finish work?”.   So, what was missing was that helping  word, okay, that helping verb, remember,   we do have to add that even if you have  a question word here like “what time”,   alright? “What time do you finish work?”. So,  these are the four main kinds of mistakes that you   have to be careful of. In tense, using the wrong  tense, using the wrong verb form, making any kind   of spelling mistakes, or leaving out an essential  verb or helping verb. Alright? That’s it!   You’ve been learning a lot, so now it’s  time to practice. Let’s get started.   Number 1: I take, but he .  What would you say in present simple?   I take, he takes, right? You have to  add that “s” there, right? Very good.   Now, let’s work it the other way. Number 2: She does, We . Do you   know it? We do. Very good. Number 3: You enjoy.   She . Yes, I can hear you.  She enjoys. Very good. Alright   Now, let’s make some phrases negative, alright,  so we’re going from positive to negative.   Number 4: They study. They  _________. Use the contraction.   They don’t study. Right? “Don’t” being short  for what? Do not. Right, you’ve got it.   Number 5: The next one. He sings. Make  it negative. He ____. Yes,   He doesn’t sing. “Doesn’t” is short  for what? Does not. Very good.   Now, let’s make some questions. So,   let’s read the sentence first. Number 6: She wants to buy a new phone.   How would we ask the question? What’s the  helping verb you have to use, helping word?   Do, or does, giving you a clue there. Here, it’s  “She”, so we have to say, “Does she want to buy a   new phone?” Okay, so remember, we come back to the  base form of the verb and we have to use “do” or   “does”, but because it’s she, we’re saying “does”.  “Does she want to buy a new phone?” Okay? Good.   Let’s do the last one. Number 7: They sell books online.   Ask a question about that. Again,  what are you going to start with?   “Do” this time, right. “Do they sell books  online?”, right? Okay? Why “do”? Because now   we’re talking about they. And why “does” here?  Because we were talking about “she”, alright.   So, if you got those right, that’s great! If you  got any wrong, maybe you can go back later and   check those parts, but we’re going to practice  some more, we’re going to learn a little bit more,   and you’ll get it for sure by the  end of this, okay. Stick with me.   To review: you know the present simple tense when  you know when you use it, which we talked about,   and how to use it. And how do you know that you  know how to use it? When you can do these things:   you can make a positive sentence, a negative  sentence, and a question. For example,   you should be able to say easily “They live in  Amsterdam.” or “They don’t live in Amsterdam.” or   “Do they live in Amsterdam?”. You should be able  to switch easily and comfortably and quickly and   correctly between these three sentences, okay? So, remember, this is the present simple tense,   but this is an entire series that we have of  English tenses, so from the present simple,   you can go to the next class which is on the  present continuous tense, and that way you can   take your English forward step by step, alright?  And if you’d like a little more practice on this   tense, the present simple tense, go to  http://www.engvid.com , alright? Thank you very much   for watching, I know you’re a serious student,  and I know you’re going to make good progress.   Hi, I’m Rebecca, and welcome to this class on the  present continuous tense, which is also called the   present progressive tense. Now, this class is part  of the engVid series on English verb tenses. So,   the present continuous tense is a basic tense.  It’s usually one of the first tenses that you   start to learn when you start studying English.  However, it doesn’t exist in every language,   and it might not exist in your language. So, it’s  possible to make mistakes very easily and it’s   a basic tense, so we really don’t want to make  those kind of mistakes. So, just stay with me.   We’re going to go through it step by step. I’ll  show you exactly how to use it, we’ll do lots of   practice together, and you will understand and be  able to use it. So, are you ready? Let’s start.   So, there are two basic tenses, first, to start  to talk about the present. They are the present   simple and the present continuous, okay? We know  it has two names, I’m just going to use one name.   So, what’s the difference? Let’s look at some  examples in each of these tenses. So, in the   present simple, I would say “I work”. In the  present continuous, I would say “I am working”.   So, what is the difference between these two? “I  am working” talks about something that’s happening   right now. For example, I am teaching.  You are watching. You are listening. Or,   it can also talk about something temporary,  like you’re watching this lesson this moment,   but also for a short time. Short is a general  idea, okay? So, it could be something that’s   happening now, or something temporary. However, we use “I work” in present simple   to talk about things that are true in general.  I work in this company, but I’m working now. Or,   I work in this company, but I’m not working  now. I’m having lunch. See the difference, okay?   We also use present simple to talk about things  that are more permanent, like your job, right? You   don’t change your job usually every day. It’s more  or less permanent; where you work, where you live.   This is more permanent and general, present  simple, and this is more temporary and now.   So, that’s the basic overview and the basic  idea. And, how do we actually form this tense?   We form it by using the subject  like I, you, we, they, he, she, it,   plus the verb “to be”, plus the verb,  plus -ing. Let’s look at an example:   “I am working”. So, we have the  subject and the verb “to be” and   each form of the verb “to be”. I am working, You  are working, We are working, They are working,   He is working, She is working, It’s working,  okay? Like the computer, the air conditioner,   whatever, okay? So, that’s the  basic overview of this tense.   Now, let’s look at when we use the present  continuous tense. So, as we saw earlier,   we can definitely use it to talk about something  that’s happening right now. For example,   “The baby is sleeping”, don’t make noise, okay?  Or for example, “Oh, it’s raining outside”,   alright? So those are examples of something  happening right now. We can also use this tense to   talk about something that’s happening around now.  For example, “He is writing a book”. So, he might   not be writing it this minute, but he’s writing  it around now. We don’t know how long it’ll take,   but it’s happening around this time. So,  we can use it in that context. For example,   we could also say “He’s working on a project”.  Maybe the project is going to take one week and   maybe it’ll take one year, or ten years, we don’t  know, but it’s happening around now, okay?   Next, we can also use it to talk about  something temporary. Not something that happens   all the time, but something temporary. For  example, that book, right? We don’t know,   maybe it’s going to take him three years to write  the book, but in his mind, it’s not something   that’s going to last forever. It’s something  temporary, okay? So, this is more about how you   look at what is happening. Or, this example,  something temporary, “We are staying at hotel”.   We live in our home, that’s permanent,  but right now, while we’re in this city,   while we’re travelling, we are staying at a  hotel. That’s something temporary. Okay?   Next, we can also use it to talk about a  trend. A trend is something that’s changing,   okay? Something that’s developing. For example,  “The prices of homes are increasing”. Let’s   say the prices were here, and now the prices are  going up, so we can say the prices are increasing.   Some sort of changes that are happening. And we  can also talk about a trend in terms of something   that’s popular. Often, we talk about things –  fashion trends, for example, right? People are   wearing a certain color. People are wearing bright  colors this summer, or people are wearing certain   kinds of shoes. So, we can talk about trends  using this present continuous tense, alright?   So, those are the basic ways in which we use  this tense, but I just want to let you know that   there are also two slightly more advanced  ways in which we can use this tense. So,   let’s look at what they are. The first one is  to talk about some kind of repeated action,   but it’s usually something negative. So,  we’re using it to kind of – when we want   to complain about something. For example,  if you say, “They’re always making noise”,   that’s a negative remark, right? So, we can  use “always” in this context with the present   continuous tense. Usually, we use words like  always, never, sometimes, frequently, and so on,   to talk about present simple. Something that’s  true in general. For example, “They always help   us”, or just to talk about facts. But when  you’re talking about something negative,   then very often we can use this present continuous  tense, but that’s a slightly more advanced way to   use it, so don’t worry about it too much, but  you might hear people using it that way.   And, another point, I know that I said this  is called the present continuous, and it talks   about the present, not the past, not the future,  the present, however, sometimes we can actually   use it to talk about the future, but only in  a special way. So, let’s look at what that is.   If I say, “She’s flying to Mexico next week.”,  now, if I didn’t say “next week”, if I only said,   “She’s flying to Mexico”, what does it mean? It’s  happening right now. So, when I want to use this   tense to talk about the future, I have to say  something like this. I have to say next week,   tomorrow, next summer, next year, I have to give  it some kind of time in the future and then you   can use present continuous for the future in a  slightly more advanced way, okay? So, those are   the basic ways in which we use this tense. Now, let’s look at when not to use the present   continuous tense. So, first of all, everything  here, all these examples, these are all wrong,   okay? And we’re going to understand why. So,  we cannot use the present continuous tense to   talk about any permanent actions or activities.  For example, for most people, where they live,   where they work, these are more or less  permanent. They don’t change every day. They’re   not temporary, right? So, if I live in Canada  all the time, then it would be wrong to say,   “I am living in Canada”. That would only  be okay if it was something temporary.   Similarly, if I work at ABC company, and that’s  my permanent job, it would be wrong to say,   “I am working at ABC Company”. I would  need to say, “I work at ABC Company”.   That would be a difference tense, the present  simple tense. And similarly here, if I live in   Canada, I need to say “I live in Canada” and not  “I am living”, because that would be temporary.   So, that’s the most common kind of mistake that  people make, so be really careful of that.   Similarly, we have stative verbs. This is another  area that you have to be really careful about.   Why? Because in English, there are two kinds of  verbs: action verbs and what are called stative   verbs. So, action verbs are your normal verbs  that you know most of the time like work, run,   play, jump, okay? And stative verbs describe  a state, or a condition. It could be a mental   state. It could be an emotional state, okay? And  with this tense, we cannot use stative verbs,   and in fact, in any continuous tense in English,  you cannot use stative verbs. Let me give you some   examples of stative verbs. For example, it would  be wrong to say, “I am understanding English”. No.   You cannot say that, because “understand” is a  stative verb, to do with your mind, so it’s wrong   to say that, okay? This is all wrong, okay. It  would be wrong to say, “We are liking this show”.   Liking is wrong because “like” is a  stative verb. So, we would need to say,   “We like this show”. “I understand English”, okay?  Similarly, here, when you talk about verbs that   refer to what you own, what you possess, what you  have, we cannot use those verbs in the stative   form with this tense. So, it would be wrong  to say, “They are having a car”. You would   need to say, “They have a car”. Similarly,  again, there’s a long list of stative verbs,   but the verb “need” and the verb “want” are very  common verbs which are usually stative verbs and   therefore you can’t use them in this tense. So,  it would be wrong to say, “Are you needing help?”.   You would need to say, “Do you need help?”, okay?  So, whether you have learned the present simple   or not, don’t worry right now, just understand  that with the present continuous, you cannot use   stative verbs, so everything here is wrong. Now, let’s look at how we form   the present continuous tense. Let’s  start by looking at a sample sentence.   “I am working”. So, we saw that there are  three parts: I, which is the subject, am,   in this case, which is a form of the verb  “to be”, then we have the verb “work”, right,   and then we have “-ing”, alright? So,  in order to use this tense correctly,   you need to know two things: you need to be  sure that you know the verb “to be” perfectly,   and then you need to know how to add the verb +  ing and any changes you need to make in spelling.   So, what I’ve done is I’ve divided this lesson.  First; into just looking into the verb “to be”   to make sure that you’re using it correctly,  because if you have mistakes in the verb “to be”,   this central part, then you will make mistakes  in this tense. But if you’ve got it right,   then you’ll be absolutely fine. So, let’s just  take a minute to review the verb “to be”, alright?   And then we’ll move on to the next part. So, in a positive sentence, it would be I am.   You are. We are. They are. He is. She is. It is.   Now, when we say the verb “to be”, the verb “to  be” is one of the most common verbs, but it is   used in two ways. One is by itself. For example, I  can say “I am a teacher.”, or we can also use the   verb “to be” as a helping verb, as it’s being used  in this tense. Then, I could say “I am teaching”.   Now, the verb “to be” became a helping verb, but  one way or the other, whether I’m using the verb   “to be” by itself or I’m using it in this context,  then I still need to know exactly how to use the   verb “to be”. So now, let’s look at the negative.  I am not. You are not. We are not. They are not.   What do you notice? We’re just adding “not”,  right? Let’s do it a little bit more. He   is not. She is not. It is not. Okay? Right  now, don’t worry about this last part. We’re   going to add that soon, okay? Let’s just get  this part right, the verb “to be”, alright?   Next, let’s look at when we have the verb  “to be” in a question or in our tense.   So, what do we do? Instead of saying “I am”,  we say “Am I?”. If you had the verb after that,   you’d say, “Am I working?” and so on, but we’ll  look at that in a minute. Right now, just master   this part. It’s a critical part of understanding  and using this tense correctly. Are you?   Are we? Are they? Right? The same at the bottom  here: Is he? Is she? Is it? Alright? So, make   sure that you can use the verb “to be” so that you  can use the present continuous tense correctly.   Now, let’s look at how we form the full  present continuous tense. You already   know the verb “to be”, now we’ll say a positive  sentence, a negative sentence, and a question.   So you can repeat after me, it will be very  good practice to also hear the correct form.   I am working. You are working. We are  working. They are working. He is working.   She is working. It is working. Okay, got  that? Good. For the negative, it’s very easy,   you just add “not” before the verb, plus the -ing,  so “not working”, right? You are not working.   He is not working. They are not working. Like  that, okay? It’s very simple, just take this   and add “not working”. Now, for the question, we  have to reverse the order. So, instead of saying   “I am”, we say “Am I?”, right? Just like with the  verb “to be”, same thing, that’s why I told you   the verb “to be” is so important, it’s part of  this tense. So, repeat after me, the questions:   Am I working today? Are you working?  Are we working? Are they working?   Is he working? Is she working? Is it working? So,  that’s your basic question form. Now remember,   you can always add a question word  before that. For example, you could say   “When are you working?”. Where are you working?  How long are you working? But what’s important –   what’s important if you do that is to keep  this same order. Keep your question order.   Don’t turn it back into a sentence. Just add the  question word, like when, or how long, or why,   or something like that, and keep this structure.  When are you working? Where are you working? Why   are you working? And so on, okay? And that’s  how you form the present continuous tense.   Now, let’s look at how we use contractions in  the present continuous tense. So, in English,   sometimes, instead of saying, for example,  “I am learning”, we shorten it or contract it   and say, “I’m learning”. So, why do we do  that? Usually, it’s faster, it’s easier,   and we use it a lot in informal conversation  and also in informal writing. We do not usually   use contractions like these in formal business  writing or in academic writing, but we use them   a lot on an everyday basis. So, let’s see how  to spell them and how to pronounce them.   So, I am becomes I’m. What happened here?  We took away the A and put an apostrophe   where we took away the letter and we joined  those two words. I’m. You are becomes you’re.   We are becomes we’re. They are becomes  they’re. He is becomes he’s. She is —   she’s. And it is — it’s. Okay? Alright, so  let’s say a sentence, a really short sentence,   with these contractions, so you can learn how  to say them easily and naturally. I’m learning.   You’re learning. We’re learning.  They’re learning. He’s learning.   She’s learning. It’s learning. Okay? Good. Now, we can do the same thing when it’s   negative. So, instead of saying “I am not”,  we can shorten it in one way only, we can say   “I’m not”. So basically, we just took the “I’m”  and added “not”, alright? So, we just got rid   of this and then we joined these two, okay?  Sorry, we didn’t join them, but we used them,   one after the other, okay? I’m not. So, let’s say  a sentence: I’m not watching. Are you watching TV?   No, you can put it off, I’m not watching,  okay? Next: You are not becomes what? There   are two possibilities here. First, let’s just add  “not”. So, “you are not” can become you’re not,   we’re not, they’re not. Or, “You are not”  can be contracted in a different way.   Here, we’re just going to take away the O here  and put an apostrophe and combine these two.   What we did here is we took this one and we  got rid of this letter and combined this one.   So, let’s look at it for a second. “You are  not here” became “You’re not”. We contracted   these two words. “You are not here”, we got  rid of the o and we joined these two words:   are not. So, the other possibility is “You  aren’t”. Say it after me: You aren’t watching.   We aren’t watching. They aren’t watching.  Okay? Very good. The same here – “He   is not” can become “He’s not”,  right? We got rid of this one.   She’s not, It’s not. Or, we can get rid of the  o here and join this and we can say “He isn’t”,   She isn’t watching. It isn’t watching. So that’s  how we spell and pronounce the contractions.   Now, let’s look at some spelling changes we need  to make to the verb when we’re using the present   continuous tense. So, with all of the verbs, you  need to add “-ing”. And to most of the verbs,   that’s all you need to do. You just need to add  “ing”. For example, eat becomes eating. Walk –   walking, right? All we did was add that “ing”,  but with some verbs you need to make a few small   other changes. For verbs ending in E, we need  to drop the E and then add “ing”. For example,   use becomes using, so we dropped or cancelled  this E and added ing. Take becomes taking. Again,   we dropped or cancelled the e, alright? Good. For verbs ending in “ie”, we need to drop the ie   and add y and then add the ing. For example, lie,  right, l-i-e, cancel ie, add y, then ing. Lying.   Tie becomes tying, okay? That’s it! Now, for some verbs, ending in a C-V-C pattern,   we have to double the last letter. What does  that C-V-C? C stands for consonant, V for vowel,   and C again for consonant. A vowel in English is  A,E,I,O or U and a consonant is any other letter.   So, what you do is look at the verb, alright, you  look at the verb from the end, it will be easier,   and if it follows that pattern, right, C, a p is  a consonant, an a is a vowel, and then the l is   a consonant, so if it follows that pattern,  C-V-C, then double that last letter. Now,   there are some special circumstances, it doesn’t  always apply, but it often applies. There are   patterns in English spelling and sometimes there  are exceptions. So, in this case, clap becomes   clapping. Sit becomes sitting. Okay? And those are  the major spelling changes you need to make.   Now, let’s look at how to give short  answers in the present continuous tense.   So, in English, if someone asks you a question  and your basic answer is “Yes” or “No”, we don’t   usually just say “Yes” or “No”. We usually say a  little bit more than that. But, at the same time,   we don’t have to repeat everything they asked  us in the question in our answer. So, what we   do is something like this. If someone says, “Is he  working late?” you could simply say “Yes, he is”,   or “No, he isn’t.” And how do you know what to  say here? You just take it from here, right?   So, is he? Yes, he is. Or, no, he isn’t. Alright,  so, what’s important to notice is that in the   positive answer, you cannot use any contraction.  You cannot shorten it and say “Yes, he’s”.   No, that’s wrong. But in the negative, you can  definitely use the contraction. You can say “No,   he is not”, it’s not wrong, but usually we’ll  just use the contraction. The same thing here:   “Are they going to the meeting?” So, we could say  what? Yes, they are, or no, they aren’t, okay?   So, you’re basically taking your answer  clues from the question itself. And again,   no contraction possible in the positive answer. Here’s another one. “Are you studying?”   So here, it’s going to be a little bit different.  Why? Because they’re asking, “Are you” and   they’re – you have to answer with “I”, right? So  here, you cannot use it, but you will simply say   “Yes I am” or “No, I’m not”. Got it? You can’t  take it from there, but you can still just give   a short answer. You don’t have to say “Yes, I am  studying”, “No, I am not studying”, just say “Yes,   I am”, “No, I’m not”. In fact, it’s a good thing  to just know this phrase, alright? Yes, I am.   No, I’m not. So, for example, if I ask you “Are  you learning the present continuous tense?”   “Yes, I am.” “Are you making progress in your  English?” “Yes, I am”. “Are you feeling happy?”   I hope you’re saying “Yes, I am.” Now, let’s practice what you’ve been learning.   So, we have some positive sentences we’re going  to work with, some negative ones, and some   questions. So, first, we’ll take a sentence  which is in present simple and we’re going to   change it to present continuous, okay? Number 1 — “I go” becomes what? “I   am going.” Or “I’m going.” Alright? You can also  contract it or shorten it. “We wait”. Let’s use   the contracted form and turn it into the present  continuous form. “We wait” becomes what? “We’re   waiting”, right? We’re waiting.  We are waiting. We’re waiting.   Good. “They play” – again, let’s use the  contraction just so you can practice the   spelling, also where to put that apostrophe and so  on and pay attention to it. “They play.” becomes   “They’re playing.”, okay? Very nice. Alright. Now, we have a sentence that’s already   in present continuous. What we want to  do is to change it to the negative form   in present continuous. “She’s calling.” How  can we make that negative? There are two ways.   She’s calling – make it negative – She’s not  calling, this is one way, and the other way – She   isn’t calling, right? Those were the two ways that  we learned. She’s not calling. She isn’t calling.   Alright? Very good. “We’re cooking”. Make it  negative. First, the easy way, you can always   just use the easy way too, if you’re unsure –  We’re not cooking. I call this one the easy way,   because you just need to add “not” and it’s 100%  right. It’s not like that one is better than this   one, no, everything is equally correct. We’re not  cooking, or what’s the other way though? We aren’t   cooking. Okay? So again, pay  attention to the spelling there.   Next, number 6 – “I’m reading”. Make  it negative. What will it become? I’m   not reading, and in this case, that’s the only  form that we can make it negative. Alright.   Now, the questions. So, right now, it’s  just a sentence. Let’s see how we can make   it into a question. “They are buying a new  car.” Make it a question, it’s really easy.   Got it? Yes, just move these around. Are they  buying a new car? And of course, the first word   will be capitalized, and the second word will not.  “She is doing her homework.” Make it a question,   what is it? The same thing. Is she doing her  homework? Good. And if you’re writing it,   again, it would be capital for the first  letter and then not capital after that.   “We are leaving at 8:00.” Make  it a question – same thing.   Are we leaving at 8:00? And of course, at the  end of each of these, we would have a question   mark if you’re writing it down. So, how did you  do? Hope everything is going well, and I’m sure   it is. Let’s look at a little bit more. Now, let’s look at some common mistakes   that are made with the present continuous  tense, and you can help me correct them.   The first kind of mistake – sometimes  the verb “to be” is missing. For example,   “My brother watching the news”. So, what did  that student need to say? What did that person   want to say? What’s missing? The verb  “to be”? So, we have to say “My brother   is watching the news”, okay? Remember,  we have the subject, the verb “to be”,   and then the verb + ing. Sometimes, the same  thing can happen but in a negative sentence.   For example, this person wrote “John  not helping”. How can we correct that?   “John” – the easy way to correct it is to  say “John is not helping” or you can always   contract it and say “John’s not helping”. Okay?  Or we can say “John isn’t helping”. Alright.   Sometimes, the verb “to be” is missing in  a question. Instead of saying “She going?”,   what’s wrong there? What should  we be saying? We should be saying   “Is she going?”. Is she going, right? Again,  we needed that verb “to be”. We can’t have this   tense without the verb “to be”, right? That’s  why we looked at it so many times, so make   sure that you don’t forget it. Next, sometimes  the verb “to be” is there, but it’s incorrect.   There’s an incorrect form of it being used.  For example, this person wrote “Bob and Maria   is driving home”. That’s not right. They have  the verb “to be” but it’s not in the right form   because “Bob and Maria” is like “they”,  right, so it should be “Bob and Maria   are driving home”, okay? And here,  this person wrote “He ain’t studying.”   Now, “ain’t” is actually slang. You might hear it  a lot in songs or in music or in movies, okay, but   in academic English, in correct grammar, it’s  not acceptable, so if you’re doing an exam or   if you’re writing a paper for university or if  you’re trying to impress a client, it’s probably   not such a good idea to use it. Instead of that,  you should use the correct version which is what?   “He isn’t studying”, okay? That doesn’t mean you  can never use slang, you can certainly use slang   with your friends or casually whenever you  want to, but just be aware – what is slang,   and what is not slang. Next, sometimes the verb,   the main verb, not the verb “to be”, but the verb  in the sentence is used incorrectly. For example,   this person wrote “She is do her  homework”. How can we fix that? “She is   doing her homework”. And this one wrote “The  game is start now”. It should be “The game is   starting now”, okay? There we go, good. See,  I’m sure you can find these now yourself, right?   And that’s the way. Now you’ve learned, you  know the rules, you’re able to apply the words,   whether you’re reading something or whether  you’re looking at something or whether you’re   writing it yourself or whether you’re  speaking, it will come out right.   Next, sometimes mistakes are made in spelling. For  example, there are several mistakes here. “She’s   lieing” but this should be what? Not lie, lying.  This was one of those verbs also, “She’s siting”,   but it’s consonant, vowel, consonant, so we need  to double the last letter, sitting, and here,   “writeing”, ends with an E, the verb “write”, so  we need to get rid of that E, okay? So be careful   of those spelling changes that we talked about.  Also, here’s a spelling mistake. This person wrote   “Were going to the mall.” That’s what they  wanted to say, but what’s missing here? The   apostrophe, good. So, that goes right  here, okay? Instead of “We are” it became   “We’re”. “We’re going to the mall”. Okay? Next, sometimes people forget, and they use a   stative verb anyway in this tense and they might  say something like “I am needing some water.”,   but can we say that? No. In correct English, you  cannot say that, because “need” is one of those   stated verbs. So, you’d need to change that and  just say “I need some water”. The same here,   “I’m wanting to visit Hawaii”. No, “want” is  another stated verb, so we just say, “I want   to visit Hawaii”, okay? And last of all, remember  what I told you, what we talked about earlier,   that we don’t and should not be using this  tense to talk about permanent situations.   So, for example, somebody asked this  person “What does your company do?”   and he said, “We are manufacturing cars.”  But that’s not right, because it’s not   something they do just temporarily, it  takes a lot of work and organization   to do this work, so it should be not “We are  manufacturing cars.”, but just “We manufacture   cars.”, okay? So, in that case, using the present  continuous tense would be incorrect. You just   needed there – the other present simple tense. So,  these are some of the common mistakes, and I think   you see that once you know the rules, the rules  actually make it easier for you. They free you to   speak and communicate more correctly. So, we’ve covered a lot in this class.   Let’s review now, just one last time. You  know this tense when you can make, what?   A positive sentence, a negative sentence, and a  question. For example: “David is making coffee.”   A positive. “David is not making coffee.” A  negative sentence. “Is David making coffee?”   A question, or to add question words to that, for  example, “When is David making coffee?” “Why is   David making coffee?”, and so on. Okay? So, what  can you do from here? To practice this tense,   try to think of examples in your own life. Talk  to yourself as you’re going through your day.   What are you doing at that moment? I’m waking  up, I’m brushing my teeth, I’m taking a shower,   I’m having breakfast, there are so many things  that you can say as you’re walking around. You   don’t have to say them aloud, you can also say  them in your mind, okay, but try to use the tense   that you’ve learned so well right now, okay? Now, when you feel that you know this tense, then   you can go on to the next lesson in this series,  because this is a series of the verb tenses.   Next, after that, you can also practice a  little bit more, if you wish, by taking a quiz   on http://www.engvid.com . Thanks very much for  watching, and all the best with your English.   In this lesson, you will learn the difference  between the present simple tense and the present   continuous tense, which is also called the  present progressive tense. In other words,   you’ll learn the difference between  saying “I work” or “I am working”. So,   this lesson is part of a series created by engVid  to help you learn all of the English verb tenses.   Now, I have created lessons on each of these  tenses separately, and maybe you have already   watched them, and now you’re watching this, which  is great, or you can watch this lesson and then   you can go on and watch the other separate lessons  so that you can go into more detail if you wish.   So, both of these tenses are basic tenses.  However, they don’t exist in all languages,   and maybe they don’t exist in your language,  so pay a little more attention and as you do,   you will understand easily the differences between  these tenses. So, shall we begin? Let’s go!   So, the present simple tense  sounds like this: I work.   The present continuous tense sounds like this: I  am working. So, what’s the very basic difference?   The basic difference is that “I am working”  talks about something that’s happening right now,   or something temporary that happens for  a short time. “I work”, present simple,   talks about something that’s true in general, or  something more permanent, something that lasts   for a long time. That’s the very basic difference,  but we’re going to be looking at all of the really   specific differences between these two tenses. But  first, let’s see, what does this tense even look   like? What does it sound like? Let’s see that. So, with present simple,   we basically take the subject + the verb.  In this case, our sample verb is “work”. So,   it would sound like this – you can say it after me  if you like. It’s good to repeat things out loud,   helps you to feel more comfortable and get used  to using it yourself. So, we would say: I work.   You work. We work. They work. But here we have a  difference: He works. We have to add an “s” there.   She works. It works, okay? Again, once  you’ve studied this tense in detail,   you’ll know all of these changes perfectly,  but I’m just giving you an overall view. When   it becomes negative, it becomes “He does  not work.”, or, if it becomes a question,   it would say “Does he work?”, alright? So,  that’s the basis of the present simple.   Now, let’s look at present continuous.  Now here, what happens? We have a subject:   I, he, you, they, etc., + the verb “to be”, we  need that helping verb here, + our basic verb,   which in this case is “work”, + “-ing”, so it’s  a little bit longer because we have that helping   verb in the middle, plus we have “-ing” at the  end, okay? So, how does this sound? I am working.   You are working. We are working. They are working.  He is working. She is working. And, it is working,   alright? So, that’s the basic positive form of it.  The negative form would be just to add a “not”.   “You are not working”. He is not working. And if  we shorten that, it becomes “He isn’t working”.   And if we make it into a  question, change the order,   we would say “Is he working?” Are you working?  Are they working? And so on, okay? So,   that’s the basic structure of the two tenses, and  next we will be looking at when to use them.   So, we use these two tenses in different  ways. Let’s understand now what they are.   So, in the present simple, we would say, for  example, “I live in this building”. This is my   permanent residence. This is where I live  all the time. So, we use present simple:   “I live”. In present continuous, we  might say “I am staying at a hotel.”   This is something temporary. It’s not all the  time, it’s only for some time. So, here, we have   “I am staying”, which is present continuous,  here we have “I live”, which is present simple.   Permanent, temporary. Next, we could say “He  plays the guitar.” This is true in general.   It means he knows how to play the  guitar. He plays. Present simple.   Here, we could say “He is playing the  guitar.” That means he’s doing that right now.   He is playing now. As soon as we say, “He is  playing”, even if we don’t use the word “now”,   this tense already means that it’s happening  right now, okay? So, he plays in general,   but he is playing the guitar  means it’s happening right now.   Another example, “We watch the news at 9:00pm.”  “We watch”, okay? This is to talk about a routine,   every day we watch the news at 9:00pm.  Alright? So that’s to describe a routine,   something that happens regularly. Or, we could say  here “We are watching the news.” “We are watching”   means what? In this case again, it’s happening  right now, okay? We’re watching the news, call   us later, we’re just watching the news, happening  now. But, every day, we watch the news at 9:00,   okay? So that’s a routine, that’s  again something that’s happening now.   See the difference? Let’s look at another one.  “The sun sets in the west.” “The sun sets”,   okay? The sun rises in the morning, the sun  sets in the evening. This is just a fact,   okay? So, we use present simple to talk  about facts. But, here, we could say “Look,   how beautiful, the sun is setting! The sky  is all orange and pink and lovely colors”.   So, this means the sun “is setting” means it’s  happening right now, alright? So here, it was a   fact, the sun sets in the west, it’s just a fact,  and here, it’s happening now. So, these are the   first few differences between these two tenses. Now, here are some more differences. In present   simple, we would say “The price rises every  year.” This is something that happens in general.   In present continuous, we might say “The  price is rising this year.” This is a trend,   this is the general direction in which things  are changing, so here, the price “is rising”   this year, but the price “rises every  year”, okay? This is present simple.   Next, suppose we want to talk about a habit.  We might say “She always takes the bus.”   She always takes – but here, we might say  “She is always complaining about the bus.”   So, when you’re talking about a negative  habit, then we can use present continuous,   but if you’re just talking about a regular  habit, then you would use present simple.   Alright? Next, we could say, in present  simple, “The flight leaves at 7:00pm.”   Now, why do we use present simple for that?  Because it’s a regularly scheduled event,   right? The flight leaves at 7:00pm, that’s  the schedule. It always leaves at 7:00pm.   But in present continuous, we might say “The  flight is leaving.” The flight is leaving   means what? The flight is leaving right now,  okay? And we know that because we have “is   leaving”. Here, we had just “leaves”. Okay. And  now here’s something where both of these tenses   can actually be used for the same purpose, but  in different ways, with different language.   So, we could say, for example, even though this  is the present simple, and even though this is   the present continuous, until now we have been  talking about present uses, but let’s look at this   example, this is different. “The flight leaves at  7:00pm tomorrow.” What, Rebecca, really? Leaves,   present simple, and tomorrow? Yes, we could  say that, and we do say that sometimes. Why?   Because it’s kind of connected with this one  because it’s a regularly scheduled event, right?   Then we could use it to talk about tomorrow, okay?  And sometimes we do. So, we could say “The flight   leaves at 7:00pm tomorrow.” and it’s kind of  connected to this idea of the schedule, alright?   But similarly, you could also say “The flight is  leaving at 7:00pm tomorrow.” Again, you’re saying,   “Rebecca, really, this is present continuous,  why are we using it to talk about the future?”   Because we can! It has a special use where  we can say – use present continuous to talk   about something in the future but you have to say  something like tomorrow, next week, next Monday,   next year. You have to give the time, because  if you say, “The flight is leaving at 7:00pm.”,   what does it mean? It’s leaving right now. But  – or, a little bit in the future – but if we say   the flight is leaving at 7:00pm tomorrow, then  we know for certain it’s in the future and yes,   we can also use present continuous along with  a few other ways to talk about the future.   There’s one other really important difference  between the present simple tense and the present   continuous tense, and that has to do with the  kind of verbs we can use with each tense. So,   one way to divide verbs in English is to see  whether it’s an action verb or whether it’s a   stative verb. An action verb is something that  has action. For example, run or jump, or sing   and dance, read and write. These are all action  verbs. And action verbs, we can use in the present   simple tense and we can also use them in the  present continuous tense. For example, I could say   “She runs”, as in, she runs every day, or “She  is running”, like she’s running right now, but   stative verbs are different. Stative  verbs describe a state or condition.   It could be a mental state, it could be an  emotional state, it could talk about possession,   it could talk about certain senses, and there is a  list of stative verbs which you need to learn when   you’re studying English grammar, because most of  the time, we cannot use the stative verbs in the   continuous tenses. But, with the present simple,  you can use all the verbs. You can use the action   verbs and you can use stative verbs, no problem,  alright? So, for example, we can definitely say   “He knows them.” or “We like them.”, knowing  being something mental, and like being something   emotional, alright? So, with present simple, use  any verb you like. With present continuous, be   careful, definitely you can use the action words,  but if you are not sure about the stative verbs,   avoid them. As a general rule,  be careful of using any stative   verbs with the present continuous tense.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • Public speaking for introverts: Turning quiet strengths into powerful impact

    Public speaking for introverts: Turning quiet strengths into powerful impact

    This article focuses on public speaking strategies specifically tailored for introverts. It challenges the misconception that introversion hinders effective communication, highlighting how introverts’ thoughtfulness, empathy, and authenticity are valuable assets. The text emphasizes mindset shifts, from viewing public speaking as a performance to a connection, and offers practical techniques like thorough preparation, authentic delivery, and mindful energy management. It also underscores the importance of audience understanding and leveraging introverted strengths such as controlled movements and strategic pauses to create impact. Finally, the article mentions the author, a high-performance coach, who helps individuals transform their public speaking skills.keepSave to notecopy_alldocsAdd noteaudio_magic_eraserAudio OverviewschoolBriefing doc

    Public Speaking for Introverts: A Study Guide

    Short Answer Quiz

    1. What is a common misconception about introverts and public speaking?
    2. Name three strengths that introverts possess that can be advantageous in public speaking.
    3. According to the article, what should introverts focus on instead of “performing”?
    4. How can introverts benefit from reframing their self-perception about public speaking?
    5. Why is it beneficial for introverts to research their audience before a speaking engagement?
    6. What are the two steps in preparation that introverts can take to build confidence before a presentation?
    7. What is one way introverts can embrace authenticity during public speaking?
    8. How can mastering the pause be advantageous for introverted public speakers?
    9. Why is it important for introverts to manage their energy levels around public speaking?
    10. What is visualization and how can it benefit introverts in preparing for a speech?

    Short Answer Quiz: Answer Key

    1. The common misconception is that introverts are at a disadvantage in public speaking because they are quieter and less outgoing, while the truth is, they possess strengths well-suited for public speaking.
    2. Introverts have strengths in thoughtful content creation, empathy and listening, and authenticity, all of which are beneficial in public speaking.
    3. Introverts should focus on connecting with the audience and communicating their message rather than performing theatrically.
    4. Introverts can benefit from viewing public speaking as an opportunity for growth and sharing, rather than seeing it as a test or challenge to be feared.
    5. Researching the audience helps introverts tailor their message, making it more relevant, and this reduces pressure, shifting the focus to serving their listeners’ needs.
    6. Introverts can prepare by scripting and rehearsing their speech multiple times to enhance delivery, and they can visualize success to calm nerves.
    7. Introverts can embrace authenticity by speaking in a natural tone, sharing personal stories and acknowledging nervousness.
    8. Mastering the pause allows introverts to add weight to their words, allowing the audience time to process the information and enhancing the impact of the speech.
    9. Introverts tend to find public speaking draining and managing energy by scheduling recovery time, pacing events, and practicing breathing techniques will help them succeed in their delivery.
    10. Visualization is the mental rehearsal of an event by using mental imagery and by practicing this, it builds confidence by activating neural pathways and reinforces a positive mindset.

    Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the unique strengths introverts possess that make them effective public speakers. How do these strengths challenge traditional perceptions of what makes a good speaker?
    2. Explore the importance of audience understanding and connection in public speaking, particularly for introverts. How can introverts use their inherent strengths to build a rapport with their audience?
    3. Analyze the role of mindset and self-perception in public speaking for introverts. How can reframing negative thoughts and fears into positive ones improve their speaking abilities and confidence?
    4. Describe specific strategies introverts can use to prepare for public speaking, emphasizing the importance of preparation, authenticity, and self-care. How do these strategies empower introverts to deliver impactful presentations?
    5. Examine the use of visualization as a tool for introverts to manage anxiety and improve public speaking performance. How does mental rehearsal translate to real-world confidence?

    Glossary of Key Terms

    Authenticity: Being genuine and true to oneself. In public speaking, it means speaking in a way that feels natural and sincere.

    Empathy: The ability to understand and share the feelings of another. For introverts, this is key to tailoring messages that resonate with their audience.

    Extroverted Charisma: The ability to draw people in with outgoing, energetic behavior, often characterized by dramatic gestures and loud voices.

    Mindset: A set of beliefs or way of thinking that affects one’s attitude and behavior. A growth mindset is the belief that abilities and intelligence can be developed through dedication and hard work.

    Public Speaking: The act of delivering a speech or presentation to an audience.

    Rapport: A close and harmonious relationship in which the people or groups concerned understand each other’s feelings or ideas and communicate well.

    Visualization: A technique of creating mental images or scenarios to prepare for an event. This is often used for calming nerves and building confidence.

    Public Speaking for Introverts

    Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided text, incorporating quotes where appropriate:

    Briefing Document: Public Speaking for Introverts

    Date: October 26, 2023

    Subject: Leveraging Introverted Strengths in Public Speaking

    Overview: This document reviews key insights from the provided text on how introverts can excel in public speaking by embracing their natural strengths rather than trying to mimic extroverted styles. It emphasizes a shift in mindset from “performance” to “connection,” and provides actionable strategies for preparation, delivery, and energy management.

    Key Themes and Ideas:

    1. Challenging the Extroverted Ideal:
    • The document challenges the traditional view of public speaking that often celebrates “loud voices, big personalities, and extroverted charisma,” arguing that this leaves “little room for quieter approaches.”
    • It reframes the concept of public speaking away from theatrical performance and towards genuine communication, stating: “However, public speaking is not about performance; it’s about connection and communication.”
    1. Introverted Strengths as Public Speaking Assets:
    • The document identifies core introverted strengths, such as “thoughtfulness, authenticity, and the ability to connect deeply,” as valuable assets in public speaking.
    • It elaborates on specific strengths:
    • Thoughtful Content: Introverts’ “time reflecting and analyzing” leads to “well-crafted and meaningful messages.”
    • Empathy and Listening: Their ability to “listen and observe allows them to tailor speeches that resonate deeply with their audience.”
    • Authenticity: “Audiences are drawn to genuine speakers, and introverts can leverage their sincerity to create trust and rapport.”
    1. Mindset Shift:
    • A critical element is a shift in mindset, “From Fear to Opportunity: View public speaking as an opportunity to share your unique perspective rather than a test of performance.”
    • It encourages a growth mindset, “From ‘I Can’t’ to ‘I’m Growing’: Recognize that public speaking is a skill that improves with practice.”
    1. Audience Understanding:
    • Introverts are encouraged to use their observation and empathy skills to “deeply understand their audience.”
    • This includes researching “the demographics, interests, and expectations of your audience” to tailor speeches and “shift your focus to serving their interests.”
    • Using Q&A to deepen connections is also recommended, based on “understanding that public speaking is less about impressing and more about resonating with your audience.”
    1. Practical Strategies for Introverts:
    • Preparation: “For introverts, preparation is often a source of confidence.”
    • Includes recommendations for “researching the audience”, “scripting and practicing” and using visualization techniques.
    • Authentic Delivery: The text advises introverts to “avoid forcing an overly dynamic delivery” and “share personal stories” to connect authentically with their audience.
    • It suggests embracing a calm tone, acknowledging nervousness, and speaking naturally.
    • Using Stillness: Introverts are encouraged to master the pause, control movements, and engage with eye contact. “Introverts’ tendency toward minimal gestures can project calmness and confidence.”
    • Energy Management:“Schedule recovery time: Plan for quiet time before and after your speech to recharge.”
    • “Pace Yourself: Avoid overloading your schedule with too many speaking engagements in a short period.”
    • “Practice Breathing Techniques: Deep breathing exercises can help calm nerves and conserve energy during high-pressure moments.”
    1. The Power of Visualization:
    • The document emphasizes that “mentally rehearsing a performance can activate the same neural pathways as physically practicing it.”
    • It advises introverts to “imagine yourself stepping onto the stage, delivering your message with clarity, and receiving positive feedback from the audience.”
    • It suggests combining visualization with “detailed sensory imagery” to create a positive mindset.
    • Expert Endorsement:The text features Dzigbordi Kwaku-Dosoo, a “multi-disciplinary Business Leader, Entrepreneur, Consultant, Certified High-Performance Coach (CHPC™) and global Speaker” whose expertise further validates the ideas being shared, specifically on integrating technical and human skills for success.

    Key Quotes:

    • “However, public speaking is not about performance; it’s about connection and communication.”
    • “From Fear to Opportunity: View public speaking as an opportunity to share your unique perspective rather than a test of performance.”
    • “Introverts’ tendency toward minimal gestures can project calmness and confidence.”
    • “Mentally rehearsing a performance can activate the same neural pathways as physically practicing it.”

    Conclusion:

    This document presents a valuable framework for introverts seeking to develop their public speaking skills. By understanding and embracing their unique strengths, reframing their mindset, and utilizing the recommended preparation and delivery strategies, introverts can become powerful and impactful speakers. The focus on genuine connection, audience understanding, and authentic expression underscores the core message that public speaking is not about conforming to extroverted norms, but about communicating effectively and meaningfully.

    Public Speaking for Introverts

    • Why do introverts often feel at a disadvantage in public speaking?
    • Introverts often feel at a disadvantage because the traditional perception of a “good” speaker emphasizes extroverted traits like loud voices, big personalities, and theatrical gestures. This can make introverts, with their quieter nature, feel like they don’t fit the mold or that their natural style is a weakness in this context. They may internalize the idea that their thoughtful, introspective approach isn’t as engaging or impactful as an extrovert’s.
    • What unique strengths do introverts possess that can make them effective public speakers?
    • Introverts possess several unique strengths that can be powerful in public speaking. They tend to be very thoughtful and analytical, resulting in well-crafted and meaningful messages. Their natural ability to listen and observe allows them to tailor speeches to resonate deeply with their audience, fostering a strong connection. Furthermore, their authenticity and sincerity are attractive to audiences, enabling them to build trust and rapport with their listeners.
    • How can introverts shift their mindset to better approach public speaking?
    • Introverts can shift their mindset by reframing their perception of public speaking. Instead of viewing it as a performance to be judged, they can see it as an opportunity to share their unique perspective and connect with others. They can also move from thinking “I can’t” to “I’m growing,” understanding that public speaking is a skill that improves with practice. Focusing on connection and communication rather than performance will allow introverts to find their voice and engage with their audience authentically.
    • Why is understanding the audience so important for introverted speakers?
    • Understanding the audience is crucial for introverted speakers because it allows them to leverage their observation and empathy skills. By researching the demographics, interests, and expectations of their audience, introverts can tailor their message to their needs, reducing the pressure to perform. This shift in focus from self-presentation to serving the audience’s interests can make the experience less intimidating and more fulfilling. Additionally, introverts can utilize their active listening skills during interactive segments, further strengthening the connection with their audience.
    • How can introverts prepare effectively for a public speaking engagement?
    • Preparation is a critical area where introverts can leverage their strengths. This includes researching the audience to tailor the message effectively, writing out the speech, and rehearsing multiple times to become familiar with the material. Visualizing success – mentally rehearsing the speech and imagining a positive outcome – also helps calm nerves and build confidence. The key is to approach preparation as a way to build a sense of security and readiness, rather than a stressful obligation.
    • How can introverts embrace their natural speaking style instead of trying to mimic an extroverted style?
    • Introverts do not need to become extroverts to be compelling speakers. Instead they can embrace their natural speaking style. This includes speaking in a calm and measured tone, rather than forcing an overly dynamic delivery, sharing personal stories to create authenticity, and being honest about any nervousness, which can make them relatable to their audience. By being genuine and comfortable with their natural style, introverts can develop a more impactful presence.
    • How can introverts use stillness and pacing to their advantage when speaking?
    • Introverts can utilize stillness and pacing as powerful tools in public speaking. Strategic pauses add weight to their words and provide the audience time to process the information. Their natural tendency towards minimal gestures can project calmness and confidence. Focusing on one person at a time during eye contact creates a sense of intimacy and connection. By embracing stillness and thoughtful pacing, introverts can create a sense of authority without the need for big, distracting movements.
    • How can introverts effectively manage their energy levels when public speaking?
    • Public speaking can be draining for introverts. To manage energy effectively, they should schedule recovery time before and after speaking engagements to recharge. Pacing themselves by avoiding overloading their schedule with too many speaking events in a short timeframe is crucial. Also, practicing deep breathing techniques can help calm nerves and conserve energy during high-pressure moments, ensuring they have the stamina needed to connect with their audience.

    Introverts and Public Speaking

    Introverts possess unique strengths that can be highly advantageous in public speaking [1]. These strengths include:

    • Thoughtful Content: Introverts tend to spend time reflecting and analyzing, which allows them to create well-developed and meaningful messages [2].
    • Empathy and Listening: Introverts are naturally good listeners and observers. This enables them to tailor their speeches to connect with their audience on a deeper level [2-4].
    • Authenticity: Introverts have the ability to use their sincerity to create trust and rapport [3]. Audiences are drawn to genuine speakers, and introverts can leverage this to their advantage [3-5].
    • Preparation: Introverts often find confidence in thorough preparation. They can organize their thoughts, rehearse their delivery, and use visualization techniques to calm nerves and enhance their performance [6-8].
    • Composure and Focus: Introverts can use their tendency towards stillness, strategic pauses, and minimal gestures to project calmness and confidence, which allows the audience to absorb their message more effectively [5, 9].
    • Ability to connect: Introverts are good at connecting deeply with their audiences and can use this skill to tailor speeches that resonate with them [1-3].

    These strengths allow introverts to move away from the notion of “performing” and instead focus on “connecting” with their audience [3]. Furthermore, research has shown that introverted leaders can excel in environments that require active listening and careful thought, which can translate to successful public speaking [10]. In addition, studies emphasize the value of authenticity and preparation, which are qualities that introverts naturally possess [4].

    Public Speaking for Introverts

    To help introverts excel at public speaking, the sources offer several tips that focus on leveraging their natural strengths and managing potential challenges [1-4].

    Mindset and Approach:

    • Shift from performance to connection: Instead of viewing public speaking as a performance, introverts should see it as an opportunity to connect with their audience and share their ideas [2, 3].
    • Reframe self-perception: Shift the focus from fear to opportunity and understand that public speaking is a skill that improves with practice [5].
    • Embrace authenticity: Rather than trying to imitate extroverted styles, introverts should embrace their natural tone and sincerity, as audiences value authenticity [4, 6, 7].

    Preparation:

    • Research your audience: Understand their demographics, interests, and expectations to tailor your message and reduce performance pressure [4, 8]. This also allows you to shift your focus to serving their needs [4].
    • Script and practice: Write out your speech and rehearse it multiple times to minimize the fear of forgetting points and enhance delivery [4, 6].
    • Use visualization: Imagine yourself speaking confidently and engaging your audience. This mental practice helps to calm nerves and build confidence [4, 6, 9].

    Delivery:

    • Embrace your natural tone: Avoid forcing an overly dynamic delivery and instead use a calm and measured tone [7].
    • Share personal stories: Use personal anecdotes to build connection and reinforce your unique voice [7].
    • Use stillness: Utilize pauses, thoughtful pacing, and deliberate gestures to create a sense of authority and allow the audience to absorb your message [10].
    • Master the pause: Strategic pauses can add weight to your words and give the audience time to process [10].
    • Control your movements: Avoid unnecessary movement that distracts from your message and use minimal gestures to project calmness and confidence [10].
    • Engage with eye contact: Focus on one person at a time, even in a large crowd, to create a sense of intimacy and connection [10].

    Managing Energy:

    • Schedule recovery time: Plan for quiet time before and after speaking engagements to recharge [11].
    • Pace yourself: Avoid overloading your schedule with too many speaking engagements in a short period [11].
    • Practice breathing techniques: Use deep breathing exercises to calm nerves and conserve energy during high-pressure moments [11].

    Additional Tips:

    • Use listening skills: Pay attention to questions and reactions from the audience during Q&A sessions to deepen the connection [12].
    • Acknowledge nervousness: It’s okay to admit if you’re nervous. This vulnerability can make you more relatable [7].

    By understanding and leveraging these tips, introverts can transform their public speaking experiences from intimidating to fulfilling, using their unique strengths to create a powerful impact [1, 3, 12].

    Engaging Audiences: Strategies for Introverted Speakers

    To effectively engage an audience, introverts can leverage their natural strengths and utilize specific strategies, according to the sources.

    Understanding the Audience:

    • Introverts can use their natural abilities for observation and empathy to connect meaningfully with listeners [1].
    • Researching the audience’s demographics, interests, and expectations can help introverts tailor their message and reduce the pressure to perform. By understanding if the audience is comprised of professionals seeking actionable advice, students eager to learn, or community members looking for inspiration, introverts can shift their focus to serving the audience’s interests, making the speech more relevant [2].

    Engagement Strategies:

    • Listening Skills: Introverts can use their listening skills to engage audiences during Q&A sessions or interactive segments. By paying attention to questions or reactions, introverts can deepen the connection with the audience [2].
    • Authenticity: Audiences are drawn to genuine speakers, and introverts can leverage their sincerity to create trust and rapport [3, 4]. Sharing personal stories can further build connection and reinforce the speaker’s unique voice [5].
    • Vulnerability: Acknowledging nervousness can make an introvert more relatable [5].
    • Eye Contact: Even in large crowds, introverts can create a sense of intimacy and connection by focusing on one person at a time [6].
    • Thoughtful Pacing: Introverts often excel at maintaining composure and focus, traits that can be powerful on stage. Pauses, thoughtful pacing, and deliberate gestures create a sense of authority and allow the audience to absorb the message [6]. Strategic pauses can add weight to the words and give the audience time to process [6].

    Shifting Focus:

    • Public speaking is not about performance, but about connection and communication [3]. By shifting the mindset from “performing” to “connecting,” introverts can see public speaking as an opportunity to share ideas and make an impact [4].
    • Understanding that public speaking is less about impressing and more about resonating with the audience can transform the experience from intimidating to fulfilling [2].

    By employing these strategies, introverts can effectively engage their audience and create a powerful impact through their unique communication style.

    Managing Energy for Introverted Public Speakers

    According to the sources, managing energy levels is a key challenge for introverts when it comes to public speaking [1]. Unlike extroverts, who may gain energy from engaging with an audience, introverts often find public speaking to be exhausting [1]. Here are some strategies to help introverts manage their energy effectively:

    • Schedule recovery time: Plan for quiet time before and after speaking engagements to recharge [2]. This allows introverts to regain their energy by being in a calm, solitary environment before and after the high-stimulation environment of public speaking.
    • Pace yourself: Avoid overloading your schedule with too many speaking engagements in a short period [2]. It is important for introverts to not schedule too many speaking events close together, and to give themselves sufficient time in between events to recover their energy.
    • Practice breathing techniques: Deep breathing exercises can help to calm nerves and conserve energy during high-pressure moments [2]. By practicing deep breathing techniques, introverts can mitigate some of the physical symptoms of anxiety related to public speaking.

    By implementing these strategies, introverts can better manage their energy levels, which can help them to feel more comfortable, confident, and in control of their public speaking engagements [2]. This will allow them to focus more on connecting with their audience and delivering their message effectively [3-5].

    Visualization Techniques for Introverted Public Speakers

    Visualization is a powerful tool that introverts can use to build confidence and reduce anxiety related to public speaking [1, 2]. The sources indicate that mental rehearsal can activate the same neural pathways as physical practice, which makes visualization particularly effective [2]. Here are some ways introverts can use visualization techniques:

    • Mental Rehearsal: Spend time imagining yourself successfully delivering your message. This involves not just thinking about the speech, but actively rehearsing it in your mind [2].
    • Detailed Sensory Imagery: When visualizing, use detailed sensory imagery. See the audience’s faces, hear the applause, and feel your own steady breathing. This technique can help make the mental rehearsal more realistic and impactful [2].
    • Positive Feedback: Visualize receiving positive feedback from the audience. Imagining a positive outcome can reinforce a positive mindset, making you feel more prepared and capable when the actual speaking engagement takes place [2].
    • Calming Nerves: Visualization techniques can calm nerves and build confidence [1, 2]. By mentally preparing for the speaking engagement and imagining a successful experience, you can approach the actual event with less anxiety and more confidence [1].

    By using these visualization techniques, introverts can mentally prepare themselves for public speaking, which can help them to feel more confident and reduce their anxiety.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • IELTS Speaking Strategies for Band 7-9

    IELTS Speaking Strategies for Band 7-9

    This video guide provides comprehensive instruction on achieving a high score on the IELTS speaking test. It contrasts the strategies of high-scoring (band 7-9) and low-scoring (band 5-6.5) candidates, highlighting common mistakes like memorized answers and overly formal speech. The guide emphasizes natural, fluent communication over complex vocabulary or grammar structures, advocating for simple, accurate responses tailored to each part of the test. Specific examples of successful and unsuccessful responses are analyzed, and a practical, step-by-step practice method is outlined to improve performance. Finally, a mock test with a student demonstrates the effectiveness of the techniques.

    01
    Amazon Prime FREE Membership

    IELTS Speaking Mastery Guide

    Quiz

    Instructions: Answer each question in 2-3 sentences.

    1. In Part 1 of the IELTS Speaking test, what is the primary focus of your responses beyond simply answering the question?
    2. What is a common mistake average students make when responding to bullet points in Part 2 of the Speaking test?
    3. According to the source, how do Band 7, 8, and 9 students use bullet points in Part 2?
    4. Why does the source discourage using a rigid “past, present, future” template in Part 2 of the speaking test?
    5. In Part 3 of the Speaking test, what does the examiner use increasingly difficult questions to determine?
    6. According to the source, why is giving a very short answer in Part 1 considered a problem?
    7. What is meant by “robotic delivery” and why is it detrimental to your speaking score?
    8. What is the danger of trying to impress the examiner by using overly complex vocabulary?
    9. What is the main thing to focus on in Part 1 of the speaking exam beyond having great ideas?
    10. According to the source, why is memorizing answers for the speaking test a bad strategy?

    Quiz Answer Key

    1. The primary focus should be on providing an explanation, an example, or additional detail to develop the answer naturally, rather than just giving a minimal one-sentence response. It is more like having a normal conversation.
    2. Average students often rigidly stick to the bullet points, addressing each one separately without connecting them or expanding on the main topic, leading to short, disjointed answers and running out of things to say.
    3. Band 7, 8, and 9 students use bullet points as guides to help them speak naturally. They refer to them when appropriate to aid their flow of ideas but do not feel obligated to directly address each point in order.
    4. The “past, present, future” template can lead to unnatural and overly complicated answers, as it is not how people typically structure responses in everyday conversations. It also may not apply to the question at all.
    5. In Part 3, increasingly difficult questions are used to distinguish between the higher band levels. These more challenging questions determine if you can cope with more complex topics and grammar structures.
    6. Giving a very short answer does not provide the examiner with enough information to evaluate your language abilities. This can lead to follow-up questions that create added stress.
    7. “Robotic delivery” is speaking in an overly formal and unnatural way, as if reading from a script. This decreases fluency and can lead to mistakes in grammar and pronunciation due to stress.
    8. Focusing solely on using impressive vocabulary can cause you to ignore the overall coherence of your answer. It is important to focus on answering the question naturally.
    9. The primary thing to focus on in Part 1 is answering questions naturally and honestly. It is about you and your life.
    10. Memorizing answers can affect coherence and can signal to the examiner that your speaking ability is not natural. Examiners can then ask more difficult questions that test real speaking ability.

    Essay Questions

    Instructions: Write a full essay response addressing the following prompts.

    1. Discuss the differences in approach between lower-level and higher-level students in Part 2 of the IELTS speaking test, based on the provided source material. What specific strategies do higher-level students employ to achieve fluency and coherence?
    2. Analyze the common mistakes made by IELTS test takers in the speaking section, as outlined in the source. What are the underlying reasons for these mistakes, and how can students effectively avoid them?
    3. Describe how the use of natural language and personal experience can lead to a higher score in the IELTS speaking test. How can a student balance this with the need to show a range of vocabulary and grammar?
    4. Discuss the importance of topic-specific vocabulary in the IELTS speaking test. How does the ability to use simple, topic-specific language contribute to a higher score compared to relying on complex, but generic, vocabulary?
    5. Explore how understanding the testing methods and underlying purposes of the IELTS speaking test can help students avoid common pitfalls and traps. How does an understanding of these purposes help students become more effective test-takers?

    Glossary of Key Terms

    Fluency: The ability to speak smoothly and easily, without unnatural pauses or hesitations.

    Coherence: The quality of being logical and consistent, where ideas are clearly connected and the response makes sense as a whole.

    Monologue: A long speech by one person, as opposed to a dialogue between two or more.

    Bullet Points: Items in a list, often used as prompts to guide the speaker in Part 2 of the IELTS test.

    Topic Specific Vocabulary: Words and phrases that are related to a particular subject or area.

    Robotic Delivery: Speaking in a stiff, unnatural, or overly formal way, like a robot.

    Range (Grammar/Vocabulary): The variety and scope of grammatical structures and vocabulary the test-taker uses.

    Idiom: A phrase or expression whose meaning cannot be understood from the literal meaning of the individual words (e.g., “bite the bullet”).

    Collocation: Words that often occur together or in a specific sequence.

    Intonation: The rise and fall of the voice in speaking, which can convey meaning and emotions.

    IELTS Speaking Mastery

    Okay, here is a detailed briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided text:

    Briefing Document: IELTS Speaking Test Analysis

    Introduction

    This document analyzes a transcript of a detailed video discussing strategies for improving performance on the IELTS speaking test. The video covers common mistakes, best practices, and specific techniques for all three parts of the speaking test. It also provides advice on using vocabulary effectively, and avoiding common traps. The target audience is test takers who are looking to improve their band scores, especially those aiming for band 7 or higher.

    Main Themes and Ideas

    1. Natural Communication is Key:
    • The overarching theme is that the IELTS speaking test is a test of communication, not rote memorization or showcasing complex language. The video stresses the importance of sounding natural and conversational, as if talking to a friend or colleague.
    • Quote: “You’re not going to speak in that overly formal overly academic robotic way because that’s not how you would speak to someone like imagine if if Justin and I were having a meeting and I said like how is thing how how is your weekend my weekend was good I went like he wouldn’t really talk like that.”
    1. Avoiding Common Mistakes:
    • The video identifies several common mistakes that lower scores:
    • Too short answers in Part 1, not providing enough information or context.
    • Quote: “if you give a really really really short answer to a question um and they’re going to be they might ask you follow-up questions like why or can you you know asking you to develop your answer a little bit more that might put you off it might be like oh is am I am I doing something wrong it’ll cause extra stress”
    • Robotic delivery, stemming from stress or a misconception that the test requires formal, academic language.
    • Trying to impress the examiner with overly complex vocabulary, idioms, or grammar, instead of focusing on answering the question clearly and naturally.
    • Memorized answers that do not address the specific question and that examiners can easily identify, leading to more difficult follow-up questions.
    • Rigidly sticking to bullet points in Part 2, instead of using them as a guide to naturally develop a topic, and running out of things to say.
    • Quote: “they rigidly stick to bullet points so it’s important that you understand the bullet points there are there to help you they’re not there to hinder you”Not answering the question, focusing on vocabulary instead of coherence.
    • Quote: “when you’re focusing just on vocabulary then you’re not really focusing on being coherent and answering the question”
    1. Part-Specific Strategies:
    • Part 1: Answer questions directly, then add brief explanations, examples or details. The goal is not to use a set number of sentences or words, but to sound like a “normal human being.”
    • Part 2: Focus on the main topic, rather than rigidly sticking to bullet points. The bullet points are there to help guide, not hinder. Avoid memorized structures or templates. Speaking should sound natural and flow easily.
    • Quote: “by just focusing on the main topic this gives you a lot more freedom to speak fluently and naturally rather than trying to do bullet point 1 2 3 4 so again it sounds like a natural conversation”
    • Part 3: Expect more challenging questions that require a broader range of grammar and vocabulary. Examiners ask more difficult questions to differentiate higher-scoring students. Students should not refuse to answer difficult questions or give very short answers. It’s important to use different tenses or grammar structures naturally.
    1. Best Practices & Techniques:
    • Develop answers naturally: Expand beyond simple, one-sentence responses, adding explanations and examples to provide depth.
    • Focus on the question: Ensure the answer directly relates to the question asked.
    • Natural Fluency: Do not feel pressure to speak without pausing, as it is okay to take a moment to think. Fluency is about avoiding unnatural or lengthy pauses.
    • Quote: “fluency does not mean speaking without pausing ever you do need to think all right um it is better to think for a couple of seconds and then give your answer than to immediately begin talking and then get lost and you know uh uh uh”
    • Simplicity is Key: Aim for clear, accurate, and simple language rather than complex constructions.
    • Use the bullet points naturally: Use them as guides when appropriate, and not by trying to follow them strictly.
    • Do not focus on idea generation: The speaking test is about you and your experiences, it is about speaking truthfully, rather than trying to generate an ‘idea’.
    • Honesty: The questions are about you, talk honestly about your own experience, which is much easier and natural than trying to fabricate an answer.
    • Quote: “these are about me there are questions they’re asking about me they’re when you are in the test they’re asking about you so just ask them naturally or answer them naturally and that is going to help your fluency”
    1. Vocabulary and Idioms
    • Topic Specific Vocabulary: Use vocabulary that is specific to the topic, as it is more effective than simply using very complex words that aren’t appropriate.
    • Avoid Overuse of Idioms: Don’t force idioms into every answer. It’s better to use them naturally and accurately and not to over use them. The goal is to use idiomatic language, which means natural and correct English, and while it includes idioms, it isn’t only about them.
    • Quote: “the definition of idiomatic is containing Expressions that are natural and correct”
    1. Importance of Practice and Feedback
    • Self-Analysis: Students should record themselves, transcribe their answers, and analyze their performance based on the official IELTS marking criteria. Pay special attention to mistakes in grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation that you are unaware of during the test.
    • Practice with simple answers: Prioritise simple ideas to improve fluency.
    • Focus on accuracy: Prioritise grammar accuracy. 50% of sentences must have zero grammatical errors for band 7 or above.
    • Correct pronunciation: Focus on clarity rather than a particular accent.
    1. Avoiding Traps
    • Unusual Questions: Examiners will ask unusual questions to identify memorized answers.
    • Difficult Questions: The examiner will ask more difficult questions to differentiate band levels. Attempt to answer even if you don’t know the topic.
    • Topic-Specific Vocabulary: Examiners will test your vocabulary by asking a range of different topics, testing your topic specific vocabulary and your range of vocabulary.
    • Cheating: Avoid memorizing answers or focusing only on very complex grammar.
    1. Case Study: Priyanka
    • The video uses the story of Priyanka, who improved from band 6 to band 8 in two weeks by focusing on four key things:
    • Using simple ideas to improve her fluency,
    • Using simple grammar tenses to increase accuracy.
    • Not worrying about complex vocabulary or a perfect accent.
    • Quote: “if you’re trying to use complex ideas in the speaking test you’re making your life 10 times more difficult for no gain at all.”
    1. Key Takeaway: The Catch Me If You Can Secret
    • The video draws an analogy from the movie Catch Me If You Can, suggesting that students shouldn’t try to “cheat” by memorizing answers. Instead, they should focus on being genuinely proficient in English, as the character in the movie was proficient enough to pass all the tests without cheating.
    • Quote: “he didn’t need to fake becoming a doctor or a lawyer or an airline pilot he didn’t need to steal money to become rich he was already talented and smart and intelligent enough to do all of these things without cheating without stealing”

    Conclusion

    This video emphasizes a holistic approach to the IELTS speaking test, focusing on clear communication, natural language use, and self-awareness. By understanding the common mistakes and implementing the best practices, test-takers can significantly improve their performance and achieve higher band scores. The focus is on becoming a genuine communicator and test taking skills such as managing stress and being able to think naturally on your feet, rather than trying to memorize or fake proficiency.

    IELTS Speaking Test Strategies

    IELTS Speaking FAQ

    1. How should I approach answering questions in Part 1 of the IELTS Speaking test?
    2. In Part 1, you should aim to answer questions naturally, as you would in a normal conversation. Don’t overthink the number of sentences or whether to include examples. Start with a direct answer to the question, and then elaborate with some additional detail, explanations, or a short story. The key is to respond as a normal human being would, avoiding overly short or formulaic responses. For example, if asked “Where do you live?”, don’t just say “London”. Instead say something like “I’ve recently moved to London, to an area called Wandsworth. It’s quite nice, especially because it is close to the river”.
    3. What is the main focus of Part 2 of the IELTS Speaking test, and what are some common mistakes students make?
    4. Part 2 is a monologue where you speak for up to 2 minutes after a minute of preparation. The examiner listens to your fluency, pronunciation, grammar, vocabulary, and ability to answer the given topic. Common mistakes include rigidly sticking to the bullet points provided in the Q card, which can lead to a lack of ideas and a choppy delivery. Students also sometimes try to use overly complicated memorized structures like “PPF” (past, present, future), making the response sound unnatural. A better approach is to focus on the main topic at the top of the Q card, and use the bullet points as support or prompts when appropriate, not as a rigid framework.
    5. How do high-scoring students approach Part 2 of the IELTS Speaking test differently?
    6. High-scoring students in Part 2 focus on the main topic of the Q card, which allows them to speak more naturally and fluently. They utilize bullet points to support their answers rather than rigidly adhering to them. They avoid using memorized templates and speak like they are having a natural conversation, using their answers to tell a story. Instead of trying to incorporate sophisticated grammar structures and a wide range of vocabulary, they prioritize answering the question with clear explanations and examples.
    7. What should I avoid doing in Part 3 of the IELTS Speaking test?
    8. In Part 3, it’s crucial to avoid giving very short answers or saying “I don’t know,” as this signals to the examiner that you may be a lower-band candidate. Do not let the stress of a long exam lead you into providing short, limited responses or giving up on more challenging questions. Examiners will ask increasingly difficult questions in order to differentiate between candidates, and you should engage with those questions instead of attempting to avoid them.
    9. What are common mistakes students make regarding pronunciation in the IELTS speaking test?
    10. Common pronunciation problems include speaking in a monotone, very quietly, or “inside their mouth”. Stress and a lack of relaxation can lead to a robotic delivery and can cause issues with fluency, grammar and vocabulary. Some students can confuse the speaking test with a formal academic one, which can also lead to a robotic style. The test is testing your conversational English in a normal setting and should be treated as such. It’s important to project your voice, and be clear and natural in your delivery.
    11. How should I balance fluency, grammar, and vocabulary in the IELTS Speaking test?
    12. It is important to recognize that these three areas are all interdependent, rather than separate elements to be focused on. Focusing too much on one element at the expense of another will bring down your overall score. For example, focusing too much on perfect grammar will decrease your fluency as you will be trying to think of every tense while speaking. Likewise, focusing too much on vocabulary will affect your coherence and fluency, as it can make you stray away from the topic and hinder your flow. Prioritize speaking naturally while attempting to incorporate your knowledge of these three elements of the speaking test.
    13. What’s more important in the IELTS Speaking test: the complexity of ideas or the clarity of communication?
    14. The IELTS Speaking test assesses your ability to communicate clearly and effectively in English, rather than the complexity of your ideas. If you focus too much on impressive ideas or complex structures, your speech can become unnatural and less fluent. Simpler ideas, if communicated clearly and accurately, can score much higher than complex ideas that are expressed poorly. In the official marking criteria there is no focus on “complexity of ideas”.
    15. What strategies can I use to improve my IELTS Speaking score by practicing at home?
    16. To improve your speaking at home, you can record your answers using your phone or laptop, then transcribe the recording using a transcription app. Listen back to your recording and identify your main weaknesses while comparing it to the official marking criteria. Analyze the transcript, looking for errors in grammar and vocabulary and assess whether you actually answered the questions. Finally, use a grammar tool to highlight any grammar mistakes, learn from these, and repeat this practice process on a regular basis.

    Mastering the IELTS Speaking Test

    Okay, here is the timeline and cast of characters based on the provided text:

    Timeline of Main Events/Concepts

    • General IELTS Speaking Test Structure: The source begins by outlining the three parts of the IELTS speaking test:
    • Part 1: General questions; emphasis on natural conversation, not formulaic responses.
    • Part 2: A monologue based on a cue card with bullet points, with preparation time and up to two minutes of speaking time. The goal is natural, fluent speaking, not just a rigid reading of bullet points.
    • Part 3: Discussion with the examiner, with increasingly complex questions aimed at discerning the test taker’s language level.
    • Common Mistakes of Lower-Level Students
    • Part 1: Giving very short answers, lacking detail or explanation.
    • Part 2: Rigidly sticking to bullet points, running out of ideas quickly, and using memorized structures (like “past, present, future”).
    • Part 3: Giving short answers, failing to engage with more difficult questions, and demonstrating a limited range of grammar and vocabulary.
    • General issues: Robotic, overly formal delivery; trying to impress the examiner with complex vocabulary or grammar; memorizing answers, which leads to incoherence.
    • Strategies of High-Scoring Students:
    • Part 1: Focus on answering the questions naturally, as in a normal conversation. Add detail, explanations, and examples as needed, but not formulaically.
    • Part 2: Focus on the main topic of the cue card, use bullet points to aid natural speaking, and avoid complex structures or rigid planning. Focus on telling a story/having a conversational flow.
    • Part 3: Answer complex questions naturally; not being afraid to say “I don’t know,” and offering educated guesses instead of silence. This shows engagement. Demonstrating a broad range of grammar, vocabulary, and comprehension by being flexible on different topics and grammatical structures.
    • General Strategies: Answering questions naturally, developing ideas with detail, avoiding the desire to impress the examiner, not relying on memorized structures, not rushing.
    • Specific Examples
    • A sample Part 2 response is given, with a student talking about meeting a new friend in kindergarten.
    • A student’s answer to “What’s your favourite website” is examined and critiqued (too short).
    • Several more sample responses are given, highlighting issues of robotic delivery, trying too hard to impress, and memorized answers.
    • Positive examples of native-speaker-level responses are given for favorite food, TV, and apps (focus on natural, detailed, conversation-like answers).
    • Best Practices
    • Speak naturally. Use explanations, and examples.
    • Don’t focus on length or number of sentences.
    • Answer questions specifically.
    • Fluency does not mean no pauses but rather the absence of unnatural pauses.
    • Do not try to think of complicated ideas – simple ideas are better.
    • Additional Topics Covered:
    • Several mock Part 2 and Part 3 questions are posed, with sample answers highlighting how to use these best practices. These cover diverse topics such as passport news, a snorkeling experience, a cancelled flight, a dream job, childhood money, copyright law, a memorable meal, hiking, travel, and a chance meeting.
    • Priyanka’s Story: The story of Priyanka, a student who failed four times, is presented.
    • The emphasis is that she changed her behaviour by focusing on only four key issues:
    • Fluency: Pauses while searching for ideas, can be improved by sticking to simple ideas.
    • Grammar: Using complex grammar leads to error, use simple grammar for accuracy.
    • Vocabulary: Complex vocabulary will not improve your score, but a focus on clear, precise wording will.
    • Pronunciation: Accent is not the problem, clarity and appropriate delivery are.
    • Idioms & Vocabulary: The document stresses that the use of idioms, phrasal verbs, informal words, etc, should be idiomatic, that is they should be used correctly, naturally and appropriately. Using lots of idioms and using them incorrectly will not improve your score. It offers a series of common idioms used by band 9 students with explanations of their origin, usage, and common mistakes: bite the bullet, a piece of cake, kill two birds with one stone, let the cat out of the bag, don’t put all your eggs in one basket, once in a blue moon, burn the midnight oil/burn the candle at both ends, at the drop of a hat, cry over spilled milk, don’t judge a book by its cover, don’t count your chickens before they hatch, go the extra mile, raining cats and dogs, throw in the towel, cross that bridge when you come to it, Rome wasn’t built in a day, and when in Rome.
    • The key takeaway about vocabulary is the “birthday cake analogy,” where the bulk of the “cake” is simple, accurate everyday words, with some “sprinkles” of high-level vocab (idioms, etc). Using an excessive amount of “sprinkles” will result in a bad-tasting “cake”.
    • Avoiding “Traps”:
    • Memorized Answers: Examiners identify memorized answers and will target areas where you don’t have memorized responses.
    • “Unusual Topics:” Examiners test you by asking about topics you are not prepared for.
    • Part 3 Difficult Questions: Examiners will escalate the difficulty of questions to see if you can cope.
    • Topic-Specific Vocabulary: Examiners test you by presenting different topics in the hope you will have vocabulary specific to that topic.
    • Self-Practice Technique: The document advises on a self-practice technique to focus on areas of weakness:
    • Record yourself and transcribe your answers.
    • Use the official marking criteria to identify areas for improvement.
    • Analyze answers for structure, fluency, accuracy, and development.
    • A Mock Test: A full mock speaking test is performed and scored in a live setting to illustrate the concepts taught.

    Cast of Characters

    • The Narrator/Teacher: The main voice throughout the text. A teacher and expert in IELTS preparation, likely the author or presenter of the content. Provides explanations, examples, and advice on how to approach the IELTS speaking test.
    • Justin: The teacher’s “glamorous assistant” who poses questions in the mock test scenarios.
    • Amanprit: The speaker in the example Part 2 response. She met her new friend in kindergarten.
    • Priyanka: A student who failed the speaking test four times. Her story is used as an example of how a few key changes in approach can greatly improve performance.
    • Tom: The teacher’s 8 year old son who is used in an example related to a desire to go to Istanbul for a Champions League final.

    This detailed breakdown should provide you with a good understanding of the content of the provided sources. Let me know if you have other questions!

    IELTS Speaking Mastery

    The sources provide a comprehensive overview of the IELTS speaking test, including its structure, common mistakes, best practices, and strategies for achieving a high score. Here’s a breakdown of key information:

    IELTS Speaking Test Format

    • The speaking test has three parts [1].
    • Part 1 is the easiest, consisting of predictable, everyday questions [1].
    • Part 2 involves a monologue based on a cue card, where you speak for up to 2 minutes after a one-minute preparation period [2]. The examiner will not ask questions or interact with you [2].
    • Part 3 includes more abstract, academic-style questions that require more developed answers [3].

    Common Mistakes Made by Lower-Band Students

    • Part 1:Giving memorized answers [1].
    • Providing overly long responses [4].
    • Going off-topic [4].
    • Sounding robotic or overly formal [4].
    • Giving very short answers [5].
    • Part 2:Rigidly sticking to bullet points on the cue card [2].
    • Part 3:Giving very short answers [3].
    • Saying “I don’t know” or not attempting an answer [3].
    • Showing a limited range of grammar and vocabulary [6].
    • Appearing as though you want the exam to be over [6].
    • Other mistakes include trying to impress the examiner with fancy vocabulary or grammar [7], focusing too much on grammar or vocabulary at the expense of fluency and coherence [8].

    Characteristics of High-Band (7, 8, and 9) Students

    • They do not sound memorized and keep answers concise [9].
    • They stay on topic and have a natural conversational tone [9].
    • They answer questions directly and develop answers with explanations, examples, or stories [2, 9].
    • They speak naturally, as if talking to a friend or colleague [9, 10].
    • They attempt every question, even if they don’t know much about the topic [11].
    • They show different sides of an argument, not just their own opinion [11].
    • They have a wide range of grammar and vocabulary [12].
    • They use simple, accurate language [13].

    Best Practices

    • Answer questions naturally, as you would in a normal conversation [2, 10].
    • Develop answers with explanations, examples, or details [9, 14].
    • Focus on clear communication rather than trying to impress [10].
    • Do not be afraid to pause for a few seconds to think before answering [15].
    • For Part 2, pick topics you are comfortable discussing, and don’t rigidly stick to the bullet points [2].
    • For Part 3, attempt to answer every question and develop your answers [11].

    Key Strategies

    • Fluency: Don’t try to use complex ideas, as simple ideas can increase your score [16]. Do not speak too quickly [17].
    • Grammar: Focus on accuracy. Use simpler sentence structures with zero errors [18]. The examiner tests range by asking different questions, and by answering naturally, you will use a range of tenses [18].
    • Vocabulary: Use vocabulary as a tool, and choose words that help you discuss different topics [19]. Use simple, topic-specific words rather than complex words [20].
    • Pronunciation: Clarity is most important. Use intonation and connected speech naturally [21].
    • Idioms: Use idioms appropriately and accurately, but do not force them. Natural idiomatic expressions are important, including phrasal verbs and colloquialisms [22, 23].
    • Practice: Use practice questions to understand the marking criteria and identify your weaknesses. Record yourself, transcribe your answers, and analyze them for fluency, pronunciation, grammar, and vocabulary [24-26].

    Traps to Avoid

    • Don’t rely on memorized answers, as examiners can spot them [27, 28].
    • Don’t be thrown by unusual questions; answer them to the best of your ability [28].
    • Don’t get overwhelmed by the difficulty of the questions or topics, particularly in Part 3 [28, 29].
    • Don’t try to trick the examiner or cheat the test, focus on demonstrating your genuine English level [20, 30].
    • Don’t compare yourself to others on YouTube, many of these videos are not accurate [31].
    • Don’t seek too much feedback, but work on specific weaknesses once they have been identified [31].

    By avoiding these traps and focusing on clear communication, natural delivery, and a solid command of English, you can significantly increase your score on the IELTS speaking test [20].

    IELTS Speaking Band 7-9 Strategies

    To achieve a Band 7, 8, or 9 on the IELTS speaking test, it’s crucial to understand the specific strategies and approaches that differentiate high-scoring candidates from those in lower bands [1]. These strategies go beyond simply having a good command of English; they involve a specific way of approaching the test and demonstrating your communication skills [2].

    Key Characteristics of Band 7-9 Candidates:

    • Natural and Conversational Tone: High-band students speak naturally, as if they are talking to a friend or colleague, rather than sounding robotic or overly formal [3, 4]. They avoid memorized responses and instead engage in genuine conversation [1].
    • Direct and Developed Answers: They answer questions directly and then develop their responses with explanations, examples, details, and stories [4, 5]. They don’t give very short answers; instead, they provide enough information for the examiner to assess their language ability [4, 6].
    • Fluency and Coherence: They speak fluently without unnatural pauses and with good coherence by making sure that their responses are always relevant to the questions, showing a clear train of thought [7].
    • Flexibility with Bullet Points: In Part 2, they don’t rigidly stick to the bullet points on the cue card, but rather use them as a guide to help them speak naturally [8, 9]. They focus on the main topic and use the bullet points to help them expand on that topic naturally [9].
    • Confidence in Handling Difficult Questions: They attempt every question, even if they don’t know much about the topic [10]. They don’t say “I don’t know” or refuse to answer; instead, they make an effort to communicate in English [2].
    • Exploration of Different Perspectives: In Part 3, they show different sides of an argument, not just their own opinion [10]. They explore the topic fully, showing that they can consider various viewpoints [10].
    • Appropriate Use of Simple Language: They use simple, accurate, and topic-specific vocabulary rather than trying to impress with complex words [11, 12]. They use simple language to clearly express their ideas [13].

    Strategies for Achieving High Scores:

    • Focus on Communication, Not Memorization: Do not memorize answers or try to trick the examiner [3, 13]. The goal is to demonstrate your ability to communicate naturally and effectively in English, and not to deliver rehearsed speeches [14].
    • Develop Answers Naturally: Instead of following a formula, develop your answers as you would in a normal conversation [15]. Add details, explanations, examples, and personal anecdotes to make your responses more engaging [6, 16].
    • Use Simple, Accurate Language: Focus on using vocabulary and grammar that you are comfortable with [17]. Don’t try to use complex language that you don’t fully understand, as this can lead to mistakes [17-19].
    • Use Topic-Specific Vocabulary: Demonstrate a wide vocabulary by using topic specific words and phrases, rather than trying to use more complex or advanced vocabulary [12, 20].
    • Practice and Self-Assessment: Record yourself speaking, transcribe your answers, and analyze them for fluency, pronunciation, grammar, and vocabulary [21]. This technique helps you identify weaknesses that you might not be aware of during the test [22].
    • Understand the Marking Criteria: Familiarize yourself with the official IELTS marking criteria and assess your performance based on these criteria [22, 23].
    • Avoid Common Traps: Be aware of common traps such as giving memorized answers, using overly complex language, or refusing to answer difficult questions [13, 24].
    • Seek Feedback from Professionals: Get your speaking checked at least once by a real IELTS professional who can identify and fix your weaknesses [23].

    Specific Techniques:

    • Fluency: Focus on speaking at a natural pace, without too many pauses or hesitations. Use simple ideas and don’t try to make things too complex [25, 26].
    • Grammar: Prioritize accuracy over complexity. Use grammar that you are comfortable with and avoid making basic errors [27, 28].
    • Vocabulary: Use vocabulary as a tool, and choose words that help you discuss different topics. Focus on simple, topic-specific words rather than complex words [19, 20].
    • Pronunciation: Clarity is most important. Focus on speaking clearly so that the examiner can understand you, and use natural intonation and connected speech [7, 29].
    • Idioms: Use idioms appropriately and accurately, but don’t force them. Natural idiomatic expressions are important, including phrasal verbs and colloquialisms, but be sure to use them correctly and in context [30-32].

    By focusing on these strategies, you can improve your communication skills and increase your chances of getting a high score on the IELTS speaking test.

    Ultimate IELTS 3-Hour Speaking Course

    Common IELTS Speaking Test Mistakes

    The sources outline several common mistakes that students make on the IELTS speaking test, which often prevent them from achieving higher band scores [1, 2]. These mistakes can be categorized by the different parts of the test, as well as general errors that apply to the entire test [1].

    Part 1 Mistakes:

    • Memorized answers: Many students memorize answers to common part 1 questions in an attempt to impress the examiner, but these responses are easily identified and lower your score [1, 2].
    • Overly long answers: Students may provide answers that are too long, often because they are using memorized templates found online [2].
    • Off-topic answers: If examiners suspect that a student is using memorized answers, they may ask unexpected questions, and those who rely on memorized answers may go off-topic [2].
    • Robotic or overly formal tone: Some students believe the test is a formal occasion and speak in an unnatural way, which comes across as robotic [2].
    • Very short answers: Giving a one-sentence answer does not provide the examiner with enough information [3, 4].

    Part 2 Mistakes:

    • Rigidly sticking to bullet points: Average students may read each bullet point in order, without adding any extra detail or making connections, which can cause them to run out of things to say [5, 6].
    • Running out of ideas: When rigidly sticking to bullet points, students often do not have enough to say and stop talking before the allotted time [6].
    • Using unnatural templates: Some students use templates such as past, present, and future (PPF) to structure their answers, which can sound unnatural and may not fit the question [6].

    Part 3 Mistakes:

    • Short answers: Students may give very short answers, failing to develop their points [7].
    • Avoiding the question: Some students may say “I don’t know” or refuse to attempt an answer, which signals to the examiner that they do not deserve a high score [7, 8].
    • Limited range: Students might demonstrate a limited range of grammar and vocabulary by failing to answer difficult questions or not using complex grammar structures [8].
    • Wanting the exam to be over: Students who want the exam to be over may give short answers and show the examiner they are not trying [8].

    General Mistakes Across All Parts:

    • Trying to impress the examiner: Students may use overly complex vocabulary and grammar, which often results in errors and affects fluency and coherence [9, 10].
    • Focusing too much on grammar or vocabulary: Focusing too much on grammar can reduce fluency because it’s hard to think of perfect grammar all the time. Focusing too much on vocabulary can also reduce fluency because it is difficult to maintain coherence if you are focusing primarily on using high level words [10].
    • Not developing answers: Not developing answers with explanations, details or examples can signal to the examiner that your communication skills are limited [4, 11, 12].
    • Using memorized answers: Relying on memorized answers will cause you to struggle when you encounter questions that are not what you expect [10, 13].
    • Incorrect use of idioms: Using idioms incorrectly, missing articles, or using incorrect word forms will lower your score [14, 15].
    • Speaking too quickly: Speaking too quickly can make it difficult for the examiner to understand you [16, 17].
    • Not using topic specific vocabulary: Students may try to use high-level vocabulary, rather than using simple topic specific vocabulary which is preferred by examiners [18, 19].

    By understanding and avoiding these common mistakes, students can improve their performance and increase their chances of achieving a higher band score on the IELTS speaking test [3].

    IELTS Speaking Mastery

    To improve your IELTS speaking score, it’s important to focus on best practices that are used by Band 7, 8, and 9 students. These best practices encompass a range of techniques that emphasize natural communication, effective development of ideas, and strategic use of language [1-3].

    General Best Practices

    • Answer Naturally: Speak in a natural, conversational way, as if you’re talking to a friend or colleague [3]. Avoid sounding robotic or overly formal [2].
    • Answer Directly and Develop Fully: Answer the questions directly and then develop your responses with explanations, examples, details, and stories [3]. Don’t give very short answers [4]. Provide enough information to showcase your language ability [3].
    • Focus on Communication: Remember that the IELTS speaking test is a test of your ability to communicate, not your knowledge or intelligence [4, 5].
    • Avoid Memorization: Don’t memorize answers to common questions [1, 2]. Memorized answers are easily spotted by examiners and will negatively impact your score [5]. Instead, respond genuinely and spontaneously [3].
    • Be Honest and Authentic: Talk honestly about your own experiences, which will come across as more natural and engaging [6].
    • Don’t Overcomplicate: Don’t try to use overly complex words or grammar [7]. Focus on using language that you are comfortable with [5, 8].
    • Use Topic-Specific Vocabulary: Use simple vocabulary that is topic-specific and appropriate to the questions [9].
    • Do Not Try to Impress the Examiner: Do not try to impress the examiner with fancy words and idioms, focus on answering the questions, instead [7].
    • Manage Your Time: Do not worry about the number of sentences or words you use, focus on answering the question fully [10, 11].
    • Be Confident: Attempt every question, even if you don’t know much about the topic. [12] Show the examiner that you are confident in your ability to communicate in English [12, 13].

    Specific Best Practices

    • Fluency and Coherence:Speak at a natural pace, without unnatural pauses [6]. It is okay to pause to think, but avoid excessive hesitation [6].
    • Answer the question directly and stay on topic. Develop your answer with explanations, examples, or stories [3, 8].
    • Make sure that your answers are always relevant to the questions, and show a clear train of thought [14].
    • Grammar:Use a range of tenses and structures accurately [15].
    • Focus on accuracy over complexity, and ensure that your grammar is correct [16].
    • Avoid making basic grammatical errors [16].
    • Vocabulary:Use a wide range of vocabulary to express yourself clearly [17].
    • Choose words that are appropriate for the context, and use topic specific vocabulary [9, 18].
    • Do not focus on using complex words that you don’t understand, but focus on using vocabulary accurately [5, 8].
    • Pronunciation:Speak clearly so that the examiner can understand you [19].
    • Use natural intonation and connected speech [19].
    • Don’t worry about having a specific accent; focus on clarity [19].
    • IdiomsUse idioms correctly and naturally, but don’t force them [20].
    • Use idioms when they fit naturally into a conversation, but don’t overuse them [21, 22].
    • Be aware that natural idiomatic expressions are important including phrasal verbs and colloquialisms [22].
    • Part 1: Answer questions directly and develop your responses with some personal details [3]. The key is to sound like a friend or colleague, rather than a robot [23].
    • Part 2: Focus on the main topic and use bullet points as a guide, not as a strict structure [18].
    • Part 3: Show both sides of an argument and fully explore the topic [12]. Don’t be afraid to express your own opinion as well [12].

    Practice Techniques:

    • Self-Assessment: Record yourself answering practice questions [24]. Listen back to your responses and analyze them based on the marking criteria [24, 25].
    • Transcription: Transcribe your answers and identify areas for improvement [25].
    • Targeted Practice: Focus on improving your biggest weaknesses [25, 26].
    • Focus on One Thing at a Time: Treat each part of the test separately [27].
    • Seek Feedback: Have your speaking checked by a qualified professional who can identify and address your specific weaknesses [27].

    Important Considerations:

    • Avoid traps: Be aware of common traps, such as memorizing answers, or using overly complex language [9, 28].
    • Understand the marking criteria: Make sure you understand the marking criteria, and use practice questions to test yourself based on these criteria [27].
    • Don’t compare yourself to others: Don’t compare yourself to “band 9” speakers on YouTube, as this can damage your confidence [26].
    • Be Patient: Don’t expect to improve your speaking overnight. It takes time, effort, and consistent practice to develop your skills [29].

    By following these best practices, you can improve your IELTS speaking skills and increase your chances of achieving a higher score [24, 30].

    IELTS Speaking Idioms: Effective Use & Common Mistakes

    The sources provide a comprehensive guide to using idioms effectively in the IELTS speaking test, emphasizing that while idioms can enhance your language, they must be used naturally and correctly [1-3]. Overusing or misusing idioms can lower your score [2, 4].

    Here’s a detailed look at idiom usage, based on the information in the sources:

    Key Principles for Using Idioms:

    • Natural Usage: Idioms should be used when they fit naturally into the conversation, not forced or inserted randomly [3, 5]. The goal is to sound natural, as if you are speaking to a friend or colleague [6, 7]. Examiners are listening for natural, idiomatic expressions, which includes idioms, phrasal verbs, informal words, and colloquialisms [3].
    • Accuracy is Essential: Use idioms correctly. Pay attention to grammar, articles, and verb tenses [3-5]. Using an idiom incorrectly will lower your score [2, 4].
    • Quality Over Quantity: Do not try to use as many idioms as possible. Instead, use them sparingly and only when appropriate [3]. The key is to demonstrate that you can use idioms correctly, not just that you know a lot of idioms [2, 3].
    • Understanding is Crucial: Understand the meaning and origin of an idiom before using it. This will help you use it properly [1, 8].
    • Focus on Communication: Remember that the IELTS speaking test is a test of your ability to communicate, not a test of how many idioms you know [3, 9]. The test is about natural, effective communication and not just about the use of idioms [3].
    • Do not memorize lists of idioms: Do not memorize lists of idioms and insert them into every answer. It is better to incorporate them into your everyday use of the English language [5].

    Common Mistakes with Idioms:

    • Forcing idioms: Do not force idioms into your answers when they do not fit [5].
    • Incorrect grammar: Using the wrong verb tense or missing articles can lower your score [4, 10]. For example, using “a piece of cake” instead of “piece of cake” [8] or saying “kill” instead of “killed two birds with one stone” [10]
    • Overuse: Using too many idioms can make your speech sound unnatural [3, 5].
    • Misunderstanding the meaning: Using an idiom incorrectly because you don’t understand it properly [2].

    How to Use Idioms Effectively:

    • Sprinkle them in: Think of your vocabulary like a birthday cake. The cake itself (97-98%) is made up of simple, everyday words. Idioms are like the sprinkles on top – they add a nice touch, but they are only a small part of the whole [3, 5].
    • Focus on Natural Usage: Use idioms as a natural part of your speech, not as something extra or unusual [3].
    • Context matters: Only use idioms when the context is appropriate [11]. For example, the idiom “once in a blue moon” should be used when talking about something that happens rarely [11].
    • Use topic-specific vocabulary: Do not try to use high-level vocabulary, instead use simple topic-specific vocabulary [12, 13].

    Examples of Idioms and Their Use: The sources provide multiple examples of idioms, their meanings, origins, and how to use them correctly in the IELTS speaking test [1, 4, 8, 10, 11, 14-20]. Here are a few of them:

    • to bite the bullet: To do something difficult or unpleasant with bravery [1]. For example, “I decided to bite the bullet and study law.” [8]
    • a piece of cake: Something very easy [8]. For example, “Compared to practicing law, teaching English is a piece of cake.” [8]
    • kill two birds with one stone: To accomplish two goals with one action [10]. For example, “I decided to kill two birds with one stone and buy one present for her birthday and Christmas.” [10]
    • to let the cat out of the bag: To reveal a secret, often by mistake [10]. For example, “The phone kind of let the cat out of the bag a little bit.” [4]
    • don’t put all your eggs in one basket: Don’t concentrate all of your resources or effort into one area [4]. For example, “It would be foolish for me to put all my eggs in one basket and just hope that IELTS and teaching lasts forever.” [4]
    • once in a blue moon: Something that happens rarely [4]. For example, “Since I’ve had kids, it’s really once in a blue moon that I go out.” [11]
    • burn the midnight oil: Working very hard, often late into the night [11, 14]. For example, “I do still burn the midnight oil, I work very hard on my career.” [14]
    • burn the candle at both ends: Working too hard and exhausting yourself [14]. For example, “I used to burn the candle at both ends… lawyers are expected to work you know 80 to 100 hours a week.” [14]
    • at the drop of a hat: Doing something quickly, immediately, and without hesitation [14]. For example, “If you rent, you can move anywhere at the drop of a hat.” [15]
    • cry over spilled milk: Not to waste time thinking about something negative that you can’t change [15]. For example, “There’s no point crying over spilled milk, you made the mistake now learn from it.” [15]
    • you can’t judge a book by its cover: You shouldn’t judge people or things by their appearance [15, 16]. For example, “You can’t judge a person based on their appearance.” [16]
    • don’t count your chickens before they hatch: Don’t assume something will be successful until it actually occurs [16]. For example, “Don’t count your chickens, but if I were to sell these watches I probably would make a lot more money.” [16]
    • to go the extra mile: To put more effort than is required [16, 17]. For example, “In whatever she does, she goes the extra mile.” [17]
    • raining cats and dogs: Very heavy rain [17]. For example, “It’s Ireland so it’s normally raining cats and dogs.” [17]
    • throw in the towel: To stop something because it is too difficult [18]. For example, “It’s so easy to throw in the towel when you get home after a hard day’s work.” [18]
    • cross that bridge when you come to it: To deal with a problem when it occurs in the future [18]. For example, “We’ll cross that bridge when we come to it.” [19]
    • Rome wasn’t built in a day: Significant accomplishments take time [19]. For example, “Rome wasn’t built in a day, you will get better at football, but not right now, you need to keep working hard.” [20]
    • when in Rome: You should respect the customs of the place you are visiting [20]. For example, “When in Rome, you should respect their culture and you should fast on their fast day.” [20]

    Data on Idiom Usage:

    • Band 9 students use very few idioms, averaging only 1.2 idioms in their speaking tests [2]. Many did not use any, and it was rare for students to use more than four or five [2].
    • This data emphasizes that it is not the quantity of idioms, but the quality and appropriateness that matters [3].

    In summary, the use of idioms should be a strategic and deliberate choice. Do not try to force idioms into your answers or memorize lists of idioms. Instead, focus on speaking naturally and using idioms correctly within the proper context [2, 3, 5].

    IELTS Speaking Test Mistakes

    Based on the sources, here are three common mistakes that test takers make on the IELTS speaking exam:

    • Memorizing answers [1, 2]: Many students try to memorize answers to common questions, particularly in Part 1 of the test, hoping to impress the examiner [1]. This is a mistake because examiners are trained to recognize memorized responses [2-5]. When examiners suspect that a response is memorized, they will ask unusual or more difficult follow-up questions to expose the lack of genuine communication [2, 3, 5]. Relying on memorized answers also hurts coherence because the answer may not directly address the question asked [3]. This can cause test takers to get flustered when asked an unexpected question [3, 4]. The key is to avoid memorization and instead answer questions naturally, as you would in a normal conversation [2, 4, 6-11].
    • Giving overly short or overly long answers [2, 3, 12]: Some students provide very short answers that don’t give the examiner enough information [12]. This can lead to follow-up questions that cause stress and make the student feel like they are doing something wrong [12]. On the other hand, some students give overly long answers, which is often a consequence of memorization [2, 3]. An appropriate answer should be developed with details, explanations, examples, or a brief story [6, 7, 10, 12-14]. However, do not think that there is a set number of sentences or a set number of words that you should use [7, 13].
    • Trying to impress the examiner with complex language [2, 3, 8, 15-18]: Some test takers try to use very complex vocabulary, idioms, and grammar structures, even when they are not comfortable using them [3, 8]. This is a mistake because it can hinder fluency, reduce coherence, and lead to grammatical errors [3, 8, 16]. Focus on using the vocabulary and grammar that you are comfortable with, so that your answers flow naturally [10, 11, 19]. Examiners are not looking for complexity; they are looking for clear, accurate, and effective communication using natural, idiomatic English [5, 11, 17, 18, 20]. Using simple topic specific vocabulary is more important than using complex words that aren’t appropriate [17].

    In summary, avoid memorizing answers, provide answers that are sufficiently developed, and focus on clear and natural communication using familiar language. The test is designed to assess your ability to communicate effectively in English, not to see how many complex words you know [5, 10, 11, 19, 20].

    IELTS Speaking Band 7-9 Strategies

    Based on the sources, test takers who score in Bands 7-9 on the IELTS speaking test demonstrate several key strategies that distinguish them from lower-scoring candidates. Here are some of the most important strategies:

    • Natural and Conversational Tone: High-scoring candidates speak in a natural, conversational way, as if they are talking to a friend or colleague [1, 2]. They avoid sounding robotic or overly formal [1]. They don’t try to speak in a formal academic way, but speak in a normal way [3].
    • Directly Answering Questions: They answer questions directly and avoid going off-topic [2]. They do not give memorized answers [1].
    • Developing Answers: They develop their answers by adding explanations, examples, and details, rather than just giving short, one-sentence responses [2]. They answer the question and then explain why they think that, or give examples and stories from their own lives [4].
    • Using their Own Experiences: They incorporate their own experiences and lives into their answers [5].
    • Avoiding Memorization: They avoid memorized answers and instead respond genuinely to each question [1, 6]. Examiners are trained to spot memorized responses and will ask more difficult questions to expose a lack of genuine communication [7-10].
    • Not Overthinking: They don’t overthink their answers by trying to use templates, tricks, or complicated structures [8, 11]. They remove as much thinking as possible and allow themselves to answer questions naturally [12].
    • Using Simple and Accurate Language: They use simple, accurate, and appropriate language rather than trying to impress the examiner with complex vocabulary and grammar [9, 13-18]. They use the grammar and vocabulary that they are comfortable using [19]. They focus on using topic-specific vocabulary [18, 20].
    • Showing a Range of Language: They naturally use a range of grammatical structures and tenses by answering questions appropriately [14, 21]. They do not focus on using the most advanced patterns [22, 23].
    • Handling Difficult Questions: They attempt every question, even if they don’t know much about the topic, and are able to communicate in English and explain their thoughts [4, 24]. They don’t refuse to answer, laugh, or say “I don’t know” [25, 26]. They might say that they don’t know anything about a topic, but will still try to give an answer [24].
    • Exploring Different Sides of an Argument: They fully explore a topic by showing different sides of the argument and explaining which side they agree with [4].
    • Maintaining Fluency: They speak without unnatural pauses or hesitations, indicating they are not struggling to find the right words or grammar [27-29]. Pausing to think is natural, but they avoid unnatural pauses [27, 30]. Fluency means speaking without effort, not quickly [29].
    • Using Idioms Appropriately: They use idioms sparingly and correctly, only when they fit naturally into the conversation. Overusing or misusing idioms can lower their score [16, 17, 31-35]. They don’t force idioms into their answers [17]. They understand that idiomatic means natural English, not just using a lot of idioms [16, 35].
    • Understanding the Marking Criteria: They are aware of and understand the marking criteria for the speaking test, which allows them to focus on the key areas that the examiners are assessing [36].
    • Self-Assessment: They can assess their own performance by using tools that record and transcribe their speech [37, 38]. They then analyze their answers by listening back to their recordings and evaluating their performance against the official IELTS marking criteria [38]. They are able to identify their weaknesses by looking at the transcriptions of their answers [38].
    • Focusing on the Communication: They understand that the speaking test is about clear communication and not a knowledge test, intelligence test, or a vocabulary test [3, 4, 8, 15, 25].
    • Treat Each Part of the Test Separately: They treat each part of the test (Part 1, Part 2, and Part 3) separately [36]. They understand that each part has a different format and requires a different type of response [36].

    In essence, Band 7-9 candidates demonstrate a combination of strong communication skills, natural language use, a strategic approach to answering questions, and an awareness of the test’s requirements. They focus on communicating effectively and naturally using simple, clear, and accurate English. They don’t try to trick the examiners into thinking that they are better than they are. They are good enough and they show the examiners their genuine English level [15, 31].

    IELTS Speaking Part 1: Common Mistakes of Band 5-6.5

    Based on the sources, here’s how Band 5-6.5 IELTS speaking test takers typically perform in Part 1 of the speaking test:

    • Memorized Answers: A very common mistake that Band 5-6.5 students make is giving memorized answers [1]. They often memorize answers to predictable Part 1 questions about their job, studies, where they live, or where they are from [1]. This is easily spotted by examiners, who may then ask unexpected questions to expose the lack of genuine communication skills [1, 2].
    • Overly Long Answers: Many students in this band will give overly long answers, often because they are using memorized templates found online [2].
    • Off-Topic Responses: Because they are using memorized answers, students in this band may give answers that are not on topic [2]. The examiner will ask predictable questions in part one but may also throw in unusual questions to catch out those who are using memorized answers [2].
    • Formal or Robotic Delivery: Students in this band often sound very formal or robotic, as if they are talking to a robot [2]. This may be due to stress, nervousness, or the mistaken belief that the test requires a formal tone. They often think that they should speak in a formal academic way, but they should speak in a normal way [2, 3].
    • Limited Development: They do not develop their answers, often giving short or one-sentence responses that don’t give the examiner enough to go on [4, 5]. They do not add details, explanations, examples, or stories [6, 7].
    • Lack of Natural Flow: Their answers often lack a natural, conversational flow. Instead of sounding like a normal human being, they sound like an IELTS candidate [6].
    • Focus on Complexity Over Clarity: They may try to use complex language, idioms, and grammar to impress the examiner, which often results in errors and a lack of coherence [3]. They are not focusing on clearly answering the question, but on using fancy vocabulary [3].
    • Difficulty with Unexpected Questions: When examiners ask unexpected questions, students in this band often struggle to provide a coherent response. Because they rely on memorized answers, they are often caught off guard by questions they were not expecting, which demonstrates that they can’t speak English fluently [2, 8, 9].
    • Overthinking: They may overthink their answers and get lost, pausing or hesitating unnaturally [10]. They are thinking too much and not speaking naturally [11].

    In summary, Band 5-6.5 test takers in Part 1 often rely on memorized answers, provide answers that are either too short or too long, and struggle with a lack of natural, conversational flow. They often try to use complex language inappropriately. They do not demonstrate the ability to develop answers or respond effectively to unexpected questions. They do not show the same level of natural, fluent communication that higher band students do [6].

    Common IELTS Speaking Mistakes

    Based on the sources and our conversation history, here are common mistakes that hinder IELTS speaking test-takers:

    • Relying on Memorized Answers: Many test-takers attempt to memorize answers to common questions, especially in Part 1, hoping to impress the examiner [1, 2]. However, examiners are trained to identify memorized responses, and when they suspect that an answer is memorized, they will ask unexpected or more difficult follow-up questions to reveal a lack of genuine communication skills [2, 3]. This strategy undermines coherence because the answer might not directly address the question [3].
    • Providing Inappropriately Lengthy or Short Answers: Some students provide answers that are either too short or too long [2]. Short answers fail to provide the examiner with enough information and may lead to follow-up questions that can cause stress and make the test-taker feel they are doing something wrong [4]. Conversely, overly long answers, often resulting from memorization, also hinder performance [2, 3]. Answers should be developed with details, explanations, examples, or a brief story, but without adhering to a specific number of sentences or words [5-7].
    • Using Overly Formal or Robotic Delivery: Many test-takers adopt a very formal or robotic tone, as if they are talking to a robot [2, 4]. This can be due to stress, nervousness, or the mistaken belief that the test requires a formal or academic tone [2, 4, 8]. Test-takers should speak naturally, as they would in a normal conversation with a friend or colleague, not in an overly formal or academic way [2, 8].
    • Trying to Impress with Complex Language: Some test-takers focus on using complex vocabulary, idioms, and grammar structures, even when they are not comfortable with them [3, 8]. This often leads to errors, a lack of coherence, and reduced fluency [3]. It’s more important to use the vocabulary and grammar that you are comfortable with, so your answers sound natural and are easy to understand, and to use simple, topic-specific vocabulary when appropriate [9-11].
    • Failing to Develop Answers: Many test-takers give very short, one sentence answers, failing to develop their answers with explanations, details, or examples [4, 12, 13]. The examiner is looking for more than just a minimal answer to a question.
    • Not Attempting Answers: In Part 3, which involves more abstract topics, some students give up on answering difficult questions, saying “I don’t know” or laughing, indicating to the examiner that they do not deserve a higher band [12, 14]. It is important to attempt every question, even if you do not know much about the topic, because the test is about communication and demonstrating your ability to use the English language, not about your knowledge of specific subjects [15].
    • Limited Range: Students in lower bands may demonstrate a limited range in their grammar and vocabulary [14]. The examiner is looking for a range of language use.
    • Misusing or Overusing Idioms: Some students try to use idioms in every answer, whether they are appropriate or not, believing that it will raise their score [16]. However, idioms should be used sparingly and naturally; misusing or overusing them can lower your score [17, 18]. The test is looking for natural, idiomatic English, which includes, but is not limited to, idioms [18, 19].
    • Over-reliance on Feedback: Students can become overly focused on getting continuous feedback from teachers and online services, instead of taking the time to work on areas where they have received feedback [20]. It is better to take the time to improve on areas where weaknesses have been identified.

    In summary, test-takers should avoid memorization, provide well-developed answers, use a natural conversational tone, focus on clear and accurate communication with familiar language, and not be afraid to attempt to answer every question. The test is designed to assess your ability to communicate effectively in English, not to see how many complex words you know or how much you have memorized [13, 15, 21-23].

    IELTS Speaking: Band 7-9 vs. Lower Bands

    Based on the sources and our conversation history, here’s a breakdown of how Band 7-9 IELTS speaking test-takers differ from lower-scoring candidates:

    • Communication Style:
    • Band 7-9: Speak in a natural, conversational tone, as if talking to a friend or colleague. They avoid sounding robotic or overly formal. They do not speak in an overly formal or academic way, but in a normal way [1, 2].
    • Lower Bands: May sound robotic or overly formal [1].
    • Answering Questions:
    • Band 7-9: Directly answer the questions and avoid going off-topic [3]. They will answer the question directly, then add explanations, examples or a story [3, 4].
    • Lower Bands: May give memorized, overly long or off-topic responses [1, 5, 6].
    • Developing Answers:
    • Band 7-9: Develop their answers with explanations, examples, and details, moving beyond short, one-sentence answers [3, 7]. They use their own life and experiences in their answers [8]. They show both sides of an argument [4, 9].
    • Lower Bands: Give short, undeveloped, one-sentence answers, often lacking detail [10, 11].
    • Approach to Memorization:
    • Band 7-9: Avoid memorized answers and respond genuinely to each question [1, 5, 6].
    • Lower Bands: Often rely on memorized answers, which are easily detected by examiners [1, 5].
    • Use of Language:
    • Band 7-9: Use simple, accurate, and appropriate language, focusing on clear communication. They use topic-specific vocabulary [12, 13]. They use the grammar and vocabulary that they are comfortable using, and don’t try to impress the examiner with complex language [14, 15]. They naturally use a range of grammar structures and tenses by answering questions appropriately and they don’t focus on using the most advanced patterns [16, 17].
    • Lower Bands: May try to impress with overly complex language, idioms, or grammar, which often leads to errors and reduced fluency [18]. They may also try to use grammar and vocabulary that is beyond their level [14]. They often fail to use topic-specific vocabulary [12].
    • Handling Difficult Questions:
    • Band 7-9: Attempt every question, even if they don’t know much about the topic, demonstrating an ability to communicate in English [4, 9]. They will still try to give an answer even if they don’t know about the topic [4, 19].
    • Lower Bands: May refuse to answer, laugh, or say “I don’t know” when faced with difficult questions [16].
    • Fluency and Coherence:
    • Band 7-9: Speak without unnatural pauses or hesitations, demonstrating a natural flow of speech [2, 20, 21]. They demonstrate a natural flow of speech, while still being able to pause naturally when thinking [2, 21]. They stick to the topic and develop their answers appropriately [21, 22].
    • Lower Bands: May have unnatural pauses, hesitations, and difficulty with coherence [11].
    • Use of Idioms:
    • Band 7-9: Use idioms sparingly and correctly, only when they fit naturally. They understand that idiomatic means natural English, not just using a lot of idioms [23, 24].
    • Lower Bands: May overuse or misuse idioms in an attempt to impress the examiner [25, 26].
    • Understanding of the Test:
    • Band 7-9: Understand that it is a communication test and not a knowledge or intelligence test [4, 22]. They also understand that each part of the test has a different format and requires a different type of response, so they treat each part of the test separately [27]. They also understand the marking criteria [27].
    • Lower Bands: May not understand the test’s requirements and try to use memorization, tricks or templates [1, 28].
    • Self-Assessment:
    • Band 7-9: Can assess their own performance by recording, transcribing, and analyzing their speech, and evaluating their performance against the official IELTS marking criteria [29, 30]. They are able to identify their weaknesses by looking at transcriptions of their answers [30].
    • Lower Bands: May not understand that self-assessment can improve their performance [31].

    In essence, Band 7-9 candidates focus on genuine communication, using natural language and simple, accurate vocabulary and grammar to clearly answer questions, and developing those answers fully. They demonstrate a natural flow of speech and a range of vocabulary and grammar use. They are comfortable with their level of English and don’t try to pretend to be better than they are [32]. Lower-scoring candidates, on the other hand, often rely on memorization, over-complicate their language, and fail to develop their answers effectively, thereby demonstrating a lack of genuine communication skills.

    Detecting Memorized IELTS Answers

    Based on the sources and our conversation history, here’s how IELTS examiners identify memorized answers:

    • Unnatural Delivery: Examiners can spot memorized answers through unnatural, robotic, or overly formal delivery [1, 2]. Genuine communication flows naturally, whereas memorized responses often sound stiff and rehearsed [2, 3]. The test taker may sound like they are talking to a robot rather than a normal human being [2].
    • Inappropriate Length: Memorized answers are often either too long or too short for the question being asked [1, 2]. An answer that is excessively detailed for a simple question raises suspicion, as it suggests the test-taker is reciting a prepared script [2, 4]. Also, when test takers give short, undeveloped answers, this may also suggest that they are relying on memorization or a template [1, 5].
    • Off-Topic or Incoherent Responses: Memorized answers often fail to directly address the question asked, because the test taker is focusing on reciting a prepared answer rather than responding naturally to the question [2, 4]. The test taker may also launch into a prepared response even when it is not appropriate for the question asked [4].
    • Lack of Spontaneity: Examiners can identify memorized responses when test takers struggle to answer follow-up or unexpected questions [1, 4]. If a test taker gives a prepared answer to a common question and then falters or becomes incoherent when asked a related but unexpected question, it is obvious that they were relying on memorization [4, 6].
    • Inability to Adapt: Test-takers using memorized answers struggle to adapt their language and ideas to the specific questions asked [4, 6]. They tend to use the same vocabulary and grammatical structures regardless of the context, which is unnatural in a genuine conversation. This shows a lack of flexibility and an inability to communicate effectively in English [6, 7].
    • Overuse of Complex Language: Test-takers may insert complex vocabulary or idioms inappropriately in an attempt to make their answers sound impressive, rather than focusing on clear communication and accuracy [4, 6, 8]. Examiners notice when the test-taker focuses on using “big words” rather than answering the question [8]. When test-takers use fancy vocabulary that they are not comfortable using, this also suggests memorization [4, 9].
    • Inconsistent Performance: If an examiner suspects that a test-taker is using memorized answers for common questions, they will ask more difficult questions on unusual topics to test the candidate’s genuine communication skills [6, 10]. Examiners know that test takers’ real speaking ability will be revealed when they are asked unanticipated questions, so they will base their score on these responses, not on memorized responses to common questions [6].
    • Mismatch with Real Communication: IELTS is a communication test and examiners are trained to identify and evaluate natural communication skills [6, 7]. Memorized answers do not demonstrate authentic communication and will not be evaluated as such [7].

    In summary, IELTS examiners use several methods to detect memorized responses, including analyzing the test-taker’s delivery, coherence, spontaneity, adaptability, and vocabulary. Examiners are trained to recognize a lack of natural communication, so they will focus on evaluating a test-taker’s real level of English, rather than their ability to memorize.

    IELTS Speaking Part 1: Common Mistakes

    Based on the sources and our conversation history, here are the common mistakes in Part 1 of the IELTS speaking test that lower scores:

    • Memorized Answers: Many candidates memorize answers to common Part 1 questions like “Tell me about your job,” or “Where are you from?” [1]. Examiners are trained to spot these answers [2], and they will lower a test taker’s score [1]. Relying on memorized responses instead of speaking naturally is a major pitfall [1, 3, 4]. Examiners can easily identify these answers and will ask more difficult questions to assess a test-taker’s real English level [2, 3].
    • Overly Long Answers: Students often give excessively long answers, which are frequently associated with memorized responses [5]. Part 1 questions don’t require lengthy responses; a natural, conversational tone with a reasonable amount of detail is more appropriate [5].
    • Off-Topic Responses: Some test takers might stray from the topic or fail to answer the question directly, because they are focusing on reciting a prepared response [3, 5, 6]. Answers should be relevant to the question asked and should not wander off into irrelevant details [5].
    • Robotic or Overly Formal Delivery: Some candidates speak in a very formal or robotic manner [5]. This often stems from stress or the misconception that the test requires a formal style of speaking [5]. Speaking unnaturally will lower a test-taker’s score because it does not demonstrate genuine communication skills. A natural, conversational tone is more appropriate [5, 7].
    • Too Short Answers: Giving very short, one-sentence answers is another common mistake [8]. Examiners need enough information to assess a test taker’s language ability. Giving only very brief answers does not allow them to do this effectively [3, 8].
    • Trying to Impress the Examiner: Some test takers try too hard to impress the examiner by using overly complex vocabulary or grammar [7]. This can lead to mistakes and a lack of coherence [7]. It is better to focus on clear, accurate communication than trying to use very fancy or high-level language [3, 9-12].
    • Failing to Develop Answers: Merely answering a question without providing any explanation, example, or detail is not sufficient for higher scores [10, 13]. It’s important to add some extra detail or an example to answers to fully develop them [13].
    • Not Answering Naturally: Students should not answer in a formulaic way [10]. Thinking of answers in a very structured way, such as always including an explanation and an example is unnatural [10]. It is better to speak naturally, as if you were speaking to a friend, and develop answers in a natural way [10, 13].
    • Limited Range: Examiners are testing the test taker’s range of grammar and vocabulary, and a failure to respond to a question that would test that range is a clear indication to an examiner that the test-taker has a limited range [14].
    • Not Attempting Answers: Some test takers may not attempt to answer questions, or just say “I don’t know,” which is very obviously an indication to the examiner that a test-taker should receive a lower band [4, 14].

    In summary, lower scores in Part 1 often result from a lack of natural communication, relying on memorized responses, failing to develop answers, and trying too hard to impress the examiner with overly complex language. It is better to speak naturally and answer the questions in a clear, accurate, and well-developed manner [3, 10].

    IELTS Speaking Part 2: Common Mistakes

    Based on the sources and our conversation history, here are some common mistakes IELTS candidates make in Part 2 of the speaking test:

    • Rigidly Sticking to Bullet Points: Candidates often treat the bullet points on the cue card as a rigid structure, reading them one by one without any flexibility or development. This approach often results in a disjointed and unnatural monologue, where the candidate simply addresses each point in isolation without connecting them into a cohesive narrative [1]. They may also run out of things to say because the bullet points do not give them enough to go on [2].
    • Running Out of Ideas: Because candidates rigidly stick to the bullet points, they often run out of ideas, which can cause them to stop speaking before the two minutes are up. Candidates need to develop their ideas and expand on each bullet point to avoid this problem. [2]
    • Using Memorized Templates: Many students rely on memorized templates, such as the “past, present, future” (PPF) structure, to organize their answers. This approach can make responses sound unnatural because it forces the test taker to think about which tense to use, rather than responding to the cue card in a genuine way [2].
    • Failing to Speak for the Full Two Minutes: Candidates must speak until the examiner stops them, usually around the 2-minute mark, but some candidates stop talking much earlier, which can affect their score [2]. It’s crucial to develop the answer enough to speak for the required duration.
    • Not Using Personal Experiences: Candidates may not use their own personal experiences and real stories, which can make it more difficult to speak naturally [3]. Using real-life examples makes it easier to speak fluently and use appropriate vocabulary and grammar [3].
    • Trying to Use Complex Language: Candidates may try to use very complicated vocabulary or grammar, which can lead to errors and a loss of fluency, or a robotic delivery [4]. It is better to use language that you are comfortable with, rather than attempting to use language beyond your level [5].
    • Not Developing Answers: Candidates may fail to expand on the bullet points with explanations, examples, or stories, thereby producing an undeveloped and unconvincing monologue. It is important to fully develop answers by explaining ideas and giving examples or details [6].
    • Not Understanding the Purpose of Part 2: Part 2 is a monologue, where the examiner is listening to assess a test-taker’s fluency, pronunciation, grammar, and vocabulary, and whether the candidate can answer the question [1]. It is important to focus on communication, and not just simply presenting a series of ideas.
    • Focusing too Much on Structure: Candidates should not get bogged down by the structure of the bullet points, but rather focus on answering the question by speaking like a normal human being [1].

    In summary, candidates often struggle in Part 2 due to a rigid approach to the bullet points, reliance on memorized structures, a lack of development, and a failure to use their own experiences to give a natural and fluent monologue. It is better to be flexible with the cue card, and give a genuine response based on personal experience.

    The IELTS Speaking “Birthday Cake” Analogy

    The “birthday cake analogy,” as described in the sources, is a method for understanding how to approach vocabulary use in the IELTS speaking test [1]. It emphasizes using simple, everyday language as a foundation, with more complex vocabulary sprinkled in sparingly, rather than focusing on using complex vocabulary as the basis of all responses [1].

    Here’s a breakdown of the analogy:

    • The Cake: The birthday cake represents a candidate’s overall language use in the IELTS speaking test [1].
    • Basic Ingredients: The bulk of the cake is made up of basic ingredients like milk, sugar, flour, water, and butter [1]. These represent simple, everyday words that should form the majority (97-98%) of a candidate’s vocabulary use [1]. Just as these simple ingredients are the foundation of a good cake, basic, common vocabulary should be the foundation of your English in the speaking test [1].
    • Sprinkles: The sprinkles on top of the cake represent the higher-level words, idioms, phrasal verbs, and colloquialisms that are used to make the cake look fancy [1]. These more complex words and expressions should be used sparingly and appropriately, like the sprinkles on a cake [1]. They add some flair and complexity but are not the core of the response [1]. These elements should be sprinkled in, not used constantly in every sentence, and should be used accurately and appropriately [1, 2].

    The analogy highlights that, like a birthday cake, IELTS speaking is not about using complex language all the time, but about using a solid foundation of simple, accurate language with some well-chosen, higher-level words and expressions [1, 2]. A candidate’s score will be lowered if they try to overuse complex language or idioms without a solid foundation [2].

    Here are some key points of the analogy:

    • Focus on Natural Language: The analogy emphasizes that the main goal is to sound natural and idiomatic [1].
    • Use Simple Words Effectively: Most of the words used should be simple, everyday words [1].
    • Sprinkle in Complex Vocabulary: Candidates should “sprinkle” in more complex words and phrases, but not force them in [1, 2]. These should be used correctly and appropriately [2].
    • Avoid Overcomplication: Overusing complex vocabulary can make communication less clear and increase errors [1, 2]. Candidates should not try to use high-level vocabulary if they are not comfortable using it, or if it does not fit the context of the conversation [2].
    • Prioritize Accuracy and Fluency: It’s more important to use vocabulary accurately and speak fluently than it is to use complex or unusual words inappropriately [3-5]. If you are trying too hard to use complex language, it will negatively affect your fluency [4].
    • Don’t Memorize Lists of Words or Phrases: Candidates should learn to use vocabulary through everyday use and practice, rather than memorizing lists and inserting them inappropriately [2]. It is better to use words that you know and can use accurately than to try to force in vocabulary that you do not fully understand [2].
    • Understanding Over Memorization: The key to language is use. Candidates should seek to understand vocabulary so they can use it naturally, rather than merely memorizing it [2].

    In essence, the birthday cake analogy is a reminder to prioritize clear, accurate, and natural communication over trying to use overly complex vocabulary. The emphasis should be on using simple language well, with higher-level vocabulary sprinkled in where appropriate [1, 2]. The key is to use vocabulary naturally and correctly, not to force high-level words into every sentence [2].

    IELTS Speaking Test Traps and How to Avoid Them

    Based on the sources, here are the “traps” that IELTS examiners set for test takers in the speaking test, along with how to avoid them:

    • Unusual Questions in Part 1: Examiners often start with predictable questions about a test taker’s home, work, or hometown, but they will also ask unusual questions that are not expected [1-3]. This is to catch out test takers who rely on memorized answers, because those test takers will be unable to answer unusual questions. The trap is that examiners will assess your real English ability based on how you respond to unexpected questions, rather than on your prepared answers [3]. To avoid this, do not memorize answers. Instead, be prepared to answer any question naturally, and avoid falling back on prepared answers [3].
    • Increasingly Difficult Questions in Part 3: If examiners believe a test taker is capable of achieving a higher band, they will ask increasingly difficult and abstract questions in Part 3 [4-6]. The trap is that some test takers will become stressed or tired by the end of the test and will give up on attempting an answer, which indicates to the examiner that the candidate is not capable of achieving a higher score [5, 6]. To avoid this, always attempt to answer the questions, even if you are not familiar with the topic. It is better to communicate in English even if you do not know anything about the topic than to give up [6-8].
    • Topic-Specific Vocabulary: Examiners test a range of topics to assess a test taker’s vocabulary [8, 9]. The trap is that many students memorize lists of “band 9 words” and attempt to use these words in every answer, but examiners are more impressed by simple, topic-specific vocabulary than by complex words that do not fit the context [8, 9]. To avoid this, focus on using simple, accurate words that relate to the specific topic, rather than trying to use high-level words in every answer [9]. This is part of the “birthday cake” analogy, where you use a foundation of simple, common language with more complex language added as “sprinkles”.
    • Over-reliance on Memorized Answers and Templates: Test-takers who rely on memorized answers for common questions in Part 1, or try to use memorized templates in Parts 2 and 3 will be caught out by the examiner [1, 2, 10, 11]. Examiners are trained to spot these, and will ask more challenging questions to evaluate a test-taker’s real English ability. A test taker who uses a memorized template or answer is not engaging in genuine communication [11, 12]. To avoid this, focus on speaking naturally and honestly about your own experiences, and don’t rely on pre-prepared responses or templates [1, 12, 13].
    • Focusing on Tricks Instead of Genuine Communication: Many test takers focus on “tricks” and “hacks” that they find online, instead of genuine communication skills, and this will hurt their performance [14-16]. The “trap” is that these tricks are not effective, and are often used by people who are not confident in their real level of English [9, 14, 16]. To avoid this, focus on improving your genuine English ability, rather than trying to use tricks to “fool” the examiner.
    • Believing that a High Score Requires Complex Language: Many test takers mistakenly believe that using complex grammar and vocabulary is necessary to get a higher score, but this often leads to errors [17, 18]. The trap is that the focus on using complex language will take away from accuracy, fluency, and coherence [11, 17, 18]. To avoid this, prioritize accuracy and fluency using the language that you already know, and do not focus on using grammar and vocabulary that are beyond your level [14, 18-20].
    • Trying to Memorize Sentence Patterns: Many test takers attempt to memorize and use high level sentence patterns, but they should focus on answering the question clearly [15]. A test-taker may also attempt to use the high level sentence patterns incorrectly, which will lower their score [15]. The trap is that a test taker will not be able to communicate clearly if they are focused on using memorized sentence patterns, rather than answering the question. To avoid this, focus on communicating clearly, and use simple, direct language when possible, and always focus on answering the question [15, 21].
    • Not Understanding the Marking Criteria: Some test takers do not understand how the speaking test is scored, and they do not use the test questions to learn more about how to use the marking criteria [22]. The trap here is that the test takers are unable to identify their own strengths and weaknesses, and are not aware of the areas of the test that they need to improve. To avoid this, use practice questions to evaluate your performance based on the marking criteria, rather than merely practicing a lot of questions [22].
    • Seeking too much feedback: It is good to get feedback, but a test taker will not improve if they simply continue to do mock speaking tests after they get feedback, without focusing on improving their weaknesses. The trap here is that test-takers can end up relying too much on feedback sessions, instead of working on improving their weaknesses. To avoid this, focus on improving the areas that the feedback has indicated are your weaknesses. Do not simply continue to take mock speaking tests without improving the areas that you need to improve [23, 24].

    In essence, the “traps” in the IELTS speaking test are designed to identify candidates who lack genuine communication skills and who are trying to “cheat” the system, often due to lack of confidence [9, 16]. To avoid these traps, it’s crucial to focus on developing your actual English skills, speaking naturally, answering questions directly and fully, and demonstrating your ability to communicate effectively in a range of situations [16]. The key is not to try and trick the examiner, but to show them your real English ability by demonstrating fluency, coherence, pronunciation, and a good range of grammar and vocabulary [16, 25].

    IELTS Speaking Vocabulary: Accuracy, Range, and Idioms

    Vocabulary in the IELTS speaking test is assessed based on both accuracy and range [1]. Examiners are not looking for test takers to use complex words all the time. Instead, they are looking for test takers who can communicate effectively using appropriate and accurate vocabulary [1-3]. Here’s how the sources describe the assessment of vocabulary:

    • Accuracy: This refers to whether you use words correctly. Do you use words precisely and appropriately, or are you making errors, such as using the wrong word or using a word incorrectly [1]? For example, you could say “This is a phone,” which is correct, or “This is an electronic device,” which is also correct, but you would not say, “This is a sitting device” when referring to a chair [1]. Using words incorrectly will lower your score [3, 4].
    • Range: This refers to the variety of words you can use to discuss different topics. Examiners want to see that you can use topic-specific vocabulary, which refers to words and phrases related to a specific topic [1, 5]. For example, if you are discussing phones, you should be able to use words like “screen,” “resolution,” or “memory.” If you are discussing pens, you should be able to use the word “ink” [1].
    • Topic-Specific Vocabulary: Examiners are trained to ask about a range of topics to assess if you can use appropriate vocabulary for various situations [5]. They are more impressed with simple, topic-specific words than with complex words that do not fit the context [3, 5]. For example, you would not use the word “gigabytes” when talking about pens because that is a word used to describe the memory of a phone [1].
    • Idiomatic Language: Examiners listen for “idiomatic expressions,” which include not only idioms, but also phrasal verbs, informal words, and colloquialisms [3]. This refers to expressions that are natural and correct, as a native English speaker would use them [3]. However, it is important to understand that:
    • Idioms are not required to get a good score. Some test takers use no idioms at all and receive a high score [6].
    • Using idioms incorrectly will lower your score. Do not try to use an idiom if you are not sure how to use it [7, 8]. If you use an idiom incorrectly, it will indicate to the examiner that your level of English is not very high [9]. For example, the idiom is “let the cat out of the bag,” not “let cut out of bag” [7]. Another example is to say “it’s a piece of cake” rather than “it’s piece of cake” [4].
    • Do not memorize idioms and try to force them into every answer, because this will lead to using them inappropriately [8].
    • The “Birthday Cake Analogy”: This analogy emphasizes that you should focus on using simple, everyday words as your base vocabulary, and then add more complex words “like sprinkles” when appropriate [3].
    • Focus on Simple Words: The majority (97-98%) of the words that you use should be simple, everyday words [3]. You should be comfortable using these simple words [8].
    • Sprinkle in Complex Words: Higher-level vocabulary, idioms, and phrasal verbs can be added like “sprinkles” on a cake, but these should be used sparingly, appropriately, and accurately [3, 8].
    • Do not prioritize vocabulary over other aspects of speaking: Do not focus too much on trying to use complex vocabulary, because if you are thinking too much about vocabulary, it will affect your fluency and accuracy [10-12].

    In summary, to get a high score in vocabulary, you should focus on using words accurately, using topic-specific vocabulary, and using a wide range of vocabulary naturally, rather than using complex vocabulary in every sentence or trying to memorize lists of words [3, 8, 12]. You should avoid overcomplicating your answers, and instead make sure that you use a good foundation of simple and accurate vocabulary, and only sprinkle in more complex language if you are comfortable using it correctly [3, 11].

    The Original Text

    you’ve just found the Ultimate Guide to I speaking this is the longest most detailed guide to I speaking you’ll find anywhere on the Internet it’s going to help you understand things about the format of the test how you can improve your speaking at home for free and give you the same strategies thousands of my students have used to get a band nine on the speaking test not only that we’re also going to give you the same grammar and vocabulary that we’ve only ever shared with our bond n VIP students before and then at the end of the video we’re going to do something very very special we’re going to share a mock test that we’ve never shared before it’s from a student who you might have seen before where she got a band8 we’ve showed her lots of the things included in this video and then we invited her back to our studio to see if she could improve from a band eight to a band nine but let’s start by helping you understand the three different parts of the speaking test and share with you those strategies that our band n students have used to succeed so without further ado let’s jump into it so let’s start off by going through the three different parts of the I speaking test and also tell you the characteristics of a band 5 to 6.5 student versus a band 7 eight or nine student the vast majority of the candidates that the examiner will see will be in and around these scores these are the average scores and vast majority of examiners are seeing things like and these students do very particular things that are very easy for the examiners to spot they are very very different from band seven eight and nine students so what we’re going to do is first of all go through each part and tell you what these things are that these students do and then show you one of our students and you can decide whether they are doing these things here or these things so part one normally the easiest part but it is where a lot of students mess up and they do a few things that are very avoidable the most common thing that examiners hear and see is a memorized answer the reason why they hear so many memorized answers is in part one because these are quite predictable questions like tell me about your job your studies where you live where you’re from a lot of students will memorize answers in the hope to impress The Examiner but it’s very very easy to spot these and it actually lowers your score related to that are very long answers and these two are related so often students will go online they’ll go on to YouTube they’ll go on to websites that have these kind of template answers and often those are just way way too long you don’t have to give very long answers to a question like do you work or do you study or tell me about where you live imagine you are in a normal situ situation imagine you are meeting someone for the first time and they say where are you from you wouldn’t talk for 20 minutes also sometimes these are off topic so again these three are kind of related because the examiner will ask you quite predictable questions in part one but then if they think that you have memorized answers what they’ll do is they’re a bit sneaky they will throw in very unusual questions like how often do you wear hats do you like hats when was the last time you had a birthday cake these are all questions that you’re not expecting and it’s really to catch out people who are just relying on memorized answers and that is a really big sign to The Examiner that you don’t know what you’re doing and you’ve just memorized a bunch of stuff the other thing that is quite surprising for many people is that they sound very formal or another way to say this would be they sound robotic they sound like you’re talking to a robot now this could be because of stress this could be because of nerves but it also could be that you have just been taught the wrong way often teachers with very little experience and students who don’t know the test very well think this is a big important test this is a very formal occasion I should speak like this hello my name is Chris you do not need to do that I’m going to show you uh some answers from my students and I want you to think about do they do any of these things or do they do other things and then we’ll talk about the main characteristics of a band 7 eight or nine students to thank you for watching this video I want to give you a free course that has helped thousands of students improve their I speaking score what it’s going to do is take you through every single part of the test and give you strategies for part one part two and part three and also allow you to practice at home for free and get feedback to sign up for that for free all you have to do is just click the link in the description thanks very much and let’s get back to the video do you ever miss being in high school um I do actually because um I started working very early I did not get to experience the University or college so um the memories that I have or the friends I have is from high school and I do think about times where we could just go back and have a reunion and like have that moment again do you have any animals in your home as pets yes I have two dogs they’re both from the shelter the animal shelter the rescues um yeah I’ve always had pets our family really likes keeping animals around so you can probably hear there that it didn’t sound very memorized it wasn’t very long they stayed on topic and it sounded like a normal conversation especially band n students it doesn’t seem like you’re talking to an i candidate it feels like you’re talking to a friend or talking to a colleague they will also always answer the question directly so if you ask them do you like Huts it’ll be yes I like Huts if you ask them what’s your favorite flavor of birthday cake they will say vanilla or chocolate even though they might have never thought about that before they will still have enough English and enough ability to answer any question now let’s talk about seasons of the Year what’s your favorite season of the year well um I love anytime when the Sun starts to come out so around spring or early summer before it gets too hot you know I just love a little bit of vitamin D and it makes me happier as well so that is um definitely better than the winter what do you do when it gets too hot in the summer hide I don’t to also you know go into any kind of buildings which air conditioning and I have to fan on every night when it’s really hot so yeah when it gets really hot in the summer you know I really need a lot of like fan and you know kind of just anything I can hold with me when I’m go out as well now none of those answers were very long but they did develop their answers so there’s enough development normally what they do is they will directly answer the question and then they might add in some explanation an example maybe a little story maybe a little bit of extra detail again there’s no set number of sentences you shouldn’t go into the exam thinking I must use two sentences or three sentences or I must not go over three or four sentences because that’s just too much thinking we want to remove as much thinking as possible and just allow you to answer questions naturally a good little tip is if you are confused about this imagine you’re starting a new job and you’re meeting your colleague for the first time and they say to you you know where do you live you probably wouldn’t just say London like because that’s a little bit rude to be honest um it doesn’t really give people a lot to go on you might say oh I’ve just moved to London I’ve actually um just moved to an area called Wandsworth it’s really nice it’s close to the river so you can see there that I didn’t really think about how many sentences to use there or whether I should use an example or whether an explan I just thought how do I sound like a normal human being okay so let’s move on to part two of the speaking test part two you will get a q card like this one and you will have one minute to prepare your answer and then you will be asked to speak for up to 2 minutes and this is slightly different from part one and part three because this is a monologue The Examiner isn’t asking you questions The Examiner isn’t interacting with you the examiner is just sitting back and listening to you it’s a really important part for two reasons number one it’s very unusual to speak for up to 2 minutes in a foreign language often this is the first time anyone has ever done this so it can be quite daunting and the second reason is more important because the reason I think they put this part in here is because it gives the examiner a real chance to just focus on what you’re saying focus on your fluency your pronunciation are you answering the question your grammar your vocabul so it’s really important that you do well and you avoid these things that average students do so the first one might be quite surprising they rigidly stick to bullet points so it’s important that you understand the bullet points there are there to help you they’re not there to hinder you so what average students normally do is they will just read bullet point number one then oh what do I say about bullet point number two I get to bullet point number three I don’t know what to say uh uh uh uh let’s go on to bullet point number four and then before they know it they have run out of things to say and they’re only 30 seconds in which is going to lower your score you must speak until the examiner stops you in and around the 2 minute Mark B 78 and N students do something very very different which we’ll talk about in a second we’ve already mentioned this they often run out of ideas this is because they’re just sticking to bullet point 1 2 3 4 doesn’t really give them enough to go on and they just stop talking and I often hear students trying to make things way too complicated by using some kind of trick or template that they’ve memorized for example a very popular one is ppf past present future the intention is to make things easier for you but it can end up making things more complicated because it’s a very unnatural way to answer any question when have you ever been in a coffee shop and someone has asked you a question and you think hm I’m going to talk about the past then I’m going to talk about the present and then maybe compare the present with the past and then talk about the future you’re just doing way too much thinking and often students will get questions that they don’t know what they’re going to do in the future or the past is just not applicable at all so this can make things worse and ban 78 and N students don’t use this at all what do they do let’s listen to one and think about what they do differently the first time I met a new friend so I’m going to go way back it was my first year of school kindergarten and I met a girl named Aman prit k um she we were about I think we just turned four years old uh we met obviously in kindergarten um first year of school uh what I liked about her when I first first saw her I mean we were sitting together with the teacher made us sit next to each other and um she had this long hair and it was like sectioned into two parts and it was just braided all the way down and she had the cutest face I’ve ever seen she had this little fluffy marshmallow like face I guess that’s all it takes when you’re a kid to want to be friends with somebody um and then I tried to so there’s like this little thing that kids do where they put their thumb out to show other kids that I want to be your friend um and then if you don’t want to be friends with them you do this it’s like a silly little thing so I did this to her I put my thumb out to say hey do you want to be friends and she was like this and I was heartbroken I was like how can she know want to be my friend um and then I saw her again the next day um and the day the next day after that and the day after that and then eventually we ended up becoming best friends she she did it back to me obviously at some point she was my first best friend that I ever had in life she was from Punjab which is a part of India um and her mom used to make the most amazing it’s called parata it’s like this stuffed bread it’s like they put uh potato and spices into like um into a flatbread and my mom used to make something called CRA which is sweet semolina situation that’s the end of the two minutes okay so again this was very natural the student just was able to speak naturally the conversation flowed and they were able to speak quite fluently and easily for up to 2 minutes how did they do that well the first thing that they did was they just focused on the main topic again if we look at at the Q card you will have the bullet points here but at the top this is the main topic by just focusing on the main topic this gives you a lot more freedom to speak fluently and naturally rather than trying to do bullet point 1 2 3 4 so again it sounds like a natural conversation because again they’re not using any tricks any memorized structures or anything like that it is again like talking to someone in a coffee shop up saying let’s talk about this or what do you think about this now you might be thinking well should we not use the bullet points well they do use the bullet points but they only use them when it’s appropriate to help them so they use the bullet points to help them speak naturally so what does that mean well if they see bullet point number one and they think I can easily talk about that they talk about that but if they look at bullet point number two and think I don’t really know about that I don’t feel comfortable talking about that don’t talk about that and then they can talk maybe about bullet point number three and bullet point number four but they can add other things below the bullet points other things related to that main topic all they’re doing is just picking things that make it easy for them to speak like a human being naturally to The Examiner now let’s move on to part three part three in my opinion is the most challenging part because it requires the student to do a few special things that most students are not used to doing so let’s look at part three for these band five 6.5 students so the biggest difference between part one and part three is part one is just as I’ve said every day getting to know you chitchat Small Talk type questions part three are more academic style questions it doesn’t matter if you’re doing academic or general training the reason why I say they’re more academic style questions is they’re asking asking you about more abstract topics so in part one they might say something like do you use public transport that is a question about you it’s impossible to get it wrong but in part three they might say something like should governments give citizens public transport for free or what are the advantages and disadvantages of using a private car versus buses for example these are not really about you you can talk about you but they’re more abstract type questions that require a far more developed answer so what band five 6 6.5 students are doing is they’re often giving very short answers the examiner is not really interested in the answer to the question this is not a knowledge test this is not an IQ test they are testing your ability to communicate and part of communication is developing your answer and we’ll talk about how about eight nine students do that in part three and a second you’ll often hear these students saying things like I don’t know anything about that topic or that was a very very difficult question and they will often just not attempt an answer at all now let me tell you a little secret about I examiners on test day for the speaking test if they think you’re good they will ask you more and more difficult questions because they have to separate up the bound sevens from the bound eights from the bound nines so they’re going to ask you increasingly difficult questions to see if you can cope with it if you don’t answer the question or you just do something like I’ve seen students laugh because they’re probably nervous I’ve seen students just go I don’t know you are basically telling the examiner I don’t deserve one of these higher bands I am one of these lower band students it’s also very very obvious to The Examiner that you want the exam to be over it is a very tiring day it is a very stressful situation The Examiner is just throwing lots of difficult questions at you you’ve been speak speaking in a foreign language for 15 minutes maybe at this stage you just want it to be over what students will do is they will just give very short answers because your brain is screaming at you just give the examiner short answers and you can leave and this ordeal can be over and it’s also very obvious to The Examiner that your range is limited what do I mean by range well the examiner will be thinking about your range of grammar and your range of vocabulary this is an opportunity for them to ask you about lots of different topics and also asking you questions that require more complex grammar structures now they’re not doing this to be mean it’s just the best way to test someone’s language level so when they ask you about a more difficult topic again students won’t be able to answer the question or they will just refuse to answer the question and then they’ll ask you maybe a question that requires a more difficult tense or more difficult grammar structure to answer it effective ly and you’re not able to do that you’re just using those basic structures let how listen to a few answers from our VIP students and think about whether they do these things or whether they do things differently is it easy to predict the weather in your country um I suppose it is yeah uh because like I said earlier uh some parts of India the weather like cannot the temperature doesn’t go over a certain uh degrees but but wherein some parts are really hot and humid throughout the year so I think it’s quite easy to predict but when it comes to um rain or monsoon season it’s a bit hard like last this year sorry a few months ago um in the north of India it was raining heavily and the rain did not stop for um I’d say two weeks so that was not predictable why do you think some people fail in some careers I think one of the main drivers is I think for for people is money and when you do anything solely because of money then it will never work and the reason people fail I think the biggest reason is because they have fail to align the identity with their work because we spend a third of Our Lives you know in work so a very big proportion of it you know needs to feel fulfilled and it can only be fulfilled if you’re you understand understand you know what what you like authentically inside you know and and then you know go into a career but then the reality is that most people then you know jump in and figure it out explore and then will work it out you know in hindsight I guess that’s what life’s about so as you can probably hear they attempt every question doesn’t matter if they’re thrown a difficult question as you you heard there some of the questions were extremely difficult and it was obvious that the student was not an expert on that topic but again it’s not an IQ test it’s not a Knowledge Test best thing that you can do even if you know nothing about that topic is attempt some kind of an answer because you’re explaining there to the examiner okay I don’t know about this topic but my English is good enough I can communicate in English and it is an English communication test and there was lots of development so they answered the question but they also explained why they thought that or why other people thought that they might have thrown in an example or a story related to their life and what you often hear about seven eight and nine students doing is showing the other side of the argument they might say well some people think this but other people think this and I agree with this person or I agree with that person so they’re fully exploring that topic they’re not just saying I think this and they have no problem with range again it is the intention of the examiner to test your language ability the best way that they can do that is to throw these more complex topics that require a broader range of grammar a broader range of vocabulary and as you can hear b seven eight and N students just naturally answer those questions so now you know what to expect in part one part two and part three and that was just a general overview of the difference between lower level students and higher level students now let’s look at some very specific common mistakes let’s get into even more detail so that you can really understand what not to do and then improve your score to about 78 and N so here are some common mistakes okay so what we’re going to do is talk about these very very briefly then I’m going to get my glamorous assistant here to ask me a question I haven’t prepared any answers or anything like that I wanted to be as As Natural as possible and I will pretend to be a student who is doing one of these common mistakes in the comments what I want you to tell me is which of these am I doing my favorite website is is Advantage because it helps me with my is scores okay so that’s the first one uh what do you think would be the problem with that one thank you for making it this far in the video I want to give you 10% off our VIP course I VIP course is the most successful ISS course in the world that is a fact because we have more band seven eight and nine success stories than any other I course in the entire world we do that by simplifying the whole is process supporting you with some of the best is teachers in the world and being with you every step of the way until you get the score that you need all you have to do is just look down in the descript description just click that and you can sign up if you have any questions about the VIP course always feel free to get in touch with us we answer 100% of the questions that we get hope that you become a VIP if not enjoy the rest of this free video Justin ask me what’s my favorite website and I said my favorite website is I Advantage because it helps me with my I scores which of these things do you think is the problem in the comments let me [Music] know okay so it’s pretty obvious it’s too short but why is that a problem so I mean the grammar was fine the vocabulary was fine the fluency was fine pronunciation was fine why is that a problem well you’re not really giving the examiner enough to go on if you give a really really really short answer to a question um and they’re going to be they might ask you follow-up questions like why or can you you know asking you to develop your answer a little bit more that might put you off it might be like oh is am I am I doing something wrong it’ll cause extra stress you want to be developing your answer a little bit more than that now for part one you don’t have to develop it much more than that but just giving one a one sentence answer wouldn’t really be enough and you’d have to add a little bit more detail or an explanation or example or something like that just to develop it a little bit more this is going to be more difficult than I thought I thought this was going to be really easy but trying to answer a question and pretend to be someone else is more difficult than I thought all right so give me another one my favorite kind of weather is cold weather because I do not like to be cold when I am cold I feel bad and I shiver because it is very cold I always like warm weather warm weather is nice that’s why I like the summer time okay so in the comments what do you think about that one was it a memorized answer trying to impress The Examiner too long too short robotic delivery what do you think and do transes robotic delivery yeah so I mean this is not really a student’s fault it can be a couple of things number one it can be because you’re really stressed out um it is a very stressful exam obviously you you know you might have a lot of pressure in terms of it might cost you your job it might lead to your family being you know upset with you you might have a Visa waiting for you it is a very very high Stak test so what happens is people just you know kind of climb up and speak in a very very robotic way and so that is a problem because you’re not being as fluent as you could be also if you are so stressed out that you are speaking in that way then people tend to make in my experience more grammar and vocabulary mistakes because they’re just not relaxed and speaking in a natural way and also sometimes it can cause pronunciation uh issues for the same reason because you’re a lot of people when they’re speaking in that way can speak in a very quiet way like inside their mouth is what how I always describe it rather than projecting their voice so it might make it a little bit difficult for the examiner so there’s lots and lots of problems you can have there the other reason is a lot of people have been taught that the ielt speaking test is a formal academic test and you should speak in a formal Academic Way it’s not it’s a speaking test about how you would speak to a normal person in a normal situation you’re not going to speak in that overly formal overly academic robotic way because that’s not how you would speak to someone like imagine if if Justin and I were having a meeting and I said like how is thing how how is your weekend my weekend was good I went like he wouldn’t really talk like that um so one of the key pieces of advice is just speak to the examiner in the same way that you would speak to a friend or a colleague or a classmate or a teacher someone who you know when you’re not speaking in a really really informal or formal way just in a in a normal way would be good okay so you could say that I’m a real fashionista and I wouldn’t really dress down once in a blue moon because I am a Real Fashion a holic and fashion is my life I would die for fashion so when I’m in the mood I go to the shopping center with my body and we buy the place out and we spend lots of money buying new clothes okay so in the comments what would you say is the problem there trying to impress yeah so that person is trying to impress The Examiner and what they’re doing is they’re just thinking of as many big words and idioms and you know fancy vocabulary as they can they they are not answering the question they’re not thinking about answering the question they’re approaching the test as if it is a vocabulary test you can also try and impress examiner with fancy grammar structures and things like that but that person was principally thinking that the test wasn’t a speaking test it was a vocabulary test and ignoring these things all right so when you’re doing that when you’re focusing just on vocabulary then you’re not really focusing on being coherent and answering the question so there’s a relationship between these two and you shouldn’t worry about one more than the other for example if you are just focusing on grammar and being 100% accurate all the time then your fluency tends to go down all right because you you can’t think of the perfect grammar every single sentence and hope to have really really good fluency same with your vocabulary if you’re just focusing on vocabulary then your fluency and your coherence tend to be affected so there is a relationship between these two remember it’s a speaking test and these are components of of speaking it’s not just a pronunciation test or just a vocabulary test or just a grammar test or just a fluency test so we’ve talked about robotic delivery we’ve talked about trying to impress The Examiner we’ve talked about being too short memorized answers this is when obviously you memorize an answer and this really tricks people be or trips people up because what you’ll do is you’ll memorize an answer for a common question like tell me about your home to or describe your home or one of these like what is your job do you what do you like to do in your free time so they’ll memorize that answer and they’ll give a normally a very very very very long answer to a question and I’m sure you’ve heard people do this what that means is two things normally that will affect your coherence because you’re not really answering the question because you’ll ask someone like uh a really good example was on Friday I was working with a student and I I asked them is your hometown a good place to grow up and they told me about the architecture in their Hometown their transport system in their Hometown their what else did they talk about um education system like telling me everything about their Hometown and I said to them you just memorized an answer and you about your hometown and you’ve given me that so that obviously affected their their coherence what will also happen when you memorize an answer is the examiner will not think oh my God this person is amazing The Examiner will think this person has memorized an answer I’m pretty sure let’s ask them a more difficult question or a question on a different topic or a follow-up question and see how they cope with that they’ll ask you a different question and what people who memorize answers normally do is like uh uh uh I don’t know how to answer that because it’s not a memor because I haven’t memorized an answer so you’re not fooling The Examiner they’re trained in these things they know what you’re doing they do it for for a job um could someone come into your job and try and trick you on something as silly as that hopefully not so why do you think the examiners would fall for that you’ve just demonstrated that you you can’t speak English you’ve demonstrated that you can memorize answers and give very very long answers but it’s not a memorization test all right it’s a speaking test let’s look now at best practices so I’m not going to give you the best practices what I’m going to do is I’m going to ask Justin again to ask me some questions I’m going to pretend that I am a student in the test all right and I’m going to answer them as best I can demonstrate what I would do and then we’re going to come up as a group in the comments you’re going to tell me some of the things that you think I did right remember we’re going to be basing everything on these pronunciation grammar vocabulary fluency and coherence so and compare them also with the the bad examples that we showed you here okay I would have to say hands down my favorite food is stick so my wife cooks this for me every Friday normally I go for a workout and been lifting weights and running around and I’m really really hungry so what I get is steak with chips mushrooms and onions and I just feel fantastic after I have that and normally have a little glass of red wine to go along with that as well so in the comments tell me some of the things that you think I did well and so how could we create some best practices in the comments and that wasn’t like a by the way that wasn’t a perfect answer or an answer that you should copy or an answer that you know that’s the only way to answer answer that what’s your favorite food there are a million ways that you could answer that that could get you a band nine there are a million ways you could answer it to get you a b five the content wasn’t important what we’re trying to get are these best practices the things that you can learn from so that you cannot copy that answer but model it and and learn from it so a lot of you are saying that the answer was too long what a lot of people learn from teachers and from online resources is that you should use a set number of sentences that like you should say three sentences or you should say a set number of words like it should be 50 words long that is not how you should think about it you should think about the answer as how can I answer this question naturally if somebody asked me this question under normal circumstances how would I answer it don’t be thinking of number of sentences or anything like that so reason so put explanation here good coherence which I think what you mean is that I actually answered the question I got to the point and I I answered it fully so developed specific okay rather than just give one answer I’ll give a few different answers and then you can judge it’s better to have a a good sample I love to watch us crime dram so there’s a few of those that I’ve really become addicted to in the past principally Sopranos the wire and Breaking Bad so these are are all very very long series um and what I like about them is they’re very episodic so that you can just go from episode to episode to episode um and it’s try and watch like one or two a night but sometimes it goes a little bit over that because they are very very addictive again from that what would you say are the good things that you could use to model as well someone said the idea generation was good I wouldn’t really say idea generation for the speaking test so much because remember part one is about you you can’t get it wrong so you’re not thinking of an idea like making something up really what you’re doing is just talking honestly about what you’re like that was my favorite food that were those were the the my favorite TV programs and those are much much easier to talk about than to make something up like to generate ideas sometimes you’ll have to do that um but most of the time it’s better just to speak naturally a little pause for thinking yeah so fluency does not mean speaking without pausing ever you do need to think all right um it is better to think for a couple of seconds and then give your answer than to immediately begin talking and then get lost and you know uh uh uh so I don’t think it’s you know mandatory for you to think at the beginning I don’t think that that’s a best practice um but I think the point I’m trying to make is fluency does not mean that you never pause you you it’s a bad fluency is when you’re pausing at an unnatural rate examples grammar I’m fluent okay so I’ll give one more example and then we can talk about what I did I use too many apps I use hundreds of apps actually recently what I’ve been trying to do is to make my phone a lot healthier uh for I’m more to make me more productive so what I mean by that is in the past I had a lot of social media apps such as Facebook Instagram YouTube and that wasted a huge amount of time so I deleted all of those from my phone and now I use apps that can track my number of steps that I’m taking my sleep um General exercise calorie intake things like that um so that will help me improve in the future rather than just waste time with apps that don’t really improve my life at all again what do you think about that one so all of them all of them have some some common themes all right and that’s what you want to do you don’t want to be copying the content or thinking this is exactly what he said or this is exactly what he did just think about the common themes amongst them so definitely a lot of you talked about that they were natural and and yes these are about me there are questions they’re asking about me they’re when you are in the test they’re asking about you so just ask them naturally or answer them naturally and that is going to help your fluency but I also think it helps your grammar your pronunciation and your vocabulary as well because you’re not thinking too much um because it’s just easier to talk about yourself and to talk naturally um also I wasn’t talking in a very robotic way I wasn’t um trying to impress The Examiner I wasn’t trying to insert lots of fancy words or anything like that I was just speaking obviously I’m a native English speaker so that that obviously helps um but as a if you need if you need a seven or above you should be at a high level of English anyway so just speaking in the same way as imagine you it’s your first day of a new class and you’re speaking to your your classmates how would you answer those questions um I so a lot of you talked about the questions are developed I gave some explanations some examples again going back to this answering it naturally I don’t think it is a good idea to answer part one questions in a very formulaic way what do I mean by that so what a lot of people will do do is suggest that you answer explanation and then example like that is a very very formulaic way of answering a question can that help you sure it can help you but do you answer questions in your native language in that way like imagine you’re speaking to your brother your sister or your friend tonight and they asked you what’s your favorite TV program or what’s your favorite food you wouldn’t think like my favorite food is steak explain you know and then okay it’s my favorite food because blah blah blah blah blah example last week I you wouldn’t really do that does that mean that you should never use explanations and examples no but just have them as like tools in your toolkit think about it when you’re developing things I need to give the examiner enough information so that they can understand what I think about this but don’t think about it in a formulaic way like like a mathematical formula you can add a little bit more detail add an explanation add an example but not in a formulaic way hopefully that makes sense coherence so that’s related to I developed the answer and I answered the specific question when they ask you about your favorite food tell them about your favorite food they ask you about apps talk about apps answer the specific question that they’re asking you um and also again developing it will help with your coherence I’m a native English speaker so I don’t want to say my grammar was great or my vocabulary was great because I was you know born speaking English obviously as well with fluency so we not want to talk too much about those I’m not going to Pat myself on the back by saying my English is great when I’m a native English speaker of course but what you will find there was I didn’t try and focus on using really really impressive grammar impressive vocabulary what I did was just answer the questions naturally and by doing that the grammar and the vocabulary and the fluency just flowed from that if your grammar and your vocabulary and your fluency is good enough and you just answer the questions naturally these will take care of themselves but if you go into okay he asked me about my favorite food what’s what are some big adjectives I can think of or what are some idioms I can use then your fluency is going to suffer you’re thinking way too much and you’re probably going to make lots of grammar and vocabulary mistakes because you’ll be thinking about grammar and vocabulary that’s beyond your level that you’re not able to use yet so use the grammar and vocabulary that you are comfortable using to fluently develop your answer and then everything kind of looks after itself pronunciation we’ll not talk about that because I’m a native English speaker and I obviously hopefully my pronunciation is okay next I want to share something very very special with you so part two is probably the most challenging part of the speaking test for many many students what I’ve done is I have taken lots of real part two questions and I’m going to show you how I personally would plan out the entire answer and then show you how I would answer it this is going to fill you with confidence because you’ll see even I don’t really make things really complicated and you don’t need a very highlevel complex answer you just keep things simple give the examiners what they’re looking for and it can really improve your confidence on test day and your score so without further Ado let’s jump into it before I show you each of the Q cards and reveal my band n sample answer for each of them I want to talk about how you can use this video to improve at home so one thing you can do is you can just sit back relax and watch the video that’s fine if you want to do that but if you really want to improve what you can do is each time I show you the Q card you could pause the video spend one minute preparing your own answer and then set 2 minutes on your phone record yourself answering the actual question and then listen to my answer and you can compare now if my answer is completely different from yours that doesn’t matter what matters is you are actually practicing you are thinking about these questions and you are actually speaking and and listening back and thinking about your performance is really really going to help so if you want to do that that is really going to help you improve your speaking or if you just want to sit back that’s fine as well so let’s have a look at these Q cards okay so talk about a time when you received good news so that will be my wife’s passport was before Easter give a background on why why it was good news and what the news was about so that will include that explain why the news was special and will all us to travel um no need for visas and then if we have time we can go into a holiday so I received amazing news just before Easter this year my wife got her new passport now for most people that wouldn’t be great news but for my wife because she’s not from the UK that was her her first passport so it was an an amazing thing to happen just to give you some background on why it was so important and so special um if you’re not from the UK and you get married to a citizen from the UK it takes between five and six years before you can get an actual passport um you can live in the UK but you’re not allowed to get a passport you have to apply multiple times send them mountains of information and spend thousands of pounds trying to get that done and what that does is it creates a huge problem because if you have what’s called a spouse visa for the UK and you don’t have one of the premium passports that allows you to travel around the world it means you’re kind of stuck in the UK so for about five or 6 years we were living in the UK but my family could only travel to my wife Home Country she couldn’t travel to Europe she couldn’t travel to America without going through a very stressful process of applying for visas there so getting this passport was amazing news because it means that we can go on holiday we can travel anywhere pretty much in the world Visa free and it just opens up literally opens up the whole world to my family uh and to celebrate uh I booked a holiday to Port pugal it was the first time my wife had ever been to Portugal and we were able to just Breeze through immigration with her British passport okay so I’m going to go snorkeling and tell a story about Barbados H so the first time and then the second time to it was too wavy no not too wavy it’s too rough and may me try scuba what activity it was where you did it when you did it explain whether you liked it or not okay maybe say why you like it okay so an activity that I took part in I doors recently and well a few months ago actually uh was snorkeling so I’ve never been snorkeling before and in August 2020 uh we went on holiday in Barbados and we had a house right on the beach and I went swimming every day cuz the the water was right there and our next door neighbor uh it was an american guy every day he would go in snorkeling and I didn’t really think that snorkeling was available and then on our last day of the holiday he said do you want to try my my snorkel so I put the snorkel on and I was kind of really surprised and kind of disappointed because there was this amazing coral reef under right under the sea a stone away from my house so you know for 2 weeks I was swimming and could have been watching this amazing scene underneath the water uh so we rebooked our holiday to Barbados we went back again December last year and I brought my snorkel with me I went to the sports shop and purchased the best snorkel I could I could buy and brought it to in my suitcase with me and when we got there we discovered that the sea was too rough so I couldn’t snorkel and the sea was rough and choppy the whole time we were there so not only could I not snorkel I couldn’t even swim so I missed that opportunity again in the future I hope to snorkel um maybe somewhere else that has more reliable snorkeling and but I’d also like to try scuba diving um because I think WEA doesn’t really matter so much cuz you’re underneath the water and it’s a far more immersive experience um but it does require a lot of training so maybe I need to do my party license so that was we on a flight cuz the flight was cancelled um we had to decide so what we did right away [Music] decide Portugal or Spain or stay decided to stay it was great cuz it was quiet um hope for come uh but disappointed because no compensation okay I hope that you’re enjoying this video but YouTube can be a little bit confusing and overwhelming so what we’ve done is we’ve created a free IELTS course called I fundamentals what ielt fundamentals does is it just boils everything down into the most important fundamental things that you need to learn it’s designed to help you remove all of the stress and just get the score that you need in the quickest possible Time by just giving you the information that you need and it covers everything it’s 100% free and it has helped thousands of students get about 7 eight or n if you want to sign up for is fundamentals for free click the link in the description thanks for very much and let’s get back to the video so recently I had to wait nearly one week for a flight so we were flying back from the south of Portugal the Algarve from an airport called pharaoh and probably miss pronouncing that apologies to any Portuguese in the audience but what happened was our flight was at 8:00 p.m. from uh Portugal to back to Belfast and at 1028 so 10 minutes before the flight was about to take off um I got a text message saying that the flight was cancelled with no explanation at all I think it was the French traffic controllers so thanks very much for that and what happened in the immediate aftermath was we just said okay no problem we went to a hotel and it was actually a bonus because we went to a little town in Portugal that we would never normally go to and it was amazing because we got to see the real Portugal they had a a fish market and a vegetable market there and right beside the water so it was nice just to go and Shop with the locals and have coffee with the locals um so it was actually a blessing in disguise later that day we needed to decide either we had to get a taxi to Spain um because there was no um flights available that day from Portugal to Belfast or to take a like a 4-Hour taxi ride to Lisbon the capital um or just wait for the next available flight which was 5 days away um so we decided to do that because when we added up all the cost it was actually cheaper just to stay an extra 5 days and that was an amazing experience because we went back to the same Resort that we stayed in and because Easter had passed it was basically just us in the resort so we got you know not just five star service six-star service and it was really quiet and beautiful and having our flight consult was an amazing experience okay there’s no one that I can think that I really want to work with um so I’m just going to pick someone famous because that’s going to be easy to talk about um so Elon Musk how you know them um Tesla Twitter Etc um what they do so that’s kind of the same thing um the thing I would like so it’s first principles thinking and then he makes money by solving problems um and you could learn a lot from him then what else could we talk about probably the negatives he’s controversial don’t know why but he is I suppose if I had to choose one person to work with it would be Elon Musk Elon Musk is one of the most successful business people in the history of the world one of the richest people in the world so it’s obvious why you would want to work with him because you could learn a huge of Mind from him um he’s famous because not only has he started one successful company I think he started more than 10 successful companies um he’s famous for uh Tesla which was the first company to successfully um start an electric car company SpaceX um he also bought Twitter but he also set up Paypal so he not only has been successful he has been successful in many different domains and the thing that I would really like to learn from him is how he makes money and and uh makes a profit by trying to solve problems for the planet and for people because Tesla makes a lot of money but it is also saving the environment um SpaceX makes a lot of money but it could also save Humanity if there was a natural disaster and we all had to get off the planet then it’s probably the only way we can go is to move to the moon or move to Mars um so his rationale his his modus operand seems to be find a huge problem solve that problem and get paid for it and I would really really like to do that I try and do that in my own business so the is test is a huge problem for thousands of people all around the world we try and make it simple and easier for them to get the scores that they need but I think there’s probably bigger problems that I could tackle now that I’ve solved that I problem this is actually quite a difficult one because I don’t come from a rich family so I suppose I’ll just say that and the only time I can ever remember getting money from my family is communion money um explain what that is and that’s why I received it um it was stolen from me um so um but it makes me very grateful because of why it was stolen stolen in inverted commas I don’t come from a very wealthy family so I’ve never been given a huge amount of money in my life the only time I can remember being given a significant amount of money was for my First Holy Communion so I’m Irish I’m from a Catholic background and if you grow up Catholic when you’re around 7 8 years old you do your First Holy Communion and it’s like a big milestone in a child’s life and normally family members will give you some money so I think at the time I was given like between 40 and 50 pounds so in the you know late 80s early ’90s I don’t can’t remember exactly when that was early ’90s that was a significant amount of money um but I actually reminded my mother the other day um that she took that money from me I said she stole it from me and her response was well we didn’t have any money so I stole it from you to buy you food and to buy you clothes um so I did feel quite AG grieved at the time because a lot of my richer friends were going and buying toys and things like that and it was the first time I’d ever had a significant amount of money and then it was taken from me right away but looking back now it fills me with gratitude I’m very grateful um that it happened because it shows how much my mother struggled and how hard she worked for me in order to set me up um in life and recently my little boy did his First Holy Communion and he got a lot more than than I got and he wasted it on buying things in a computer game and it was a good opportunity for us to teach him about money and teach him about not wasting money now he wants to um buy more things um in the computer game but I told him that he has to work for it and he has to do some jobs around the house if he wants that okay so I’m going to talk about copyright because that’s a law that affects me directly every day um so I’m going to explain what copyright is and basically protects IP um I follow it by being original um protects from people I hate that’s called a spade to Spade um and explain what should happen if you break that law so a law that I like is copyright copyright protects content creators people who create things it protects their intellectual property from being copied um without authorization uh the reason why I like this law is because my job principally 80% of my time is spent making original content so that could be a blog post that could be a YouTube video it could be an image something like that and how this law protects me is um on a daily basis definitely a weekly basis um somebody takes my original work and just copies it completely and what we can do is we can then tell the platforms or sometimes like YouTube tells us hey somebody has copied your your work and what that allows us to do is basically get that taken down and then YouTube YouTube can either ban them from the platform or what they do is they have a three strikes policy I think um where if they do it three times um they’re completely banned from the platform I do like this law but I think that it isn’t enforced enough and it isn’t um respected Enough by other people uh recently we had or not recently throughout our whole whole career um we’ve had a lot of people not only copying our content the words and the images and the video but copying things now like our titles and our thumbnail images which are all original and they take a lot of creativity and brain power and time and work and I absolutely hate the fact that somebody lazy and stupid to be honest can just come along and take that and steal it and when we report people stealing our titles people stealing our thumbnails um YouTube are less likely to take that down because they don’t consider that a copyright violation when if you follow the letter of the law it actually is okay so Portuguese fish stew uh and perfect because in a pot um restaurant allight us to take turns explain how you felt [Music] and great because cuz it allowed us to have a good time with our children an unusual meal I had recently was at a Portuguese restaurant and for the first time my wife and I and my two little boys had Portuguese fish do I’ll not try and pronounce the Portuguese version of it but basically it comes in a big cast iron pot and it has rice and prawns and other fish and other and clams and other shellfish in it the reason why it was such an unusual experience was it was a restaurant that was completely outside and it was set in a big Garden on the ocean on the Atlantic Ocean and there were Cliffs kind of going down to the ocean and it was very special because if you have two young boys they don’t want to sit in a fancy restaurant and this allowed our boys to kind of run around the gardens and and go and have a look over the cliffs and all don’t worry it was safe um and it allowed myself and my wife to take turns playing with the boys or eating our meal and because the stew was in a big cast iron pot as I said um it didn’t get cold so I would eat some while my wife was looking after my boys and then my wife would come back and she would eat some and then I would go and play with my boys and they didn’t eat it because they they think that you know prawns and things like that are gross um but we really really enjoyed it um I would definitely go back to that restaurant again and I would definitely order that meal one thing we did Miss idon was we as we were leaving we discovered they had um a f a Fresh Fish Fresh Fish counter where the you know the daily catch was brought in and you could actually go and choose your fish and my wife love seafood and next time we’ll get the fish stew but we’ll also pick a few other things so be hiking I’ll explain three places or four places um I normally do it alone because I like to listen to podcasts um or to think and then I’ll talk about um physical side of it and then talk more about the mental benefits and then if I run out of time I’ll run out things to say I’ll talk about the weather which kind of a dine side of it yeah that should be enough as you can probably tell from looking at me I’m not the healthiest person in the world but one thing I do enjoy which is quite healthy uh is hiking um I live in Northern Ireland and I live in um a part of Northern Ireland which is world rened for its natural beauty um so right on our doorstep we have beaches we have two beautiful Forest parks we have a beautiful Lake and we’ve got um a a medieval castle that you can walk around um so that means that there’s a huge variety of plac and even within each of those places like within the Forest parks um there are different Trails you can you can go down so you’re always discovering new places and you never get bored um I like to do this on my own um because I don’t only do it for the physical health benefits I do it for the mental health benefits so I have quite a a busy stressful job and being able to just get out in nature um we say it allows you to get your head showered here in in Northern Ireland which means you know just get out and bathe in nature and not literally bathed but just surround yourself with nature and it not only helps you with your cardiovascular health um it can help with stress and de-stressing as well um the only problem with hiking here in Northern Ireland is our weather is notoriously bad um so during the winter it can snow but most of the time it is actually just raining and walking in the rain is not and and especially when it’s cold and when it’s windy is not a great experience but in the summertime um we often get spells of weather maybe two or three weeks um where it is nice and dry and that is an amazing time I generally work a lot less during those times and try and get out every day onto one of the the hiking trails Istanbul uh Champions League um who you go with because my son Sports Man City and why you want to go there to see Man City explain why you want to go for a short period jump in league so there’s not much there so um I’ll talk about why it’s not not suitable for kids um and I’ll talk about other parts of turkey so so it’s a lot of walking uh historical stuff cultural stuff yeah so a place I’d love to go for a short period of time is stanbul in Turkey there’s a very specific reason for that is in a couple of weeks I think it’s two or three weeks uh they have the Champions League final there my little boy Tom who is 8 years old is obsessed with man city so we watch all the Man City games here in the house and he especially loves the Champions League so if they make it to the final I would love to take him to the Champions League final I don’t know if we’ll be able to go however because tickets are quite hard to come by um but if we get the opportunity I’d love to go um I wouldn’t take him there for more than a couple of days I know that Istanbul is an amazing place to visit but I don’t think it’s suitable um for children or not for my kid anyway uh the things that I would like to do in Istanbul such as experience the wonderful food and the historical sites and the religious sites and the cultural things to do there an 8-year-old is just not really interested in those things so we would probably just fly in um stay the night before um go to the match and then come back and I think the matches are held quite late there because of the temperature um so he probably would fly back the next day um I would like to take him back to Turkey but probably not Istanbul um for the for the reasons I just said he doesn’t really like um big cities but he does like Seaside Resorts and there are places like antalia in the south of turkey and I’d like to take him there for a lot longer a week or two so he could experience turkey and all the wonderful things there that they have for kids okay so an old man in the sea I met him in the sea while I was swimming um how you met them met them in the sea what they do uh so he’s lived there for more than 80 years um in the sea nearly every day um told me by the history of the village he’s just calm and Serene he’s a product of his environment and it also worked in tourism so fascinating man that I met recently um back back in December so a few months back um I was swimming in the Caribbean Sea um on the west coast of Barbados and there was an old man who was just lying back relaxing in the sea um and he started talking to me and I discovered that he lived in a house right on the beach in the village where where I was staying um he was more than 80 years old and I discovered that he had been in the sea nearly every day of his life and for me that location is one of the most beautiful places on in the entire universe and it was quite astounding to meet someone who was doing the thing that I wish that I could do and he’ done that for his entire life and what struck me about this man was he was so calm so Serene and when I thought about it he was kind of a product of his environment so um I often wondered after meeting him you know if he grew up in a in a let’s say a poverty-stricken part of the world in a very rough inner city neighborhood would he be that person um so it’s kind of thinking about that nature versus nurture debate and it was also fascinating to talk to him about um The Village in Barbados that he grew up in cuz his I think his grandmother um he said owned most of the land around that Village and she was such a lovely woman and she just gave plots of land to everybody who needed it so the village kind of grew up up around her and he knew everybody in the village and they were all very tight because she had just gifted that land to everybody so fascinating guy so by now you’re probably thinking just give me some quick tips and tricks your test might be coming up very very soon and we’re going to do that but in a very special way we’re going to teach you all the tips and tricks you need by telling you the story of one of our most successful students prianka PR Bianca failed the speaking test four times in a row and we helped her improve from a band six to a band eight in Just 2 weeks by sharing the four most important tips that you need to understand in order to improve so let’s hear priyanka’s story Priyanka failed her speaking test four times in a row and she was about to give up on her dream of moving to Canada forever but after I gave her these four simple tips she jumped from a b six to a band 8 in Just 2 weeks so the other day I got this email Chris my test is in 2 weeks and I’m going to fail again I failed my speaking four times in a row and I don’t know why help so I replied let’s do a one-on-one speaking test and she was right she failed again in fact she got a band Six in fluency pronunciation grammar and vocabulary but I could tell that if she changed just four simple things she was going to to get a band8 on her next test and when I told her this she said do you know my test is in 2 weeks yes do you know that if I fail this time I’ll never be able to move to Canada yes don’t worry every band n student that I’ve worked with used these four simple tips the first thing we needed to work on was her per fluency there were more o and as in every answer than an Elon Musk interview um um um um um um um and prianka had the exact same problem Elon does when he speaks publicly you see when anybody speaks they make these audible pauses these M’s and as’s this is totally normal and we all do this when we’re thinking of what to say next Elon is thinking of very complex things like how to launch a rocket to Mars so he has more pauses M and as because he’s thinking a lot about what to say next and this is exactly the same reason why PR D’s fluency was so bad you see your brain is just like a computer if you’re like me you’ll have hundreds of tabs open in your browser and what happens when you have hundreds of tabs open your computer slows down so you might have the latest MacBook Pro but if you push it too hard it slows down her fluency wasn’t bad she was just trying too hard you see she was taught by other teachers that to get a high score on the I speaking test you need to have have impressive ideas so I asked prianka what happens when you’re speaking in the test and you try and think of complex ideas and she said I freeze and my mind goes completely blank so why try and think of complex ideas the truth is that nowhere in the official ielt marketing criteria does it mention complexity of ideas in fact ideas are not marked at all but just telling students this information doesn’t really change their behavior and their performance on test day so I decided to show Priyanka exactly what to do so I asked her a simple IP speaking question and her answer was a complete mess the usual M’s and as’s and long pauses so I asked her the same question again and I asked her just to change one simple thing and this changed everything she answered the question with band n fluency and Bano was completely amazed you mean simple ideas increase my score yes if you’re trying to use complex ideas in the speaking test you’re making your life 10 times more difficult for no gain at all it’s like trying to eat a bowl of soup with a Swiss army knife instead of just using a simple spoon but just because we fixed her fluency issues doesn’t mean she’s going to get a high score for grammar so let’s look at that next so we did the same thing again I asked her a simple speaking question hi has your your home time changed since you were a child and her first answer was long it was complex it had multiple different tenses on multiple different grammar structures in there do you think an answer like this would get a high score well her answer might be complex it might have a very wide range of grammar but it contained multiple grammar errors so what I did was I asked her the exact same question and I gave her some advice and told her to change just one thing and here is her answer my home Time Has Changed dramatically since I was a child it used to be a small village but it has grown into a bustling City with new opportunities despite the fast pace the sense of community has remained strong right this example only has two of the most basic tenses in the English language it is much much simpler but it contained zero errors and to get a bond seven or above on your I speaking test 50% or more of your sentences must have zero errors to put it simply the more sentences you produce with no grammatical errors the higher your score so which answer do you think would get a higher score the one that has a very wide range of grammar but lots of mistakes or a simpler one with zero mistakes but like many of you prianka was still very worried and she asked me what about range of grammar aren’t I being judged on both range and accuracy well in the text you know the way the examiner asks you a range of different questions well they’re doing that to test the range of your grammar just by answering each question naturally and appropriately you’ll naturally use a range of different grammar structures and tenses all you have to do is just answer the question so in less than 5 minutes we had fixed 50% of priyanka’s problems but she’s still worried about her vocabulary and her pronunciation she’d been told by all of her old teachers that she needed to use complex vocabulary and that her accent was a problem and this was going to lower her pronunciation score so I said listen I have good news and I have bad news the good news is you’ve just fixed your grammar and your fluency issues in less than 5 minutes and you’re probably going to get a very high score the bad news is you’re going to have to completely change everything about your vocabulary and her reaction was very predictable like nearly every student I tell this to they say but my old teacher told me that I need to make all of my vocabulary complex and this is 100% true most teachers especially on YouTube teach you that complex words equal a higher score but we teach students something completely different think of vocabulary as Tools in a toolkit each tool helps you do a job each word you know helps you discuss different topics this tool helps you talk about your hometown and this tool helps you talk about where you’d like to live in the future band 8 and nine students have enough words enough tools so that they can handle any question or any topic you see using fancy vocabulary is like buying a very expensive fancy tool when all you need is a Hummer to hit in a nail the truth is that the vast majority of students that we work with have enough vocab already to get the score that they need but because they’ve been taught to use very highlevel complex words they make lots of mistakes and this actually lowers their score it’s like a band seven is a weight that they can easily lift already but instead of just lifting that weight they try and lift the weight way heavier that they’re not capable of lifting and they end up dropping it on their head so did prianka just answer some questions and use Simple vocabul and live happily ever after and get the score that she needed no like many students she got very angry with me for criticizing her old teachers she told me that this was going to lead to failure and she ended the call so a few days go past and I don’t hear anything from prianka finally I check my email she’s booked another one-on-one speaking test with me but at this point her test is in 24 hours the next day she’s not just worried she’s completely freaking out so I asked her a simple question you failed four times before do you think doing the same thing that you did those four times is going to lead to success you see all these speaking tips and tricks that you’ll find online are just ways of you trying to trick The Examiner into thinking that you’re good enough and that you deserve a higher score than you’re really capable of we have was saying here in Ireland you can put lipstick on a pig but it’s still a pig the truth is is that you are good enough to get the score that you need you just have to use the English level and the words and the grammar and the vocabulary that you already have and show the examiner your real genuine English level so finally pranka said let’s do a practice test let’s do it your way her ideas were simple but relevant her grammar was appropriate and accurate and her vocabulary was wide ranging enough that she could talk about any topic I asked her about and she was able to speak accurately and fluently but this just left her pronunciation if she couldn’t fix her pronunciation issues it doesn’t matter how good the rest of it was she would still fail to get the score that she needed and pran’s big pronunciation problem was that she spoke too quickly if you speak too quickly it is really difficult for the examiner to understand every word that you’re saying and if the examiner doesn’t understand every word they give you a low score but in that final one-on-one session her pronunciation popped up from a band six to a band eight without me giving her any advice at all she changed one thing without me telling her what to do you see once she answered each question naturally and used the grammar and vocabulary she already knew how to use she relaxed this meant that she made fewer mistakes was less nervous and relaxed even more the more relaxed she was the better her pronunciation by fixing everything and being able to speak to the examiner in the same way that she would speak to a friend or a colleague she slowed everything down I could understand 100% of what she was saying and she instantly improved her pronunciation and a result on test day she got an amazing band eight she moved to Canada she found a better job she earned more money and lived happily ever after and she never had to think of the silly I test ever again in this video I’ll reveal the most common sentence patterns used by Band 78 and N students we’ve used AI to analyze thousands of band 78 and N performances so that you can learn from them and improve your score we’ll also be playing a little game throughout the video and if you get enough points you’ll win a very special prize at the end so let’s start off with question one which of these sentence patterns is the most common for band 78 and nine students in part one of the speaking test I’m a my role entails in my professional capacity and I am responsible for final answer the correct answer is a I’m a so when asked do you work or study which is the most common question that you’ll get in part one of the speaking test the most common response from band 7 8 and N students is simply I’m a teacher worker whatever you do but isn’t that a little bit too simple for B 78 and N student well let’s continue and we’ll explain later in the video question two which of these sentence patterns is the most common for b seven eight and N students in part one of the test I originate from I hail from I’m from I am a product of final answer and the correct answer is I’m from so like question one all of the wrong answers are technically correct the English is absolutely fine but in general students that try and use those more advanced options tend to get a lower score I know that doesn’t make any sense right now continue to watch the video and we’ll explain why that makes sense and how to improve your score question three which of these sentence patterns is the most common for b seven eight and N students in part one I prefer I like I normally I live in final answer and the correct answer is I like but these are actually all very very common sentence patterns in part one of the speaking test we use I like and and I prefer to discuss things that we like doing we use I normally to talk about daily routines and we use I live in to talk about the accommodation that we live in or maybe talk about where we’re from again you’re probably extremely surprised that these highlevel students use such simple language it must get more complicated when they start talking in part two of the test let’s move on to part two of the test to find out which of these sentence patterns is most used by about seven eight and nine students in part two of the I speaking test we went to we were going they had gone we had been going so this is a tricky one would you like to phone a friend we use things called narrative tenses to tell stories about past experiences and looking at these four options these are all narrative tenses one is pass simple one is past continuous one is past perfect and one is past perfect continuous any of these could be used to tell a story about the past but the most common tense among these is past simple so I’m going to go for we went to Final Answer correct so now that we know that it’s very common to use narrative tenses in part two let’s look at how to use them in question number number five which of these sentences is incorrect I went to London for 3 years I was watching TV when the phone rang he realized he left his passport at home I’ve been walking for hours before we found a restaurant final answer the correct answer is I went to London for 3 years this is very very important because it shows a crucial point about part two of the speaking test it is not about which sentences you use or the range of different tenses that you use it is about choosing a sentence that is appropriate and accurate so in part two you’ll be given a range of different bullet points and the last bullet point the most common one the most popular one will look like this and explain how you felt about that thing so let’s let’s move on to question six all about how you feel which of these sentence patterns would get the highest score I felt sad I was over Moon I have a feeling of overwhelming Joy words cannot describe the depths of my feelings so that’s a tricky one do you want to ask the audience audience please pick the correct answer and if you want to play along at home in the comments write A B C or D so let’s look at the results 49% think that it’s D 19% C 177% A and 15% think it’s B so 49% of you are wrong it’s wrong for two reasons one you didn’t actually answer the question that’s not actually saying how you feel about anything and examiners are trained to spot memorize answers this signs like a memorized answer so you would actually get a lower score rather than a higher score 19% of you are wrong because this is simply the wrong verb tense remember it’s not just whether the sentence is appropriate but it also has to be accurate 15% of you are wrong because this is simply inaccurate it is wrong to say I was over a moon it is I was over the moon if you say to the examiner I was over Moon again you are lowering your score you’re not increasing your score because you used some magic idiom and well done to the 17% of you playing at home who got it correct it answers the question and it is grammatically accurate it is better than all of the others therefore so let’s move on to the final round where we’re going to look at part three of the speaking test part three is the most challenging it is the most difficult it has the most difficult questions and requires the most complex answers of the whole test so question seven what was the most common sentence pattern for band 7 8 and N students in part three of the speaking test I totally agree not necessarily it’s possible that in my opinion so all of these are very very common but let’s look at what they do so I totally agree we use that functional language to do the job of agreeing with someone not necessarily again the function of that sentence pattern is to disagree with someone it’s possible that the function of that is slightly different it’s possible that is to consider someone else’s opinion and in my opinion you are expressing your opinion and B 78 and nine students use this type of language this functional language all the time because it helps them do things they’re not thinking about the most advanced pattern to use or the most high level structure to use they’re thinking what do I want to say and what sentence pattern helps me do that in other words they’re just solely focused on clearly answering the question and the most common one is in my opinion because you will be giving your opinion a lot but you’re not done there you can’t just give lots and lots of opinions and get a high score you must back it up with explaining your point of view question eight which of these is the most common way s eight and N students explain things like in other words that is to say that because now all of these are actually fine to use all of them are correct all of them can be used to explain why you believe something is true or why you have that opinion but the most common way is because too simple well no because because is the most common way native English speakers use that’s the most common sentence pattern that they use to explain things would a native English speaker get a low score because they use everyday normal English like because so will you get a b nine we’re down to the final question question nine so you’ve stated your opinion you’ve explained that opinion but you need to go even further and there are a few options open for you to help you expand your part three answers even more question nine which of these sentence patterns is the most common way for band 7 8 and N students to expand their answer even further in part three on other hand for example to sum up a nutshell you’re probably going to need a 50/50 for that one do you want to take a 50/50 computer please take away two wrong answers so they’ve got rid of to sum up why is to sum up wrong again think back to what we talked about functional language to sum up is to summarize something it is actually quite rare for highlevel students to summarize what they’re saying in part three so to sum up isn’t technically wrong it is just quite rare for a student to do that in nutshell again we would use that to summarize something we don’t normally summarize things as we just said but in nutshell is wrong because it is inaccurate it is not in nutshell it’s in a nutshell so that leaves us with one wrong answer and one correct answer will you get them all right on the other hand is good showing the other side of the argument is one of the best ways that you can expand your answer even further in part three so you talk about one side of the argument and then you talk about the other side of the argument if you can think of it so it’s good but it’s not right because it’s not on other hand it is on the other hand again this is why a lot of students mess up because they go and memorize a bunch of sentence patterns before the test and that’s why you clicked on the video isn’t it and they use them incorrectly so the correct answer is for example which is just a nice simple way of giving an example so if you use the sentences the sentence patterns in this video are you guaranteed to get a band nine absolutely not the reason why you clicked on this video video is because you want to memorize things many of you have been brought up in education systems where you have been taught that memorization is a skill unfortunately IELTS is not a memorization test it is an English communication test memorization is the opposite of clear communication the key for the speaking test is to understand what type of questions might come up and then have appropriate and accurate simple correct direct ways of dealing with all the most common questions that is why B 7 8 and N students use Simple language most people think that the secret to I speaking success is learning how to do a few things really well but after helping thousands of students get a b nine and high speaking I can tell you the opposite is actually true the real secret is bandl students avoid traps set for them by I speaking examiners and if you fall for them you will fail this video will show you what those traps are how to spot them and how to avoid them so that you can massively increase your score and at the end of the video I’m going to reveal the biggest IP speaking secret that’s contained in one of my favorite movies understanding this secret has done more to help my students get a band n than anything else and you can learn it instantly the first trick they play is really sneaky and it’s the same trick my dad used to play when he worked here as a chef Young Chefs would come into his kitchen and ask him for a job sure my dad would say come back tomorrow cook me something if I like it you can have a job and just before they left he’d say is there anything you do not like to cook and when they arrived the next day for the cooking demonstration he’d ask them to cook the thing they hated so what has my sneaky father got to do with I speaking if you look online for topics that will definitely come up on test day you’ll find these three topics but if you look at the official Cambridge questions you’ll find very unusual topics that you weren’t expecting you see when I examiners ask about your home or your work or your hometown they often get answers like this I am over the moon that you ask me about my hometown it is only once in a blue moon that I get to talk about a topic that is so close to my heart there are a plethora of reasons why one would enjoy my hometown let’s talk first about the 18th century architecture but if the examiner was to ask them about a topic they weren’t expecting such as wigs The Examiner might hear an answer like this I don’t know anything about wigs I’ve never worn a wig in in my entire life and things are going to get much worse for this student because the examiners are trained to spot memorized answers and what they will do if they think that you are giving memorized answers for example about your hometown they will ask you more and more difficult questions on unusual topics and here’s the scary part The Examiner has your memorized answer and your answer to the questions you weren’t expecting they will not base their score on this answer they will base their score on this answer alone because as my father used to say a shed f is only as good as their worst dish not their best dish your memorized answers are not your real level your real speaking level is dealing with questions you w not expecting so if you do get an unusual question on test day answer it like this no I’ve never worn a wig I think that people who wear wigs sound and look ridiculous I think they really just do it for attention or to be funny which isn’t funny at all to be honest now if you thought the examiners were sneaky in part one you’re really going to hate them after I reveal their sneaky trap in part three of the test now before I tell you what it is let me tell you why they do it because once you understand the why you’ll be able to spot it immediately and deal with it much more easily so when I was a kid in primary school I really struggled academically I couldn’t even write my own name properly I couldn’t understand most of the lessons and I wasn’t allowed to sit with the other kids but despite all this I was able to eventually graduate from one of the best law schools in the world you see when I did a test I got all the easy questions wrong but the few really difficult questions at the end of the test that no other students could get correct I would always get those correct and this is exactly what the examiners are trained to do in part three of the speaking test if they believe that you are at one of the lower bands let’s say a band four or a band five they will ask you quite easy questions like these ones but if they think that you deserve one of the higher bands a b seven eight or even nine they will ask you more and more difficult questions notice how in the book here the questions get more and more difficult but the key here is how you react to these more difficult questions these questions will come at the very end of the speaking test when you are stressed you are tired and you just want the test to end and when the examiner asks these questions often students will give answers like uh yes [Music] um I don’t know the thing you have to remember with these questions is the examiner is testing you they are testing are you capable of answering these band seven8 and N questions cuz they have to separate out the band sevens from the band eights from the band nines one of the ways they’re trained to do that is ask these really really difficult questions and then see how you react to them so what if you know nothing about the topic or you just find that question really really challenging are you going to automatically get a low score no let me show you how to cope with those questions so if I was doing the test and I got this question and I know nothing about this topic I am a complete idiot when it comes to this topic I could say something like this to be honest I don’t know anything about this topic I’m not from from India and I don’t know much about cooking but if I had to give an answer um it’s very difficult to predict the future but what I would say is maybe AI will change how the restaurants take orders and how they deliver the food to their customers but that’s just a complete guess now is that the best answer in the world no but it is much better than uh and by attempting an answer and telling The Examiner what I think about that topic even though I know nothing about it I have indicated to The Examiner that I am good enough to deal with those questions and they might then steer the conversation to a topic that I’m more comfortable with and then I can really show them how good I am now the last trap is the sneakiest of them all and it’s got to do with how they test your vocabulary there are thousands of words in the English language and the examiners only have between 10 and 15 15 minutes to test your ability to use English vocabulary so they came up with a genius way of testing it in around 10 minutes see some words we use to talk about this topic some words this topic and some words this topic but if we try to use these words to talk about this topic it doesn’t work these are called topic specific words and we can use them to talk about different topics knowing this information is crucial for two reason reasons first the examiners are trained to ask you a range of different topics on test day so that you can’t just memorize a list of band nine words and put them into every answer and cheat the test in that way secondly the examiners are more impressed with a simple topic specific word than a more complex word that doesn’t really help you answer the question this is why so many students failed the test when they were expecting to get get a really high score because they memorized lists of band nine words and this is why so many of our VIP students get a band 7 8 and N not by memorizing lists of highlevel bond nine words but using the simple topic specific words they already know it’s actually imposs whoa It’s actually possible to avoid 100% of the traps that might come up in the speaking test not just the speaking test but all all areas of the I test every part of the I test reading listening writing has traps contained within it but there is one way that you can spot all of them and avoid all of them and massively increase your score in the movie Catch Me If You Can Leonardo DiCaprio plays a criminal that is being chased by FBI man Tom Hanks Leo’s character plays a criminal who pretends to be an airline pilot and a doctor and a lawyer he also steals money by making fake checks and stealing credit cards The crucial scene in this movie comes when Tom Hanks asks Leo how did he fake passing the bar exam the bar exam is an exam all lawyers have to take before they can become a lawyer it is one of the most difficult tests in the entire world and Tom Hanks can’t figure out how a criminal how a Conn man would be able to fake passing this test and here’s how did it I didn’t cheat I studied for 2 weeks and I passed you see he didn’t need to fake becoming a doctor or a lawyer or an airline pilot he didn’t need to steal money to become rich he was already talented and smart and intelligent enough to do all of these things without cheating without stealing he just needed to stop cheating all of the is’s traps are used to catch cheaters like Leo’s character most I students don’t cheat because they are bad people they cheat because they lack confidence they are scared that they’re going to fail and then they get desperate and resort to listening to these tricks and cheats and hacks and the most fascinating thing is this movie is a true story he now actually works for the FBI and credit card companies have paid him millions of dollars to help prevent future criminals taking advantage of the system if you believe that you’re good enough and you don’t cheat The Examiner is going to give you your real score on test day and you’ll be rewarded with a new life in a new country getting paid way more than you currently are you are more than capable of doing that you just have to show them made it across didn’t die I’m going to give you the the most common idioms used by real band n students and for each idiom I’ll also give you a band n sample answer we’ve helped hundreds of students get a ban nine in the ielt speaking test and we took all of their practice tests and analyzed them using Ai and identified the most common idioms that they used and at the end of the video we’re going to show you the number of idioms that band n students actually use Hint it is much much lower than you think and reveal the biggest mistake that students make when it comes to idioms so that you can avoid that and improve your score so without further Ado let’s get into it so the first idiom is to bite the bullet bite as in to bite something and a bullet something that you put in a gun to bite the bullet what to bite the bullet means is to do something difficult or unpleasant with bravery so you don’t want to do something something very very difficult or unpleasant but you do it anyway you’re brave and you do it so where does this come from well this actually comes from the battlefield from war so many many years ago if you had a wound if you were shot or stabbed or whatever it is and you needed a very unpleasant procedure from the doctor there wasn’t any anesthetic there wasn’t any painkillers so what they would do is they would give you a bullet and tell you to bite down on that bullet I don’t know if this helps or not but that is where it comes from an understanding where idioms comes from really helps you remember them and use them properly so let’s pick a real question and I’ll answer it and use to bite the bullet in the answer I didn’t really want to study law but I was the only one in my family ever to get high grades in their a levels so my mother sat me down one day and said it’s either medicine or law so I went to a hospital on work experience and fainted when I saw the sight of blood I’m too squeamish for medicine so I decided just to bite the bullet and study law now some common cations of this idiom are to bite the bullet it’s normally to bite the bullet not bite the bullet I decided to bite the bullet I chose to bite the bullet and I had to bite the bullet and the correct pronunciation of this is to stress or emphasize bite bite the bullet not bite the bullet the next idiom is a piece of cake a piece of cake means that something is very easy and we often use this when we are reassuring someone who is worried about something so if my little boy was worried about his math test I would say don’t worry it’s going to be a piece of cake you don’t always use it to help someone or give advice to someone we normally talk about it just when we are describing something that is simple that is easy to do where does this come from well there’s quite a debate about where this comes from but the easiest way to think about a piece of cake is that it’s Pleasant it is easy to eat a piece of cake it is a very nice thing you might also hear the idiom it was a cake walk that means walking around looking at cakes a very pleasant night easy thing to do to be honest compared to practicing law teaching English is a piece of cake to give you a concrete example to qualify as a lawyer takes around 6 years of study and work experience to qualify as an English teacher only takes 6 weeks the pay obviously isn’t as good but the students the clients are much nicer and friendlier a common mistake that we hear a lot with a piece of cake is to drop the article to just say it’s piece of cake if you make that mistake it’s not going to improve your ey out score it’s going to lower your ey out score so don’t just pick these and use them without really learning them properly and again the pronunciation is a piece of cake you’re stressing piece rather than cake next is a very very old idiom kill two birds with one stone what this means is to accomplish two goals with with one action and this actually comes from Greek mythology it is thousands of years old and the story of Icarus where they killed a bird with one stone but they were able to get the feathers that’s one goal and to build wings to fly out of a cave that’s another goal but a good way to remember this is just think of something in your everyday simple life and think of one action that you take that achieves two different goals so let’s get a real question and I will use this idiom in the answer yes I actually bought my wife a diamond ring last Christmas so my wife’s birthday is in November and Christmas is obviously in December so I decided to kill two birds with one stone and buy one present for her birthday and Christmas and she was very happy with that because she got one nice expensive ring rather than two less expensive gifts a common mistake that we see with this one is to use kill in its present simple form rather than killed k i l l e d in its past form so if you’re talking about the past just like I did in that question or that answer I used killed two birds with one stone not kill two birds with one stone you could also say I decided to kill two birds with one stone or I chose to kill two birds with one stone just to make sure that you’re not taking the idiom and inserting it into the sentence without thinking about tense without thinking about grammar the next idiom is to let the cat out of the bag to let the cat out of the bag is to reveal a secret Often by mistake where does this come from well think about it if you had a cat in a bag and it was let out of the bag would it be easy to put that cat back into the bag it would be very very difficult and this is the same with Secrets once you reveal a secret once it is out there into the world you cannot take it back so that is where to let the cut out of the bag comes from if you count watches as jewelry then yes for my last birthday my 40th birthday my wife bought me a very special watch that I’ve been looking at and Desiring for for many many years uh the funny story about that is that my credit card and my wife’s credit card are the same so whenever my wife bought it it pinged on my phone and I got an alert from my favorite watch Boutique and it was the exact amount of money that was for this watch cuz I’ve been looking at this watch for ages so the phone kind of let the cat out of the bag a little bit but it was still a very nice gift and a nice surprise the pronunciation of this is to stress or emphasize cat and bag let the cat out of the bag let the cat out of the bag common mistake we see with this one is again missing out the Articles let cut out of bag you shouldn’t take the idiom and then say it you know partly you shouldn’t use it incorrectly a lot of students believe that if you just use idms and it doesn’t matter if you use them correctly or not you’re going to get bonus points and you’re going to get a high score again if you use it incorrectly you’re lowering your score not improving your score the next itm is don’t put all your eggs in one basket what this means is don’t concentrate all of your resources or all of your effort into one single area in order to minimize risk where does this come from well quite literally if you had lots of chickens lots of hens that were laying eggs and you put all of your eggs into one basket if you drop the basket all of your eggs would be destroyed we often use this to talk about our careers or work or investment strategy for example you know don’t put all of your money into one stock don’t put all your eggs into one basket put them into many many different places and then you’re minimizing risk it’s basically about diversification probably not because with the developments in AI recently I don’t think there are going to be I Els teachers or even any teachers in the future I think it would be very foolish for me to put all my eggs in one basket and just hope for the best and hope that IELTS and teaching lasts forever but honestly I don’t think it will the next idiom is once in a blue moon which means it happens rarely so you’re talking about frequency you’re talking about how often something happens and this thing happens rarely probably less than once a year this is quite a literal idiom because literally it is rare to have a blue moon but it does happen sometimes this refers to I think it happens once every 3 years or once every two or 3 years you will have two moons in one calendar month so once in a blue moon means something that doesn’t happen very often I used to go out nearly every night but since I’ve had kids it’s really once in a blue moon most of my friends have either settled down with kids like me or they have moved away so it’s quite rare to have an occasion where a group of friends are all together at the same time uh sometimes at Christmas when a lot of our friends visit Ireland uh during the Christmas period or in the summertime when a lot of our friends have time off I might go out but it is quite a rare occasion these days a common mistake that we see with once in a blue moon is trying to use it when it’s not really appropriate to use it a lot of students have been taught that you know if you use this idiom and it’s really easy to use because it’s talking about frequency um which is quite a you know a basic function of English uh that it will automatically bump your score it’s kind of like easy points students will insert this in in unusual situations remember you’re only using it when the examiner asks you how often do you do that this might come up in part one it might come up part two it might come up in part three but probably part one but if you don’t get a question how often do you do something you don’t have to use it you won’t get a lower score because you didn’t use once in a blue moon only use it when you can use it and when you are actually talking about something that happens very very rarely like once every few years the next one I’m going to give you two edms in one burn the Midnight Oil and burn the the candle at both ends they have similar meanings but are slightly different so I’m going to answer a question and use both of them in the same answer so burn the Midnight Oil is talking about things that are difficult you’re working hard on something you are literally sitting up at midnight working on something so we would often talk about work or studying and burning the midnight oil that means that you’re working very very hard at something doesn’t have to be at nighttime just means that you are working very very hard on something and where does this come from well before electricity our main source of light would have been oil lamps so you would have lit an oil lamp and used that oil so if you were burning the midnight oil it means that you weren’t sleeping it means that you were working at midnight meaning you’re working very hard burning the midnight oil now to burn the candle at both ends has a similar meaning but slightly different burning the midnight oil doesn’t mean that it’s a bad thing it isn’t negative per se it’s quite positive you’re you’re working hard on something burning the candle at both ends means that you’re working too much you are exhausting yourself and where does this come from it actually comes from France where they would like everywhere else use candles for light but if you were an aristocrat if you were very very rich you wouldn’t burn the candle on one end you would turn the candle horizontal and you would light both ends and what this meant was that you were wasteful that you were rich and you were just wasteful for Waste sake but over the years the meaning has changed to mean that you are working too hard and you were exhausting yourself it’s often used in the context of people who work very hard so they spend a lot of time and energy in work and then they party too much after after so it’s you know typical lawyer for example um or a banker who is working very very hard all day and then going out all night they’re burning the candle at both ends and they’re going to exhaust themselves yes I used to burn the candle at both hands I had a very much work hard play hard attitude uh because I was a lawyer lawyers are expected to work you know 80 to 100 hours a week but we would often go out to bars and restaurants after after work to blow off steam and to de-stress um which isn’t really sustainable um now I do still burn the Midnight Oil I I work very very hard on my career but you’re more likely to find me tucked up in bed by 900 p.m. than to be out party the next idiom is at the drop of a hat and this means to do something quickly immediately and without any hesitation so without even thinking about it without debating it in your mind you just do it where does this come from well many many years ago hundreds of years ago everybody wore hats if you look at pictures from a long time ago you’ll see that everyone in this country anyway wore a hat and if people were going to fight or run a race or compete in some way what people would do is they would take their hat off and when they dropped their hat that was the sign that the fight was going to begin or the race was about to begin so people would drop their hat you started immediately without thinking about it we actually rent our home we could afford to buy a home but we really value our independence and freedom if you own a home you’re kind of stuck in that location because it can take a very long time to sell that home but if you rent you can move anywhere at the drop of a hat the next idiom is cry over spil milk and this means not to waste time thinking about something thinking negative thoughts about something that you cannot change that has already happened where does this come from literally if you spill milk is there any point in crying about spilling milk no you can’t put it back into the bottle you can’t change that scenario the thing I dislike most about my job is dealing with people who only focus on the negative especially when they are given negative feedback that could be students that could be employees but people who make mistakes and don’t learn from them so for example I give a lot of feedback on student essays and some students see mistakes and they’re like great now I know what my mistakes are and I can improve other students will just cry about it for days and they’ll cry about it for weeks be like I’m going to fail it’s like there’s no point crying over spelled milk you made the mistake now I learn from it the next IDM is you can’t judge a book by its cover this means that you should not judge people or things based on their appearance normally people but can also include things the origin of this is quite obvious if you go into a Bookshop you will see lots of covers of books but you actually need to read the book to judge it you can’t go in and say I don’t like that book I think it will be terrible based on the cover because you actually have to read it to understand it and we apply this to people you can’t judge a person based on their appearance very rarely actually because I’m a firm believer in you can’t judge a book by its cover and we should judge people not on what clothes they wear and their appearance but by their character and the things that come out of their mouth my wife firmly disagrees with this because she says someone who gets millions of views on YouTube shouldn’t be wearing the same shirt every day so she does encourage me to go buy new clothes but I do it begrudgingly the next one is don’t count your chickens before they hatch another chicken idiom and this means don’t assume something will be successful or something will happen until it actually occurs so you shouldn’t assume that watching this video and using these idioms is going to guarantee a band nine you should actually go and do the test and see if you get a band nine don’t count your chickens now the full version of of this idiom is don’t C your chickens before they hatch but English speakers normally just say don’t CCH your chickens you can use either of them in the test but I think it’s just simpler and easier to remember and use the shorter form don’t C your chickens this actually comes from asap’s fables about a milkmaid this milkmaid was going to use milk to make butter and then she was going to sell the butter to buy eggs and then she was going to hatch the eggs and raised chickens and then sell the chickens to buy a new dress unfortunately it didn’t work out she didn’t get her dress so don’t count your chickens I prefer to buy luxury watches than jewelry I’m not sure if you could count a luxury watch as jewelry but the thing about jewelry is like diamond rings necklaces things like that often as soon as you buy them as soon as you walk out of the Jewelers um they lose value whereas many of the watches that I’ve purchased have actually gone up in value I don’t want to count my chickens but if I were to sell these watches I probably would make a lot more money on them than I paid for them so that’s why I prefer luxury time pieces over simple jewelry the next itm is to go the extra mile and this means to put more effort or to work harder than what is required so for example instead of making an ielt idian video where I just say all the idioms and go through them quickly I go the extra mile and talk about the origin and give you example sentences this is actually a Biblical reference from The Sermon on the Mount and in the Bible it says if anyone forces you to go one mile go with them two miles and many people interpret this as you should always do more than is required of you my wife does the vast majority of the cooking not because she’s necessarily a better cook but the thing I love about my wife is in whatever she does she goes the extra mile so if I was cooking steak I would just cook the steak and eat it with a little bit of bread but my wife will have like three different sauces and balsamic vinegar and two different olive oils and four different types of potato she really does go the extra mile when it comes to cooking in our house the next idiom is raining cats and dogs this is very useful because it is used to describe the weather and the weather will often come up uh during part one or part two or part three and it describes very very heavy rain to rain cats and dogs now there’s a bit of a debate about where this comes from it’s quite unusual but the one that I find that helps you remember it and is a very Vivid image is back in the day many many years ago countries and cities didn’t have the same drainage that we have these days and when it would rain hard when it would rain heavy the um city streets would flood what are the most common pets in most countries cats and dogs so those cats and dogs would actually drown and whenever the storm was over people would go into the streets and there would be cats and dogs lying lifeless all over the place they had drowned it’s not a very nice image but you’ll definitely remember it yes and no uh where I live is one of the most beautiful places in the world uh we’re spoiled for choice in terms of outdoor activities and beautiful places like on our doorstep we have beaches forests Lakes mountains but unfortunately it’s Ireland so it’s normally raining cats and dogs so you don’t really get to eny enjoy it a big mistake that I see with this one is getting the cats and dogs mixed up and saying dogs and cats um when students don’t really learn this properly and just see a list of idioms they go into the test they’re like it was raining dogs and cats a native English speaker or someone with a very high level of English will spot this immediately and it is basically you holding up a sign saying I’m not very good at English so make sure you use it properly I also see students using the wrong tense of rain so it rained cats and dogs if you’re talking about um the past to talk about something that normally happens so it’s normally raining cats and dogs or it rains cats and dogs you need to understand the verb tense of the word rain and use it correctly again if you’re saying it’s raining cats and dogs yesterday that’s incorrect and it’s a big flly bag to The Examiner that you don’t really know what you’re talking about the next itm is to throw in the towel so a towel that you use to dry yourself that you after a shower and this means to stop something that is either very very difficult or has become impossible to throw in the towel and this comes from boxing so if guys are boxing and one boxer is getting so beat up that it is impossible for them to continue you know continuing is not going to result in Victory it is going to result in them getting badly injured their Corner their trainer will throw a towel into the ring and whenever a towel is thrown into the ring the referee stops it immediately to throw in the towel as you can tell from looking at me no I don’t have a very healthy diet I do try I normally get up in the morning and have a healthy breakfast and have a healthy lunch but it’s so so easy just to throw in the towel when you get home after A Hard Day’s work and you know your wife has a beautiful meal prepared there’s a bottle of wine on the table and your kids half eaten chocolate is lying all around the kitchen so um I do quite well most of the day and then fail in the evenings the next DM is cross that bridge when you come to it people often say we will or we’ll cross that bridge when we come to it or I will I’ll cross that bridge when I come to it and what this means is to deal with a problem or a situation when it actually occurs in the future not to worry about something that has not happened yet so imagine you are out for a walk and someone starts talking about a bridge that is miles away and they’re worrying about Crossing that bridge you would say Let’s cross that bridge when we come to it so where this comes from is you know many many years ago Bridges weren’t free and they weren’t reliable so often people would collect tolls collect taxes to cross a bridge or the bridge wasn’t very sturdy and Crossing that bridge could result in you falling off or the bridge collapsing and you dying so it’s talking about an unpleasant or difficult situation that is coming up in the future but you shouldn’t worry about that you know we’ll worry about that when we get there let’s just focus on the here and now it’s not something I really like to think about because in the back of my mind I know I teachers and all educators are doomed because AI is going to replace them and why would a student hire a human that is not as good as a machine that can do it at half the price or a fraction of the price and do it much more effectively um you know we’ll cross that bridge when we come to it um but I don’t think it’s that far away but in the meantime I’m just going to enjoy teaching for as long as I can next we have two Roman idioms or idioms that originate from the city of Rome Rome obviously was one of the greatest Empires that the world has ever seen and it has a huge influence on the English language and a huge number of languages to this day and the first one is Rome wasn’t builing in a day and this means that significant accomplishments so to accomplish something big a big goal takes time it takes a long time to achieve something significant so back in the day many many years ago Rome was the greatest city in the world but it was built over centuries it took a very very very long time to build Rome into the greatest city in the world and we often use this when some someone is trying to get us to do something too quickly um so if somebody said to me you know you need to have the best biggest uh YouTube channel in the world well Rome wasn’t built in a day we’ll do it one video at a time it’s often used as well to console someone who is feeling bad about not achieving something so you know if my little boy was like we lost a football match you know I’m not very good at football Rome wasn’t built in a day you know you will get better at football but you won’t get better at football right now you need to keep working consistently hard into the future and then you will be a footballing superstar which he wants to be the thing I hate about social media is the fact that these companies have so much power to change their systems and change their algorithms but they decide not to for money so to give you an example from my work and my job job uh to become a famous ielt YouTuber is actually quite easy all you have to do is come up with some clickbait titles like hacks and tricks and predictions and things like that and put a pretty girl on the thumbnail um but that doesn’t mean that the person making that video knows anything about I it just means that they know how to trick the algorithm you know I understand Rome wasn’t built in a day that you know it takes time to fix platform forms and change algorithms but these are you know sometimes trillion dooll companies if they wanted to get these people off their platform they could but they decide not to because popular is more important than you know educating the public properly the next one is When in Rome do what the Romans do but this is often shortened to When in Rome so you’ll very rarely hear native English speakers say when in Rome do what the Romans do just say when in Rome and what this means is that when you are visiting a foreign place when you are a tourist or a visitor in a country that you’re not from you should respect the customs and I respect the religion the culture the customs of that place and this comes from the Catholic faith where Milan and Rome had different different days for fasting so in many religions you have fast days where you don’t eat anything and in Milan it was on a Sunday but in Rome it was on a Saturday so they were talking about like when do you fast do you fast on a Saturday or fast on a Sunday when in Rome you should respect their culture and you should fast on their fast day when you’re home do it normally no I actually hate it and it makes me feel very uncomfortable um I’m from Ireland and in Ireland it is quite rare for someone to take your photo and if they want to take your photo it is rude to just take it without asking you so it’s customary just to say do you mind if I take a photo and if somebody says yes you can take it but if they say no you should definitely not take it my wife who is from Vietnam in Vietnam they have a very very different culture they are taking photos all of the time and they will think nothing of just taking a photo of you and if I get angry with someone for taking a photo they’ll think that I’m the problem and I’m being rude so you know when in Rome so now you know all of these different idioms that ban n students use does that mean that you can use them in the I test and automatically get a higher score yes and no and this is the most important point in the video if you don’t watch this bit you probably will mess up your test fail waste a lot of money please do watch it so what I’m about to say is very different from most ielt YouTubers and most ielt teachers so let’s just look at data and facts none of this is my opinion all the things I’m about to tell you are straight facts so when we analyzed all of our band n students who got band n in the real ielt speaking test what were the number of idioms that they actually used and the number is quite shocking 1.2 on average this means that many of them didn’t use idioms at all most of them maybe used one or two but there was quite a variation and it was quite rare for students to use say more than four or five why is this and why are many of you you know typing in the comments right now that is wrong you must use idioms to get a higher score let me explain so if you go to the official band descriptors for ielt speaking you’ll find them online what it says for lexical resource which is basically a fancy way of saying vocabulary for band seven is uses some less common and idiomatic vocabulary and shows some awareness of style and collocation with some inappro roate choices so what you’ll hear from most I YouTubers is you must use idioms to get a seven or above and this is a misconception it is a misunderstanding of the official marketing criteria most I YouTubers have not been examiners and they don’t really know what these actually mean let’s look up the dictionary definition for idiomatic what does idiomatic actually mean mean because most YouTubers and most students think that idiomatic means idioms just use lots of idioms you’ll get about seven eight or n does it actually mean that well if we look at Cambridge dictionary the definition of idiomatic is containing Expressions that are natural and correct and this is what idiomatic actually means for the purposes of a idiomatic means natural English and in other words English that a native English speaker would use natural idiomatic expressions it does contain idioms but it also contains slim phrasal verbs informal words colloquialisms and many other forms of natural English because if you are studying English in school and you’re just using textbooks that is not the most natural English that you will hear it’s only when you move to a native english- speaking country and start copying these idiomatic phrases and expressions that you sign like a native English speaker and that is what the examiners are listening out for they’re not listening for how many idioms did you use they are listening to your whole performance and then thinking are they using some idiomatic expressions or not and that includes idioms But it includes many many other things so have I just wasted your time with this lesson you you’re telling us that you should learn these idioms and then you’re telling us not to learn these idioms so let me tell you what we tell our VIP students when we’re teaching them vocabulary we use something called the birthday cake analogy or the birthday cake method if you think about a birthday cake it looks very fancy and it looks very very impressive but if you think about the ingredients of a fancy looking birthday cake they are the most basic Foods the most basic ingredients in the World things like milk sugar flour water butter these are things that can be found in any shop in any country in the world they are simple they are basic most birthday cakes are made up 98 97% of the simple basic ingredients but the sprinkles on top make it look fancy that’s the exact approach that we teach our VIP students 979 8% of the words that you use are going to be simple everyday basic words because that is how the English language functions that is how any language functions then you can use some high level words you could use some idioms you should use some phrasal verbs you could sprinkle those on top but it’s going to actually be quite rare when you use them the examiner is not looking for you to use them in every single sentence now if you go back in this video and listen to to uh my answers even though I tried to use idms in every single answer if you broke down the words of all of those answers 90 95% of the words that I use are simple basic everyday words remember the birthday cake analogy so it is great having idioms in your toolkit and you can use them appropriately and accurately but you don’t have to use them you know if you are building a house would you rather have a massive toolkit that allows you to do many many things or would you just like to have a hammer teaching you these idioms is about expanding the vocabulary you know how to use and the key word there is use you are not learning vocabulary you are learning to use vocabulary effectively please please please do not do two things number one do not memorize these idioms and try and insert them force them into every single answer you are going to fail because it will be inappropriate you’ll use them too much and you will use them incorrectly you know the words will be correct incorrect the collocations will be incorrect and the pronunciation probably will be incorrect try to incorporate them into your everyday use of the English language use them properly and use them appropriately that is the difference between a b six student and a b n student the second thing you should not do is learn lists of idioms the reason why this is a very very long video and why I’m talking a lot and explaining all of this to you and why I didn’t just give you a list of idioms and just rhyme them off and show you examples was to demonstrate to you that you should use them appropriately I could not take those idioms and do a speaking test and use all of them in the speaking test in fact when I did the speaking test I got a b nine because I’m a native English speaker of course but I used zero idioms that is because I’m not being judged on my use of idioms alone I’m being judged on all of the words that I’m be that I’m using not just the fancy highlevel idioms well done for making it this far in the video by this stage you should be ready to start taking some practice questions and start practicing at home and we’re going to give you more than a thousand of them in The Following part of this video but not only that we’re not just going to give you a bunch of questions we’re going to show you how to use practice questions at home to really really improve your score so don’t just skip ahead in the video and find the link and download all the questions and start practicing watch the next part of the video that is going to show you what not to do how not to practice and how to practice kind of simple dos and don’t for practicing at home it’s really going to accelerate your speaking ability and improve your score in a much shorter period of time let’s start off with the don’ts these are things that you should not do and these are things that band 7 eight and N students do not do when they’re using IP speaking questions number one don’t get overwhelmed sometimes when we give students hundreds and hundreds of questions they get completely overwhelmed and they think that their job is to analyze and look at and practice every single question and they need to be aware of all the different questions you do not need to do that don’t look at hundreds of questions and think that you must have an answer for all of them or be aware of all of them just use them in the way that we’re going to show you in this video so important don’t get overwhelmed number two don’t worry if you see a topic in there that you’re not an expert in remember that it is a speaking test it is not a knowledge test or an intelligence test number three you should not try to prepare answers and memorize them and try to improve your speaking score in that way I examiners are trained to spot this and they can easily spot it and what they will do is they will ask you other questions that you were not prepared for and they will base your score on those unprepared questions because IELTS is not a test of memorization because it is testing communication you don’t use memorization when you’re communicating with people in any language so don’t try to prepare answers for any of them number four don’t try and anticipate the different topics that come up if you go through all of these you will see that there are no common topics you could be asked about anything so you’ll see lots of things online uh but you know YouTube videos saying these are the common topics that might come up or here are the predicted topics that might come up this is just to get you to click on those videos none of those are actually real so don’t try and do that this is a big one don’t compare your performance with so-called band n students that you find on YouTube this is going to damage your confidence and it is also highly misleading now not to bash any other channels and not doing that or I’m not going to mention specific channels but just looking at those you know band n mock speaking tests or band eight or whatever they are the vast majority of them either are not actually band n or band8 or the people giving feedback are not real teachers those videos are incredibly popular so what’s happening is companies are hiring fake teachers and then hiring models and actresses is to make I videos abide speaking but none of them are accurate so if you’re comparing yourself to those people it’s not a fair comparison and if you’re watching too many of those videos you might be getting bad advice from unqualified teachers and the last don’t is something that a lot of students don’t really think about don’t take these questions and look constantly for feedback so some students what they do is they’ll look at the questions and then they’ll ask the teachers or some online services to just constantly do mock speaking tests and constantly do feedback tests with them and give them lots and lots of feedback those things are important you should be practicing you should be getting feedback but the real Improvement comes after you get feedback so if a teacher gives you feedback for example on pronunciation or fluency or grammar or vocabulary doing another mock speaking test is not actually going to improve those things at all there is such a thing as too much feedback so don’t take these and just do lots and lots and lots of feedback sessions work on improving the things you need to work on and you’re going to see far more Improvement if you work on your weaknesses okay let’s get into the things that b 7 8 and N students do when they are using these practice questions okay so Chris here this is how you find the article with all of the practice questions in it I’m going to show you how to access them in three steps so step one what you’re going to do is you’re going to go to Google and you’re going to type in ielt speaking once you have ielt speaking up in Google you’re going to scroll through all the different websites and go to is Advantage so it might be on the first page it might be on the second page probably be in and around the middle of the first page you’re just going to click on I speaking how to get a band seven or above I Advantage you’re going to click on that that’s step one one of the big things successful students do is they treat each part of the speaking test separately so part one part two and part three are very very different different types of questions and different types of answers and the examiners are thinking about different things when they are assessing you so what you should not do is just take some part one questions a part two question some part three questions and then try and answer them all in the same way B 7 8 and N student don’t do that keep watching this video but at the end of the video I’ll give you some links so that you can the differences between the different parts it’s very very important number two band eight and N students understand the marking criteria it is far more important that you use these questions to understand the marking criteria IIA than just to go through all of these questions use the questions to test yourself to practice to think about your performance and think about how are you doing in relation to the markeing criteria that’s the only thing that matters because that’s the only thing that the examiners are thinking about on test day and we’ll show you how to do that when we give you the VIP technique at the end number three get your speaking checked at least once by a real IELTS professional now I’m not saying that because I want you to buy our services we’re normally completely sold out I’m saying this because it is so easy to spot if you’re a real I professional an ex examiner it’s so easy to spot little things that the student is doing that will lead to failure and it’s so easy to fix these things now many of you don’t want to spend any money on this but it is a lot lot cheaper than failing your test and the difference between failing your test and doing a mock speaking test with a real professional is the real test costs a lot more and you get no feedback if you do a mock speaking test with a real professional it’s much much cheaper and they are going to give you real actionable feedback you’re going to know what’s going on what your weaknesses are what your score is and how to improve your score but please be careful most people calling themselves ex examiners are not really X examiners and your local I teacher who has very little experience and has never been an examiner probably will not give you very good feedback it is better to find a source that you trust that you know that they’re real X examiners and they really know what they’re talking about in general the more expensive ones are going to be more reliable the cheaper ones are going to be unreliable we do provide that service but we’re normally sold out if you want more information get in touch with us but before you say oh my God he’s only making this video to try and make money from us I’m going to show you how you can get real feedback accurate feedback for free at home at zero cost this is the same Technique we give our VIP students it is extremely effective but you’re going to need a few things so we’re going to go through it step by step step two it should bring you to this page on our website ielt speaking in 2023 this page has a lot of information on it what you’re going to do is you’re going to scroll down and you’re going to keep scrolling you’re going to keep scrolling you’re going to keep scrolling until you get to I speaking topics now let’s go back to the video and I’ll show you how to click on the article you need in step three first of all you’re going to need practice questions real practice questions we’re going to show you how to access those at the end of the video so you’ve got those the next thing is you’re going to need either a phone or a laptop you’re going to need some kind of electronic device that will record your voice most laptops most phones will be able to do this please don’t ask should you use a laptop or should you use a phone it doesn’t matter just pick something that you have that you can use to record your voice the next thing you need to do is download some kind of recording app or program to your phone or to your laptop now all you have to to do is go into your app store or Google I’m not going to name specific apps because they change all the time and it’s so easy for you to just find this yourself the next thing you want to do is sign up for a service that automatically transcribes your voice so let me give you some examples but again these change over time do your own research so on uh an Apple phone in the notes function you can just press the transcribe button and it will transcribe what you say there’s also a service that you can use on your computer called otter.ai they have a free version of that software that will record your voice and transcribe it but as I said before do your own research find a tool and you’ll be able to get this done but you do need one to record your voice so you can listen back and one to transcribe it there might be some apps out there that do both if there are put it in the comments let people know what you find and help each other okay so that’s all the tech set up done next what you’re going to do is you’re going to pick one part of the test either part one part two or part three don’t do a full test just pick one part and focus on one thing at a time so for part one you’re going to use about nine questions part two you’re only going to use one question and for part three you’re going to pick three or four questions make sure that you don’t study these questions we want to recreate create the real test as much as possible don’t look at easy questions and try and prepare answers all right just pick questions from the list don’t look at them don’t study them just pick them look at each question and answer it as if an examiner is asking you that question so read each question and answer it as if you are in the real test if you mess up don’t worry about it this is just practice next I want you to download the official marketing criteria I’ll put a link below but if you just Google speaking marking criteria it should come up on Google as well what you’re going to do is you’re going to listen back and you’re going to think about your performance you’re going to read the marketing criteria and think about which band you should get based on your own performance if you don’t understand the marketing criteria you don’t understand the bands I’ll put a link at the end of the video that will show you in more detail what the Bands been as you’re listening back think about your biggest weaknesses so if you were um uh you couldn’t really answer the questions fluency is an issue if you can’t understand anything that you say pronunciation is probably an issue or if you’re making lots of vocabulary mistakes or grammar mistakes that’s your biggest issue the great thing about this technique is when you’re in the real test you’re unaware of the mistakes that you are making but when you’re listening by and just focusing on your mistakes and focusing on your performance you’ll be able to pick out things that you were completely unaware of and you’ll be able to fix those things and that takes us on to our next Point you’re going to look at the transcription whatever service you used that will write out your answers and you’re going to analyze that in more detail so the first thing you’re going to analyze is did you actually answer the question look at the question look at the transcription did you actually answer the question and did you develop your answer enough you can also analyze your fluency if there are lots of um and as and pauses in the transcription if you’re jumping around a lot then fluency might be an issue for you if the transcription cannot understand most of the words like the words are completely different then that is a pronunciation issue you can also analyze your vocabulary did you repeat too many words are you trying to use words that you don’t really understand did you struggle with that topic because of a limited vocabulary and then with grammar what you can do is you can put that transcript into something like grammarly for example or there are lots of other options and it will highlight all of the grammar mistakes that you made and you’ll be able to identify your key grammar mistakes for example if you are using the wrong article before every line you need to work on articles so this technique is not actually about improving your speaking yet this technique is to give you feedback as I said before feedback doesn’t improve your speaking instantly but what you do after does so for example if you look at the transcript and you messed up every article being aware of that is just the first step you’re not going to magically uh improve your speaking by just being aware of that but you will magically improve if you work on those things and some of you watching right now you might be thinking well that’s a lot of work yes it is but it’s a lot less work than going and watching a bunch of tips and tricks videos believing that they’re going to help you and then failing the test over and over again and not knowing why that is a lot of work this is actually a lot less stressful because you will be in control and you can do it all for free at home at your own pace again we’re here to give you things that are actually going to improve your score not tips and tricks that make you happy so step three you should be here I speaking topics you’re going to scroll down and you will see a link I speaking topics The Ultimate Guide click on that and it will give you access to all of the hundreds and hundreds and hundreds and hundreds of questions that you will need for your speaking practice well done you made it to the last part of the video so we’re going to do something we’ve never done before so you’ve probably seen that we do lots of mock speaking tests here in our studio and but this is the first time that we’ve brought a student back so before we had this student who got a band eight but I thought that she was actually capable of a much much higher band a band nine which is a huge Improvement so she went through a lot of the same lessons in this video that you have just went through and I want to show you the massive Improvement that she made just by following the steps in this video so without further Ado let’s look and see if she did get her band nine let’s start off by talking about exercise how often do you exercise when you talk about exercise exercise I don’t really exercise that much but then I do other forms of exercise if you can take that into the category exercise so I like to dance I like to do yoga I like to go for a walk so I’m sure that’s included in exercise so if you talk about that I think every day at least an hour so yeah I do like to take care of my body and I do like to invest in my body what’s your favorite exercise so I think I’d like to say dance because it’s it’s funny because it’s mindless you don’t realize you’re exercising when you’re dancing it’s just one hour of katharsis you you’re just going and sweating it out and you don’t realize that you worked out for an hour so yeah I think I’ll say dance are there any exercises you do not like I wouldn’t say I don’t like I do like lifting weights but it’s not one of my favorite part of the exercise it’s something which I find monotonous something which I find uh cumbersome something which I find boring so yes lifting weights do you prefer to exercise indoors or Outdoors M I think both when the weather allows then Outdoors but otherwise I’m more of an indoor person I don’t mind uh doing yoga every single day in my room I know like a lot of people don’t enjoy that they need an environment they need a setup they need to go to the gym which is also indoors but uh I do enjoy indoors and I do enjoy just exercising in my home in my room and that being said I also enjoy working out in uh outside facility as as well like I like going for walks I like going for a run so yeah I think both now let’s talk about weekends how do you normally spend your weekends weekends I usually have more classes I’m a yoga teacher so my weekends are not uh a normal weekend for other people where they go out for lunches dinners and celebrate for me weekends are more heavy on work but uh if I can say that Monday is my weekend or Tuesday is my weekend then I like to watch movies I really like watching Netflix and I like to spend time with my husband I also like cooking and that’s the time which I get for myself so yes I think I like spending it in the house and really giving that time to myself and my husband do you like to spend your weekends in your local area or do you like to travel so it depends it’s both if I have a lot of time to myself in the sense if I have 2 days off or 3 days off I like to go out on a vacation like a mini trip so I like to go out probably do like a picnic go out to a park or maybe explore any other Countryside any other city but if it’s a short duration if it’s only a day then probably spend it in the house like I mentioned earlier are there any interesting things to do in your local area on the weekend yes there are a lot of coffee shops and there’s a coffee shop right beneath my house so which is very popular in London it’s called Gales so uh yeah there are a lot of nice places around my neighborhood but I wouldn’t say that I like going to those places because they’re very uh familiar I would like to go to places which are a little away so I would like to travel a little bit and enjoy the entire journey of reaching a place but yes my neighborhood is also quite uh friendly and social do you prefer to go out or stay in at the weekend so like I mentioned earlier if it’s a short weekend if it’s only a day and a half then staying in is better for me and because there are a lot of things that I need to finish so so I prefer staying in but if it is a longer weekend like in the sense you also have a Friday Saturday Sunday it’s a 3 days then I like to probably step out and probably explore other uh neighborhood cities and towns and Villages yeah now let’s talk about reading what was your favorite book when you were a child I can’t go back that far like when I was a child but I do remember somewhere in school probably towards the end of school I loved this book called many master many lives and I think I like to call myself an old SCH because when I was a child I still was very inclined toward spirituality and I really liked to know where we’ve come from where would we go after life before death you know those kind of things so uh after death after life uh so yes so that’s I think a book which rings a bell which I always get reminded of how often do you read so uh as of now my reading is very education based I have have a lot of books on yoga a lot of books on spirituality I’m very Less on fiction but I try and listen a little bit of fiction as well so I listen to the audiobooks it’s called audible so I have that app with me so I think when I’m on uh on the tube when I’m traveling it’s always the audible the book which I listen to and uh when I’m at home and when I’m trying to educate myself and I’m trying to know more about yoga then it’s probably I think overall an hour a day or maybe sometimes an hour in 2 days mhm do you like to read when on holiday um depends like I said most of my reading reading is education based so I need to dedicate time to it uh to just the Reading part of it but when I’m on vacation then I don’t write like to educate myself so it depends but sometimes I do like to read uh I think when I’m on a vacation I’d rather go for just listening to a book and do you prefer to read physical books or ebooks I think I prefer to read physical books I do have a Kindle as well but I think it’s been longest that I’ve touched it I like to have the feel of it to turn the pages in real so I do prefer a physical book now let’s talk about history do you enjoy watching TV shows about history yes but I’d like to put it uh this way I enjoy history but I like more of the crime-based histories there are a lot of events which have happened in certain countries certain part of towns so I like to know more about that I’m very heavy on crime based Series so yes and sometimes I also like to watch just the history bit as well like I’ve I think I’ve seen that entire show on Netflix called the Roman Empire or something like that but that’s also because it’s very heavy on drama it’s very heavy on the crime based as well so I think I do have an inclination towards that did you enjoy studying history in school as far as I remember I don’t really have a clear memory of reading or learning history in school which of course we did it was it was there in our textbooks but I think I grew more fonded and more interested in history way later when I started reading about civilizations when I started reading about different areas and regions and how the world was divided and then you know invaded by different uh uh kingships if I may can I can call that uh so yes it was only later that I started getting interested in history so it says uh describe a time when you were late for something so I’m usually a very punctual person and I can’t think think of any time when I was really late but there have been a few instances and one such instance was when I got really really late was for my work so I’m new to London and I’ve started teaching yoga over here it’s been about 6 to 8 months and I’m still understanding the tube work like how does the commute work over here how does the uh bus work over here and uh also the timings and everything so I’m still adjusting myself to the city so there was this one class I was supposed to reach after two classes which I was always already taking an angel so there was this one area called angel I was taking two classes over there right after that there was another class in another area and I was supposed to reach there this another class wasn’t mine so I was covering for someone and I got like a last moment uh notification that can you take this class and I accepted it really vouching for it and really saying that I will be there it was very disheartening for me because by the time I wrapped up the studio and I left from there I couldn’t make it on time and this is a big professional setback on my end because I shouldn’t be doing that that and what happened was that I went for uh I thought I’ll take a bus so I took a bus and uh by the time I was about to reach a certain location I realized I’ve taken the wrong bus so I got down and then I tried to take a train so by the time I tried to reach the next best train location I realized that the train station was shut that is when I started panicking I started uh looking for a cab and I started contacting my DM which is like a manager who’s always on call and checking if you on time or not and the DM told me this is really sad because it looks like I’ll not be able to reach on time and even 5 minutes late is late for students so they they started asking questions like why is it that the stain station is stopped like in the sense it’s shut because probably I think they weren’t believing me in that moment but uh later when I described everything I clicked pictures and finally they believed me and when I reached that’s the 2 minutes are up well done okay you’ve been telling me about a time when you were late we’re now going to discuss arriving late and being punctual right is it rude to be late if you’re meeting a friend in a way yes uh because I think I’ll say if you’re constantly late if you’re always late it’s a yes it is rude because you’re playing with someone’s time someone has specially dedicated their time to you and vice versa even you’ve dedicated your time to them so in a way yes because that person could have done a lot of things in that much time but also sometimes no because uh you never know what is that person going through I mean in the sense uh it’s it’s a friend right it’s not a profession sometimes I’ve had my friends complaining that AA it’s all right I mean you can chill because oh we’re just meeting for a coffee so it’s okay if they get a little bit late if it’s only like 10 15 minutes it’s fine what should happen to people if they are consistently late for work well I think it’s a big no because you’re answerable for a lot of people and you have to deliver a job a product or something in that profession and if you get late it’s not only you who’s uh suffering but it’s also the entire company who’s suffering because of you so I think they need to learn how to manage their time well and there should be some kind of a repercussion for that so that they are being more careful and mindful in the future what can can people do to become more punctual okay so I have this trick which is um a lot of times I noticed that people who are constantly late they take the deadline as the deadline for example if they have to be somewhere at 10:00 they’ll think okay I have to be there at 10:00 I’d like to put it the other way I’ll say keep your time 15 minutes earlier say that you have to reach there by 9:45 or probably 9:30 if you have a habit of constantly being late that ways you’ll start early getting you’ll start getting ready earlier you’ll leave the place earlier your home earlier and probably you’ll be on time you can set a time alarm you can uh set a timer you can really make use of these things in order to be on time I think now let’s talk about work productivity mhm is it better to work for long interrupted periods of time or to take multiple small breaks H in my opinion I think to take many multiple breaks because uh it doesn’t matter how long you’re working if you’ve refreshed yourself and if you have come to your full capacity mental capacity to work even if you work in short bursts that could be more productive and uh yes I think that’s what I think about productivity are open plan offices good for productivity what do you mean by open plan offices so um some offices uh cubic have cubicles and they’re closed or offices are closed and then some offices are just tables in a big room and everyone can see each other working all right well it depends I’m not really sure how it works because uh either it works for them because uh it’s a very social environment you can relax and you’re not like really just into work because that can also play with your uh stress maybe but in a way also no because then you can get you have the chances to get distracted sooner and if you’re working in a closed environment then you can probably take out that small burst of time which I was talking about and just dedicate it to your work some people believe companies should move to a 4day week do you think this would improve overall productivity I think I’m a big advocate for that because I really feel there should be a good work life balance where you’re working and also you have time for yourself when you’re constantly only working which is like 6 days a week probably that that ways you don’t have time for yourself you don’t have time for your family you don’t have time for your hobbies and interests which plays a big role in your stress so if you have four days a week that means that you have you have more time for yourself and by default you’ll be able to focus on your work because you’ve uh been able to take care of other parts and uh categories in your life you know now let’s talk about AI in the workplace which jobs are most likely to be affected by AI in the future I’m not sure sure but I think uh maybe the film industry I feel that a lot of the editing will be taken care of by AI because I have noticed and I’ve come across a lot of people who are using only AI for editing on Instagram so that just rang a bell in my head because I thought o oh if that is the case then probably the film industry will be the one which will suffer because uh most of their jobs are done by human labor right so if AI takes over then it’ll make their jobs easier but also take away jobs from their hands if AI takes millions of people’s jobs in the future how will society change financially I’m not very sure because that will reduce uh the jobs for a lot of people but I also feel that um people will have more time to themselves and people will have more space to figure out the other kind of jobs that they should be doing so in a way a lot of work load if you look with a positive perspective a lot of workload will be taken away from them and will give them a lot more space to decide what do what would they want to do with their time and are there any positive consequences of AI replacing millions of workers I think this is very similar to what I just mentioned that yes you can look at it positively as well but I did mention that I’m not very sure how will it play financially on people but the positive side effect or positive effect can be that it can unburden or take away the burden from a lot of people and uh give them more space and time to utilize in another activities of their life so you’re hoping to get a b nine which is a very very high score what I will do is I’ll give you feedback on part one part two and part three of the test and then I’ll give you feedback on the four marking criteria so to get a band nine you need top marks in fluency and coherence grammar vocabulary and pronunciation so part one um what the examiner is looking for is for you to answer the question and develop it a little bit I think the key Hallmark of a of a band n candidate in part one is it’s like talking to a friend or it’s like talking to a colleague and that’s how it felt talking to you so you were able to answer each question naturally and develop them you had no problem talking um about any of those topics and I really like the way you used your own life and your own experiences in that so it didn’t feel like speaking to a robot who prepared answers it felt like talking to a real human being who’s at a very very high level of English I also threw in some more unusual uh topics in there and you were able to to cope with those those perfectly so part one I have no negative feedback all very very good part two is probably the most challenging part for a lot of students because it’s a monologue so you have to to speak for up up to 2 minutes what you did was you decided to choose a a real story from your own life that was a very good choice because it led to a very fluent coherent answer so it’s much easier to talk about an experience from your own life than it is to make up a story or to talk about something a little bit more abstract so we would always suggest to to students to try and choose something in part two related to your own life and then it’s much easier then to use vocabulary um and and grammar as well especially vocabulary because you’re talking about real things and real experiences and you weren’t trying to we would say fetch the language you weren’t thinking of the correct word or the correct grammar structure or the correct tense you were just talking very coherently and and naturally again and I didn’t have to encourage you to speak more um a problem with many students is they’ll speak for one minute minute or 1 minute 30 seconds and then you have to encourage them to speak I had to do the opposite I had to stop you which is which was very very good in my opinion uh part three is the most challenging part because these topics like arriving late work productivity AI in the workplace these are more abstract academic type type topics when you compare them to to part one and you did very very well what the examiner is looking for is development and answering the question then really developing it you did that multiple times by showing both sides of the argument by using examples sometimes you use real examples from your own life and you had no problem with with any of those topics the reason why towards the end I asked you more and more difficult questions is the examiner will think that you’re a very good candidate so they will ask you more and more difficult questions to see how you cope with them so even when I asked you um about societal changes in the future from AI like that is a very very difficult question many students in that position would just say I don’t know or that’s difficult or I have no idea you attempted the answer and you gave a very you know a coherent answer that’s related to that topic and you really developed it well you could see at the end that you were struggling a little bit with with those ideas but the thing to remember is that it is not an ideas test it is a test of your English and you did up you did really really well now let’s move on to your scores for each part so fluency and coherence we can break that down coherence is all about did you answer the question so if I asked you about is it rude to be late if you’re meeting a friend you talk about meeting a friend you don’t talk about being late for work for example um and every question that I asked you you answered exactly uh how it was supposed to be answered you really stuck to that topic the other part of coherence is development so did you develop your answer with explanations examples stories things like that for every part you did a really good job with that so full marks um for coherence fluency is not speaking quickly or not speaking slowly but really speaking without effort someone who is like a lower band like a bound six or a b seven even they will often be searching for the correct word to use or the correct am I using the correct grammar structure so they’ll have a lot of audible pauses uh things like that and they’ll also be trying to think of ideas because your English level is so high you pretty much never had to do that there was never any real pauses where I was like oh she’s trying she doesn’t really know that word and she’s trying to fetch that word from from her brain you spoke effortlessly about a range of different topics without any audible pauses really when I say without any audible pauses I’m talking about unnatural audible pauses because while I’m speaking now as a native English speaker and as an ises teacher I’m pausing sometimes that is natural unnatural is as I just said you’re like thinking oh what’s the way to say you know to say this you never do that so for fluency and coherence you would get a band nine you would get full Mark so that that’s native English speaker level um which is very very good for pronunciation um there’s two things that the examiner is thinking about pronunciation the first is the most important which is Clarity can I understand everything that you’re saying and I could understand 100% of what you were saying so first box is is Tick you no problem in that area the second is something called higher level uh pronunciation features and that those are things like intonation as your voice goes up and your voice goes down naturally at lower level students will speak very monotone like this everything is very flat whereas native speakers will go up and down in order to um convey meaning I can understand 100% of what you’re saying you’re using intonation at a very high level you’re using connected speech you’re using sentence stress word stress all very very naturally which allows me to understand you even more a lot of people um confuse a high pronunciation score with a British accent or an American accent or or an Irish accent The Examiner is not really thinking about how British you sound or how American you sound The Examiner is thinking about the clarity of your speech so you have an an Indian accent and you should be very proud of your your Indian accent but there’s some people when they speak with not just an Indian accent but any accent sometimes that accent will interfere with um the the The Listener ability to understand what you’re saying at no point does your accent interfere with with with what you’re saying you are from India and in India you guys speak very very quickly to each other it’s not a not a criticism it’s just naturally a lot a lot of you guys do speak like that would you would you agree yes I agree with that um and also being in a T situation when we’re nervous we speak a little bit more quickly now sometimes especially with with Indian students when you combine the accent with speaking very very quickly that can sometimes cause a problem um for the for the listener but it doesn’t with you you’re nervous a little bit sometimes and you do speak a little bit quickly um if you were doing the test soon I would suggest that that’s the one thing that you would just be careful of is if you go into the test very very very nervous and you speak really really quickly that could affect your pronunciation score slightly but I don’t think that’s I’m being overly cautious with my uh feedback you mixed up your V and W sounds a little bit um it’s very common with German speakers it’s very common with Indian speakers but it wasn’t to the extent where I couldn’t I didn’t understand what you were saying for example Spanish speakers will say video instead of V video I watch the video on YouTube and some German speakers will say I watched a video now that if it was extreme could lower your score but you had just a very slight um mix up between those two signs if every time you were trying to pronounce the you said W that would lower your score because that is a systematic error that just keeps happening every time you use that sound but it wasn’t the case at all with with you so you would get a b n for pronunciation the next is vocabulary so there’s two things that the examiner is thinking about when it comes to uh vocabulary the first is accuracy did you use the correct words basically or are you getting words mixed up so for example um you could say this is a phone which is correct um you could say this is an electronic device which is correct but phone would be a little bit more precise but we would say that this is a sitting device you know this this is a chair or if you got these mixed up it’s like I’m sitting on a phone like that is completely wrong so um you are using vocabulary correctly and precisely accuracy you have no problems there you’re also using a lot of topic specific vocabulary topic specific vocabulary is for example to talk about phones we would talk about a screen we would talk about the resolution of that screen we would talk about the memory and how many megabytes or gigabytes of the memory but we couldn’t use gigabytes to talk about a pen for example we couldn’t talk about the resolution of a pen and but we would talk about ink but we can’t use the word ink to talk about phone so these are very topic specific words as you can see no matter what topic we ask you about you are able to pull those topic specific words and that indicates that no matter what topic we ask you about you will be able to talk about that topic so that’s the second thing that’s your range so it’s not like you can only talk about arriving late but you can’t talk about AI you can talk about any topic so the range of your vocabulary is very very high and the accuracy of your vocabulary is very very high so you get a bad nine last but not least is grammar um so your grammar again is being assessed by accuracy and range the range of your grammar is very good you pick the most appropriate structures and tenses to use so as you can see what you do is you don’t just answer every question with the present simple tense for example you use the appropriate tense the appropriate structure to answer each question which indicates you have a very wide range of grammar now a lot of people think that to get a b nine for grammar the accuracy needs to be 100% % but that’s not actually true what it says in the official marking criteria is that you can have a few slips some examiners would listen to you and think yeah you made a few tiny little slips like this one however under exam conditions if you’re stressed you can often make little mistakes that you wouldn’t normally make and some examiners might think that you’re making a few too many of these small grammatical errors if that was the case where they thought that you were making a few too many small grammatical errors you would get a band eight not a band nine um for grammar but I think that you would be on the side of it just being a few slips where you would get a band nine so I think overall you probably would get a bond nine I think the lowest you would get would be an 8.5 overall but I would be quite confident that you would get a bond nine if you you had that performance thank you any questions oh well done thank you so much so I hope you enjoyed this video it was very very long but I hope that you will agree that it is going to really really improve your speaking score if you need more help with not just your speaking preparation but your writing your listening you’re reading this is my email address we answer 100% of the emails that we receive so if you just need a little bit of help or you have a question or you want to work with us let us know via email and we will be back in touch with you or if you just want to continue on your journey with us here on YouTube this video should help you right

    Ultimate IELTS 3-Hour Speaking Course

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • Mind Your Language (Season 2; 1978)

    Mind Your Language (Season 2; 1978)

    The provided text is a play script detailing the chaotic and humorous happenings in a British English as a second language classroom. The main character is Mr. Brown, a teacher struggling with unruly students from diverse backgrounds and a demanding headmistress, Miss Courtney. The play is filled with comedic misunderstandings, cultural clashes, and eccentric personalities. A subplot involves a romantic entanglement between Miss Courtney and a con man. The script culminates in a school concert showcasing the students’ unique talents and further highlighting the comedic chaos of the classroom.

    English as a Foreign Language Class Study Guide

    Quiz

    Instructions: Answer the following questions in 2-3 sentences each.

    1. What was Mr. Brown’s reaction to the news that most of his students had failed their exams?
    2. Describe the misunderstanding about the letter Mr. Brown wrote for Zultan.
    3. What happened with the watch that Ali bought at the market?
    4. How did Mr. Brown end up in jail while staying at Max and Giovani’s flat?
    5. Explain what happened to Rangit’s money and how it was recovered?
    6. What was the proposed subject of the debate in Mr. Brown’s classroom, and who took part?
    7. What problem did Mr. Brown and his students encounter on their coach trip?
    8. What caused the dispute between Suly and Taro?
    9. Describe what happened to Mr Brown and his students during the school concert.
    10. How did Mr Brown break his leg the day of the ladies Circle supper dance, and what were the results?

    Answer Key

    1. Mr. Brown was initially shocked and disappointed by the news. He stated that it wasn’t a great record, but then seemed somewhat resigned to the situation, commenting that he was hoping for a 100% pass record. He also mentioned that he had not been informed of the results by the authorities or Miss Courtney.
    2. Mr. Brown wrote a love letter for Zultan to his girlfriend, but accidentally put it in an envelope addressed to Miss Courtney. Miss Courtney read the letter, believing it was from Mr. Brown, leading to a very awkward situation and misunderstanding about his feelings toward her.
    3. Ali bought a watch from a market stall for £250, believing it was a bargain but he was swindled. He found out it was fake when he discovered there was nothing inside the watch case when he tried to wind it.
    4. Mr. Brown was locked out on the balcony of the flat and had to break into the apartment next door to get back inside. This action was misconstrued by a neighbor, leading to his arrest for breaking and entering.
    5. Rangit entrusted his £230 to Mr. Brown for safekeeping but Brown then lost it. Sid then found the lost envelope but only £130 remained. Brown then discovered Sid had bet the other £100 on a horse. They later won back the £100 with a group bet.
    6. The proposed subject of the debate was “Television: Is television a good or bad influence on the community?” Taro and Jamila argued that it was good, while Ali and Danielle argued it was bad.
    7. Mr. Brown and his students were on a coach trip to a stately home that was organized by the school history teacher, Mrs. Hunter. The wrong number of buses was scheduled, and when the replacement bus arrived, the engine broke down, and they got lost on the way.
    8. Suly and Taro had a political disagreement that turned into a shouting match. Suly was a Chinese nationalist, and Taro was a Japanese nationalist, so they had opposing views which they found difficulty setting aside.
    9. Mr. Brown and his class performed a very disorganized and unconventional act for the school concert. The performances included Zultan’s “Hungarian Magic,” Giovani’s butchery impressions, Danielle’s off music, Taro’s “Aorus Lamento,” Anna’s animal impressions, Suly’s revolutionary singing, Ali and Ranit’s comedy duo, Jamilla’s poetry recital, Juan’s bullfighting routine and Ingred and Max’s juggling. The acts were so poor that the school administrator wanted to write the entire class off as hopeless.
    10. On the day of the dance, Mr. Brown got a compound fracture in his leg after slipping on a discarded lemon peel, but insisted on still going, resulting in a second injury to the other leg as he tried to show the first injury. He initially believed he was going to be dancing with Miss Courtney, but ended up dancing with his student, Anna.

    Essay Questions

    Instructions: Answer each of the following essay questions in a well-organized essay format.

    1. Analyze the significance of cultural and linguistic diversity within the classroom, and how that diversity causes communication issues among the students. Provide specific examples.
    2. Explore the theme of miscommunication in the text, considering how language barriers, cultural differences, and misunderstandings contribute to the humor and the plot.
    3. Discuss the character of Mr. Brown. What are his strengths and weaknesses as a teacher? How does he interact with his students?
    4. Examine the various relationships between the characters, considering friendships, rivalries, and romantic tensions.
    5. Discuss the role of humor in the text and how it is used to explore social and cultural issues and how that humor contributes to the narrative structure.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Colloquialism: A word or phrase that is not formal or literary; used in ordinary or familiar conversation.
    • Compound fracture: A bone fracture in which the broken bone pierces the skin.
    • Interjection: A word or phrase used to express a strong emotion, like ‘oh!’ or ‘wow!’.
    • Metaphor: A figure of speech in which a word or phrase is applied to an object or action to which it is not literally applicable; an implied comparison.
    • Pathfinder: A person who is first to explore or find a way through.
    • Preposition: A word that shows the relationship between a noun or pronoun and other words in a sentence (e.g., “on,” “in,” “to”).
    • Present perfect: The tense of a verb used to denote an action that began in the past and has continued up to the present (e.g., “I have moved”).
    • Rudiments: The first principles or basic elements of a subject.
    • Slang: Very informal words or expressions that are more common in speech than in writing.
    • Stately home: A large, historical house, often belonging to a wealthy family, that has cultural significance.
    • Verb: A word that describes an action, occurrence, or state of being (e.g., “run,” “is,” “become”).
    • Vice versa: With the order or meaning of something reversed; used to show that the opposite of what has just been said is also true.

    English Class Chaos

    Okay, here is a detailed briefing document analyzing the provided text:

    Briefing Document: Analysis of “Pasted Text”

    Overview:

    The “Pasted Text” appears to be a transcript of a humorous narrative, likely from a radio or television program, centered around an English language class for foreign students. The narrative focuses on the chaotic and often absurd interactions between the teacher, Mr. Brown, his eccentric students, and the school’s rather officious and demanding principal, Miss Courtney. The overarching theme is the challenges and comedic mishaps that arise when cultures, personalities, and levels of English proficiency clash.

    Main Themes:

    • Cultural Clashes and Misunderstandings: The text is rife with misunderstandings arising from the students’ diverse cultural backgrounds and varying levels of English. This leads to humorous situations where literal interpretations of English phrases, mispronunciations, and cultural norms collide.
    • Example: When asked if he speaks English, one student responds with “Hungry” thinking the teacher is asking about his nationality (Hungarian).
    • Quote: “Do you speak any English hungry Hungary again but you want something to eat Hungary oh Hungarian Budapest in my register banut…”
    • The Absurdity of Language Learning: The narrative highlights the challenges of learning a new language, especially when colloquialisms and idioms are introduced. The students often take things literally, leading to funny and confusing exchanges.
    • Example: A student struggles with the difference between “w” and “v” and another cannot differentiate between a “dip thong” and a “dip stick”.
    • The Teacher’s Struggle with Control: Mr. Brown is constantly battling to maintain control over his class, facing lateness, disruptive behavior, and students veering off-topic. His attempts to teach English are frequently derailed by the students’ antics.
    • Quote: “I’m getting rather tired of this continual habit of certain people being late.”
    • The Overbearing Authority Figure: Miss Courtney is depicted as a strict, somewhat ridiculous authority figure, obsessed with following rules and making a good impression. Her interactions with Mr. Brown are often tense and comical.
    • Quote: “Obviously Mr. Brown you are sadly lacking in the necessary qualities required to teach English.”
    • The Misadventures and Farce: The narrative is characterized by a series of farcical situations, from a misplaced letter, to a mix-up with the winning lottery number, a chaotic coach trip, a misunderstanding with a police sergeant, and a disastrous school concert. This element of farce drives the humor and keeps the narrative engaging.

    Important Ideas and Facts:

    • The Students: The class consists of a diverse group of characters, each with unique quirks and backgrounds:
    • Zultan: Hungarian, prone to literal interpretations and has a letter written for his girlfriend.
    • Jamila: Possibly from India, a keen knitter who enjoys miserable films.
    • Taro: From Japan, often mixing up his “o”s and “l”s with “r”s and is fond of cameras and television.
    • Ali: Perhaps of Pakistani origin, often misinterpreting English and giving an overly literal account of things and has a unique interpretation of Shakespeare.
    • Ranit: From India, working multiple jobs and saving to visit his mother and struggles to understand slang, has a tendency to use the term “a thousand apologies”.
    • Juan: From Spain, was to be a bull fighter and has difficulty understanding English colloquialisms.
    • Ingrid: From Sweden, she is very outspoken and opinionated and does not always follow societal norms.
    • Suly: From China, she expresses firm political beliefs and disapproves of western dance.
    • Giovani: From Italy, prone to over-the-top theatrics.
    • Anna: From Germany, has some interesting animal impressions and a good sense of rhythm.
    • Max: From Britain, and is often up to no good.
    • Failed Exam and Second Chance: The narrative starts with the class having failed their previous exam, highlighting the initial failure. They are returning for more lessons, showing some willingness to improve.
    • Quote: “We failed our exam but we’re coming back for more lessons.”
    • The Misplaced Letter: A letter Mr. Brown writes for a student is accidentally sent to Miss Courtney, leading to a series of comedic misunderstandings and accusations. This mix-up showcases the chaotic nature of the classroom and Mr. Brown’s less than organized manner.
    • The Lottery Ticket Mix-Up: Mr. Brown wins a large sum of money in the lottery, seemingly allowing him to quit his job, only to have the win declared a misprint in the following edition and is therefore made to continue working, a symbol of the unexpected nature of his situation.
    • The Conman: Mr Brown helps to resolve Miss Courtney’s relationship problems by removing the conman, Albert, from her life. This is an example of Mr Brown solving situations.
    • The Disastrous Coach Trip: A trip organized by another teacher ends up in chaos due to a faulty map, a breakdown, and general miscommunication. This highlights how even outside the classroom things can be chaotic.
    • The School Concert: The class’s performance is not well received by the school authorities. This is another example of things not working out.

    Key Quotes Highlighting Specific Aspects:

    • (Cultural Misunderstanding): “I am Mr Brown your teacher well I hope that was complimentary never mind look do you know any English ah yes good shave the queue in shave the queen God Save the Queen more some more English please thank you good ston stones I can’t get no satisfac rolling St good done good”
    • (Teacher’s Frustration): “I really don’t know what to say oh blame me if if you’re not knowing what to say how are you going to be teaching us”
    • (Miss Courtney’s Authority): “I should be keeping a very close eye on you this term Mr Brown and unless I see a marked improvement out you go”
    • (Language Learning Humor): “a sentence contains eight parts of speech can anybody tell me what they are come along noun good excellent pronoun very good hey why am I very good and she is excellent all right you’re both excellent”
    • (Farce): “I have lost your money” (Mr Brown to Ranit).
    • (Miss Courtney’s High Expectations): “I don’t think you’re approaching this special occasion in the right attitude I think you’re being carried away.”

    Conclusion:

    The “Pasted Text” offers a humorous and chaotic glimpse into the world of English language education through the eyes of a struggling teacher and his diverse group of students. The narrative is driven by cultural misunderstandings, farcical situations, and the clash between order and chaos. The text’s strength lies in its ability to create humorous situations out of the everyday challenges of language learning and cultural interaction.

    A Diverse Classroom: Language, Culture, and Education

    FAQ: Exploring Themes of Language, Culture, and Education in a Diverse Classroom

    • Why do many students struggle to learn English in Mr. Brown’s class?
    • The sources highlight several factors contributing to students’ difficulties. Firstly, the students come from diverse linguistic backgrounds, often leading to misinterpretations and challenges with pronunciation, vocabulary, and grammar. Secondly, some students exhibit a lack of motivation or a casual attitude towards learning, as demonstrated by their engagement with non-academic activities during class time or their preference for socializing over studying. Additionally, Mr. Brown’s teaching style, while well-intentioned, sometimes lacks the structure or clarity needed to effectively address the varied learning styles and needs within the classroom. There’s also the underlying issue of the classroom being a place where a diverse group of people are forced into close contact, which leads to interpersonal conflicts that take away from the primary purpose of the class. Finally, external pressures like financial struggles, work commitments, and personal problems further affect students’ concentration and progress.
    • How does the setting of an English language classroom become a microcosm of cultural differences and misunderstandings?
    • The classroom serves as a stage where diverse cultures, languages, and personal experiences clash and intertwine. Students bring with them their own cultural norms, values, and communication styles, which often result in misinterpretations and conflicts. For example, the clash between Taro and Suly highlights ideological differences, while casual greetings and interactions are often misinterpreted due to linguistic and cultural variations. The students’ varied approaches to humor and seriousness also highlight cultural differences. The classroom becomes a space where the difficulties of communication and understanding between cultures are magnified, showing the complexities of intercultural interaction.
    • What are some of the unconventional methods employed by Mr. Brown in his approach to teaching English?
    • Mr. Brown frequently resorts to unconventional, and sometimes chaotic, methods. Instead of adhering rigidly to textbooks and drills, he often engages students in activities like debates, storytelling exercises, or creative games, though these often veer off-topic. He frequently uses humor, even if it’s unintentional, as a way to engage the class, though this often leads to misunderstandings and the derailment of lessons. His attempts to be relatable to his students frequently fail, demonstrating that he struggles to meet the diverse group of people where they are. He also tries to personalize his approach by engaging with individual students’ lives, like writing a letter for Zalan or asking students about their holidays. However, his teaching is often hampered by his own disorganization and a lack of preparation.
    • How do personal struggles and external factors impact the students’ ability to focus on learning?
    • Many students face significant personal challenges that make it difficult for them to fully commit to their studies. Rangit works three jobs to save money, impacting his energy and availability for class. Jamila has emotional ups and downs that cause her to lose focus. Several students also struggle with financial difficulties, making the class feel less relevant than pressing issues in their lives. These struggles often result in students being late, distracted, or emotionally overwhelmed, which hinders their learning process. The classroom is portrayed as just one aspect of a complex existence, making it difficult to fully prioritize learning when surrounded by many external stressors.
    • How does Mr. Brown’s personal life and character influence his role as a teacher?
    • Mr. Brown’s personal life is often chaotic and intertwined with the classroom drama. His romantic pursuits and financial struggles often spill over into his interactions with students. He is easily distracted and sometimes comes across as disorganized and not always in control of the class. Despite his best intentions, his personal problems, like losing Rangit’s money or getting embroiled in a series of misunderstandings, sometimes negatively impact his ability to provide consistent and effective instruction. His personal charm and willingness to connect with his students on a personal level make him likeable, but he does not always exude an air of authority.
    • What does the recurring theme of ‘misunderstandings’ reveal about language and communication?
    • The sources are riddled with various forms of misunderstandings, showcasing the complexities of communication. These misunderstandings arise not only from linguistic differences but also from varying cultural assumptions, personal biases, and ambiguous situations. Students often misinterpret English phrases or idioms, and characters often have conversations where they are speaking completely past each other. These recurrent issues reveal that language is more than just words; it involves the interpretation of nuances, cultural context, and emotional intent. Misunderstandings underscore the difficulty of achieving perfect communication and the ever-present potential for misinterpretations and conflicts.
    • How does humor function in the classroom setting and what role does it play in the overall narrative?
    • Humor is a constant presence in the classroom, often arising from linguistic misunderstandings, cultural clashes, or Mr. Brown’s well-intentioned, but often awkward, attempts to engage the students. The humor often serves to diffuse tension and create lighthearted moments, but it also reveals the students’ varied approaches to learning. Sometimes the humor underscores the struggles of communicating across cultures or highlights the absurdities within the classroom, creating a dynamic and often chaotic atmosphere. The humor is a coping mechanism for both the students and the teacher, providing relief amid their challenges and highlighting the resilience of human interactions in the face of these challenges.
    • How do events like the Royal Visit preparation or the school concert reflect the dynamics and personalities within the class?
    • Events like the preparations for the Royal Visit or the school concert magnify the students’ diverse personalities and classroom dynamics. The chaotic planning, varied reactions, and unexpected outcomes of these events highlight the challenges of bringing together such a diverse group with a common purpose. The students’ attempts to contribute to these events, whether through national costumes or unique performances, are often well-intentioned, but often veer off course into the absurd or unexpected. They also serve as a reminder that what is planned is not always what actually happens, reflecting the chaotic reality of the classroom environment. Ultimately, these events underscore the uniqueness of each student and how each member of the class is trying to find their place within it.

    Mr. Brown’s English Class

    The sources depict a series of English lessons for a class of adult students with diverse backgrounds and nationalities, taught by Mr. Brown [1, 2]. The lessons are often chaotic and humorous, as the students struggle with the English language and Mr. Brown attempts to manage their various personalities and learning styles [1-4].

    Some key aspects of the English lessons include:

    • Focus on basic grammar and vocabulary: Mr. Brown attempts to teach the students fundamental English concepts such as sentence construction [5], parts of speech [5], verb tenses [6, 7], prepositions [8], and vocabulary [9]. He tries to explain concepts like colloquialisms [7], metaphors [10], and interjections [5]. However, students often misunderstand these concepts or get them confused with other words [1-3, 5, 10].
    • Emphasis on practical conversation: Mr. Brown also tries to teach the students practical conversational phrases that they might use in everyday life [11]. He asks students what they would do in common situations such as feeling ill [11], needing aspirin [12], or cashing a check [11].
    • Use of varied teaching methods: Mr. Brown uses a variety of teaching methods, such as asking students to define words [5], complete sentences [5], give examples [8], and engage in conversation [11]. He also incorporates games like “I Spy” [13] and storytelling [14] to make the lessons more engaging.
    • Challenges with student comprehension: The students frequently misunderstand Mr. Brown’s instructions and explanations [1-3, 5]. Their diverse backgrounds and varying levels of English proficiency lead to numerous humorous misunderstandings and misinterpretations [1-5, 8, 11].
    • Student participation and interaction: Despite the challenges, the students actively participate in class discussions and activities [2-5]. They often engage with each other, sometimes leading to arguments or humorous exchanges [3, 11].
    • Cultural and linguistic differences: The class includes students from various countries and cultures, which leads to linguistic differences and misunderstandings [1, 2]. Mr. Brown tries to address these differences, but the students’ varying accents, vocabulary, and cultural backgrounds often create confusion and humor [1-5].
    • Use of homework assignments: Mr. Brown gives homework assignments such as visiting the zoo, cinema, or historical sites, and then asks students to report back on their experience in class, which further tests their English language and comprehension skills [15-17].
    • Difficulties with assessments: The students’ struggles with the English language are reflected in their low test scores [2, 3]. Mr. Brown has difficulty getting the students to focus on their work, which is another reason for the low pass rates [3]. He tries to encourage them to do their homework and to focus in class, but they continue to struggle [2, 3, 10].

    The lessons are frequently interrupted by other events, such as the visit of the Queen [18, 19] and Miss Courtney’s personal life problems [12, 20, 21], or the school concert [22-25]. Mr. Brown’s attempts to maintain order and provide instruction are constantly challenged by the students’ diverse personalities and the chaotic circumstances of the classroom [1-5, 18].

    Student Failures in Mr. Brown’s English Class

    The sources reveal several instances of student failures in Mr. Brown’s English class, both in terms of formal assessments and in their comprehension of the material [1-3]. Here’s a breakdown of these failures:

    • Low Pass Rates: Mr. Brown’s students have a history of failing exams, specifically the lower Cambridge certificate [4]. In one instance, out of ten students, nine failed [3]. Additionally, two out of ten students failed in another instance [2]. These repeated failures highlight a significant problem with student performance in his class.
    • Specific Failures and Low Scores: Some students are mentioned by name for failing: Jamila, Taro [2]. One student, Ali, admits to only getting 20 out of 100, which he acknowledges is not a good score [2]. Mr. Brown also notes that Ali got zero the previous year, demonstrating a slight improvement, but still not a passing grade [3]. Even the students who pass do not always have very high scores [3].
    • Lack of Effort and Understanding: Mr. Brown notes a general lack of effort from the students [3]. He says he wants 100% effort from them [3]. The students frequently misunderstand basic English concepts and instructions [1-3]. They also struggle to apply these concepts to practical situations.
    • Misunderstandings and Misinterpretations: The students often misinterpret what Mr. Brown is trying to teach [1-3]. For example, they confuse vocabulary words, verb tenses, and grammatical structures. They also misunderstand idioms and figures of speech [1-3].
    • Challenges with Assessments: The students are often unable to give correct definitions or answers to simple questions [1-3]. The questions Mr. Brown asks are not always well understood by the students and they struggle with basic comprehension tasks [1-3].
    • Reasons for Failures: The students’ failures stem from a combination of factors:
    • Diverse Linguistic Backgrounds: The students come from various countries and cultural backgrounds, making it difficult for them to grasp English concepts quickly [1]. The differences in language and culture contribute to misunderstandings and confusion [1-3].
    • Lack of Focus: The students often struggle to focus in class, which affects their ability to learn [1-3]. They are easily distracted and often engage in side conversations or other disruptive behaviors [1-3].
    • Inadequate Study Habits: Many students do not seem to put in the necessary effort outside of the classroom [2, 3]. Mr. Brown has to tell them to concentrate much harder, and he gives twice as much homework to encourage them to study more [3].
    • Personal Issues: Some students seem more interested in other things besides studying English [1-3]. This lack of motivation also affects their ability to learn.
    • Mr. Brown’s Frustration: Mr. Brown expresses his disappointment in the students’ repeated failures [3]. He struggles to find effective ways to teach them and is often frustrated by their lack of progress [3, 4]. He also feels that he is not being informed about the students’ results by the school administration [1].
    • Students’ awareness of failures: The students are sometimes aware of their failures, and acknowledge it amongst themselves [2, 3]. However, they do not always understand the reasons for their failures [2, 3].

    In summary, the students’ failures in Mr. Brown’s class are a recurring theme throughout the sources. These failures are caused by several factors related to both the students’ capabilities and also potentially Mr. Brown’s teaching methods. The students struggle with basic English comprehension, they do not apply themselves to the work, and this leads to the overall low pass rates and poor outcomes.

    The Cancelled Royal Visit

    The sources describe a planned, but ultimately cancelled, royal visit to the school, which causes considerable excitement and chaotic preparations. Here’s a breakdown of the key events:

    • Announcement of the Visit: Mr. Brown learns about the impending visit of the Queen and Prince Phillip to the school from an Assistant Town Clerk (ATC) named Mr. Forbes [1]. The visit is meant to be informal, as the Duke himself laid the foundation stone of the school building [1].
    • Miss Courtney’s Overreaction: Upon hearing the news, Miss Courtney becomes overly enthusiastic and begins making elaborate preparations. She is particularly concerned with showing the school’s loyalty and devotion to the sovereign [2, 3]. She also sees the visit as an opportunity to gain recognition, even imagining herself receiving a Knighthood [2, 3].
    • Chaotic Preparations: The school staff and students become involved in the preparations, which include:
    • Disguising Toilet Doors: Miss Courtney, in an attempt to not offend the royal family, disguises the toilet doors with signs that read “Bucks and Does,” “Lads and Lasses,” and “Setters and Pointers,” among others [2].
    • Preparing a Bouquet: Miss Courtney plans for one of Mr. Brown’s students, Jamila, to present a bouquet of flowers to the Queen, and she instructs Jamila on how to curtsy and address the Queen [4].
    • National Costumes: Mr. Brown’s students are told to wear their national costumes, which leads to a variety of colorful and sometimes comical outfits [3].
    • Silver Tea Set: Miss Courtney brings her silver tea set, in case the royals want refreshments [2].
    • Food preparations: There is also some discussion about the food that should be prepared for the royal family, with suggestions ranging from ham rolls to tinned salmon [2].
    • Sweeping the Schoolyard: Sydney is ordered to sweep the schoolyard multiple times, even though it had already been done [2].
    • Mr. Brown’s Discomfort: Mr. Brown appears less enthusiastic about the visit. He is concerned about the disruptions it causes to his teaching schedule, and he expresses his doubts about the necessity and the scale of the preparations [2, 3]. He also finds the overzealous preparations to be somewhat absurd [2]. He also has to deal with students changing into their national costumes in the cloakroom [3].
    • The Cancelled Visit: The royal visit is ultimately cancelled, as the royal couple has to go directly from the hospital to the town hall. This causes great disappointment, particularly for Miss Courtney who had put so much effort into the preparations. She learns about the cancellation from the superintendent [4, 5].
    • Reactions to Cancellation: Despite the cancellation, some staff and students are not all that disappointed [5]. Mr. Brown is not particularly upset by the news. Miss Courtney, on the other hand, is greatly disappointed, and feels that all her preparations were a waste of time [5].

    Overall, the planned royal visit is a significant event that causes chaos and excitement in the school, but ultimately, it is cancelled, leaving the staff and students disappointed, but perhaps also relieved [2, 5]. It provides an example of how events outside the classroom impact Mr. Brown’s teaching environment, and how he tries to manage those events and also his students.

    Disrupted Lessons: School Chaos and Humor

    The sources detail several school events that disrupt the regular English lessons, highlighting the chaotic and often humorous atmosphere of the school:

    • The Cancelled Royal Visit: The planned visit of the Queen and Prince Phillip causes considerable disruption as staff and students alike become involved in elaborate preparations [1, 2]. Miss Courtney is particularly enthusiastic about this visit, seeing it as an opportunity to show loyalty and devotion, and to possibly gain recognition [2, 3]. This leads to chaotic preparations including:
    • Disguising toilet doors with humorous signs [2].
    • Preparing a bouquet to be presented to the Queen [4].
    • Having the students wear national costumes [3, 4].
    • Bringing in a silver tea set [2].
    • Discussing appropriate food for the royal visitors [2].
    • Sweeping the schoolyard repeatedly [2]. Ultimately, the royal visit is cancelled, leading to disappointment, particularly for Miss Courtney [5].
    • School Concert: The school concert is another major event that disrupts the normal routine [6]. Mr. Brown’s class is expected to participate, and they are given homework to prepare for the event [6, 7]. The class performance is a chaotic mix of music, impersonations, dance, and poetry, which Miss Courtney finds unacceptable [8, 9]. The students’ performance includes:
    • Hungarian magic [8]
    • Italian impersonations [8]
    • French dancing [8]
    • A traditional Japanese song [8]
    • German animal impressions [9]
    • A Chinese revolutionary song [9]
    • A comedy routine [9]
    • English poetry [9]
    • Spanish flamenco dancing [9]
    • Swedish and Greek juggling [10] The concert is ultimately deemed unsuccessful by Miss Courtney, and Mr. Brown is given three more days to improve his class’s performance [10].
    • Coach Trip: A coach trip to a stately home is organized by Mrs. Hunter, the history teacher [11]. However, the trip is fraught with problems from the beginning:
    • There is a mix-up with the coach booking and only one coach is available for the large group [11].
    • Sydney, a school employee, provides an old, unreliable coach that is not fit for purpose [12, 13].
    • The group gets lost on the way and is unable to find the stately home [13, 14].
    • The coach breaks down, and they run out of petrol [14].
    • They are eventually turned away from the stately home because they arrive after closing time [15]. The trip ends up being a chaotic and unsuccessful outing, with the students and staff having to resort to playing games on the coach while they wait to be rescued.
    • Other School Events: Other minor school events also disrupt the lessons, including the lady Circle supper dance [16] and an upcoming school concert [6]. These events impact the lessons, and cause various disruptions as teachers and students prepare for them.

    These school events highlight the chaotic and unpredictable nature of the school environment. Mr. Brown and his students are often caught up in these events, which disrupt their lessons and impact their learning. The events also provide an opportunity for humorous situations and interactions between the students and staff, and an insight into the different personalities and conflicts among them.

    Romantic Entanglements at the School

    The sources depict several romantic entanglements, often humorous and sometimes complicated, involving both the students and staff at the school:

    • Miss Courtney and Albert Collins: Miss Courtney becomes romantically involved with a man named Albert Collins, who is her ex-fiancé from 25 years ago [1]. She is overjoyed when he reappears and proposes to her [2]. However, it is soon revealed that Albert is a con man who specializes in proposing to lonely women and stealing their money [3]. This leads to Miss Courtney being heartbroken and Mr. Brown intervening to protect her [3]. This romantic entanglement highlights Miss Courtney’s vulnerability and her tendency to be carried away by emotions.
    • Mr. Brown and Miss Courtney: There are hints of a possible romantic interest between Mr. Brown and Miss Courtney, although it is not explicitly stated. Miss Courtney often seeks Mr. Brown’s advice, and they have several personal conversations throughout the sources [1, 4, 5]. She also offers him a ticket to the Lady Circle supper dance, suggesting a personal interest in his company [6]. However, it is also clear that Miss Courtney has a pattern of becoming romantically involved with men who do not have her best interests at heart, and so any interest she might have in Mr. Brown is mixed up in her general tendency to be easily charmed [7, 8].
    • Zan and his Girlfriend: Zan, a Hungarian student, asks Mr. Brown to write a letter to his girlfriend [4]. This leads to a humorous situation when the letter is accidentally sent to Miss Courtney instead, causing her to believe that Mr. Brown is expressing his feelings for her [9, 10]. This mix-up leads to a very awkward and comical exchange where Miss Courtney believes that Mr. Brown is attracted to her, while Mr. Brown is really just trying to help his student.
    • Student Romantic Interests and Interactions: The students’ romantic interests and interactions also provide comedic moments:
    • Danielle’s desire to “make love”: Danielle frequently expresses her interest in “making love”, and sees it as a better alternative to television [11]. She also is depicted as being very forward and open about her sexuality and interest in the other students, especially Mr. Brown, but her ideas are not always in line with societal expectations [7, 12].
    • Taro and Ingrid: Taro expresses a desire to sit next to Ingrid on the coach trip, indicating a possible romantic interest [12].
    • Max’s attraction to Ingrid: Max also expresses that he “fancies” Ingrid, suggesting a potential romantic rivalry [13].
    • Anna’s comments about “fairies”: Anna claims to have spent time with fairies at the bottom of the river, which may be a coded reference to a romantic encounter [6].
    • Ali’s interest in “picking up skirts”: Ali mentions his desire to go out and “pick up” girls with the other students, showing a general romantic interest [14].
    • The Lady Circle Supper Dance: The Lady Circle Supper Dance becomes a source of romantic entanglement as various students vie for the chance to go with Mr. Brown. This results in confusion and comedic moments, especially when Gladis, the tea lady, claims that she is going to the dance with Mr. Brown. This ultimately results in Mr. Brown having to go to the dance with multiple partners [6, 8, 15, 16].
    • Mr. Brown’s avoidance of entanglement: Mr. Brown often tries to avoid direct involvement in the students’ romantic interests. He is not interested in getting involved in any love triangle and is primarily focused on his teaching duties [14, 17].

    These romantic entanglements add a layer of complexity and humor to the sources, highlighting the diverse personalities and relationships of the characters. The romantic interactions also contribute to the overall chaotic and unpredictable nature of the school environment.

    Mind Your Language (Season 2; 1978)

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • Mind Your Language (Season 1; 1977–1978)

    Mind Your Language (Season 1; 1977–1978)

    The text is a comedic play depicting the chaotic experiences of a diverse group of foreign students in an English as a foreign language class. A male teacher, Mr. Brown, is unexpectedly hired despite the principal’s preference for a woman, leading to numerous humorous situations. The class is a melting pot of personalities and cultures, resulting in constant misunderstandings and comedic conflicts. Mr. Brown’s unconventional teaching methods and the students’ unique backgrounds fuel the farcical nature of the play. The narrative culminates in the students’ final exams and Mr. Brown’s unexpected dismissal, highlighting the absurdity of the situation.

    English as a Foreign Language Study Guide

    Quiz

    1. What is Ali Nadim’s initial confusion when he arrives for his first English class?
    2. Ali Nadim is confused about the word “enrolled,” mishearing it as “unrolled,” and doesn’t understand when and where to wait for class to start, mixing up left and right.
    3. Why is Miss Courtney initially unhappy with Jeremy Brown as the new English teacher?
    4. Miss Courtney is unhappy because she specifically requested a female teacher and is concerned that a male teacher will be too much for her students after a previous male teacher had a mental breakdown.
    5. Describe Mr. Brown’s first encounter with his students when taking roll.
    6. Mr. Brown encounters confusion with his students’ names, as they correct his assumption that he is “brown” and struggle with pronouncing their names and/or being understood in English, and their occupations.
    7. What prompts Mr. Brown’s student, Ranjeet, to contemplate suicide?
    8. Ranjeet is being forced into an arranged marriage to a woman he describes as “looking like an elephant” and feels that suicide is his only escape from the situation because of his religious tradition.
    9. How does Mr. Brown deal with the students’ homework issues?
    10. Mr. Brown discovers the students have cheated by copying homework, so he assigns extra homework, warning them to do the work themselves.
    11. What does Mr. Kenyan (from the education authority) find concerning during his visit?
    12. Mr. Kenyan is surprised at the diversity in the class, and is generally aloof, but does not find any issues with the class or teacher.
    13. How does Mr. Brown teach the students about rhyming slang?
    14. Mr. Brown uses the caretaker, Sid, as an example, explaining how to replace a word with one that rhymes, giving examples like “Uncle Ned” for “head.”
    15. Describe Miss Courtney’s reaction to the students’ photograph activity.
    16. Miss Courtney expresses disapproval of the photography session, believing it inappropriate for class time and wondering why it was not included in the course curriculum.
    17. How do students try to cheat on the mock exam?
    18. The students devise ways to copy from each other, such as writing answers on their hands, hats, and handkerchiefs.
    19. Why does Mr. Brown get involved in a physical fight with Mr. Jarvis, a woodwork teacher?
    20. Mr. Jarvis makes repeated comments about the foreign students, so Mr. Brown must defend the dignity of his students, and a brawl ensues, after much talk and misunderstanding.

    Answer Key

    1. Ali Nadim is confused about the word “enrolled,” mishearing it as “unrolled,” and doesn’t understand when and where to wait for class to start, mixing up left and right.
    2. Miss Courtney is unhappy because she specifically requested a female teacher and is concerned that a male teacher will be too much for her students after a previous male teacher had a mental breakdown.
    3. Mr. Brown encounters confusion with his students’ names, as they correct his assumption that he is “brown” and struggle with pronouncing their names and/or being understood in English, and their occupations.
    4. Ranjeet is being forced into an arranged marriage to a woman he describes as “looking like an elephant” and feels that suicide is his only escape from the situation because of his religious tradition.
    5. Mr. Brown discovers the students have cheated by copying homework, so he assigns extra homework, warning them to do the work themselves.
    6. Mr. Kenyan is surprised at the diversity in the class, and is generally aloof, but does not find any issues with the class or teacher.
    7. Mr. Brown uses the caretaker, Sid, as an example, explaining how to replace a word with one that rhymes, giving examples like “Uncle Ned” for “head.”
    8. Miss Courtney expresses disapproval of the photography session, believing it inappropriate for class time and wondering why it was not included in the course curriculum.
    9. The students devise ways to copy from each other, such as writing answers on their hands, hats, and handkerchiefs.
    10. Mr. Jarvis makes repeated comments about the foreign students, so Mr. Brown must defend the dignity of his students, and a brawl ensues, after much talk and misunderstanding.

    Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the ways in which cultural and linguistic misunderstandings create humor and conflict in the classroom.
    2. Analyze the role of stereotypes and prejudice as portrayed in the interactions between characters in the source material.
    3. How does the source material explore the challenges and rewards of teaching English to students from diverse backgrounds?
    4. Examine the character of Jeremy Brown as a teacher, considering both his strengths and weaknesses.
    5. Explore the themes of cultural identity and integration as they are portrayed through the experiences of the various students in the English class.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    Enrolled: To be officially registered as a member of a course or organization.

    Credentials: Qualifications, achievements, personal qualities, or aspects of a person’s background, typically when used to indicate they are suitable for something.

    Par: An acceptable standard or average level.

    Racialism: The belief that all members of each race possess characteristics, abilities, or qualities specific to that race, especially so as to distinguish it as inferior or superior to another race or races.

    Chicanery: The use of trickery to achieve a political, financial, or legal purpose.

    Betrothed: Engaged to be married.

    Cotney: A person from the East End of London, traditionally associated with a particular dialect and working-class culture.

    Rhyming slang: A form of slang in which a word is replaced by a phrase that rhymes with it.

    Figure of speech: A word or phrase used in a non-literal sense to add rhetorical force or vividness.

    In the pudding club: Pregnant (slang).

    Hara Kiri: A Japanese ritual of suicide by disembowelment.

    Aspirate: A sound that is accompanied by a puff of breath, typically made when pronouncing the letter “h.”

    Defector: A person who has abandoned their country or cause in favor of an opposing one.

    Bourgeois: Relating to or characteristic of the middle class, typically with reference to its perceived materialistic values or conventional attitudes.

    Syntax: The arrangement of words and phrases to create well-formed sentences in a language.

    Foreign Students & EFL Chaos

    Okay, here’s a detailed briefing document summarizing the main themes and important ideas from the provided text, which appears to be a transcript of a comedy skit or play:

    Briefing Document: “Pasted Text”

    Overview:

    This text is a comedic exploration of a diverse group of foreign students attending an English as a Foreign Language (EFL) class, and their interactions with their teacher, Mr. Brown, and the school staff, particularly Miss Courtney. The narrative is driven by cultural misunderstandings, language barriers, and the students’ often-humorous attempts to navigate the English language and British customs. The text is rich with situational comedy, wordplay, and running gags.

    Main Themes:

    • Cultural Misunderstandings and Stereotypes: A core theme is the comedic clash of cultures. The students’ diverse backgrounds (Greek, German, Italian, Japanese, Indian, Spanish, Chinese, etc.) lead to numerous misunderstandings stemming from differing cultural norms, linguistic habits, and stereotypical expectations.
    • Example: Max initially thinks Mr. Brown’s name is a statement about his skin color: “You are not brown, we are brown, you are white”.
    • Example: The students’ varying ideas about concepts such as the “true faith” and the meaning of a “figure of speech” highlight their diverse cultural perspectives.
    • Example: The comical interactions around jokes reveals the challenges of translating humor across cultures.
    • Language Barriers and the Learning Process: The students’ struggles with English grammar, pronunciation, and idioms form a significant source of comedy. Their literal interpretations of phrases and mispronunciations are constant running gags.
    • Example: Ali’s frequent use of the word “squeeze me” when meaning “excuse me.”
    • Example: The consistent confusion of the R and L sounds
    • Example: The students’ misinterpretations of rhyming slang used by the caretaker, Sid.
    • The Absurdity of Bureaucracy and Rules: Miss Courtney’s strict adherence to rules, her concerns about maintaining decorum, and her often-baffled reactions to the students’ antics add to the comedic effect.
    • Example: Her initial request for a female teacher and her fear of male teachers having “no stamina” after a prior incident.
    • Example: Her frustration over collecting registration fees in multiple foreign currencies and her meticulous accounting.
    • Classroom Dynamics and Teacher-Student Relationships: Mr. Brown tries his best to manage a chaotic class and his own personal life. He is often flustered, but also demonstrates a surprising amount of patience and compassion for his students. The students, in turn, develop a strange mix of affection, frustration, and respect for him.
    • Example: Mr. Brown’s attempts to introduce new vocabulary, such as “catalyst” and “indisposition”
    • Example: Mr. Brown’s struggle to correct the homework assignments which he suspects are all written by one person.
    • Example: The students showing their teacher appreciation by buying him a pen, a salami, and a card.
    • Identity and Integration: Beyond the comedy, there are subtle explorations of identity as the students try to adapt to a new culture while retaining their own. The text touches on topics such as arranged marriages, immigration, and the complexities of cultural and religious backgrounds.
    • Example: Ranjit’s struggle with his arranged marriage to a woman he has not seen in many years and his culture’s emphasis on duty.
    • Example: Boris, the Russian sailor, seeking political asylum and starting a new life
    • The Power of Community: Despite their differences, the students form a kind of community, supporting each other and sharing in their chaotic experiences. They celebrate each other’s milestones (e.g., Suly’s wedding) and find humor in their common struggles.
    • Example: The students’ willingness to help Max with his homework, even if they did it for a small price.
    • Example: The students helping Mr. Brown with his health.
    • Situational and Running Gags: The text relies heavily on recurring jokes and comical situations to create humor.
    • Example: The ongoing confusion between rhyming slang
    • Example: The repeated misunderstandings between Ally and Mr Brown with phrases such as “squeeze me”
    • Example: The various characters’ obsession with sex and their consistent misinterpretations.
    • Example: The chaotic tea breaks, during which students try to conduct business or solicit money.

    Key Ideas and Facts:

    • The EFL class is a melting pot of nationalities: This is a constant source of comedy and cultural clashes.
    • Mr. Brown is a flawed but well-meaning teacher: He is frequently overwhelmed and sometimes exasperated by his class. He is generally quite well-liked and appreciated by the students despite this.
    • Miss Courtney embodies strict rules and order: Her interactions with the chaotic class create much of the humor.
    • Sid, the caretaker, provides the perspective of a working-class Londoner: His rhyming slang is an obstacle for the students, but he also offers some genuine insight into British culture.
    • The students’ English improves throughout the text while still being humorous in its flawed execution.
    • The impending exams cause considerable anxiety and scheming amongst the students. This leads to comical attempts to cheat and get ahead.
    • The characters have complex personal lives beyond their roles in the classroom. The text touches on topics such as impending marriages, financial struggles, and homesickness.
    • The narrative is episodic, moving through various classroom activities, tea breaks, and personal interactions between the characters.

    Notable Quotes:

    • Mrs. Courtney: “I distinctly requested the local authority to send me a woman teacher especially in view of what happened with Mr wton.” (Highlights her fear of male teachers and the absurdity of the school’s bureaucracy).
    • Mr. Brown: “Apart from one attempted murder and a possible race riot I seem to be coping reasonably well.” (A self-deprecating comment reflecting his chaotic classroom management)
    • Max: “You are not brown, we are brown, you are white” (Illustrates the cultural misunderstandings from the get-go)
    • Ranjit: “According to the seik tradition I was betro when I was 12 to surinder the 10-year-old daughter of the best friend of my father…“. (Illustrates the complex cultural norms.)
    • Sid: “I went home and I had a bull in a cow with a travel and strip you see it was all over the Dustbin LDS so I went down the Frog and Tow into the rabber da and I met an old China plate it looked a bit ankle dick so I got him rejected Dy and I had that thing led to the other we both got bres and list I stagged on took all the dicky dirt and the daisy roots and fell backwards on the apples and pear”(This quote is a perfect example of Sid’s almost indecipherable rhyming slang and his chaotic narrative style)
    • Ali: “squeeze me please” (A recurring comedic misunderstanding)

    Conclusion:

    The provided text is a comedic exploration of cultural diversity, the challenges of language learning, and the absurdity of bureaucracy. It uses situational comedy, wordplay, and character interactions to create a lighthearted narrative that highlights the challenges and rewards of cross-cultural exchange. It also emphasizes the universal themes of community, friendship, and the humor found in everyday misunderstandings. The characters’ quirks, struggles, and unexpected moments of camaraderie make it an engaging and humorous piece.

    The Chaos of ESL

    Frequently Asked Questions:

    1. Why does the English teacher, Mr. Brown, face such unusual challenges in his new job?
    2. Mr. Brown’s challenges stem from the diverse backgrounds and personalities of his adult students, who are all learning English as a foreign language. The clash of cultures, misunderstandings due to language barriers, and differing expectations lead to chaotic situations. Additionally, Mr. Brown faces the initial skepticism of his supervisor, Miss Courtney, and a general lack of preparation for the unique issues that arise from teaching such a diverse group of students. He also faces scrutiny from inspectors and the need to adapt to their individual learning needs and cultural backgrounds.
    3. What are some of the main cultural differences and humorous misunderstandings that occur in the classroom?
    4. Numerous cultural and linguistic misunderstandings arise, many of which are played for comedic effect. These include literal interpretations of English phrases (“unrolled” instead of “enrolled”), differing views on race and efficiency (Germans vs. Japanese), and confusion about names and occupations. Additionally, there are conflicts arising from cultural and religious beliefs, like the discussion of what is “right” or “wrong” in various cultures. Finally, the use of slang, accents and colloquialisms from the teacher and other staff are often completely lost on the students.
    5. How do the students’ diverse backgrounds and experiences influence their learning of English?
    6. The students’ backgrounds greatly influence their learning. Their various occupations, nationalities, and cultural norms lead to different learning styles, common mistakes, and personal biases. Some students struggle with pronunciation, some with grammar, and some with concepts that are unfamiliar to them. Their personal experiences, like one student’s betrothal, also spill into the classroom creating humorous or awkward situations. Furthermore, some students try to apply their previous knowledge of other languages to English, creating interesting results.
    7. How does the series explore the theme of cultural exchange and integration, and are there challenges with this?
    8. The series demonstrates the complexities of cultural exchange. The students attempt to integrate into English society while simultaneously maintaining aspects of their own identities. This process is filled with comical misunderstandings, as well as genuine attempts at connection. However, conflicts related to cultural differences also arise, sometimes in the form of attempted violence or public displays of prejudice. The challenges underscore the difficulty of truly understanding other cultures and beliefs, as well as the need for empathy and humor in bridging such gaps.
    9. What role does humor play in the series?

    Humor is central to the series, stemming from language barriers, cultural clashes, and absurd situations. It serves as a way to navigate the potential tensions arising from diversity, highlighting the ridiculousness of misunderstandings and the universality of human experience. The comedy also functions as a tool for breaking down cultural barriers, creating moments of shared laughter that unite the students despite their differences. It also is used as a way to get at serious subjects without becoming overly didactic.

    1. How do the students try to “game” the system or get out of difficult situations?
    2. Several students try to find ways to get around the rules of the class or tests. These attempts at cheating or avoiding work add another layer to the comedic chaos. There are examples of copied homework, attempts to steal test answers, and misunderstandings about what is expected. These antics often backfire, but the students’ creativity is on display. There are also many situations in which the students attempt to manipulate each other or the teachers to get their way, or as a form of social manipulation, with varying degrees of success.
    3. What are some of the recurring themes about relationships and social dynamics amongst the students and staff?
    4. The series explores the dynamics of various relationships, both platonic and romantic, some of which are also tinged with sexism and/or racism. There is a sense of camaraderie among the students, as they go through the shared experience of learning a new language, as well as developing friendships. There are also several romantic entanglements, often complicated by cultural or personal circumstances. The dynamic between the teachers and students is portrayed as both comical and at times, genuinely caring. Finally, there is a strong suggestion of a possible attraction between two of the staff, as well.
    5. What is the overall message or takeaway from the sources?
    6. The series conveys the complexities of language learning, cultural adaptation, and personal growth. It uses comedy to address themes of cross-cultural understanding, personal identity, and the struggle for connection. While the situations are often comical, there are underlying messages about the importance of empathy, patience, and humor in navigating diverse and sometimes chaotic social situations. The conclusion of the series also seems to suggest that personal growth and lasting connections are more important than passing tests or learning perfect grammar.

    Teaching English as a Foreign Language

    The sources depict an English as a Foreign Language class and the various interactions between the teacher, Mr. Brown, and his students, as well as the school’s principal, Miss Courtney, and other staff. The class is comprised of a diverse group of students from various countries, each with their own unique personalities and challenges in learning English.

    Here are some of the key aspects of the English class, as portrayed in the sources:

    • Student Diversity: The class includes students from Greece, Germany, Italy, Japan, Spain, China, Pakistan, and India, among other places. Each student brings their own cultural background and language to the classroom, creating a rich and sometimes chaotic learning environment.
    • Language Barriers: The students have varying levels of English proficiency, which leads to misunderstandings, miscommunications, and humorous situations. Some students struggle with pronunciation, grammar, and vocabulary. The teacher often has to repeat himself, use gestures, and try different approaches to get his point across.
    • Teaching Methods: Mr. Brown uses a variety of teaching methods, including vocabulary lessons, verb conjugations, reading exercises, and group discussions. He also tries to make the class fun and engaging, sometimes using humor and games. However, his methods are sometimes unconventional and not always appreciated by the school administration.
    • Classroom Dynamics: The classroom is often lively and chaotic, with students talking over each other, arguing, and getting into trouble. There are also instances of students displaying prejudices and making insensitive comments towards each other. Mr. Brown often struggles to maintain control and keep the students focused on their lessons.
    • Cultural Differences: The sources highlight the cultural differences between the students and between the students and the teacher, which sometimes lead to misunderstandings or misinterpretations. For example, some students have difficulty understanding English figures of speech.
    • Challenges for the Teacher: Mr. Brown faces numerous challenges in his role as a teacher, including dealing with disruptive students, language barriers, cultural differences, and the school administration’s disapproval. He also has to deal with personal problems, including being mistakenly accused of being a school inspector and having a fight arranged in the school’s gymnasium after a misunderstanding.
    • Importance of Textbooks: Textbooks are mentioned as an important tool for learning, and homework is assigned and reviewed. The teacher also uses newspapers to help students learn vocabulary and understand the world around them.
    • Focus on Practical English: The teacher tries to focus on teaching practical English skills, such as how to order a meal, find accommodation, and engage in conversations about daily life, although the students do still focus on more formal grammar.
    • Student Progress: Despite the challenges, the students do make progress in their English skills throughout the course, learning new vocabulary and practicing their pronunciation and grammar. They also learn how to communicate with each other and participate in group discussions.
    • Examinations: The students are preparing for their lower Cambridge certificate exam, and a mock exam is given to help them prepare. The students’ level of preparedness is not ideal, and some are even caught trying to cheat.
    • Social Interactions: Outside of class, there is an effort for socialization with an end-of-term pub visit.

    Overall, the sources portray a dynamic and often chaotic classroom environment where students from different backgrounds come together to learn English, and the teacher tries his best to help them navigate the challenges of learning a new language while also managing the chaos of a diverse classroom.

    Mr. Brown’s Trials

    Mr. Brown faces numerous challenges as an English teacher in the sources, stemming from the diverse student body, the school administration, and his own personal circumstances.

    • Student Diversity and Language Barriers: Mr. Brown’s class includes students from a wide array of countries, each with varying levels of English proficiency. This creates communication challenges and misunderstandings. He often has to repeat himself, use gestures, and try different approaches to get his points across.
    • Classroom Management: The classroom is often chaotic, with students talking over each other, arguing, and engaging in disruptive behavior. Mr. Brown frequently struggles to maintain control and keep the students focused on their lessons. He has to navigate cultural differences, prejudices, and insensitive comments made by the students.
    • Unconventional Teaching Methods: Mr. Brown’s teaching methods are sometimes unconventional, which leads to disapproval from the school principal, Miss Courtney. While he tries to make the class fun and engaging, his methods are not always appreciated by the school administration, who prefer more traditional approaches. He is told to use more figures of speech in his teaching. He’s also told that they need to learn more practical English.
    • Conflicts with School Administration: Miss Courtney, the school principal, is a source of conflict for Mr. Brown, as she has a strong preference for female teachers, especially after a previous male teacher had a breakdown. This preference leads to Mr. Brown being put on a month’s trial. She often criticizes his teaching methods and threatens to fire him. She also interferes with his class, making unhelpful remarks and showing skepticism about the students’ progress.
    • Accusations and Misunderstandings: Mr. Brown is mistakenly accused of being a school inspector. He is also involved in a misunderstanding with a student, Danielle, who tells another teacher that she is engaged to Mr. Brown, which then reaches Miss Courtney, making things awkward for him.
    • Personal Problems: Mr. Brown also has to deal with personal problems such as being challenged to a fight in the school gym and dealing with a student, Ranit, who was planning to kill himself rather than be forced into an arranged marriage. He must also navigate the various social events that the students involve him in, as well as the gossip and rumors that circulate through the school.
    • Student Cheating: The students are caught trying to cheat on a mock exam. Mr. Brown is also told that previous teachers had given students answers. He then finds himself in a moral dilemma of needing to get the students through their final exam, while knowing that they are very unprepared.
    • Threat of Job Loss: Due to Miss Courtney’s disapproval and the students’ academic performance, Mr. Brown is constantly under threat of being fired. He is eventually dismissed from his job but is later rehired after Miss Hardaker is unable to manage the class.
    • Exam stress: The students’ impending final exam and the pressure to get them to pass is a significant challenge for Mr. Brown. He must balance his time teaching the class with making sure that they have the resources and information they need to pass. This pressure is compounded by Miss Courtney’s suggestion that the course may be canceled if the students don’t pass their exam.

    In summary, Mr. Brown’s challenges encompass managing a diverse and often unruly group of students, navigating conflicts with school administration, dealing with misunderstandings and personal problems, and overcoming systemic issues in the school environment. These factors make his role as a teacher extremely demanding and complex.

    Mr. Brown’s Class: Chaos and Culture Clashes

    The students in Mr. Brown’s English class are frequently involved in mishaps, stemming from language barriers, cultural misunderstandings, and their own unique personalities. These incidents often disrupt the class and create challenges for Mr. Brown. Here are some of the student mishaps described in the sources:

    • Misunderstandings and Miscommunications:
    • Students frequently misunderstand instructions or questions due to their varying levels of English proficiency.
    • There are many instances of students misinterpreting figures of speech and idioms, which leads to confusion and sometimes humor.
    • Students sometimes use words incorrectly, causing confusion and laughter, such as when a student confuses “unrolled” with “enrolled”.
    • Classroom Disruptions:
    • Students often talk over each other, interrupt the teacher, and engage in side conversations, making it difficult for Mr. Brown to maintain control.
    • Some students argue with each other, sometimes using insulting language or stereotypes.
    • Students squabble over seating arrangements, leading to a physical confrontation.
    • There are instances of students being late to class, and giving strange excuses.
    • Students are frequently distracted, and not focused on their lessons, often thinking about other topics and having side conversations.
    • Some students engage in disruptive behavior, such as making noises, or not sitting still.
    • Cultural and Social Missteps:
    • Students make culturally insensitive comments towards each other, such as those relating to race and religion.
    • Some students have difficulty understanding the cultural norms of England, which sometimes leads to awkward or humorous situations.
    • There are instances of students displaying prejudices and making insensitive remarks towards each other.
    • A student, Ranit, plans to kill himself rather than be forced into an arranged marriage.
    • Students also engage in romantic pursuits, sometimes disrupting the class with their behavior.
    • Cheating and Dishonesty:
    • Students are caught attempting to cheat on a mock examination.
    • Some students write answers on their hands, handkerchiefs and hats in an effort to cheat on the final exam.
    • A student is caught shoplifting, leading to further disruption of the class and school.
    • Other Incidents:
    • A student is mistaken for a school inspector.
    • Some students get into trouble outside of class, such as a student who is speeding on the motorway.
    • Students get locked in a classroom and have to be rescued.
    • There is also a major incident when they are all sent home for giving silly answers.
    • The students are also involved in a number of drinking incidents.
    • Exam mishaps
    • During a mock exam, one student answers “a sentence is what you get when you are sent to prison”.
    • During the mock exam, a student answers the question about the past participle of “I write” with “I have WR Ren”.
    • One student was writing backwards during the mock exam.
    • Students arrive for the final exam with crib notes written on their clothing, hats, and hands, and some are even using ink to write on their skin during the exam.

    These mishaps highlight the challenges of teaching a diverse group of students who are all at different stages of learning a new language and adapting to a new culture. The mishaps also contribute to the overall chaos and humor of the English class, and demonstrate the challenges that Mr. Brown faces as a teacher.

    Cultural Clashes in the English Classroom

    The sources reveal several instances of cultural clashes within the English class, arising from the diverse backgrounds of the students and their varying perspectives. These clashes manifest in several ways:

    • Religious Intolerance: A significant cultural clash occurs when a student, Ranit, a Sikh, expresses his disapproval of Islam, calling Muslims “unbelievers”. This leads to a heated exchange with Ali, a Muslim student, who is deeply offended by the remarks, and pulls a knife. This incident highlights the religious tensions and prejudices that exist within the classroom, requiring the teacher’s intervention to prevent violence.
    • Stereotyping and Prejudice: Students often resort to stereotyping and making prejudiced comments about each other’s cultures. For example, Terumi, a Japanese student, makes derogatory remarks about Chinese people, referring to them as “peasants,” while a Chinese student makes derogatory comments about Japanese. There are also several instances where students are described by their nationality as a way of insult such as “big Spanish omelette” or “you brown of chapati”. These comments reveal the underlying prejudices and biases that some students harbor towards others, which lead to conflicts and misunderstandings in the class.
    • Misunderstandings of Cultural Norms: Students often struggle with understanding English cultural norms and customs. For instance, some students have difficulty grasping English figures of speech and idioms, leading to confusion and sometimes humor. This misunderstanding is apparent when some students interpret the phrase “sold a pup” literally. There are also instances of students misinterpreting social cues, such as when a student makes a comment that is sexually suggestive and culturally inappropriate.
    • Differing views on marriage: When Ranit is discussing his arranged marriage, his culture’s tradition where only women can change their minds is presented as a point of conflict. The concept of arranged marriage is also presented as a challenge to the understanding of other students, and those from other cultural backgrounds, particularly when Ali reveals that he is planning to marry Su, even though he is already married.
    • Contrasting Political Ideologies: Su, a Chinese student, expresses strong support for communism and frequently criticizes Western capitalism and imperialism. This leads to clashes with other students who hold different political views. Her comments are seen by a Japanese student as “a load of copos” which further demonstrates the divide within the class. Her support for Chairman Mao and his teachings are seen by other students as being strange and confusing.
    • Language as a Source of Conflict: Language itself becomes a site of conflict, as students struggle to express themselves in English, often leading to misunderstandings or misinterpretations. When students make errors in English, such as using the wrong verb tense, it becomes an opportunity for other students to ridicule them. In one example, a student is mocked when he says that the plural of “thief” is “thiefs”. This is further complicated when a student reveals his rhyming slang, which completely confuses his classmates.
    • Clash of values: There are instances of students mocking others for their religious beliefs, such as when one student refers to the Catholic religion with disrespect, and another student refers to Muslims and Sikhs with disdain. There are many instances of students being called names or mocked for their national origin.
    • Disagreement over personal life: There are also many disagreements between students about what is acceptable in their personal lives. For instance, some students have strong opinions on sexual matters and express them in a way that clashes with the views of other students.

    These cultural clashes highlight the challenges of creating a harmonious learning environment when students come from vastly different backgrounds. They also underscore the teacher’s role in navigating these differences and promoting understanding and respect among the students. These tensions are a recurring theme throughout the sources, and present a continuous challenge for Mr Brown to manage in the classroom.

    Exam Anxiety: Students and Teacher Under Pressure

    The sources reveal that both the students and Mr. Brown experience significant exam anxieties, stemming from different concerns and pressures.

    Student Anxieties:

    • Fear of Failure: The students express a clear fear of not passing their upcoming lower Cambridge certificate exam. They are aware that their English skills are not perfect, and this creates a sense of apprehension and worry. Mr. Brown even says that he doubts whether they will pass.
    • Pressure to Perform: The students feel the pressure to succeed, not just for themselves, but also for Mr. Brown. They feel that they must not let Mr. Brown down, and that their performance is a reflection of his teaching. The pressure is made worse by Miss Courtney’s suggestion that the course may be canceled if the students do not pass the exam.
    • Lack of Confidence: Many students lack confidence in their ability to do well on the exam. This is shown by their reliance on cheating, and their concerns about their performance during practice sessions. They express doubts about their chances of success, revealing a deep-seated anxiety about the exam itself.
    • Concerns about specific exam components: Students express concern about the dictation part of the exam, and are worried they will not understand the person who will be reading aloud.
    • Desire to please the teacher: There is a sense that the students want to pass the exam to show Mr. Brown that his work has not been in vain. They express their wish to show him they have learned from him, and that they do not want to disappoint him.
    • Cheating as a Coping Mechanism: The students turn to cheating as a way of coping with their anxiety. They try to obtain the answers in advance, and write notes on their clothing, hands, and hats, which shows the desperation they feel about the exam.
    • Nervousness: The students express their nervousness about taking the exam in many ways. Some students are so nervous that they cannot even shake Mr. Brown’s hand. Others talk about feeling “petrified”.

    Mr. Brown’s Anxieties:

    • Pressure to Get Students to Pass: Mr. Brown is under immense pressure to ensure that his students pass their exams. He knows that their performance will reflect on his abilities as a teacher, and he is concerned that a bad result will lead to his dismissal. He feels that his job depends on their success.
    • Concerns About Student Preparation: Mr. Brown is aware that his students are not fully prepared for the exam, and that their chances of passing are low. He has tried many different ways to help the class pass, but he knows that it may not be enough.
    • Moral Dilemma: Mr. Brown is faced with a moral dilemma, as he knows that the students are likely to fail their exam. This has him consider leaving the answers lying around for the students to see.
    • Threat of Course Cancellation: Mr. Brown is anxious about the possibility that the course will be canceled if his students fail their exams. This adds to the pressure he feels to get the students through the exam.
    • Self-Doubt: Despite his unconventional teaching methods, Mr. Brown questions whether his teaching has been effective. He expresses self-doubt about his methods and effectiveness as a teacher, and wonders whether his students will be able to pass the exam.
    • Desire to Help Students: Mr. Brown feels a strong desire to help his students succeed and does what he can to prepare them. He knows that they want to do well, and he is concerned about letting them down.
    • Personal anxiety: Mr. Brown also faces some personal anxieties, including his fight with Mr. Jarvis, and his uncertainty about his future. These anxieties make it more challenging for him to focus on the exam.

    In summary, both Mr. Brown and his students experience significant anxiety related to their upcoming exams. The students are worried about their performance and whether they will pass, and Mr. Brown is worried about the success of his students, as well as his future employment. These anxieties highlight the high stakes that are involved in the exams, and the pressure that both parties are under.

    Mind Your Language (Season 1; 1977–1978)

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • English Lesson Beyoncé Named Greatest Pop Star of the 21st Century – Study Notes

    English Lesson Beyoncé Named Greatest Pop Star of the 21st Century – Study Notes

    This English lesson uses a Billboard article naming Beyoncé the greatest pop star of the 21st century as a text to teach advanced vocabulary and grammar. The lesson explains various grammatical concepts like the historical present and present perfect tenses, and defines numerous vocabulary words within the context of the article, including compound adjectives and phrasal verbs. The lesson also discusses the Billboard charts and their significance in the music industry. Finally, homework questions encourage students to practice the newly learned vocabulary and grammar.

    01
    Amazon Prime FREE Membership

    Music Industry Analysis & Grammar Review

    Quiz

    1. What is the “historical present tense” and why is it used in the article’s headline?
    2. Explain the difference between the present perfect tense used in the first paragraph (“has been named”) and the simple present tense (“names”) used in the headline.
    3. What is a compound adjective? Give two examples used in the article.
    4. How does the article define “the bar” in the context of evaluating pop stars?
    5. Explain the phrase “have long been” as it is used in the context of the article, and give an example sentence.
    6. What does it mean to “scoop up” trophies, as used in the context of the article?
    7. What are the two Billboard charts mentioned in the article, and what does each measure?
    8. What does it mean for an entertainer to “dominate the airwaves?”
    9. Explain the use of the suffix “-dom” as it relates to the word “stardom.”
    10. What is the meaning of the phrasal verb “to round out” as it’s used in the text?
    01
    Fans for Line Dancing, 2025 New Laser Colors Fans, Large Folding Hand Fan, Foldable Craft Decorative Handheld Fan (Blue)

    Quiz – Answer Key

    1. The “historical present tense” is when the present tense is used to describe a past event, which makes the event sound more interesting or urgent. This is why the headline uses “names” instead of “named.”
    2. The present perfect tense (“has been named”) is used to describe a past event that has a present effect, indicating that the naming has recently occurred and is relevant now. The simple present tense (“names”) in the headline uses the historical present, a style used in headlines to create immediacy.
    3. A compound adjective is a phrase with two or more words that act together as an adjective. Examples from the article include “staff-chosen” and “Grammy-winning.”
    4. In this context, “the bar” represents the standard of quality or performance against which all other pop stars of the 21st Century are measured. Beyonce is described as “the bar.”
    5. The phrase “have long been” is a formal way of saying that something has happened or existed for a long time. For example: “Education has long been considered the key to success.”
    6. In this context, “scooping up” trophies means winning awards very easily, with little resistance or challenge.
    7. The two Billboard charts mentioned in the article are the Hot 100, which measures the most popular songs, and the Billboard 200, which measures the most popular albums.
    8. To “dominate the airwaves” means to be the largest, most noticeable, or most important presence on radio or television broadcasts.
    9. The suffix “-dom” creates nouns that refer to a state, status, or quality. So, “stardom” refers to the state of being a star.
    10. The phrasal verb “to round out” means to complete something or make it perfect, typically by adding a final component.
    01
    Cat Eye Lashes False Eyelashes Wispy Natural Lashes Mink Lashes Fluffy False Lashes Volume Natural Eyelashes Flared-05

    Essay Questions

    1. Analyze how the article uses formal and informal language to convey information about Beyoncé’s achievements. Discuss the effect of these different styles on the overall message.
    2. Discuss the role of music charts and awards in determining the success and influence of a pop artist, using specific examples from the article. How does the article seem to position these measures?
    3. The article mentions several grammatical concepts such as the historical present tense, compound adjectives, and prepositions. Analyze the importance of these different grammatical points in the lesson.
    4. Explore the theme of innovation and evolution as presented in the article. How does the article use these concepts in relation to Beyonce’s career and influence on the music industry?
    5. Compare and contrast the use of direct language and idioms/phrasal verbs (such as “scoop up,” “round out,” and “the bar”) in the article. How do these choices affect the tone and inform the reader?
    01
    Fusion5 F202_8G 10.1 Inch Tablet – Android 13, Full HD IPS, Octa-Core, 8GB RAM, 128GB Storage, Dual Band Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, USB-C, 10 Inch, 13MP Rear 5MP Front Camera

    Glossary of Key Terms

    Billboard: A famous American music and entertainment magazine that creates official charts of the most popular songs and albums in the U.S.

    Compound Adjective: A phrase with two or more words that act as a single adjective to describe a noun, often connected by a hyphen.

    Debut: The first time an entertainer, athlete, or product is introduced to the public.

    Dominate (the airwaves): To be the largest, most noticeable, or most important part of something being broadcasted on radio or television.

    Editorial: An article in a newspaper or magazine that expresses the editor’s opinions or ideas.

    Exemplify: To be a clear or typical example of something.

    Evolution: The process of slow change and development over time.

    Historical Present Tense: Using the present tense to describe recent past events, often to create a sense of immediacy or urgency.

    Innovation: The introduction of new and better ideas or methods, often associated with technology or inventions.

    Measure (against): To compare someone or something to a specific standard or benchmark.

    Nod: An informal term for a nomination for an award.

    Ongoing: Continuing to happen or not yet completed.

    Ordinal Numbers: Numbers that indicate position in a series (e.g., first, second, third, 21st).

    Pick: An informal term for a selection or choice.

    Rank: To choose the order of people or things on a list based on quality, importance, or success.

    Record: Used as an adjective before a noun to describe something that is the highest, most, or best ever achieved.

    Round out: (phrasal verb) To make an experience feel complete or perfect, usually by adding something final.

    Scoop up: (phrasal verb) In this context, to win something very easily.

    Series: A set of related things that happen or are done one after the other. (Note: it’s both singular and plural)

    Staff Chosen: A compound adjective describing something that was selected by the staff of an organization.

    Stardom: The state or status of being a star, often in the entertainment industry.

    Suffix: A letter or a group of letters added to the end of a word to change its meaning.

    The Bar: A standard level of quality or performance used to compare others.

    To Claim: To gain, win, or achieve something, often in a formal way.

    To Name (someone something): To officially select or identify someone for a specific title.

    To Top (a list): To be in the highest position on a list or to be better than a previous person or thing.

    Turn of the Millennium: The beginning of the Millennium, specifically referring to the year 2000.

    01
    Gold-Plated Cross Necklace for Women – Handmade Cubic Zirconia Faith Pendant Necklaces, 18K Plated Hypoallergenic Jewelry

    Beyoncé: Billboard’s Greatest Pop Star

    Okay, here is a briefing document summarizing the key themes, ideas, and facts from the provided text excerpts.

    Briefing Document: Billboard Names Beyoncé Greatest Pop Star of the 21st Century

    Date: October 26, 2023

    Subject: Analysis of a news article about Billboard’s selection of Beyoncé as the greatest pop star of the 21st century.

    Sources: Excerpts from a transcript of an English language lesson analyzing a news article.

    Overview:

    The core of the text is the analysis of a news article where Billboard magazine has named Beyoncé the greatest pop star of the 21st century. The provided text is from an English language lesson that uses this article as a vehicle to teach advanced vocabulary, grammar, and pronunciation skills. The analysis goes into depth on the language used in the headline and article, highlighting the nuances of formal and informal language.

    01
    Gold-Tone Heart Pendant Necklace with Multicolor Rhinestones, Double-Layer Chain, Adjustable Jewelry for Women

    Key Themes and Ideas:

    1. Billboard’s Ranking of Beyoncé:
    • Billboard, a leading American music and entertainment magazine, declared Beyoncé the greatest pop star of the 21st century as part of an ongoing series. This was based on her “full 25 years of influence.”
    • Quote: “Beyonce has been named the greatest pop star of the 21st century by billboard the music charting site announced on Tuesday as a part of an ongoing series Beyonce tops our staff chosen editorial list based on her full 25 years of influence.”
    1. Beyoncé’s Impact and Achievement:
    • Beyoncé is considered the standard against which other pop stars are measured due to her “commitment to Innovation, Evolution and all-around Excellence.”
    • Quote: “her commitment to Innovation Evolution and allaround Excellence has made her the bar against which all other pop stars this Century have long been measured over the past 25 years”
    • She is the most Grammy-winning artist with a record of 32 wins.
    • Quote: “Beyonce is the most Grammy winning artist with a record 32 wins”
    • She has received 11 nominations (nods) for her 2024 album, Cowboy Carter, with predictions for further award wins.
    • Quote: “after earning 11 more nods for her 2024 album Cowboy Carter is expected to scoop up more trophies come January”
    • She has a strong presence on Billboard’s charts with nine number-one songs and 24 top 10 songs on the Hot 100, and eight albums have reached the number one spot on the Billboard 200 albums chart.
    • Quote: “She has nine number one songs and 24 top 10 songs on the Hot 100 eight of her albums have claimed the number one spot on the billboard 200 albums chart”
    01
    kimorn Sunglasses Womens Men Trendy Retro Sun Glasses Oversize Square Frame Shades K1571
    1. Billboard’s Top 25 Pop Artists:
    • The article mentions that Billboard has been ranking their staff picks for the top 25 pop artists of the past 25 years since August.
    • Taylor Swift was announced as number two, and Rihanna was number three in the list.
    • Quote: “last week Taylor Swift was announced as Billboard’s number two pick with Rihanna claiming the third spot”
    • Other artists that were in the top 10 are Adele, Ariana Grande, Justin Bieber, Kanye West, Britney Spears, Lady Gaga, and Drake. Katie Perry was named as number 25.
    • Quote: “Adele Ariana Grande Justin Bieber Kanye West Britney Spears Lady Gaga and Drake round out the top 10 at number 25 is Katie Perry with other pop artists including Bad Bunny the weekend One Direction Miley Cyrus Eminem Usher and others ranking in between”
    01
    Kids Swim Goggles,Swimming Goggles for Kids 6-14, Anti-Fog UV Protection Pool Glasses for Boys Girls
    1. Language Analysis:
    • The lesson emphasizes the use of advanced vocabulary such as “ongoing,” “innovation,” “evolution,” “editorial,” “exemplify,” and “dominate.”
    • It delves into grammar concepts such as the “historical present tense” used in the headline, the use of “present perfect tense” (“has been named”), ordinal numbers, compound adjectives, and formal grammatical structures such as the phrase “have long been.”
    • Idiomatic expressions and phrasal verbs like “scoop up” and “round out” are also explained.
    • The text also discusses the use of “as” to indicate a title or job, and how the suffix “dom” can be used to form nouns about a state, status, or quality.
    • There is a discussion about the word “debut” where the “t” is silent and the way Texas Hold ’em is pronounced colloquially as “holdom.”
    01
    Starlight Retractable Car Charger, Max 120W 4 in 1 Car Accessories with Starlight, Retractable Fast Car Phone Charger with 2 USB Ports for Phones/Tablets/Car Recorders, 31.5inch (Grey)
    1. The “Bar” Metaphor:
    • Billboard’s use of the metaphor “the bar” indicates Beyoncé’s position as the standard to which other pop stars are compared. This is a standard of performance and quality.
    • Quote: “her commitment to Innovation Evolution and allaround Excellence has made her the bar against which all other pop stars this Century have long been measured over the past 25 years”
    • It also discussed common uses of “the bar”, such as “set the bar,” “raise the bar,” and “lower the bar.”
    01
    WIHOLL Womens Cap Sleeve Summer Sweater Tops Lightweight Pointelle Knit Business Casual Outfits 2025 Trendy
    1. Purpose of the Lesson:
    • The text is part of an English language learning lesson designed to enhance reading comprehension and vocabulary through the analysis of news articles, and to highlight the nuances of formal and informal English.
    • The lesson also includes opportunities for pronunciation and listening practice through a read through at a normal pace and concludes with homework questions to encourage writing practice.
    01
    Smart Portable Air Conditioner, 8000 BTU ASHRAE 128 (10,000 BTU DOE) for Rooms Up to 700 Sq. Ft., Smart Portable AC with Follow Me Remote and Window Kit, White

    Important Facts:

    • Billboard: A famous American music and entertainment magazine that creates official charts of the most popular songs and albums in the U.S.
    • Historical Present Tense: Using present tense to describe recent past events to make them sound more interesting or urgent, this was used in the headline.
    • Compound Adjectives: Two or more words that work together as an adjective to describe a noun.
    • Ordinal Numbers: Used to denote centuries like “21st” as opposed to “21.”
    • Grammys: The Grammy Awards, the music industry’s equivalent of the Oscars.
    • Texas Hold’em: A popular card game that is the namesake of one of Beyonce’s songs.
    • Hot 100: Billboard chart for most popular songs.
    • Billboard 200: Billboard chart for most popular albums.
    • Airwaves: The waves or signals that are used to broadcast radio or television programs.
    01
    B4Life Tie Rack Wall Mounted Tie Box,Tie Organizer Tie Display Racks for Wall, Bamboo Tie Storage Tie Organizer for Men Tie Holder Wall Mount(Storage 16 Ties) (Wood Color 9 Grids)

    Conclusion:

    This document analyzes a news article about Billboard’s selection of Beyoncé as the greatest pop star of the 21st century. The article serves as a learning tool for advanced English lessons that cover nuances of the language as well as various aspects of the music industry. The article highlights Beyoncé’s major achievements and contributions to pop music. It provides key insight to the language used in media and its context.

    01
    Custom Commercial Rug Door Mat 6′ X 3′ 7MM Thickness Welcome Doormat for Indoor Outdoor Entryway Personalized Business Logo Floor Mat Rubber Backing Carpets

    Beyoncé: Billboard’s Greatest Pop Star of the 21st Century

    1. How did Billboard determine that Beyoncé is the greatest pop star of the 21st century?

    Billboard named Beyoncé the greatest pop star of the 21st century as part of an ongoing series where their staff chooses an editorial list of artists. This decision was based on her 25 years of influence, commitment to innovation and evolution, and overall excellence. They essentially view her as setting the standard or “the bar” against which all other pop stars of this century are measured.

    01
    Organic Lions Mane Mushroom Capsules (120 Count), for Brain Support and Immune Health, Third Party Tested and Grown in The USA – by Double Wood

    2. What are some of the key achievements that support Beyoncé’s recognition?

    Beyoncé’s key achievements include being the most Grammy-winning artist with a record of 32 wins. She also has 9 number-one songs and 24 top 10 songs on the Billboard Hot 100. Additionally, eight of her albums have reached the number one spot on the Billboard 200 albums chart, and 11 of her solo albums have charted in the top 10. Her impact, described as her influence, innovation, evolution, and “all-around excellence” are also cited as reasons.

    01
    Soccer Coach Gifts, 20 oz Tumbler, Thank You Gifts Coach for Baseball, Softball, Swim, Football, Basketball, Volleyball, Coaches

    3. What is the “historical present tense,” and why is it used in headlines?

    The “historical present tense” is when the present tense is used to describe recent past events. It is often used in headlines to make the event sound more interesting or more urgent. For example, instead of saying “Billboard named Beyoncé,” the headline uses “Billboard names Beyoncé,” even though the naming event has already occurred. This is a stylistic choice to capture the reader’s attention.

    01
    JMIERR Men’s Corduroy Button Down Shirts Casual Long Sleeve Shacket Jacket with Flap Pockets

    4. What is a “compound adjective,” and can you provide some examples from the article?

    A compound adjective is a phrase with two or more words that work together as an adjective to describe a noun. These words are often connected by a hyphen. Examples from the article include: “staff-chosen editorial list,” “all-around excellence,” and “Grammy-winning artist.” These phrases combine multiple words to offer a more specific description of the noun they are modifying.

    01
    PAPIFEED Wireless Cat Water Fountain, 106oz/3L Battery Operated Pet Water Fountain Cordless for Cats Indoor, Automatic Cat Drinking Dispenser with Motion Sensor, Leak-Proof Silicone Pad Included White

    5. What is meant by the phrase “the bar” in the context of the article, and how is it used?

    In the context of the article, “the bar” is a metaphor for the standard level of quality or performance against which others are measured. By saying Beyoncé is “the bar,” Billboard is stating that her level of achievement, innovation and impact represents the benchmark for pop stars in this century. It’s used to show that other pop stars are compared to her success and influence.

    01
    Wheel Brush, Soft Drill Wheel Cleaner Brush, Highly Dense and Durable Rim Cleaner Brush for Wheels, Rims, Engines, Exhaust,Motorcycles

    6. What is the significance of the Billboard charts mentioned in the article (Hot 100 and Billboard 200)?

    The Billboard charts are considered the standard for success in the music industry in the US. The Hot 100 chart tracks the most popular songs, while the Billboard 200 chart tracks the most popular albums. Placement on these charts is an indicator of an artist’s popularity and commercial success. For instance, Beyoncé’s nine number one hits on the Hot 100, and eight number one albums on the Billboard 200 are significant markers of her prominence and impact on the music industry.

    01
    Magnesium L Threonate, Magtein™, Sleep and Cognitive Support – High Absorption – Most Bioavailable Form of Magnesium – 2,000 mg – 120 Capsules

    7. What does it mean to “dominate the airwaves” and who else has been mentioned as dominating the airwaves?

    To “dominate the airwaves” means to be the largest, most noticeable, or most important part of radio or television broadcasts. It indicates that an artist’s music is frequently played and their presence is highly visible. The article mentions that Beyoncé’s former girl group Destiny’s Child dominated the airwaves in the early 2000s.

    01
    Full (54″x10″x6″) Bed Wedge Pillow for Headboard – Bed Gap Filler – Mattress Wedge – Bloster Triangle Pillow for Sleeping to Fill Gap (0-8″) Between Headboard and Mattress – Ivory

    8. Besides Beyoncé, which other artists were mentioned in the top picks by Billboard?

    Besides Beyoncé at number one, Billboard’s top picks include Taylor Swift at number two, Rihanna at number three, and other artists within the top ten such as Adele, Ariana Grande, Justin Bieber, Kanye West, Britney Spears, Lady Gaga, and Drake. Katie Perry is listed as number 25. Other notable artists ranked in between include Bad Bunny, The Weeknd, One Direction, Miley Cyrus, Eminem, and Usher.

    01
    CoQ10 200mg Softgels, Ultra CoQ10 Ubiquinone 200mgWith Coconut MCT Oil, 5X Superior Absorption, Coenzyme Q10 Supplement for Heart Health & Energy – 90 Counts

    Beyoncé: Billboard’s Greatest Pop Star

    Okay, here is the detailed timeline and cast of characters based on the provided text:

    Timeline of Events

    • Past 25 Years: Billboard has been tracking the influence of pop artists. Beyoncé has demonstrated consistent innovation, evolution, and excellence, establishing a high standard. Her commitment to these elements has been measured by the industry.
    • 2003: Beyoncé’s debut solo album, Dangerously in Love, was released. This marked the beginning of her solo career after being part of the group Destiny’s Child.
    • Early 2000s: Destiny’s Child was dominating the airwaves and charts.
    • Recent Past: Billboard begins an ongoing series ranking the top 25 pop artists of the past 25 years. The rankings are based on staff picks.
    • August (Year Not Specified): Billboard begins ranking staff picks for the top 25 pop artists of the past 25 years.
    • Last Week (Prior to Article): Billboard announces Taylor Swift as their number two pick, and Rihanna as number three in their list of top pop artists.
    • Tuesday (Prior to Article): Billboard announces that Beyoncé has been named the greatest pop star of the 21st century as part of their ongoing series. This is done through a staff-chosen editorial list based on 25 years of influence.
    • January (Future): The Grammy Awards will be held, and Beyoncé is expected to win more awards for her 2024 album, Cowboy Carter, for which she has received 11 nominations.
    01
    (3 Pack) Kava Kava Root Extract Supplement – High Concentration Kava w/Ashwagandha, Lemon Balm, Valerian Root for Immune & Overall Health – Vegan, Alcohol-Free

    Cast of Characters

    • Beyoncé: An American singer, songwriter, actress, and record producer. Named by Billboard as the greatest pop star of the 21st century, based on her 25 years of influence, her commitment to innovation, evolution, all-around excellence, and her position as the standard against which other pop stars are measured. She has won a record 32 Grammy Awards and has received 11 more nominations for her 2024 album Cowboy Carter. Has a deep history on Billboard’s charts, with nine number-one songs, 24 top 10 songs on the Hot 100, and eight number-one albums on the Billboard 200. A former member of the girl group Destiny’s Child.
    • Taylor Swift: An American singer-songwriter. Ranked number two on Billboard’s list of top pop artists.
    • Rihanna: A Barbadian singer, actress, and businesswoman. Ranked number three on Billboard’s list of top pop artists.
    • Adele: A British singer-songwriter. Part of the top 10 on Billboard’s list of top pop artists.
    • Ariana Grande: An American singer, songwriter, and actress. Part of the top 10 on Billboard’s list of top pop artists.
    • Justin Bieber: A Canadian singer-songwriter. Part of the top 10 on Billboard’s list of top pop artists.
    • Kanye West: An American rapper, singer, songwriter, record producer, and fashion designer. Part of the top 10 on Billboard’s list of top pop artists.
    • Britney Spears: An American singer, dancer, and actress. Part of the top 10 on Billboard’s list of top pop artists. She is also the speaker’s personal pick for top pop star of the last 25 years.
    • Lady Gaga: An American singer, songwriter, and actress. Part of the top 10 on Billboard’s list of top pop artists.
    • Drake: A Canadian rapper, singer, and actor. Part of the top 10 on Billboard’s list of top pop artists.
    • Katy Perry: An American singer-songwriter. Ranked number 25 on Billboard’s list of top pop artists.
    • Bad Bunny: A Puerto Rican rapper and singer. Appears on Billboard’s list of top pop artists somewhere between number 11 and 24.
    • The Weeknd: A Canadian singer-songwriter and record producer. Appears on Billboard’s list of top pop artists somewhere between number 11 and 24.
    • One Direction: A British-Irish boy band. Appears on Billboard’s list of top pop artists somewhere between number 11 and 24.
    • Miley Cyrus: An American singer-songwriter and actress. Appears on Billboard’s list of top pop artists somewhere between number 11 and 24.
    • Eminem: An American rapper, songwriter, and record producer. Appears on Billboard’s list of top pop artists somewhere between number 11 and 24.
    • Usher: An American singer, songwriter, and dancer. Appears on Billboard’s list of top pop artists somewhere between number 11 and 24.
    • Destiny’s Child: An American girl group from which Beyoncé launched her solo career.

    This timeline and character list provide a clear overview of the events and people mentioned in your source materials. Let me know if you need any clarification or additional information.

    01
    Women’s Essential Pilates Set, Including 5 Accessories, Pilates Ring Boot Strap, Women’s Yoga Set, and gluteal Yoga Ball Boot Strap

    Beyoncé: A Pop Star Grammar Lesson

    This English lesson uses a Billboard article naming Beyoncé the greatest pop star of the 21st century as a text to teach advanced vocabulary and grammar. The lesson explains various grammatical concepts like the historical present and present perfect tenses, and defines numerous vocabulary words within the context of the article, including compound adjectives and phrasal verbs. The lesson also discusses the Billboard charts and their significance in the music industry. Finally, homework questions encourage students to practice the newly learned vocabulary and grammar.

    01
    Smilco Synthetic Wigs for Women Ombre Grey Wig Long Wavy Curly Middle Part Wig Natural Looking Hair Wigs Synthetic Heat Resistant Fiber Wigs for Daily Party Cosplay (30 Inch)

    Beyoncé: Billboard’s Greatest Pop Star

    Beyonce has been named the greatest pop star of the 21st century by Billboard [1]. This decision is based on her 25 years of influence and her commitment to innovation, evolution, and all-around excellence [2, 3]. Billboard considers her the standard against which other pop stars of this century are measured [3].

    Here are some of the accomplishments that contributed to this assessment:

    • Grammy Awards: Beyonce is the most Grammy-winning artist with a record 32 wins [4]. She has also received 11 more nominations for her 2024 album, “Cowboy Carter,” and is expected to win more awards [4].
    • Billboard Charts: Beyonce has had a significant presence on Billboard’s charts, including [4]:
    • Nine number-one songs on the Hot 100 [5]
    • 24 top-ten songs on the Hot 100 [4]
    • Eight albums that have reached number one on the Billboard 200 albums chart [5]
    • Solo Albums: 11 of Beyonce’s solo albums have charted in Billboard’s top 10 [5]. Her debut solo album was “Dangerously in Love” in 2003 [5].
    • Early Career: She previously dominated the airwaves as part of the girl group Destiny’s Child [5].

    Billboard has been ranking their staff picks for the top 25 pop artists of the past 25 years, and they believe that Beyonce has most defined pop stardom and exemplified pop greatness since the turn of the Millennium [6].

    Billboard Crowns Beyoncé Greatest Pop Star

    Beyonce has been named the greatest pop star of the 21st century by Billboard [1]. This decision was made as part of an ongoing series where Billboard has been ranking their staff picks for the top 25 pop artists of the past 25 years [1-3]. Billboard’s picks are based on which artists they believe have most defined pop stardom and exemplified pop greatness since the turn of the Millennium [2, 3].

    Key Points from the Article:

    • Billboard: Billboard is an American music and entertainment magazine that creates official charts of the most popular songs and albums in the US [4]. These charts are considered the standard for success in the music industry [4]. When a song is on the top of the charts, it usually means the Billboard music charts [4].
    • Beyonce’s Recognition: Billboard named Beyonce the greatest pop star of the 21st century [1]. This was based on her 25 years of influence, commitment to innovation, evolution, and all-around excellence [4-6].
    • Grammy Wins: Beyonce is the most Grammy-winning artist with a record of 32 wins [7]. She has also earned 11 more nominations for her 2024 album “Cowboy Carter” and is expected to win more trophies [6, 7].
    • Billboard Chart Performance: Beyonce has had nine number-one songs and 24 top-ten songs on the Hot 100 [6, 8]. Additionally, eight of her albums have claimed the number one spot on the Billboard 200 albums chart [3, 8]. Eleven of her solo albums have charted in Billboard’s top 10 [3, 8].
    • Other Artists: Taylor Swift was announced as Billboard’s number two pick and Rihanna claimed the third spot [3, 6]. The top 10 also includes Adele, Ariana Grande, Justin Bieber, Kanye West, Britney Spears, Lady Gaga, and Drake [3, 6]. Katie Perry is ranked at number 25 [3, 6]. Other pop artists ranked in between include Bad Bunny, The Weeknd, One Direction, Miley Cyrus, Eminem, and Usher [3, 6].
    • Terminology:
    • Compound adjectives are phrases with two or more words that act together as an adjective to describe a noun, such as “staff-chosen editorial list” [4].
    • “The bar” is a standard level of quality or performance that is used to compare all others [5].
    • “Nod” is an informal term for a nomination for an award or title [7].
    • “Scoop up” in this context means to win something very easily [7].
    • “Debut” is the first time an entertainer, athlete or product is introduced to the public [8].
    • “Airwaves” are the signals that are used to broadcast radio or television programs [8].
    • “Stardom” refers to the status of being a star [2].
    • “Exemplify” means to be a clear typical example of something [2].
    • “Round out” means to make an experience feel complete by adding something final [6].
    • “The turn of the Millennium” refers to the beginning of the Millennium, specifically the year 2000 [2].

    The article also includes a grammar lesson covering the historical present tense, present perfect tense, ordinal numbers, compound adjectives, idioms using the phrase “the bar”, formal word order, the use of the preposition “against,” separable phrasal verbs, the use of the word “as,” and the use of the phrase “come January” [1, 4-7].

    English Vocabulary for Music and Entertainment News

    The sources provide several examples of English vocabulary, including definitions and usage in context [1-7]. Here’s a breakdown of some of the key terms:

    General Vocabulary

    • To name someone something: To officially select or identify someone or something for a specific title [1].
    • Ongoing: Continuing to happen or not yet completed [2].
    • To top something: To be in the highest position on a list or to be better than a previous person or thing [2].
    • Innovation: The introduction of new and better ideas or methods [3].
    • Evolution: The process of slow change and development over time [3].
    • All-around: Having many skills, abilities, or uses [3].
    • To measure someone or something against someone or something else: To compare someone or something to a standard [3].
    • To scoop something up: In this context, it means to win something very easily [4].
    • To claim something: A formal verb that means to gain, win or achieve something [5].
    • Debut: The first time an entertainer, athlete or product is introduced to the public [5].
    • To rank someone or something: To choose the order of people or things on a list based on quality, importance, or success [6].
    • Stardom: The status of being a star [6].
    • To exemplify something: To be a clear, typical example of something [6].
    • To round something out: To make an experience feel complete by adding something final [7].

    Phrases and Idioms

    • The bar: The standard level of quality or performance that is used to compare all others [3].
    • Nod: An informal term for a nomination for an award or title [4].
    • The airwaves: The waves or signals that are used to broadcast radio or television programs [5].
    • The turn of the Millennium: The beginning of the Millennium or the year 2000 [6].

    Grammatical Terms

    • Historical present tense: Using the present tense to describe recent past events, making the event sound more interesting or urgent [1].
    • Present perfect tense: Used to describe an event that happened recently in the past, but has an effect on the current situation [1].
    • Ordinal numbers: Numbers like first, second, third, etc. used for centuries [2].
    • Compound adjectives: Phrases with two or more words that work together as an adjective to describe a noun [2]. Examples from the sources include “staff-chosen editorial list” [2] and “Grammy winning artist” [4].
    • Separable phrasal verb: A verb like ‘to round out’ which has two parts that can be separated by another word [7].
    • Suffix: A letter or group of letters added to the end of a word to create a new word [6]. The sources give examples such as the -dom suffix used to create “stardom” and the -ness suffix that turns adjectives into nouns [6].

    Additional Notes

    • The sources highlight how compound adjectives are often connected with hyphens [2].
    • The sources mention how some words, like “series,” have the same form for both singular and plural [2].
    • The sources point out that it is sometimes acceptable and even necessary to end a sentence with a preposition [3].
    • The sources note that the word “come” can be used as a preposition when referencing a future date or time such as “come January” [4].
    • The word “as” can be used to indicate someone’s title, job, role or function [7].

    By understanding these terms and their context, your English vocabulary can improve, especially in the areas of music and entertainment news [1-7].

    Grammar and Style Guide for English

    The sources offer several grammar tips, focusing on both formal and informal English usage, as well as specific grammatical structures and concepts [1, 2]. Here’s a breakdown of those tips:

    Tense Usage

    • Historical Present Tense: This tense uses the present tense to describe recent past events, making them sound more interesting or urgent [1]. For example, the headline “Billboard names Beyonce the greatest pop star of the 21st century” uses this tense [1].
    • Present Perfect Tense: This tense describes an event that happened recently in the past but has an effect on the current situation [1]. For example, “Beyonce has been named the greatest pop star…” [1].

    Sentence Structure and Word Order

    • Formal vs. Informal Word Order: The sources highlight that formal English sometimes uses word orders that are not typical in everyday speech or writing [3]. An example of this is: “her commitment… has made her the bar against which all other pop stars this Century have long been measured” [2, 3]. In more natural English, this would be: “her commitment… has made her the bar that all other pop stars this Century have long been measured against” [3].
    • Ending Sentences with Prepositions: It is acceptable to end a sentence with a preposition, and sometimes there is no other choice [3]. For example, “…that all other pop stars this Century have long been measured against” [3].

    Other Grammatical Concepts

    • Ordinal Numbers: Use ordinal numbers (first, second, third, etc.) for centuries [2]. For example, “the 21st century” [1].
    • Compound Adjectives: These are phrases with two or more words that act as an adjective to describe a noun [2]. They are often connected with a hyphen [2]. Examples include “staff-chosen editorial list” and “Grammy winning artist” [2, 4].
    • “Have long been”: This is a formal way to express that something has existed or happened for a long time, especially when talking about historical trends [3]. For example, “education has long been considered the key to success” [3].
    • Separable Phrasal Verbs: These are verbs, like “round out”, that have two parts that can be separated by another word [5]. For example, “…to round out the team” [5].
    • Use of ‘As’: The word ‘as’ can be used to indicate someone’s title, job role or function [5]. For example, “as your teacher” [5].
    • Use of ‘Come’: The word “come” can be used as a preposition when referencing a future date or time such as “come January” [4].

    Additional Notes

    • The sources mention that some words, like “series,” have the same form for both singular and plural [2].
    • The source emphasizes the importance of understanding suffixes, such as -dom (stardom), and -ness (greatness), to improve vocabulary [6].

    These grammar tips provide insight into how to use English more naturally and effectively, both in formal and informal contexts.

    Beyoncé’s Billboard Chart Dominance

    Billboard is a well-known American music and entertainment magazine that creates official charts of the most popular songs and albums in the U.S. every week [1, 2]. These charts are considered the standard for success in the music industry [2]. When someone says a song is at the top of the charts, it usually means the Billboard music charts [2].

    Here are some key points about Billboard charts discussed in the sources:

    • Hot 100: This chart tracks the most popular songs in the U.S. [3]. Beyonce has had nine number one songs and 24 top 10 songs on the Hot 100 [4, 5].
    • Billboard 200: This chart tracks the most popular albums in the U.S [3]. Eight of Beyonce’s albums have reached the number one spot on the Billboard 200 [4, 5].
    • Beyonce’s Chart History: In addition to her number one hits, 11 of Beyonce’s solo albums have charted in Billboard’s top 10 [3, 5]. Her debut solo album, “Dangerously in Love,” was released in 2003 [3, 5].
    • Ranking of Artists: Billboard has been ranking their staff picks for the top 25 pop artists of the past 25 years [6, 7]. These picks are based on artists who they believe have most defined pop stardom and exemplified pop greatness since the turn of the Millennium [6, 7]. Billboard named Beyonce the greatest pop star of the 21st century as part of this series [1, 5].
    • Other Ranked Artists: Taylor Swift was announced as Billboard’s number two pick, and Rihanna claimed the third spot. The top 10 includes Adele, Ariana Grande, Justin Bieber, Kanye West, Britney Spears, Lady Gaga, and Drake. Katie Perry is ranked at number 25 [5, 7]. Other artists who have been ranked in between include Bad Bunny, The Weeknd, One Direction, Miley Cyrus, Eminem, and Usher [5, 7].
    • “Claimed the number one spot”: The source uses the phrase “claimed the number one spot” to describe albums that reached the top of the Billboard 200 chart, and this phrase is described as a formal verb meaning to gain, win, or achieve something [3].

    These points highlight the importance of Billboard charts in the music industry and how Beyonce has achieved significant success, according to Billboard’s rankings [1-5].

    Yes, you CAN read the NEWS in English! 📰 (Advanced Vocabulary and Grammar)

    in today’s English lesson we’re going to read a news article together you’re going to learn a lot of advanced vocabulary in context for formal and informal situations you’ll also learn some important grammar tips for more natural speaking and writing in English after we analyze each paragraph you will have an opportunity to practice your pronunciation and listening skills by listening to me read everything from start to finish a little bit faster then I’ll have some homework questions for you to practice your writing and as always I’ve created a free PDF for today’s lesson you can download all of today’s notes by clicking the link in the description of this video are you ready today’s article is about some big news in the music industry let’s start with the head headline or the title of today’s news article billboard names Beyonce the greatest pop star of the 21st century first we have the verb to name someone something which means to officially select or identify someone or something for a specific title for example she was named the winner of the competition after an amazing performance he was named employee of the month for his hard work and dedication if you watched my other lesson about how to understand newspaper headlines then you already know that sometimes headlines don’t use the typical grammer rules of standard speaking and writing this title uses something called the historical present tense this is when we use present tense to describe recent past events and this makes the event sound more interesting or more urgent that’s why we’re using names here but in the regular paragraphs of the article we switch back to standard grammar rules and the first sentence of the first paragraph is a great example of this let’s read that now Beyonce has been named the greatest pop star of the 21st century by billboard the music charting site announc on Tuesday as a part of an ongoing series Beyonce tops our staff chosen editorial list based on her full 25 years of influence so here we’re using the present perfect tense has been named this is how we would typically describe an event that happened recently in the past but it has an effect on the current situation next we have the 21st Century not 21 century or Century 21 in English we use ordinal numbers for centuries these are numbers like 1 second 3D fourth Etc the S at the end are the last two letters in the word first the 21st century now let’s talk about billboard billboard is a famous American music and entertainment m magazine that creates official charts of the most popular songs and albums in the US every week these music charts are considered the standard for success in the music industry so when someone says that a song is on the top of the charts that usually means the Billboard music charts here we have a very useful adjective ongoing this means that something is continuing to happen or is not yet completed the crime investigation is still ongoing there are ongoing discussions about how to improve the project a quick grammar note here I know that the word series looks like a plural noun but in English the singular form is also Series so you can watch a series or you can watch many series on Netflix for example here we’re using top as a verb to top something means to be in the highest position on a list or to be better than a previous person or thing for example the song topped the charts for 6 weeks she topped her previous high score in the game by 20 points an editorial is a type of article in a newspaper or a magazine a person who’s in charge of a newspaper or a magazine is called an editor so the purpose of an editorial is to express the editor’s opinions or ideas here we have a compound adjective these are phrases with two or more words that work together as an adjective to describe a noun so what type of editorial list is this you could say an editorial list that was chosen by the staff but this sounds a bit long and the relationship between the adjective and the noun is unclear it sounds much better to say a staff chosen editorial list the words staff and chosen are connected with this punctuation mark which is called a hyphen we use a lot of compound adjectives in English and we’ll see a few more examples of this later let’s go to the next paragraph her commitment to Innovation Evolution and allaround Excellence has made her the bar against which all other pop stars this Century have long been measured over the past 25 years let’s talk about the word Innovation Innovation is the introduction of new and better ideas or methods you usually hear this word in the context of technology or inventions the late 19th and early 20th centuries are remembered as times of great Innovation Innovation is necessary to stay competitive in the technology industry next Evolution evolution is the process of slow change and development over time The Evolution of Music Styles reflects changes in culture the evolution of the internet has transformed how we communicate with people we have another compound adjective allaround this means having many skills abilities or uses he’s an all-around Entertainer who can sing dance and act now we have a lot of idioms in English that use the phrase the bar the bar is the standard level of quality or performance that is used to compare all others you often see this with the verb set so in the same way that you can set a goal or set an example you can also set the bar some other options are to raise the bar or lower the bar in this case billboard is saying that Beyonce is the bar she is the standard when we talk about comparing other people or other things to the standard a more formal verb for this is to measure someone or something against someone or something else now pay attention because we have some very Advanced grammar here this word order is extremely formal and it’s not how we would typically speak or write in everyday English let’s use this part of the sentence as an example and I’m going to replace the subject with the word this this has made her the bar against which all other pop stars this Century have long been measured in everyday English the more natural word order would be this has made her the bar that all other pop stars this Century have long been measured against yes you can end a sentence with a preposition in English in fact sometimes you must end with a preposition because sometimes there’s no other choice in the comments let me know if you’d like a more detailed gramar lesson about the location of prepositions in sentences but wait what about this phrase have long been well this is a more formal way to say that something has happened or has existed for a long time we especially like to use this to talk about historical Trends after the auxiliary phrase have or has been we can use a past participle verb an adjective or a noun education has long been considered the key to success the Statue of Liberty has long been a popular tourist attraction in the United States Beyonce is the most Grammy winning artist with a record 32 wins and after earning 11 more nods for her 2024 album Cowboy Carter is expected to scoop up more trophies come January before the noun artist we have another compound adjective Grammy winning and just like all other adjectives you can use compound adjectives in the comparative form with more or the superlative form the most the most Grammy winning the Grammy Awards are usually just called the gramys and I would say that the gramys are like the Oscars of music we can use the word record as an adjective before a noun to describe something that’s the highest the most or the best ever achieved the band has sold a record number of albums we’ve experienced record amounts of snow this winter the noun nod is a more informal term that’s common in the entertainment industry a nod is a nomination for an award or a title here’s an interesting phrasal verb to scoop something up usually this means to lift or collect something with a scoop or scooping motion but in this context scooping up more trophies means winning something very easily so billboard is predicting that Beyonce will scoop up some more Awards because of the 11 nods specifically 11 Grammy nods that she received for her most recent album the Grammys will be in January and that’s why you see this phrase at the end of the sentence come January this is another way to say when January comes I know it sounds kind of strange but in this phrase the word come is a preposition and then you can add a particular time in the future I would say this sounds a bit old-fashioned but it’s still pretty common in every day conversation for example my daughter will be 10 years old come next Wednesday the garden doesn’t look good right now but come spring it will be filled with green grass and colorful flowers the Texas holdom singer has a deep history on Billboard’s charts as well she has nine number one songs and 24 top 10 songs on the Hot 100 eight of her albums have claimed the number one spot on the billboard 200 albums chart starting with her 2003 debut solo album Dangerously in Love after previously dominating the airwaves as part of girl group Destiny’s Child 11 of Beyonce’s solo albums have charted in Billboard’s top 10 Texas holdom is the name of one of Beyonce’s songs but what does that mean well it’s a popular card game that originated in the state of Texas Texas holdom is a well-known variation of Poker where you have two personal cards and there are five Community cards holdom is a reduction of hold them this spelling is not standard so so don’t use this informal writing or speaking it’s modified to represent colloquial speech or how native speakers pronounce these two words in everyday conversation not always but sometimes in fast spoken English you will hear hold them pronounced as hold them hold them so U my dad’s a Texas hold them player Texas hold them Texas hold them when you purchase them and hold them and hold them and hold them here n o period is an abbreviation for number also we have the name of two important Billboard music charts the Hot 100 is for the most popular songs and the billboard 200 is for the most popular albums in the US every week to claim something is a formal verb that means to gain win or achieve something the politician claimed Victory after a long and difficult campaign many people believe that he will claim the gold medal in the next Olympic race next we have the word debut debut the t is completely silent a debut is the first time an Entertainer athlete or product is introduced to the public the director’s debut film was a massive success The Talented actor made his Hollywood debut when he was only 18 years old we can also use this word as a verb The Talented actor debuted in Hollywood when he was only 18 years old next we have a noun phrase the airwaves the airwaves are the waves or signals that are used to broadcast radio or television programs so if you hear something on the airwaves then you hear it on the radio or maybe you see it on TV so what does it mean to dominate the airwaves well in this context the verb dominate means to be the largest most noticeable or most important part of something Destiny’s Child dominated the charts in the early 2000s when I was a child I had their albums I went to their concert I used to listen to Destiny’s Child a lot since August billboard has been ranking their staff picks for the top 25 pop artists of the past 25 years Billboard’s picks are artists who they believe have most defined pop stardom and have exemplified pop greatness since the turn of the Millennium to rank someone or something this means to choose the order of people or things on a list based on quality importance or success it’s very common to use the passive form of this verb be ranked as plus a number or position Princeton is ranked as one of the best universities in the United States next this is an informal noun a pick is just a selection or a choice Florida is a popular pick for winter vacation destinations what’s your pick for the best restaurant in town now let’s talk about the word stardom we already know the word star so let’s focus on this D suffix a suffix is a letter or a group of letters added to the end of a word and this creates a new word if you want to improve your vocabulary it’s really really important to become familiar with the most common suffixes words that end with the D suffix are nouns that refer to a state status or equality for example freedom is the state of being free boredom is the state of being bored so pop stardom is the status of being a pop star next we have a very formal professional verb to exemplify something exemplify this means to be a clear typical example of something his actions exemplify true leadership so his actions are a perfect example of true leadership this photo exemplifies popular fashion and makeup styles from the 1960s here we have the word greatness this is a combination of the word great plus the NSS suffix this is a very useful suffix that turns adjectives into nouns the adjective happy becomes the noun happiness kind becomes kindness great becomes greatness next the turn of the Millennium just means the beginning of the Millennium or when the beginning of the Millennium came which was the year 2000 the phrase the turn of the focuses on the transition from one period of time in history to the next so this can be the start of a new century or decade or year Etc at the turn of the 20th century industrialization was transforming cities around the world music videos started to become popular at the turn of the 1980s last week Taylor Swift was announced as Billboard’s number two pick with Rihanna claiming the third spot Adele Ariana Grande Justin Bieber Kanye West Britney Spears Lady Gaga and Drake round out the top 10 at number 25 is Katie Perry with other pop artists including Bad Bunny the weekend One Direction Miley Cyrus Eminem Usher and others ranking in in between one of the most common questions that I receive is how do you use the word as well there are so many ways to use this word and I promise to talk about this in a future lesson but for now let’s focus on the context of this sentence a common way to use the word as is to indicate someone’s title job role or function for example my Michel Jordan is known as one of the greatest basketball players of all time as your teacher I will always be here to support you okay our last vocabulary word today is a separable phrasal verb to round something out this means to make an experience Feel Complete or perfect usually by adding something final one final thing the coach is looking for one more player to round out the team the dessert rounded out the meal perfectly I think a great way to round out this lesson is to go back and read the entire article again this time at a more natural speed remember you can slow down the video if needed billboard names Beyonce the greatest pop star of the 21st century Beyonce has has been named the greatest pop star of the 21st century by billboard the music charting site announced on Tuesday as part of an ongoing series Beyonce tops our staff chosen editorial list based on her full 25 years of influence her commitment to Innovation Evolution and allaround Excellence has made her the bar against which all other pop stars this Century have long been measured over the past 25 years Beyond is the most Grammy winning artist with a record 32 wins and after earning 11 more nods for her 2024 album Cowboy Carter is expected to scoop up more trophies come January the Texas holdam singer has a deep history on Billboard’s charts as well she has nine number one songs and 24 top 10 songs on the Hot 100 eight of her albums have claimed the number one spot on the billboard 200 albums chart starting with her 2003 debut solo album Dangerously in Love after previously dominating the airwaves as part of girl group Destiny’s Child 11 of Beyonce’s solo albums have charted in Billboard’s top 10 since August billboard has been ranking their staff picks for the top 25 pop artists of the past 25 years Billboard’s picks are artists who they believe have most defined pop stardom and have exemplified pop greatness since the turn of the Millennium last week Taylor Swift was announced as Billboard’s number two pick with Rihanna claiming the third spot Adele Ariana Grande Justin Bieber Kanye West Britney Spears Lady Gaga and Drake round out the top 10 at number 25 is Katie Perry with other pop artists including Bad Bunny the weekend One Direction Miley Cyrus Eminem Usher and others ranking in between now it’s your turn to practice some of today’s vocabulary I have two homework questions for you one who would be your pick for the top pop star of the past 25 years my personal pick would be Britney Spears two do you think that music charts or Awards like the Grammys are a good way to measure the greatness of an artist why or why not write your answers in the comments all right I hope you enjoyed reading this article with me if this lesson was useful please like this video And subscribe to my channel a quick thank you to my channel members here on YouTube and on patreon for your support members can listen to exclusive podcast episodes and access the community chat group where you can ask me questions and practice your skills with other English Learners around the world click join below this video to become a member thank you so much for watching I’m Gina this is your world in English and I’ll see you in the next lesson bye

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • The Canterbury Tales in Modern English – Study Notes

    The Canterbury Tales in Modern English – Study Notes

    This text provides excerpts from a modern English translation of Geoffrey Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales. The excerpts showcase a variety of tales told by different pilgrims, illustrating medieval life, love, morality, and social commentary. Included are selections from the Knight’s Tale, the Miller’s Tale, the Reeve’s Tale, the Wife of Bath’s Prologue and Tale, the Man of Law’s Tale, the Prioress’s Tale, the Monk’s Tale, the Nun Priest’s Tale, the Pardoner’s Tale, the Clerk’s Tale, the Merchant’s Tale, the Squire’s Tale, the Franklin’s Tale, the Summoner’s Tale, the Friar’s Tale, the Canon’s Yeoman’s Tale, and the Manciple’s Tale. The text also features biographical information about Chaucer and notes explaining medieval references. Finally, it includes Chaucer’s retractions.

    01
    Amazon Prime FREE Membership

    A Canterbury Tales Review

    Short Answer Questions

    Instructions: Answer each question in 2-3 sentences.

    1. What are the defining characteristics of the Knight, and how do these qualities contrast with other pilgrims?
    2. How does Chaucer use satire to critique the Monk’s deviation from monastic ideals?
    3. What evidence in the General Prologue suggests the Friar is more concerned with personal gain than spiritual guidance?
    4. How does Chaucer’s description of the Wife of Bath challenge societal expectations of women in the Middle Ages?
    5. Explain the significance of the Pardoner’s physical description and how it relates to his profession and character.
    6. What is the central conflict in “The Knight’s Tale,” and how does it reflect the values of chivalry?
    7. How does the Miller disrupt the expected order of storytelling, and what does this reveal about his social standing?
    8. What is the moral lesson in “The Nun’s Priest’s Tale”?
    9. How does the Clerk’s tale of patient Griselda serve as a commentary on marriage and societal expectations?
    10. What is the significance of the Canon’s Yeoman’s confession, and what warning does he offer?
    01
    MyUs.com – Unbox The Possibilities

    Short Answer Key

    1. The Knight is described as chivalrous, honorable, and experienced in battle, embodying idealized knighthood. This contrasts with characters like the Friar or Summoner, who are more interested in personal gain than upholding moral values.
    2. Chaucer satirizes the Monk by highlighting his love for hunting and fine clothing, activities that directly contradict the expected austerity and devotion of monastic life. He enjoys the finer things in life, ignoring his religious duties.
    3. The Friar’s focus on hearing confessions “for a gift” and granting easy penances to those who can pay suggests his prioritization of wealth over genuine spiritual guidance.
    4. The Wife of Bath is outspoken, assertive, and experienced in matters of love and marriage, directly challenging the expected submissiveness and silence of women in medieval society.
    5. The Pardoner’s effeminate features and long, yellow hair are described in a way that hints at potential hypocrisy, given his role as a preacher of morality. His appearance reflects a possible dissonance between his pious profession and his true nature.
    6. The central conflict in “The Knight’s Tale” is the rivalry between Palamon and Arcite for the love of Emily. Their adherence to chivalric codes of conduct, even in competition, emphasizes the importance of honor and courtly love in knightly culture.
    7. The Miller, a lower-class character, interrupts the Host’s intended order of storytelling to tell a bawdy, fabliau-style tale, asserting his voice and challenging the social hierarchy.
    8. “The Nun’s Priest’s Tale” offers a cautionary message about the dangers of pride and vanity. Chanticleer’s downfall, caused by his own arrogance, serves as a reminder of the importance of humility.
    9. Griselda’s extreme patience and obedience in the face of her husband’s cruel tests raise questions about the dynamics of power and submission within marriage, challenging societal expectations of both husbands and wives.
    10. The Canon’s Yeoman’s confession reveals the deceitful practices of alchemy, exposing how his master uses trickery to exploit others. He warns against the allure of false promises and the dangers of greed.
    01
    Binance Account Sign Up

    Essay Questions

    1. Explore the theme of corruption within the Church as presented in The Canterbury Tales. Analyze at least three characters who embody this corruption, examining their motivations and the consequences of their actions.
    2. Discuss Chaucer’s use of humor and satire in The Canterbury Tales. How does he employ these literary devices to expose societal flaws and critique human behavior? Provide specific examples from the text.
    3. Analyze the portrayal of women in The Canterbury Tales. Consider the diverse roles and personalities of female characters like the Wife of Bath, the Prioress, and Griselda, discussing how they challenge or conform to societal expectations.
    4. Examine the significance of storytelling and the role of the Host in The Canterbury Tales. How do the pilgrims’ tales function as a form of entertainment, social commentary, and self-revelation?
    5. Choose one of the tales from The Canterbury Tales and provide an in-depth analysis. Discuss its key themes, literary techniques, and its contribution to the overall message of the work.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Frame story: A narrative structure that encloses other stories within it. In The Canterbury Tales, the pilgrimage to Canterbury serves as the frame story for the individual tales told by the pilgrims.
    • Satire: A literary technique that uses humor, irony, and exaggeration to criticize and expose human folly or societal vices. Chaucer masterfully employs satire in The Canterbury Tales.
    • Fabliau: A short, humorous, and often bawdy tale, typically featuring characters from the lower classes and focusing on themes of trickery and sexual deception. The Miller’s Tale is a prime example.
    • Chivalry: The code of conduct associated with knighthood in the Middle Ages, emphasizing honor, courtesy, courage, and loyalty. “The Knight’s Tale” showcases chivalric ideals.
    • Courtly Love: A medieval tradition of love that idealized romantic relationships, often characterized by unrequited passion, elaborate rituals, and a focus on the lady’s unattainable beauty.
    • Estates Satire: A literary genre that uses satire to critique the social classes and institutions of medieval society. The Canterbury Tales exemplifies this genre by featuring characters from all three estates: the clergy, the nobility, and the commoners.
    • Allegory: A story in which characters, settings, and events represent abstract ideas or moral principles. Some of the tales within The Canterbury Tales can be interpreted allegorically.
    • Iambic Pentameter: A poetic meter characterized by lines of ten syllables, alternating unstressed and stressed syllables. Chaucer wrote The Canterbury Tales in iambic pentameter.
    • Middle English: The form of English spoken in England from roughly the 12th to the 15th centuries. Chaucer’s The Canterbury Tales is a significant work in Middle English literature.
    • Rhyming Couplet: A pair of consecutive lines of poetry that rhyme. The Canterbury Tales is written primarily in rhyming couplets.

    Briefing Document: Main Themes and Ideas from “The Canterbury Tales” Excerpts

    This briefing document analyzes excerpts from “The Canterbury Tales” by Geoffrey Chaucer, focusing on key themes and character portrayals.

    Main Themes:

    • Social Commentary: Chaucer provides a satirical and insightful commentary on 14th-century English society. Through his diverse cast of pilgrims, he explores different social classes and professions, revealing their virtues, vices, and hypocrisies.
    • The portrayal of the Monk who prefers hunting to monastic life exposes the corruption within the Church.
    • The Friar’s willingness to accept bribes for absolution highlights the Church’s exploitation of the faithful. “Sweetly he heard his penitents at shrift / With pleasant absolution, for a gift.”
    • The Wife of Bath’s outspokenness about marriage and sexuality challenges societal expectations placed upon women.
    • Human Nature: Chaucer delves into the complexities of human behavior, showcasing both positive and negative traits.
    • The Knight embodies chivalry and nobility, while the Pardoner represents greed and deceit.
    • The tales often revolve around universal themes of love, betrayal, greed, and redemption.
    • Storytelling and Entertainment: The Canterbury Tales is a celebration of storytelling itself, with the pilgrims engaging in a contest to entertain each other.
    • The variety of tales reflects the diverse backgrounds and interests of the pilgrims.
    • The framing device of the pilgrimage creates a dynamic and engaging narrative structure.

    Important Ideas and Facts:

    • The Pilgrimage: The story is set within the framework of a pilgrimage to Canterbury, a religious journey undertaken by people from all walks of life.
    • The Host: The Host of the Tabard Inn proposes the storytelling contest and serves as a lively and authoritative figure throughout the journey.
    • Character Descriptions: Chaucer vividly describes each pilgrim’s appearance, profession, and personality, providing a glimpse into medieval society.
    • Moral Lessons: Many tales contain moral lessons, often presented through satire and irony.
    • Unfinished Work: “The Canterbury Tales” remains unfinished, adding to its mystique and leaving readers to wonder about the tales that were never told.

    Quotes:

    • Knight: “He had done nobly in his sovereign’s war / And ridden into battle, no man more, / As well in Christian as in heathen places, / And ever honoured for his noble graces.” (Illustrates the Knight’s chivalry and bravery)
    • Wife of Bath: “In wifehood I will use my instrument / As freely as my Maker me it sent.” (Challenges societal norms and embraces her sexuality)
    • Pardoner: “My holy pardon frees you all of this. / But listen, gentlemen; to bring things down / To a conclusion, would you like a tale?” (Exemplifies his manipulation and focus on personal gain)
    • Host: “Sir Priest,’ our Host remarked in merry tones, / ‘Blest be your breeches and your precious stones. / That was a merry tale of Chanticleer!” (Highlights the Host’s boisterous and entertaining personality)

    Conclusion:

    These excerpts from “The Canterbury Tales” showcase Chaucer’s genius as a storyteller and social observer. Through his engaging characters and thought-provoking tales, he explores the multifaceted nature of human existence and provides a timeless commentary on the enduring themes of life, love, and society.

    The Canterbury Tales FAQ

    Who is the Knight and what are his values?

    The Knight is the first pilgrim described in the General Prologue of Chaucer’s The Canterbury Tales. He is a distinguished man who embodies the ideals of chivalry: truth, honor, generosity, and courtesy. He has fought nobly in many battles, both in Christian and heathen lands, and is highly respected for his valor and virtues.

    How is the Monk’s portrayal a critique of the Church?

    The Monk is presented as a departure from the traditional monastic image. Instead of devoting himself to prayer and study, he enjoys hunting and riding, activities typically associated with the wealthy and worldly. Chaucer’s description of the Monk’s love of luxury and disregard for religious rules serves as a critique of the corruption and hypocrisy within the Church.

    What is the Friar’s character like?

    The Friar is portrayed as a charismatic yet manipulative individual. While claiming to be a humble mendicant, he is actually skilled at extracting money from people through flattery and subtle threats. He uses his position for personal gain and exhibits a lack of genuine piety, further highlighting the Church’s moral shortcomings.

    How is the Wife of Bath a complex and unconventional character for her time?

    The Wife of Bath stands out for her bold personality and outspoken views on marriage and female sexuality. Having had five husbands, she challenges societal norms and embraces her experiences. She is witty, self-aware, and unafraid to assert her authority, making her a complex and unconventional figure in the context of medieval literature.

    What is the significance of the tales within the larger narrative structure?

    The tales told by the pilgrims are not merely entertainment but also reflect their individual personalities and perspectives. Each story provides insight into the teller’s values, beliefs, and social standing. Moreover, the tales often interact with each other, creating a tapestry of contrasting viewpoints and engaging in dialogue with various literary genres and traditions.

    What is the moral lesson in the Pardoner’s Tale?

    The Pardoner’s Tale, a story about greed and its deadly consequences, highlights the hypocrisy of the Pardoner himself. While preaching against avarice, he openly admits to exploiting people’s fears and superstitions for personal gain. This stark contrast emphasizes the tale’s message about the destructive power of greed and the importance of genuine morality.

    How does the Canon’s Yeoman’s Tale expose the dangers of alchemy?

    The Canon’s Yeoman’s Tale recounts the deceitful practices of alchemists who prey on gullible individuals with promises of wealth and transformation. The tale exposes the dangers of blind faith and the pursuit of material riches through unethical means. It serves as a cautionary tale against the allure of false promises and the importance of critical thinking.

    What is the significance of the frame story in The Canterbury Tales?

    The frame story, a journey to Canterbury, provides a unifying structure for the diverse collection of tales. It brings together individuals from different social backgrounds and creates opportunities for interactions and commentary. The pilgrimage itself becomes a microcosm of medieval society, reflecting its values, conflicts, and the complexities of human nature.

    The Canterbury Tales: Timeline and Cast of Characters

    This information is based on the provided excerpt of “The Canterbury Tales” in modern English.

    Please Note: This is a partial timeline and cast list as the excerpt does not cover the complete “Canterbury Tales.”

    Timeline

    1. Springtime, Unspecified Year: A group of pilgrims sets out from the Tabard Inn in Southwark, London, to visit the shrine of Saint Thomas Becket in Canterbury.
    2. The Journey Begins: The pilgrims agree to engage in a storytelling contest proposed by the Host of the Tabard Inn.
    3. The Knight’s Tale: The Knight tells a tale of chivalry, courtly love, and the rivalry between two knights, Palamon and Arcite, for the love of Emelye.
    4. Other Tales: The excerpt includes sections from various tales, suggesting the storytelling contest is well underway. These tales are told in turn by various pilgrims, including:
    • The Monk’s Tale: A series of tragedies detailing the fall of great figures from prosperity to ruin.
    • The Nun’s Priest’s Tale: A humorous fable about Chanticleer the rooster, Pertelote the hen, and a cunning fox.
    • The Physician’s Tale: A tragic story of Virginius, a Roman knight, who kills his own daughter to protect her from the lecherous judge Appius.
    • The Pardoner’s Tale: A darkly comic tale about three revelers who seek out Death but find only treasure, leading to their mutual destruction through greed and treachery.
    • The Wife of Bath’s Tale: A prologue and tale about the Wife’s experience in marriage and a story of a knight who must discover what women desire most.
    • The Friar’s Tale: A tale of a corrupt summoner who encounters a devil disguised as a yeoman.
    • The Summoner’s Tale: A tale of a greedy friar who is tricked by a dying man.
    • The Clerk’s Tale: A tale of patient Griselda and the trials she endures at the hands of her husband, the Marquis Walter.
    • The Merchant’s Tale: A cynical tale about old January, his young wife May, and her lover Damian.
    • The Franklin’s Tale: A tale of love, magic, and honor involving Dorigen, her husband Arveragus, and Aurelius, a squire who loves her.
    • The Canon’s Yeoman’s Tale: A tale exposing the deceitful practices of alchemists.

    Note: The excerpt does not indicate the exact order of all the tales, nor does it provide the ending of the pilgrimage.

    Cast of Characters

    • The Knight: A valiant and chivalrous man who has fought in many battles and is respected for his honor and courtesy.
    • The Monk: A hunting enthusiast who enjoys the finer things in life and does not conform to the typical monastic lifestyle.
    • The Friar (Hubert): A charismatic and manipulative friar who exploits his position for personal gain.
    • The Merchant: A wealthy and seemingly successful businessman who, despite his outward appearance, is secretly in debt.
    • The Oxford Cleric: A poor student dedicated to learning and philosophy.
    • The Wife of Bath: A bold and outspoken woman who has been married five times and has strong opinions on love, marriage, and experience.
    • The Man of Law: A knowledgeable lawyer who is skilled in legal matters.
    • The Franklin: A wealthy landowner known for his hospitality and love of good food and company.
    • The Reeve: A shrewd and cunning estate manager.
    • The Miller: A boisterous and crude character known for his strength and love of drinking.
    • The Cook: A skilled cook who accompanies the pilgrims.
    • The Shipman: A worldly and experienced sailor.
    • The Prioress: A refined and delicate nun who displays a sentimental attachment to her little dog.
    • Sir Topaz: The subject of the Prioress’s tale, a knight who embarks on a fantastical adventure.
    • The Pardoner: A corrupt church official who sells fake relics and indulgences.
    • The Host: The jovial and boisterous owner of the Tabard Inn who proposes the storytelling contest and acts as the judge.
    • The Summoner: A church official tasked with summoning sinners to court. He is depicted as corrupt and lecherous.
    • The Yeoman: A servant who accompanies a Canon (an alchemist).
    • The Canon: A skilled alchemist who uses his knowledge for deceitful purposes.
    • The Clerk: A scholar who tells the tale of patient Griselda.
    • January: An old and lustful man who marries young May in the Merchant’s Tale.
    • May: January’s beautiful young wife who is unfaithful to him.
    • Damian: A squire who is in love with May and becomes her lover.
    • Dorigen: A virtuous and faithful wife in the Franklin’s Tale who makes a rash promise to Aurelius, a man who is in love with her.
    • Arveragus: Dorigen’s noble and understanding husband.
    • Aurelius: A squire who falls in love with Dorigen and uses magic to try to win her.

    Note: Several characters in the tales are not pilgrims but figures within their narratives (e.g., Palamon, Arcite, Emelye, Chanticleer, Appius, Virginius, etc.).

    The Life and Times of Geoffrey Chaucer

    Geoffrey Chaucer was born in London around 1342. His father, John, and grandfather, Robert, worked in the wine trade and were associated with the Court. [1] John was the Deputy Butler to the King in Southampton in 1348. [1] It is believed that Chaucer’s mother was Agnes de Copton, niece of an official at the Mint. [2] While the family was reasonably well-to-do, their son would grow up to reach a higher social standing. [2]

    It’s believed that Chaucer first attended St. Paul’s Almonry for school. [2] He then went on to be a page in the house of the Countess of Ulster, wife of Lionel, the third son of Edward III. [2] Records show that the Countess bought Chaucer clothes in 1357. [3] As a page, he would have acquired an education in manners, a skill which would benefit both his career as a courtier and a poet. [3] His duties also included making beds, carrying candles, and running errands. [3] One of the people he served was the Duke of Lancaster, John of Gaunt. [4] John of Gaunt was a steady patron and protector of Chaucer throughout his life. [4]

    Chaucer became a soldier in 1359 and was sent to France during the Hundred Years’ War, where he was captured. [4] Edward III helped to pay his ransom the next year. [4] Chaucer married Philippa de Roet around 1366. [5] Philippa was a lady in attendance on the Queen and the sister of Catherine Swynford, the third wife of John of Gaunt. [5] Chaucer did not write any poems to Philippa. [5] It was not fashionable to write poems to one’s wife. [5]

    Chaucer was employed by the King for important missions abroad, many of a commercial nature. [6] His trustworthiness and efficiency can be inferred from this. [7]

    Chaucer was an avid reader and learned to read Latin, French, Anglo-Norman, and Italian. [7] He became an expert in:

    • astronomy
    • medicine
    • psychology
    • physics
    • and alchemy [7]

    His favorite literary and historical figures were:

    • Vergil
    • Ovid
    • Statius
    • Seneca
    • and Cicero [8]

    He also enjoyed:

    • The Romance of the Rose
    • and the works of Dante, Boccaccio, and Petrarch [8]

    He also studied religious works. [8]

    Two trips to Italy in 1372 and 1378 broadened Chaucer’s horizons. [9] It’s believed that these trips brought him into contact with the dawn of the Renaissance, which greatly influenced his later poetry. [9] While he continued to appreciate French culture, he also incorporated elements of Dante and Boccaccio into his work. [9] His skill in storytelling is thought to have originated during this time. [10]

    Chaucer steadily rose through the ranks of the Civil Service, holding the following offices:

    • Comptroller of customs and subsidies on wools, skins, and hides at the Port of London in 1374 [10]
    • Comptroller of petty customs in 1382 [10]
    • Justice of the Peace for the county of Kent in 1385 [10]
    • and Knight of the Shire in 1386 [10]

    He was dismissed from these offices in 1386 when John of Gaunt went to Spain and the Duke of Gloucester became an influence on King Richard II. [11] This gave Chaucer time to begin writing The Canterbury Tales. [11]

    Chaucer was restored to favor and office when John of Gaunt returned in 1389. [11] He was given several jobs. [12] Chaucer died October 25, 1400, and was buried in Westminster Abbey. [13] His grave was the first in what is now known as Poet’s Corner. [13]

    The Canterbury Tales: A Literary Analysis

    The Canterbury Tales is a collection of stories told by a group of pilgrims traveling from Southwark to Canterbury to visit the shrine of St. Thomas Becket. Chaucer began writing it sometime around 1386 or 1387, but he never finished it [1].

    The Canterbury Tales was likely begun while Chaucer was out of favor with the King, following John of Gaunt’s departure for Spain. [1]. This time away from the court gave him the freedom to work on his writing.

    The idea of framing a series of stories within the context of a pilgrimage is original to Chaucer [2]. Collections of stories were common in the 14th century, but he is the only writer of the time to conceive of this framing device. This allowed for a variety of storytelling styles as well as a wide range of subjects [2]. Chaucer’s pilgrims come from all levels of society and represent an array of occupations, including:

    • a Knight
    • a Miller
    • a Reeve
    • a Cook
    • a Man of Law
    • a Wife of Bath
    • a Friar
    • a Summoner
    • a Clerk
    • a Merchant
    • a Squire
    • a Franklin
    • a Nun’s Priest
    • a Physician
    • a Pardoner
    • a Canon’s Yeoman
    • a Manciple
    • and a Parson

    The tales themselves cover a range of genres, from romances to fabliaux [3].

    Chaucer likely planned to have each pilgrim tell two stories on the way to Canterbury and two on the way back, but he did not complete this ambitious plan [4]. The existing text is made up of fragments of varying lengths [5]. Modern editors have arranged these in a logical sequence according to dates and places mentioned in the dialogue between the tales, which are referred to as “end-links” [5].

    Modern editors have organized these fragments into ten groups, lettered A to I. Group B is subdivided into two parts [5]. The order of the tales in this edition is based on work done by Fumivall and Skeat in the 19th century. Their arrangement presents a story that spans five days in April, concluding on the outskirts of Canterbury, where Chaucer apologizes for any sinful content in the work [2, 4].

    The Canterbury Tales draws on stories from across Europe, including many from Chaucer’s contemporaries, as well as from classical and Eastern sources [6]. Chaucer adapted his stories rather than inventing them, which was common practice at the time. He used a variety of techniques to make them engaging and instructive. The only tale thought to be his own invention is The Canon’s Yeoman’s Tale [7].

    Courtly Love in Medieval Literature

    Courtly love was a medieval European literary conception of love that emphasized nobility and chivalry. This concept was celebrated in the songs and romances of 12th century France and became popular in English literature in the 14th century. [1] Chaucer was likely introduced to the concept during his time in France. [1] The typical scenario of Courtly love involved a knight who was completely devoted to a lady, usually of higher social standing. The knight would perform brave deeds in an attempt to win her favor. [2, 3] **A smile from his beloved was thought to be a reward for his years of service and devotion. ** [3] The lover was expected to be completely obedient and to endure suffering in order to prove his love. [3]

    The relationship between the knight and his lady was often adulterous. [2] Marriage at this time was often based on social and economic factors. [2] Wives were expected to be obedient to their husbands and there was no expectation of love. [2, 4] Courtly love provided a way to explore the concept of romantic love outside the confines of marriage. [2, 4]

    The Knight’s Tale, one of the tales in The Canterbury Tales, explores the themes of courtly love. Two knights, Palamon and Arcite, are both in love with the same woman, Emily. They engage in a series of challenges and battles in order to win her hand.

    It’s been argued that Chaucer found the conventions of Courtly love to be artificial and limiting. [4] In The Canterbury Tales, he often presents the concept in a humorous or satirical light. The Wife of Bath’s Prologue suggests that marriage can be a battleground for power and that women are not always the passive objects of male desire. [5] However, The Franklin’s Tale presents a more positive view of love and marriage, in which the husband and wife are equals. [6-9]

    Medieval Life Through Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales

    It is difficult to make generalizations about Medieval life, as the period spanned over 1,000 years and encompassed a wide range of geographical regions and social classes. However, some aspects of life in England during the time of Chaucer can be gleaned from The Canterbury Tales.

    Chaucer’s pilgrims represent a cross-section of 14th century English society. The feudal system, with its rigid hierarchy, was still in place. At the top were the King and the nobility, followed by the clergy, the merchants, and the peasants.

    • The Knight is a representative of the noble class. He is a skilled warrior and has fought in many battles.
    • The Miller, the Reeve, and the Cook are all members of the peasant class. They work hard to earn a living and are not as well-educated or as refined as the upper classes.
    • The Wife of Bath is a wealthy merchant who has been married five times. She is a strong and independent woman who is not afraid to speak her mind.
    • The Friar and the Summoner are members of the clergy, but they are both corrupt and hypocritical.

    Religion played a central role in Medieval life. People made pilgrimages to holy shrines, such as the one in Canterbury. The Church had an immense amount of power and influence. However, as seen in The Canterbury Tales, not all members of the clergy were pious or virtuous.

    Storytelling was a popular form of entertainment. The Canterbury Tales itself is a collection of stories told by a group of pilgrims on their way to Canterbury. The tales cover a wide range of topics, from love and chivalry to death and betrayal.

    The concept of Courtly love, popularized in the songs and romances of 12th century France, is evident in some of the tales. As discussed previously, this concept emphasized nobility and chivalry. The lover was expected to be completely obedient to his lady and to endure suffering to prove his love. The relationship was often adulterous, as marriage at this time was typically an economic arrangement.

    As demonstrated in The Canterbury Tales, Chaucer uses humor and satire to explore the complexities of Medieval life. He does not shy away from depicting the flaws and foibles of his characters, whether they are nobles or peasants. Despite the hardships of life during this time, people found ways to find joy and celebrate life.

    Moral Tales in Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales

    Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales includes several stories that fall into the category of moral tales. A moral tale is a story that is intended to teach a lesson about right and wrong. These tales often feature allegorical characters or events that represent abstract concepts, such as virtue and vice. Moral tales were popular in the Middle Ages.

    • Chaucer was likely influenced by French moral tales while he was a page in the house of the Countess of Ulster, as well as during his time as a soldier in France during the Hundred Years’ War.
    • His two trips to Italy in the 1370s exposed him to the works of Italian writers such as Dante and Boccaccio, who also wrote moral tales.

    The Canterbury Tales includes the following moral tales:

    • The Knight’s Tale is a romance that explores the themes of love, chivalry, and fate. While the tale does not have an explicit moral, it can be interpreted as a cautionary tale about the dangers of excessive passion.
    • The Man of Law’s Tale is a religious tale about the trials and tribulations of Constance, a young woman who is persecuted for her faith. The tale emphasizes the importance of patience, perseverance, and trust in God.
    • The Prioress’s Tale is another religious tale about a young boy who is murdered by Jews for singing a hymn to the Virgin Mary. The tale is anti-Semitic and reflects the prejudices of the time, but it can also be interpreted as a warning against religious intolerance.
    • The Clerk’s Tale is a tale about Griselda, a patient and long-suffering wife who endures many trials at the hands of her husband. The tale is often interpreted as a lesson in humility and obedience, but it has also been criticized for its portrayal of a submissive woman.
    • The Franklin’s Tale is a romance about a knight who makes a rash promise to his wife. The tale explores the themes of love, honor, and generosity. While The Franklin’s Tale is not a moral tale in the strictest sense, it does present a positive view of marriage and suggests that love and trust are essential to a happy relationship.
    • The Second Nun’s Tale is a religious tale about the martyrdom of Saint Cecilia. The tale emphasizes the importance of faith and chastity.
    • The Canon’s Yeoman’s Tale is a satirical tale about the dangers of alchemy. Alchemy was a popular pursuit in the Middle Ages, but it was often associated with fraud and deception. The tale warns against the dangers of greed and the pursuit of worldly wealth.
    • The Manciple’s Tale is a fable about the dangers of gossip. The tale features a talking crow who is punished for revealing a secret. The moral of the story is that it is better to keep silent than to spread harmful rumors.
    • The Parson’s Tale is a prose sermon on the Seven Deadly Sins. This tale is the most explicitly moralistic of all the tales in The Canterbury Tales. It offers a detailed guide to confession and repentance.

    Chaucer’s moral tales are not always straightforward or didactic. He often uses humor and irony to make his points, and he allows his readers to draw their own conclusions. The popularity of his works, centuries after they were written, attests to his insights into human nature.

    The sources state that Chaucer enjoyed “stories that had some sharp point and deducible maxim, moral, or idea” [1] and “proverbial or other wisdom” [1]. The Canterbury Tales end with an apology from Chaucer for any “worldly vanities” [2] in the tales and a request that Christ forgive his sins [2]. He then thanks God for the moral and devotional writings he created [3]. This suggests that Chaucer saw value in writing that provided a moral framework for its readers.

    Chaucer’s Literary Influences

    Chaucer was influenced by a variety of literary sources and traditions, including French, Italian, and classical literature. His work reflects the diverse intellectual currents of 14th century Europe.

    French Influences:

    Chaucer likely began writing poetry after his return from France in 1360 [1]. He served as a soldier in the English army during the Hundred Years’ War, and it’s believed that he was first exposed to poetry while abroad. The elegance and themes of French poetry, particularly the concept of Courtly love, are believed to have made a strong impression on him. [1]

    One of his earliest works was a translation of Roman de la Rose, a 13th-century French allegorical poem about Courtly love. [1, 2] As discussed previously, Courtly love was a literary concept that celebrated nobility and chivalry. It typically involved a knight who devoted himself to a lady of higher social standing, performing brave deeds in an attempt to win her favor. The relationship was often adulterous, as marriage at the time was typically for economic or social purposes. The concept of Courtly love is evident in many of Chaucer’s works, including The Knight’s Tale.

    • The Book of the Duchess (c. 1369/70) [3], another early work that predates Chaucer’s trips to Italy, was written in the French tradition of dream visions. This genre typically featured an allegorical journey in which the dreamer encounters various figures and symbols that represent abstract concepts.
    • Chaucer’s use of the fabliau in The Canterbury Tales also demonstrates a French influence. The fabliau was a short, humorous tale that often featured bawdy or obscene content. The Miller’s Tale is a prime example of this genre.

    Italian Influences:

    Chaucer made two diplomatic trips to Italy in the 1370s. These trips exposed him to the Italian Renaissance and the works of Italian writers such as Dante, Boccaccio, and Petrarch. [4] The influence of Italian literature can be seen in Chaucer’s later works, which are more sophisticated in terms of structure and character development.

    • The story of Troilus and Criseyde was adapted from Boccaccio’s Il Filostrato.
    • The frame narrative of The Canterbury Tales may have been inspired by Boccaccio’s Decameron, which also features a group of people telling stories to entertain each other.

    Classical Influences:

    Chaucer was also well-versed in classical literature, and his work shows the influence of authors such as Ovid, Virgil, and Boethius.

    • Chaucer frequently references classical mythology in his writing. The Knight’s Tale, for instance, draws heavily on the myths of Theseus and the Amazons.
    • He translated Boethius’s philosophical treatise De Consolatione Philosophiae. [5, 6] This work, written in the 6th century, explores themes of fate, free will, and the nature of happiness. Boethius’s influence can be seen in Chaucer’s exploration of philosophical themes in his writing.

    Other Influences:

    In addition to these major influences, Chaucer was also influenced by a variety of other sources, including:

    • folk tales,
    • legends,
    • religious writings,
    • medieval romances.

    Chaucer’s ability to synthesize these diverse influences into a unique and compelling style is one of the hallmarks of his genius.

    Chaucer’s Royal Career

    Chaucer rose through the ranks of royal employment throughout his lifetime, holding a variety of positions that reflect his multifaceted skills and suggest a high level of trust from the crown. His roles ranged from personal attendant to controller of customs, demonstrating competence in areas like diplomacy, finance, and management.

    Initially, Chaucer’s career benefited greatly from the patronage of John of Gaunt, Duke of Lancaster, whose influence helped secure him prestigious and lucrative positions. This support faltered briefly during a period of political upheaval, but Chaucer eventually regained his standing and enjoyed further royal favor.

    Here are some key details about Chaucer’s royal employment, drawn from the sources:

    • Page in the Household of the Countess of Ulster (1357): This was Chaucer’s first known position. As a page, his duties likely included attending to the Countess’s needs, running errands, and learning courtly manners. The position offered valuable training in social graces and provided exposure to influential figures, such as John of Gaunt, who would become a lifelong patron [1-3].
    • Soldier in the English Army During the Hundred Years’ War (1359): Chaucer was captured during a military campaign near Rheims and ransomed the following year, with King Edward III contributing to his release [1, 4]. This event highlights his willingness to serve the crown in a military capacity, and the King’s contribution to his ransom suggests that he was already a valued member of the royal entourage.
    • Valet to King Edward III (c. 1367): Chaucer was appointed as a personal attendant to the King, a position that further solidified his connection to the royal court [5]. This role likely involved close proximity to the King and performing various tasks to ensure his comfort and well-being.
    • Diplomatic Missions Abroad (1372-1378): Chaucer undertook several diplomatic missions on behalf of the King, including trips to Genoa and Milan, likely related to trade negotiations [6, 7]. These assignments demonstrate his trustworthiness and competence in handling sensitive matters of state.
    • Comptroller of Customs and Subsidies (1374): This was a significant financial position, responsible for overseeing the collection of taxes on wool, skins, and hides at the Port of London [8]. The role required a high degree of financial acumen and integrity.
    • Comptroller of Petty Customs (1382): Chaucer was promoted to a more senior position within the customs office [8], further demonstrating his competence and value to the crown.
    • Justice of the Peace for Kent (1385): This appointment placed Chaucer in a legal and administrative role within the county of Kent, showcasing his versatility and expanding his responsibilities [8].
    • Knight of the Shire (1386): Chaucer was elected to represent Kent in Parliament, reflecting his growing social standing and recognition within his community [8]. This position suggests that he was perceived as a capable and respected figure within the political sphere.
    • Temporary Loss of Office (1386-1389): During a period of political instability when John of Gaunt was out of favor, Chaucer lost his positions [9]. However, with Gaunt’s return, Chaucer’s fortunes revived.
    • Clerk of the King’s Works (1389): Chaucer was appointed to oversee royal building projects, including repairs to bridges, walls, and ditches in London [9]. This position demonstrated his administrative skills and his ability to manage large-scale projects.
    • Sub-Forester of North Petherton (c. 1390s): Chaucer was granted this position, which likely involved managing a royal forest and its resources [10].

    In addition to these specific roles, Chaucer was also granted various perks and honors, such as a daily pitcher of wine from Edward III, later upgraded to an annual tun of wine under Richard II, and a scarlet robe trimmed with fur from Henry Bolingbroke [10]. These gestures underscore the high regard in which he was held by successive monarchs.

    Chaucer’s royal employment not only provided him with financial security but also gave him access to the highest levels of society and a wealth of experiences that informed his writing. The insights into human nature, social customs, and political intrigue evident in The Canterbury Tales are likely drawn from his years of service to the crown.

    Chaucer’s French Literary Influences

    Chaucer’s early literary influences were primarily French. His experiences as a page in the house of the Countess of Ulster and as a soldier during the Hundred Years’ War exposed him to French culture and literature.

    The sources explain that Chaucer began translating Roman de la Rose soon after these experiences. This 13th-century allegorical poem about Courtly love was a popular work that introduced Chaucer to the conventions of French poetry and the concept of Courtly love, a theme that he would explore in many of his works, including The Knight’s Tale [1].

    • Courtly love typically involved the relationship between a knight and a lady of higher social standing, often an adulterous relationship. The knight would perform brave deeds to win the lady’s favor. [1]

    The sources also state that Chaucer was a prodigious reader with a remarkable memory [2]. This allowed him to absorb and synthesize a variety of literary influences, which is evident in the range of genres and styles present in his works.

    Chaucer’s early works reflect his immersion in French literary traditions:

    • The Book of the Duchess (c. 1369/70) was written in the French tradition of dream visions, a genre that typically featured an allegorical journey in which the dreamer encounters figures and symbols representing abstract concepts. [1, 3]

    Later, Chaucer would incorporate the French genre of the fabliau into The Canterbury Tales.

    • The fabliau was a short, humorous, and often bawdy tale that poked fun at social conventions and human foibles. The Miller’s Tale is an example of this genre. [4]

    It is important to note that Chaucer did not simply imitate his sources. He adapted them to his own purposes, using humor, irony, and keen observation to create works that are both entertaining and thought-provoking. He drew inspiration from his French influences but transformed them into something uniquely his own.

    Chaucer’s Royal Service

    Geoffrey Chaucer held a variety of positions in the service of the English crown, reflecting his diverse talents and the trust placed in him by successive monarchs. Here are some of the key roles he occupied:

    • Page in the Household of the Countess of Ulster (1357): This early position, mentioned in the sources, marked the beginning of Chaucer’s connection to the royal court. [1, 2] As a page, he likely performed various duties for the Countess, gaining valuable experience in courtly manners and interacting with influential figures. [3] This role may have laid the foundation for his future success in royal service.
    • Soldier in the English Army (1359): Chaucer participated in military campaigns during the Hundred Years’ War, even being captured during a battle near Rheims. [4] King Edward III personally contributed to his ransom, indicating his value to the crown even at this early stage. [4]
    • Valet to King Edward III (c. 1367): Chaucer eventually became a personal attendant to the King, serving in close proximity to the monarch. [5] This position suggests a high level of trust and offered further opportunities to learn about the workings of the court.
    • Diplomatic Missions (1372-1378): The sources detail Chaucer’s involvement in diplomatic missions, traveling to places like Genoa and Milan, likely for trade negotiations. [6] These assignments demonstrate his competence in handling sensitive matters and representing the crown’s interests abroad. [7]
    • Comptroller of Customs and Subsidies (1374): This crucial financial role involved overseeing the collection of taxes on wool, skins, and hides at the Port of London. [8] The position required significant expertise in accounting and trade regulations, highlighting Chaucer’s financial acumen.
    • Comptroller of Petty Customs (1382): Chaucer was later promoted to a more senior position within the customs office, further emphasizing his competence in managing financial matters for the crown. [8]
    • Justice of the Peace for Kent (1385): This appointment placed Chaucer in a legal and administrative position within his county, demonstrating his versatility and broadening his responsibilities. [8] He was involved in maintaining law and order, adjudicating disputes, and ensuring the smooth functioning of local government.
    • Knight of the Shire (1386): Chaucer was elected to represent Kent in Parliament, signifying his growing influence and respect within his community. [8] This role underscores his engagement in the political landscape of the time.
    • Clerk of the King’s Works (1389): Following a brief period of political disfavor and loss of office, Chaucer was appointed to manage royal building projects. [9, 10] His tasks included overseeing repairs to infrastructure such as bridges, walls, and ditches, indicating his administrative skills and experience in overseeing complex undertakings. [10]
    • Sub-Forester of North Petherton (c. 1390s): This position, likely granted in the later years of his life, may have involved managing a royal forest and its resources. [10]

    Chaucer’s career in royal service spanned several decades, encompassing a wide array of positions that demonstrate his skills and adaptability. His experiences provided him with unique insights into various aspects of English society, politics, and human nature, profoundly influencing his literary work, particularly The Canterbury Tales.

    Chaucer and French Literary Influence

    Chaucer’s time in France had a significant impact on his literary development, exposing him to new poetic forms, themes, and styles that would shape his later works.

    • Exposure to French Literature and Courtly Love: As a young man, Chaucer served as a page in the house of the Countess of Ulster and later fought in the Hundred Years’ War, both experiences offering him firsthand exposure to French culture [1, 2]. The sources note that he became interested in poetry during this period and began translating Roman de la Rose, a seminal work of French courtly love literature [1, 3]. This lengthy allegorical poem, popular throughout Europe, introduced him to the conventions of French poetry, including the intricate rhyme schemes, refined language, and elegant depictions of love and chivalry that would later influence his writing [3].
    • The Influence of Roman de la Rose: Roman de la Rose significantly shaped Chaucer’s understanding of courtly love, a concept that figures prominently in many of his works, including The Knight’s Tale [3]. This poem, with its exploration of love as a complex and often frustrating game of pursuit, provided Chaucer with a rich source of inspiration and thematic material. He would adapt and transform elements of courtly love in his own writing, adding his unique blend of humor, irony, and social commentary.
    • French Poetic Forms and Techniques: Chaucer’s early poetry, such as The Book of the Duchess (c. 1369/70), reflects the influence of French poetic forms like the dream vision [4]. This genre, popular in French literature, typically involved an allegorical journey in which the dreamer encounters symbolic figures and experiences that reveal hidden truths or moral lessons. Chaucer’s mastery of intricate rhyme schemes and his use of allegory, particularly in his earlier works, can be attributed to his immersion in French poetic traditions.
    • Later Adaptations of French Genres: While Chaucer’s early work was heavily influenced by the more refined and elegant styles of French poetry, his later writing incorporated elements of the fabliau, a short, humorous, and often bawdy tale that originated in France [5]. Examples of this genre can be found in The Canterbury Tales, notably The Miller’s Tale, which features ribald humor, social satire, and a focus on the lower classes, demonstrating Chaucer’s ability to adapt and transform various French literary traditions for his own artistic purposes.

    Chaucer’s time in France was a crucial period in his development as a writer. It exposed him to a literary culture that would shape his understanding of poetry, love, and storytelling. He absorbed and adapted French forms and themes, transforming them into something uniquely his own, ultimately contributing to his status as the “Father of English Poetry” [6].

    Chaucer’s Life and Works

    The sources provide a list of the major works authored or translated by Geoffrey Chaucer:

    • Translation of Roman de la Rose (before 1372): This was one of Chaucer’s earliest known works. The Roman de la Rose is a 13th-century French allegorical poem about courtly love. Chaucer’s translation introduced him to the conventions of French poetry and the concept of courtly love, both of which profoundly influenced his writing. [1]
    • The Book of the Duchess (1369/70): This is Chaucer’s first major poem, written in the French tradition of dream visions. The poem is an elegy for Blanche, the Duchess of Lancaster, and showcases Chaucer’s developing skills in using allegory and poetic language. [2, 3]
    • The ABC of the Virgin (before 1372): A devotional poem in which each stanza begins with a successive letter of the alphabet. [3]
    • The House of Fame (between 1372 and 1382): Another dream vision poem that features a playful exploration of the nature of fame and reputation. It includes a discussion of sound waves, highlighting Chaucer’s interest in science. [2-4]
    • The Parliament of Fowls (between 1372 and 1382): An allegorical poem that uses a gathering of birds to satirize courtly love and explore themes of love, marriage, and social order. [2, 3]
    • Early Canterbury Tales (between 1372 and 1382): The sources suggest that Chaucer began writing some of the tales that would later become part of The Canterbury Tales during this period. These include The Second Nun’s Tale, The Clerk of Oxford’s Tale, The Man of Law’s Tale, Chaucer’s Tale of Melibee, and The Knight’s Tale. These early tales indicate Chaucer’s exploration of diverse themes, including piety, morality, and the complexities of human relationships. [5]
    • Troilus and Criseyde (between 1380 and 1385): This is considered Chaucer’s masterpiece, a tragic romance based on a story from Boccaccio’s Filostrato. It explores themes of love, fate, and free will with depth and psychological insight. The poem’s success led to accusations that Chaucer was unfairly critical of women, prompting him to write The Legend of Good Women. [2, 6]
    • Translation of Boethius’ De Consolatione Philosophiae (between 1380 and 1385): This philosophical work by the Roman philosopher Boethius significantly influenced Chaucer’s thinking, particularly his ideas about tragedy and fortune. [2, 7]
    • The Legend of Good Women (1386): A collection of stories about virtuous women from classical mythology and history. It was written, in part, as a response to criticisms that Chaucer’s portrayal of Criseyde in Troilus and Criseyde was misogynistic. [2, 6]
    • The Canterbury Tales (1386 onwards): Chaucer’s most famous work, a collection of stories told by a diverse group of pilgrims on their way to Canterbury Cathedral. The Tales offer a vivid portrait of medieval English society and explore a wide range of genres, styles, and themes, from bawdy humor to religious allegory. [2, 6]

    Chaucer’s Retractions (1400): A statement appended to The Parson’s Tale in which Chaucer expresses regret for having written works that might have led others to sin. He specifically mentions several of his earlier works, including Troilus and Criseyde. [8]

    Chaucer’s Literary Influences

    Geoffrey Chaucer’s literary works were profoundly shaped by a diverse range of influences, most notably from French and Italian literature. His early exposure to French culture and his later encounters with Italian Renaissance writers expanded his literary horizons and provided him with a wealth of material to adapt and transform in his own unique style.

    French Influences:

    • Courtly Love Tradition: Chaucer’s early experiences in the house of the Countess of Ulster and as a soldier in France exposed him to French courtly love literature, most significantly the Roman de la Rose, which he began translating in his youth [1, 2]. This allegorical poem about the pursuit of love introduced him to the conventions of courtly love, a concept that he would explore extensively in his own works, such as The Knight’s Tale, where the noble knights Arcite and Palamon compete for the love of the fair Emily [3, 4].
    • French Poetic Forms: Chaucer adopted and mastered various French poetic forms, including the dream vision, exemplified in The Book of the Duchess and The House of Fame [5]. These poems, characterized by allegorical journeys and symbolic encounters, showcase his early immersion in French literary traditions.
    • The Fabliau: Chaucer also incorporated elements of the French fabliau, a short, humorous, and often bawdy tale, into The Canterbury Tales [6, 7]. The Miller’s Tale, for example, features the classic fabliau elements of trickery, sexual escapades, and social satire, reflecting Chaucer’s ability to adapt and transform French genres for his own artistic purposes.

    Italian Influences:

    • Dante, Boccaccio, and Petrarch: Chaucer’s two diplomatic journeys to Italy (Genoa in 1372 and Milan in 1378) exposed him to the flourishing literary scene of the Italian Renaissance [8]. He drew inspiration from Italian masters like Dante, Boccaccio, and Petrarch, whose works broadened his thematic and stylistic range. Troilus and Criseyde and The Knight’s Tale, for instance, are based on stories found in Boccaccio’s Filostrato and Teseida, respectively [8].
    • Narrative Skill and Humanism: Chaucer’s encounter with Italian literature, particularly Boccaccio’s work, is credited with enhancing his ability to tell engaging and complex stories [9]. The Italian Renaissance emphasis on humanism, with its focus on human emotions, motivations, and experiences, is also evident in the nuanced character portrayals and psychological depth found in Chaucer’s later works, most notably The Canterbury Tales.

    Other Influences:

    • Classical Literature: Chaucer was well-versed in classical literature, drawing inspiration from authors like Ovid, Virgil, and Statius [10]. His works often allude to classical myths and stories, incorporating these ancient narratives into his medieval context.
    • Medieval Scholasticism and Philosophy: As a highly educated man of his time, Chaucer was also influenced by medieval scholasticism and philosophy. His translation of Boethius’s De Consolatione Philosophiae reflects his engagement with philosophical ideas about fate, free will, and the nature of happiness [11, 12]. These philosophical underpinnings are subtly woven into many of his works, adding depth and complexity to his exploration of human experience.
    • English Tradition: While deeply influenced by continental literature, Chaucer also drew inspiration from English sources, including popular folktales, romances, and religious texts [13]. He masterfully blended these diverse influences, creating a unique literary voice that would significantly shape the development of English literature.

    Chaucer’s genius lies in his ability to synthesize these various literary influences, forging a distinct style that is both sophisticated and accessible. He masterfully blended humor, irony, social commentary, and psychological insight, creating works that continue to resonate with readers centuries later.

    Chaucer’s Life and Legacy

    Geoffrey Chaucer died on October 25, 1400, and was buried in Westminster Abbey in London [1]. His tomb, erected by an admirer in the 15th century, marks the beginning of what is now known as Poets’ Corner [1].

    Coghill’s Chaucer Translations

    Professor Nevill Coghill translated Chaucer’s Troilus and Criseyde into Modern English. He also translated The Canterbury Tales into Modern English [1]. Both translations were published as Penguin Classics [1].

    Chaucer’s Life and Career

    In addition to his prolific writing career, Geoffrey Chaucer held various occupations throughout his life, many of them in service to the crown. The sources highlight the following:

    • Page in a Noble Household (1357): Chaucer’s first documented position was as a page in the house of the Countess of Ulster, where he likely received a well-rounded education in courtly manners and etiquette [1, 2].
    • Soldier in the Hundred Years’ War (1359): Chaucer fought in the English army during the Hundred Years’ War and was captured by the French near Rheims [3]. King Edward III contributed to his ransom, suggesting that Chaucer was a valuable asset to the English forces [3].
    • Courtier and Diplomat (c. 1367 onwards): Upon his return from France, Chaucer began his career as a courtier, eventually serving King Edward III directly [4]. He undertook several diplomatic missions abroad, including trips to Genoa in 1372 and Milan in 1378, demonstrating his trustworthiness and efficiency in handling important affairs of state [5-7].
    • Civil Servant (1374-1386): Chaucer held a series of increasingly important positions in what would now be considered the Civil Service. He served as Comptroller of Customs and Subsidies on wools, skins, and hides at the Port of London (1374) [8]. He later became Comptroller of Petty Customs (1382) and Justice of the Peace for the County of Kent (1385) [8].
    • Knight of the Shire (1386): Chaucer was elected to Parliament as a Knight of the Shire, representing Kent [8]. This position reflects his rising social status and recognition within his community.
    • Royal Favor and Continued Service (1389 onwards): After a brief period of disfavor during the reign of Richard II, Chaucer was restored to royal favor when John of Gaunt, his longtime patron, returned to England [9, 10]. He was appointed to oversee various public works projects, including the repair of walls and bridges between Greenwich and Woolwich, and the maintenance of St. George’s Chapel at Windsor [10].

    Chaucer’s diverse occupations provided him with a wealth of experiences and insights into medieval English society, which he skillfully incorporated into his writing. His roles as a courtier, diplomat, and civil servant brought him into contact with people from all walks of life, enriching his understanding of human nature and providing him with ample material for his vivid and engaging tales.

    The Canterbury Tales: Structure and Narrative

    The Canterbury Tales is structured as a frame story, a literary device in which a main narrative sets the stage for a series of embedded stories. The main narrative, in this case, is the pilgrimage to Canterbury, which provides a framework for the diverse collection of tales told by the pilgrims.

    The General Prologue introduces the frame story by describing the setting, the time of year (April), and the gathering of pilgrims at the Tabard Inn in Southwark. The Prologue vividly portrays each pilgrim, offering a glimpse into their social standing, personality, and occupation. This introduction establishes the context for the storytelling competition proposed by the Host, Harry Bailey, who serves as the master of ceremonies and judge of the best tale.

    The tales themselves are interconnected by “end-links”, which are brief conversations or interactions between the pilgrims that occur after each tale. These end-links often involve reactions to the preceding story, commentary on the teller’s character, or the Host prompting the next pilgrim to begin their tale. The end-links create a sense of continuity and contribute to the development of the relationships between the pilgrims, highlighting their diverse perspectives and social dynamics.

    Chaucer’s original plan was ambitious: each pilgrim was supposed to tell two tales on the journey to Canterbury and two on the return trip. However, he did not complete the full scheme. The sources indicate that Chaucer left behind ten fragments of varying sizes, which modern editors have arranged into what is believed to be the intended sequence.

    The manuscript fragments are grouped alphabetically, from Group A to Group I, with Group B subdivided into two parts. This arrangement creates a narrative flow that spans five days (April 16-20), culminating in the outskirts of Canterbury. However, the incompleteness of the work leaves some inconsistencies and unanswered questions.

    Within the overall frame story, Chaucer employs a variety of genres, reflecting the diverse backgrounds and interests of the pilgrims. The tales encompass:

    • courtly romances (The Knight’s Tale)
    • bawdy fabliaux (The Miller’s Tale)
    • saint’s lives (The Second Nun’s Tale)
    • sermons (The Parson’s Tale)

    This generic diversity contributes to the richness and complexity of the work, offering a panoramic view of medieval literary forms.

    The Canterbury Tales is not merely a collection of stories; it is a carefully crafted work that uses the pilgrimage as a unifying device to explore themes of social class, morality, religion, and the nature of storytelling itself. The interaction between the tales, the tellers, and the frame story creates a multi-layered narrative that continues to fascinate and engage readers centuries after its creation.

    The Literary Influences on Chaucer’s Storytelling

    Determining exactly what inspired an author’s storytelling style centuries after they lived is an impossible task, even for someone as famous and well-studied as Chaucer. However, based on the sources and our previous conversation, some educated guesses may be offered.

    Chaucer’s storytelling style was likely heavily inspired by his exposure to a diverse range of literary influences, his multifaceted career, and his own insightful observations of medieval English society.

    • French and Italian Literary Influences:
    • As discussed previously, Chaucer was deeply influenced by both French and Italian literature. From the French tradition, he adopted elements of courtly love, dream visions, and the fabliau. These influences can be seen in tales such as The Knight’s Tale, The Book of the Duchess, and The Miller’s Tale, respectively.
    • His encounters with Italian Renaissance writers like Boccaccio are believed to have enhanced his narrative skill and introduced him to a more human-centered approach to storytelling. The psychological depth and nuanced character portrayals found in The Canterbury Tales are likely a result of these Italian influences.
    • A Diverse Career:
    • Chaucer’s various occupations, including his roles as a courtier, diplomat, and civil servant, provided him with invaluable insights into the complexities of human nature and the dynamics of medieval English society. His work on The Canterbury Tales began after a period of political turmoil and upheaval, which likely sharpened his awareness of social tensions and inequalities.
    • These experiences, coupled with his keen observational skills, allowed him to create characters that felt real and relatable, even across the centuries. The range of social classes and occupations represented among the pilgrims, from the noble Knight to the bawdy Wife of Bath, testifies to Chaucer’s broad understanding of human experience.
    • The Pilgrimage Framework:
    • The pilgrimage framework of The Canterbury Tales itself is a brilliant storytelling device. It provides a natural and believable setting for the characters to interact and share their stories.
    • The journey to Canterbury also serves as a metaphor for the journey of life, with each tale representing a different stage or aspect of human experience. This framework allows Chaucer to explore a wide range of themes and genres while maintaining a sense of unity and purpose throughout the work.

    In addition to these factors, Chaucer’s mastery of language, his use of humor and irony, and his ability to weave together multiple storylines contribute to his distinctive storytelling style. He was a master of both the high style of courtly romance and the earthy language of the common people. This versatility allowed him to create works that were both entertaining and thought-provoking. The Canterbury Tales, though unfinished, remains a monument to Chaucer’s genius and a testament to the enduring power of storytelling. [1-3]

    Chaucer’s Works: A Catalog

    The sources provide a list of works authored or translated by Geoffrey Chaucer, although the exact order in which they were written is uncertain. Some of his works have been lost.

    Authored Works:

    • Before 1372:
    • Part of his translation of the Roman de la Rose,
    • The Book of the Duchess (possibly 1369/70),
    • The ABC of the Virgin.
    • Between 1372 and 1382:The House of Fame,
    • The Parliament of Fowls, and
    • possibly some early versions of stories that were later included in The Canterbury Tales, such as The Second Nun’s Tale, The Clerk of Oxford’s Tale, The Man of Law’s Tale, Chaucer’s Tale of Melibee, and The Knight’s Tale.
    • Between 1380 and 1385:Troilus and Criseyde.
    • 1386:
    • The Legend of the Saints of Cupid, also known as The Legend of Good Women, was written at the command of the Queen in response to criticism that Troilus and Criseyde painted women in a negative light. Chaucer never finished it.
    • From 1386 or 1387 onwards:The Canterbury Tales, also unfinished, exists in 84 manuscripts and early printed editions.

    Translated Works:

    • Translation of the Roman de la Rose.
    • Translation of Boethius’ De Consolatione Philosophiae (The Consolation of Philosophy): This work, completed between 1380 and 1385, significantly influenced Chaucer’s philosophical views, particularly on tragedy and free will.

    Lost Works:

    • The Book of the Lion is mentioned in Chaucer’s retractions at the end of The Canterbury Tales ([1]). It is speculated to have been a translation of a French work called Le Dit du Lion.

    It is also worth noting that some scholars believe that Chaucer’s “Tale of Sir Topaz”, while presented within The Canterbury Tales, may have been an earlier work that he adapted for the storytelling competition [2, 3].

    Chaucer’s body of work demonstrates his wide-ranging interests and his ability to adapt and transform existing stories into captivating narratives. His works continue to be studied and enjoyed for their wit, their insight into human nature, and their vibrant portrayal of medieval English life.

    Coghill’s Chaucer Translations

    Professor Nevill Coghill is best known for his modern English translations of Chaucer’s The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and Criseyde. These translations, published as Penguin Classics, have made Chaucer’s works accessible to a wider audience.

    Coghill’s translation of The Canterbury Tales was first published in 1951 and was revised several times, with the most recent revision published in 1977. His goal was to convey the spirit and energy of Chaucer’s Middle English verse in a way that modern readers could easily understand and appreciate.

    The sources note that Coghill’s translation of The Canterbury Tales became an enduring bestseller. It is widely used in schools and universities, and it has been praised for its accuracy, readability, and ability to capture the humor and vitality of Chaucer’s original.

    In addition to his work on The Canterbury Tales, Coghill also translated Chaucer’s Troilus and Criseyde into modern English. This translation, like his translation of The Canterbury Tales, was published as a Penguin Classic.

    Coghill’s translations have been instrumental in introducing new generations of readers to the genius of Geoffrey Chaucer. His work has helped to ensure that Chaucer’s stories continue to be enjoyed and appreciated for their timeless wit, their profound insights into human nature, and their vibrant depiction of medieval English life.

    Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales: Manuscripts and Fragments

    The sources state that there are 84 manuscripts and early printed editions of The Canterbury Tales by publishers such as Caxton, Pynson, Wynkyn de Worde, and Thynne [1]. However, this number refers to the total number of sources, not just manuscript fragments.

    The sources specify that Chaucer left ten fragments of The Canterbury Tales, varying in size [2]. Modern editors have arranged these fragments into what is believed to be the intended sequence based on clues within the text, such as dates and locations mentioned in the “end-links” [2].

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • Cambridge Proficiency Masterclass

    Cambridge Proficiency Masterclass

    The provided text is an excerpt from the “Cambridge Proficiency Masterclass – Student’s Book,” a comprehensive guide designed to prepare candidates for the 2013 Cambridge English: Proficiency (CPE) exam, a C2-level English assessment. It outlines the structure and content of the coursebook, detailing various sections like grammar explanations by George Yule, vocabulary development, and exam practice tasks for all parts of the CPE exam, including reading, writing, listening, and speaking. The material emphasizes high-level language acquisition and offers strategies for effective communication beyond the exam context. Additionally, it highlights the inclusion of online resources such as practice exercises and a digital dictionary to supplement the student’s learning experience.

    01
    Amazon Basics 3-Tier Rolling Utility or Kitchen Cart – White

    Proficiency Masterclass: Exam Preparation and Practice

    The “Cambridge Proficiency Masterclass” student’s book is specifically designed to provide appropriate preparation and practice for the Cambridge English: Proficiency (CPE) exam, updated for the 2013 format. It also aims to help candidates develop their English skills for success beyond the exam. The book’s units contain practice of exam-type tasks for all parts of each paper, developing high-level vocabulary and grammar, which is supported by a dedicated Grammar notes section. Additionally, a Review section helps consolidate language covered in the main units.

    For further practice, the book includes access to Online Skills and Language Practice, offering over 150 exercises, including skills-training, exam practice, vocabulary, and grammar exercises. This online resource also features speak-and-record tasks, an integrated Oxford Advanced Learner’s Dictionary 8th Edition search box, and feedback on answers. A full online practice test is also available via the access code.

    Here are general and specific strategies for preparing for the exam papers:

    General Exam Preparation Skills

    • Understand Your Learning Style: Identify if you are a fast or slow reader, if you visualize what you read, or if you need to revisit material to remember it.
    • Time Management: Learn how long to spend on each part of a paper and practice completing full papers (e.g., Reading & Use of English in 1 hour 30 minutes) within the given time limits.
    • Vocabulary Development: When learning new vocabulary, try to remember it in context, along with words it collocates with, or as part of word families.
    • Reading Widely: This enhances vocabulary, grammatical accuracy, and appreciation of different writing styles.
    • Proofreading: Always leave sufficient time at the end to check for errors and ensure that your writing makes sense.
    • Stay Calm: Panic can hinder performance. If you miss an item during listening, guess or move on and return to it on the second listen. Examiners want you to do well.

    Reading & Use of English Paper (1 hour 30 minutes)

    This paper has 53 questions and accounts for 40% of the total marks.

    • Skimming and Scanning: Practice skim-reading for gist and global meaning without getting bogged down by unknown words. Practice scanning for specific information, underlining it and noting the question number.
    • Identifying Opinions: Learn to identify instances where the writer expresses an opinion or adopts a particular attitude.
    • Reading Between the Lines: Strive to understand the writer’s views in more depth.
    • Text Cohesion: Be aware of text structure, including exemplification and reference, which is particularly helpful for tasks like gapped text.

    Strategies for Specific Parts:

    • Part 1: Multiple-choice cloze:
    • Read each sentence carefully, considering the meaning of each word.
    • Try all four options before making your final choice, ensuring the word fits grammatically and semantically with surrounding words.
    • Part 2: Open cloze:
    • Read the text ignoring the gaps, then reread sentence by sentence, focusing on words around the gaps.
    • Think of a single word that fits best, ensuring it is grammatically correct and makes sense in context.
    • Part 3: Word formation:
    • Identify the required part of speech for each gap (e.g., adjective, adverb, noun).
    • Pay attention to affixes (prefixes and suffixes) needed, including negative prefixes like un-, im-, il-, and ir-. Check for necessary form changes and spelling.
    • Part 4: Key word transformations:
    • Understand the original sentence’s meaning. Brainstorm idioms, phrases, or collocations with the given word.
    • The rewritten sentence must have a similar meaning to the original, using 3-8 words, and the key word must not be changed.
    • Part 5: Multiple choice:
    • Read the text carefully. Turn question stems into questions and try to answer without looking at the options first.
    • Multiple-choice questions typically follow the order of information in the text.
    • Part 6: Gapped text:
    • Focus on text cohesion and links between paragraphs.
    • Practice by cutting up photocopied texts into paragraphs and reassembling them.
    • Pay close attention to words and information immediately before and after each gap.
    • Part 7: Multiple matching:
    • Read each section of the text carefully. Identify which section relates to each question, perhaps by underlining relevant information and people’s names.
    • Match the meaning of the statements to the text, rather than just exact words.

    Writing Paper (1 hour 30 minutes)

    This paper consists of two parts and carries 20% of the total marks.

    • Task Analysis: Underline key information in the task: context, target reader, points to include, and word limit.
    • Planning: Dedicate a few minutes to planning your writing to ensure relevance and good organization.
    • Style and Organization: Decide on a suitable writing style and how to lay out your information effectively.
    • Variety: Use a variety of structures and vocabulary to avoid repetition.
    • Word Count: The word count is a guide; you won’t be penalized for exceeding it, but irrelevant information will cost marks. Estimate your word count per page to stay within limits.

    Strategies for Specific Parts:

    • Part 1: Essay (compulsory):
    • Carefully read the two input texts, identify their main points, and whether they present contrasting or complementary views.
    • Integrate and paraphrase the main points from both texts and incorporate your own views and opinions.
    • Maintain focus, avoid irrelevant information, and use appropriate register and cohesive devices.
    • Part 2: Choice of task:
    • Understand the type of text required (article, report, review, letter, or essay for set texts).
    • Identify the target reader to determine the appropriate style.
    • Ensure all aspects of the question are covered.
    • Set Text Task: Only choose this if you have thoroughly read and studied the book. Watch film adaptations as a supplementary tool, but read the book. Keep notes on the plot, key events, themes, narrative perspective, characters, setting, and relevant quotes. Do not simply summarize the plot.

    Listening Paper (approx. 40 minutes)

    This paper has four parts and carries 20% of the total marks.

    • Active Listening: Practice concentrating and focusing on what the speaker is saying, rather than thinking about your own contribution.
    • Pre-listening: Always maximize the time given to read through the questions carefully before the recording starts. This helps you focus on the information to listen for.
    • Note-Taking: Practice reading questions, listening, and making brief notes simultaneously.
    • Accents: Try to quickly tune in to different accents and speaking styles at the beginning of each task.
    • No Prediction: While anticipating the type of answer is helpful, do not decide on the exact answer before listening.

    Strategies for Specific Parts:

    • Part 1: Multiple choice (3-option):
    • Read all questions and options carefully before the recording begins.
    • Put a dot next to your potential answer on the first listen, and make your final choice on the second listen.
    • Part 2: Sentence completion:
    • Read sentences carefully and try to anticipate the type of missing information (e.g., names, facts, figures), but avoid guessing the specific word.
    • The answers are usually one or two words and must be spelled correctly.
    • Part 3: Multiple choice (4-option):
    • This task requires a longer period of continuous concentration.
    • Read questions quickly but carefully, dotting potential answers on the first listen and finalizing on the second.
    • Part 4: Multiple matching (2 tasks):
    • Read both tasks carefully and underline keywords. You need to consider answers for both tasks simultaneously while listening to each speaker.
    • Match the meaning, not necessarily the exact words, as speakers may use slightly different phrasing.

    Speaking Paper (approx. 16 minutes)

    This paper has three parts and carries 20% of the total marks.

    • Confidence: Keep talking to showcase your speaking skills. Don’t be too nervous, as examiners want you to do well.
    • Clarity and Projection: Speak clearly and project your voice so both examiners can hear you.
    • Interaction: Maintain eye contact with the examiner (except in Part 2, where you interact with your partner). In Part 2, ensure you give your partner opportunities to speak and politely interrupt if they dominate.
    • Flexibility: If unsure about visuals, speculate. Visuals can often be interpreted in multiple ways, and your opinion is valid.
    • Fillers and Link Words: Use useful fillers, phrases, and link words to give yourself time to think, agree or disagree, and structure your responses.
    • Justify Opinions: Don’t be afraid to express and justify your views on topics.
    • Relevance: Listen carefully to instructions and prompts. Irrelevant responses will detract from your score.
    • Assessment Criteria: Be aware that you are assessed on grammar and vocabulary (range, accuracy, appropriacy), discourse management (organizing ideas, developing topics), pronunciation (prosodic features, intelligibility), and interactive communication.

    Strategies for Specific Parts:

    • Part 1: Conversation:
    • This part aims to relax you. Expand on your answers rather than giving one-word replies. Start talking as soon as possible.
    • Part 2: Two-way conversation:
    • Listen carefully to the task. Avoid rigid or dogmatic views; exploring both sides of an issue can provide more scope for demonstrating language. Keep talking, as the examiner will stop you when the time is up.
    • Part 3: Individual long turn & discussion:
    • Start talking quickly, as silence wastes time. You are assessed on your ability to express ideas, not the ideas themselves.
    • Use the ideas on the prompt card to structure your response.
    • Use discourse markers as pointers. Correct mistakes if you notice them. Paraphrase if you can’t think of a specific word.
    • Listen to your partner’s long turn, as you will be asked follow-up questions related to the topic.
    • Developing the Topic: Answer questions directly without going off-topic. Focus on expressing opinions and ideas rather than personal anecdotes, though sometimes personal examples are appropriate. If the examiner asks both candidates a question, contribute, but also allow your partner to speak.

    Cambridge English: Proficiency Exam Skills Guide

    Exam preparation for the Cambridge English: Proficiency (CPE) exam, as outlined in the “Cambridge Proficiency Masterclass” student’s book, heavily emphasizes the development of comprehensive language skills. The course is designed to provide practice for exam-type tasks and to help candidates develop their English skills for success beyond the exam itself. This includes focused development of high-level vocabulary and grammar throughout the course, supported by a dedicated Grammar notes section.

    Here’s a breakdown of the language skills highlighted in the sources for exam preparation:

    General Language Skills Development

    The course aims to develop English on a broader level. This involves:

    • Understanding Learning Style: Identifying if you are a fast or slow reader, visualize what you read, or need to revisit material to remember it.
    • Time Management: Learning how long to spend on each part of a paper and practicing completing full papers within given time limits.
    • Vocabulary Development: Remembering new vocabulary in context, along with words it collocates with, or as part of word families.
    • Reading Widely: This enhances vocabulary, grammatical accuracy, and appreciation of different writing styles.
    • Proofreading: Leaving sufficient time at the end to check for errors and ensure that writing makes sense.
    • Staying Calm: Preventing panic, especially during listening tasks; if an item is missed, guessing or moving on and returning on the second listen.

    Reading & Use of English Paper (40% of total marks)

    This paper assesses a variety of reading skills, with Parts 1-4 largely focusing on language knowledge (vocabulary and grammar), and Parts 5-7 on more extensive reading skills with longer texts.

    • Vocabulary and Grammar Knowledge (Parts 1-4):
    • Part 1: Multiple-choice cloze tests accuracy with vocabulary and some grammar, including the meaning of single words, phrases, and phrasal verbs. Strategies include trying all options to ensure grammatical and semantic fit.
    • Part 2: Open cloze focuses on accuracy with grammar and some vocabulary in context. Candidates must think of a single word that fits best, paying attention to surrounding words.
    • Part 3: Word formation assesses accuracy with vocabulary, particularly word-building, including compound words and the use of prefixes and suffixes. Identifying the required part of speech and appropriate affixes is key.
    • Part 4: Key word transformations tests accuracy with a wide range of grammar and vocabulary, including collocation, phrasal verbs, and lexical phrases. The rewritten sentence must have a similar meaning to the original within a 3-8 word limit.
    • Extensive Reading Skills (Parts 5-7):
    • Part 5: Multiple choice evaluates understanding of detail, opinion, attitude, tone, purpose, main idea, implication, exemplification, and reference. Questions follow the order of information in the text.
    • Part 6: Gapped text requires understanding of text structure and links between parts of text. Practice involves focusing on cohesion and connections between paragraphs.
    • Part 7: Multiple matching tests understanding of detail, opinion, attitude, and specific information across different sections of text. Matching the meaning, not just exact words, is crucial.
    • Core Reading Skills: Skim-reading for gist/global meaning, scanning for specific information, identifying where the writer expresses an opinion or attitude, and reading between the lines to understand deeper views.

    Writing Paper (20% of total marks)

    This paper assesses the ability to identify, summarize, and evaluate key information and incorporate personal opinions into a coherent essay (Part 1). For Part 2, it assesses the ability to organize relevant ideas and express them clearly within various text types (articles, reports, reviews, letters). Key skills include:

    • Task Analysis and Planning: Underlining key information (context, target reader, points to include, word limit) and dedicating time to planning.
    • Style and Organization: Deciding on a suitable writing style, effective layout, and linking sentences and paragraphs.
    • Variety: Using a range of structures and vocabulary to avoid repetition.
    • Paraphrasing: Crucial for Part 1, integrating and rephrasing main points from input texts.
    • Developing Arguments: Integrating personal views and opinions with key points.
    • Specific Language Use: Applying evaluative language, descriptive language, persuasive devices, exemplification, and hedging.
    • Nominalization: Used for conciseness and varied style in reports.

    Listening Paper (approx. 40 minutes, 20% of total marks)

    This paper tests the understanding of detail, gist, opinion, feeling, attitude, purpose, agreement, course of action, specific information, and inference. Essential skills include:

    • Active Listening: Concentrating on what the speaker is saying rather than planning your own contribution.
    • Pre-listening: Maximizing time to read questions before the recording starts to focus on information.
    • Note-Taking: Practicing reading questions, listening, and making brief notes simultaneously.
    • Accent Adaptation: Quickly tuning into different accents and speaking styles at the beginning of each task.
    • Accuracy: In sentence completion, answers are usually one or two words and must be spelled correctly.

    Speaking Paper (approx. 16 minutes, 20% of total marks)

    This paper assesses grammar, vocabulary (range, accuracy, appropriacy), discourse management (organizing ideas, developing topics), pronunciation (prosodic features, intelligibility), and interactive communication. Key aspects include:

    • Confidence and Clarity: Keeping talking to showcase skills, speaking clearly and projecting voice.
    • Interaction: Maintaining eye contact with the examiner (except Part 2), interacting with partner, giving opportunities to speak, and politely interrupting.
    • Flexibility: Speculating if unsure about visuals.
    • Strategic Language Use: Employing useful fillers, phrases, and link words to gain time, agree/disagree, and structure responses.
    • Justification: Expressing and justifying opinions.
    • Relevance: Listening carefully to instructions and prompts to provide relevant responses.
    • Discourse Management: Organizing ideas, developing topics, expressing and justifying opinions, using discourse markers.
    • Pronunciation: Focusing on prosodic features and intelligibility.
    • Interactive Communication: Demonstrating use of general interactional and social language.

    In summary, effective exam preparation for the Cambridge English: Proficiency exam involves not just rote learning, but a holistic development of language skills across all four papers, emphasizing accuracy, range, and appropriate use of vocabulary and grammar in various contexts.

    Mastering Grammar for Cambridge English Proficiency

    In the context of the provided sources, Grammar Focus refers to the systematic development and comprehensive practice of high-level grammar as a core component of preparation for the Cambridge English: Proficiency (CPE) exam.

    Here’s how grammar focus is approached:

    • Integrated Development The “Cambridge Proficiency Masterclass” student’s book aims to develop “high-level vocabulary and grammar” throughout the course. This suggests that grammar is not treated in isolation but is integrated into various units and tasks.
    • Dedicated Grammar Notes A significant aspect of the grammar focus is the Grammar notes section (starting on page 149). These notes are written by linguist George Yule and provide detailed explanations and examples of grammatical structures. The “Review section” (page 166) also contains exercises to review and consolidate the language covered.
    • Online Practice The “Online Skills and Language Practice” component includes over 150 exercises, specifically mentioning “grammar exercises” to build on and extend the language and skills from the Student’s Book.
    • Assessed in the Exam Grammar is a crucial element assessed in the Cambridge English: Proficiency exam. For example, the Reading and Use of English paper (Parts 1-4) largely focuses on “testing language knowledge – vocabulary and grammar“. Additionally, in the Speaking Paper, candidates are assessed on their “accurate use of grammar”.

    Specific grammar topics that are part of the grammar focus across the units include:

    • Verb Forms and Tenses
    • Narrative tenses.
    • Past verb forms with present or future meaning.
    • Future forms and time clauses, including future phrases.
    • Perfect aspect (present, past, and future perfect tenses).
    • Past modals (possibility, speculation, necessity, obligation).
    • Defining and non-defining relative clauses, including reduced clauses.
    • Stative verbs and the distinction between simple and continuous aspects.
    • Gerunds and infinitives, including their different uses and patterns with verbs.
    • Uses of “have” and “get” (including passive constructions).
    • Reported speech, including verb patterns and reporting questions.
    • Counterfactual conditionals, mixed unreal conditionals, and alternative conditional structures.
    • Sentence Structure and Cohesion
    • Focus and emphasis, such as cleft sentences and inversion.
    • Link words.
    • Discourse markers (for generalizations, exceptions, giving examples, agreeing/disagreeing).
    • Contrast clauses and reason clauses.
    • Manner clauses.
    • Complex sentences.
    • Accuracy and Appropriacy
    • The Reading & Use of English paper specifically targets accuracy in grammar through tasks like the Multiple-choice cloze (Part 1), Open cloze (Part 2), and Key word transformations (Part 4).
    • The “Exam strategies” section advises candidates to ensure their chosen words fit “grammatically correct” and “make sense in its context” in cloze tasks. For Key word transformations, candidates must ensure the rewritten sentence “means the same as the first sentence” within a word limit, demonstrating a wide range of grammar knowledge.

    In essence, Grammar Focus within this curriculum is about mastering the intricacies of English grammar not just for theoretical knowledge, but for its accurate, appropriate, and flexible use in real-world communication and high-stakes exam scenarios.

    Mastering Vocabulary: The Cambridge Proficiency Approach

    Vocabulary building is a central and pervasive element of language skills development within the “Cambridge Proficiency Masterclass” curriculum, essential for both exam success and broader English proficiency. The course emphasizes a holistic and systematic approach to expanding a candidate’s lexical repertoire.

    Here’s a detailed discussion of how vocabulary building is focused upon:

    • Integrated Development: High-level vocabulary is developed throughout the entire course. It’s not treated as a separate, isolated skill but is woven into the fabric of various units and tasks. The “Online Skills and Language Practice” also includes specific “vocabulary exercises” to build and extend language.
    • Exam-Specific Assessment: Vocabulary is a crucial component assessed across multiple papers in the Cambridge English: Proficiency (CPE) exam:
    • Reading & Use of English Paper (40% of total marks): This paper extensively tests vocabulary knowledge.
    • Part 1: Multiple-choice cloze specifically assesses “accuracy with vocabulary” including single words, phrases, and phrasal verbs. Candidates are advised to consider the meaning of each word and how it fits the context.
    • Part 2: Open cloze also focuses on “accuracy with grammar and some vocabulary in context”.
    • Part 3: Word formation heavily emphasizes “accuracy with vocabulary,” particularly “word-building, including compound words and the use of prefixes and suffixes”. This involves identifying the correct part of speech and appropriate affixes.
    • Part 4: Key word transformations requires “accuracy with a wide range of grammar and vocabulary, including collocation, phrasal verbs and lexical phrases”.
    • Speaking Paper (20% of total marks): Candidates are assessed on their “range and use of vocabulary”. It is important to use a “range of appropriate vocabulary”.
    • Writing Paper (20% of total marks): Candidates are encouraged to “use a range of vocabulary to demonstrate what you are capable of”.
    • Strategies for Vocabulary Development: The sources provide several key strategies for effective vocabulary acquisition:
    • Contextual Learning: When learning new vocabulary, it’s recommended to “remember it in context, together with words it collocates with, or in word families”.
    • Wide Reading: “Reading widely” is highlighted as a general skill that “will help you learn more vocabulary and increase your grammatical accuracy”. This exposure to different writing styles also enhances vocabulary.
    • Online Tools: The course includes access to the “Oxford Advanced Learner’s Dictionary 8th Edition search box” within its online practice, facilitating word lookup and understanding.
    • Review and Consolidation: The “Review section” (page 166) contains exercises specifically designed to “review and consolidate the language covered in the main units,” including vocabulary.
    • Thematic Vocabulary Expansion: The “Contents” section of the student’s book reveals a structured approach to vocabulary based on thematic units. Each unit introduces and practices vocabulary relevant to its topic, for example:
    • Unit 1 (People & places): Focuses on “Describing characters and plots,” “Word knowledge: get,” “Collocations: memory,” and “Word knowledge: would”.
    • Unit 3 (Language & culture): Includes “Describing culture,” “Descriptive adjectives,” “Prefixes,” “Idioms for emphasis,” and “Borrowed words”. The review exercises further exemplify this, with a focus on “Negative prefixes”.
    • Unit 5 (Safety & danger): Covers “Phobias,” “Ways of looking,” “Word knowledge: weather and storm,” and “Collocations: risk and danger”.
    • Unit 8 (Law & order): Features “Collocations: crime, punishment, rights, rules,” “Crime vocabulary and dependent prepositions,” and “Word knowledge: law”.
    • Unit 9 (Psychology & employment): Introduces “Suffixes” and “Expressions: listen, hear and ear”.
    • Unit 10 (Entertainment & leisure): Covers “Food and drink adjectives,” “Word knowledge: make,” “Money sayings and proverbs,” “Synonyms: rich and poor,” “Collocations with money,” and “Words or expressions connected with trade and money”.
    • Unit 12 (Travel & tourism): Explores “Word knowledge: if,” “Word knowledge: cut,” and “Word knowledge: road, path, and track”. It also specifically covers “Success and failure”.

    This comprehensive grammar focus, coupled with broad language skills development, is designed to prepare candidates thoroughly for the demanding Cambridge English: Proficiency examination.

    Cambridge Proficiency Masterclass: Deep Text Analysis

    Text Analysis within the “Cambridge Proficiency Masterclass” curriculum refers to a focused and in-depth examination of written and, in some cases, spoken language, extending beyond simple comprehension to a critical understanding of how language is used to convey meaning, style, and writer/speaker intent. It is a recurring activity indicated in the contents and explicitly detailed in various units.

    This focus aims to enhance a candidate’s ability to:

    • Interpret Implied Meaning and Authorial Intent: Text analysis tasks require understanding what the writer is implying, their attitude, tone, and purpose. This goes beyond surface-level comprehension to grasp the deeper nuances of the text.
    • Identify and Evaluate Stylistic and Literary Devices: Students are asked to pinpoint various techniques writers employ and discuss their effectiveness. Examples include:
    • Analyzing the effectiveness of similes.
    • Identifying rhetorical devices used to engage the reader or create interest.
    • Explaining the meaning and purpose of metaphorical expressions.
    • Spotting instances of alliteration and considering their impact.
    • Understanding the use of euphemisms and understatement.
    • Discussing persuasive devices in articles.
    • Examine Lexical Choices and Nuances: Text analysis often delves into specific words and phrases, exploring their meaning, connotation, and contribution to the overall text. This includes:
    • Understanding the meaning of specific words or expressions in context, such as “unprecedented”, “compelling evidence”, “charged with”, “paradigm shift”, “mere blip”, “epithet”, “on a par with”, “humble”, “from this time on”, “unsettling”, “Terra Incognita”, “mindsets”, “travel game”, “rose-tinted glasses”, “flowery language”, and “losing its lustre”.
    • Identifying synonyms and discussing their differing meanings and uses.
    • Explaining the meaning of idiomatic phrases and collocations.
    • Analyze Grammatical and Structural Elements: The focus extends to how grammatical structures contribute to meaning and emphasis:
    • Underlining and explaining focus and emphasis structures like cleft sentences and inversion.
    • Analyzing the use of semicolons.
    • Explaining the use of pronouns and their reference.
    • Discussing the function of specific verb forms.
    • Understand Text Cohesion and Organization: Text analysis tasks, particularly those related to gapped texts, train students to understand how different parts of a text link together coherently. This involves identifying connecting words, reference devices, and the logical flow of information.
    • Critically Evaluate Written Work: In the writing sections, text analysis involves critically reading sample essays, articles, reports, and letters. This includes assessing:
    • Whether main ideas are adequately addressed.
    • How ideas are organized within paragraphs.
    • The clarity of personal opinions and the use of evaluative language.
    • The effectiveness of paraphrasing.
    • The appropriateness of the register and style for the target audience.
    • Specific words or phrases that indicate informal style.
    • Grammatical and lexical accuracy and range in student work.

    In summary, text analysis in the “Cambridge Proficiency Masterclass” is a systematic approach to developing a deep, critical understanding of English texts, preparing candidates to interpret complex meanings, appreciate stylistic choices, and produce their own well-structured and sophisticated written responses for the Cambridge English: Proficiency (CPE) exam.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • IELTS Vocabulary for Maximum Score

    IELTS Vocabulary for Maximum Score

    This document, titled “CHECK YOUR ENGLISH VOCABULARY FOR IELTS” by Rawdon Wyatt, is a workbook designed to help students prepare for the IELTS examination, covering both Academic and General Training modules. Published by Bloomsbury Information, it focuses on essential vocabulary across various sections of the exam, including Listening, Reading, Writing, and Speaking. The book is structured into self-contained modules with task-based activities that present vocabulary in context, encompassing general and topic-specific areas like education, architecture, family, and science. Through exercises, it aims to enhance vocabulary acquisition and improve performance for test-takers seeking to maximize their IELTS score.

    01
    SpotMyUV UV Detection Stickers for Sunscreen with Patented Dermatrue SPF Sensing Technology, Know When to Reapply Sunscreen to Help Prevent Sunburn, 16 Count

    IELTS Vocabulary Mastery: A Preparation Guide

    IELTS preparation, as outlined in the sources, involves building a strong vocabulary across various domains to maximize your score in the examination. The “Check Your English Vocabulary for IELTS” workbook is specifically designed to aid students preparing for either the Academic or General Training modules of the IELTS exam.

    01
    The Cowboy Who Loved Texas: Enemies to Lovers Romance & Small Town Saga (Three Rivers Romance™ Book 3) Kindle Edition

    Here’s a breakdown of key aspects of IELTS preparation based on the sources:

    • Vocabulary Focus
    • The workbook covers main vocabulary areas essential for the Listening, Reading, Writing, and Speaking sections of the exam.
    • It includes general vocabulary items relevant to specific IELTS tasks, such as describing how something works, discussing changes in graphs or tables, and providing or following directions.
    • It also features topic-specific vocabulary areas that may appear in the examination, like education, architecture, family matters, science and technology, among others.
    • Examples of general vocabulary topics include “Addition, equation and conclusion,” “Around the world,” “Changes,” “Confusing words & false friends,” “Context & meaning,” “Contrast and comparison,” “Emphasis & misunderstanding,” “Focusing attention,” “Generalisations & specifics,” “Groups,” “How something works,” “Joining or becoming part of something bigger,” “Likes & dislikes,” “Location & direction,” “Modified words,” “Objects & actions,” and “Obligation & option”.
    • Further general vocabulary topics covered are “Opinion, attitude & belief,” “Opposites: adjectives,” “Opposites: verbs,” “Ownership, giving, lending & borrowing,” “Phrasal verbs,” “Presenting an argument,” “Reason & result,” “Shape & features,” “Size, quantity & dimension,” “Spelling,” “Stopping something,” “Success & failure,” “Task commands,” “Time,” and “Useful interview expressions”.
    • Topic-specific vocabulary extends to “The arts,” “Business & industry,” “Children & the family,” “Crime & the law,” “The environment,” “Food & diet,” “Geography,” “Global problems,” “Healthcare,” “The media,” “Men & women,” “Money & finance,” “On the road,” “Sport,” “Town & country,” and “Travel,” and “Work”.
    • Workbook Structure and Usage
    • The book is organized into self-contained modules with task-based activities that present vocabulary in context.
    • Each topic-specific module typically contains three tasks: two presenting vocabulary in context with practice exercises, and a third for review through gap-fill exercises.
    • For practical application, there are productive practice exercises (pages 105–119) designed as IELTS-style speaking and writing tasks. These tasks are followed by sample answers that offer guidance, emphasizing there are no “right” or “wrong” answers.
    • A comprehensive key (pages 120–139) allows you to check your answers and provides additional information on specific vocabulary items or general vocabulary areas, as well as other useful words or phrases.
    • It is advised not to work through the book mechanically from beginning to end. Instead, you should choose areas that you are unfamiliar with or those that are of specific interest or importance to you.
    • Enhancing Vocabulary and Study Habits
    • A crucial tip is to keep a record of new words, phrases, and expressions that you acquire.
    • Regularly review these new entries to ensure they become part of your active vocabulary.
    • To further acquire new vocabulary, you should read as much as possible from a variety of authentic reading materials, such as books, newspapers, magazines, and web-based articles.
    • Using a good monolingual English dictionary is highly recommended to develop your vocabulary effectively. Such a dictionary should clearly explain word meanings, pronunciation, various forms (e.g., noun form of an adjective), collocations, and provide sample sentences for usage. The Macmillan English Dictionary for Advanced Learners is specifically suggested, with a free online version available.

    The IELTS examination itself is administered by the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), the British Council, and IDP Education Australia, though the mentioned workbook is not endorsed by these organizations.

    01
    Office Chair – Ergonomic Desk Chair with Adjustable Lumbar Support, Mesh Computer Chair, Executive Chair for Home Office Comfortable Lumbar Support (White White)

    IELTS Vocabulary Building and Strategies

    Vocabulary building is a crucial component of IELTS preparation, aimed at helping students maximize their score across all four sections of the examination: Listening, Reading, Writing, and Speaking. The “Check Your English Vocabulary for IELTS” workbook is specifically designed to support this process for both the Academic and General Training modules of the exam.

    Based on the sources, here’s a comprehensive discussion of vocabulary building for IELTS:

    Key Areas of Vocabulary

    The preparation focuses on two main categories of vocabulary:

    • General Vocabulary Items: These are relevant to specific tasks or questions encountered in the IELTS examination. Examples include:
    • “Addition, equation and conclusion”
    • “Around the world”
    • “Changes” (e.g., describing changes in graphs or tables)
    • “Confusing words & false friends”
    • “Context & meaning”
    • “Contrast and comparison”
    • “Emphasis & misunderstanding”
    • “Focusing attention”
    • “Generalisations & specifics”
    • “Groups”
    • “How something works” (e.g., describing mechanisms)
    • “Joining or becoming part of something bigger”
    • “Likes & dislikes”
    • “Location & direction” (e.g., providing or following directions)
    • “Modified words”
    • “Objects & actions”
    • “Obligation & option”
    • “Opinion, attitude & belief”
    • “Opposites: adjectives” and “Opposites: verbs”
    • “Ownership, giving, lending & borrowing”
    • “Phrasal verbs”
    • “Presenting an argument”
    • “Reason & result”
    • “Shape & features”
    • “Size, quantity & dimension”
    • “Spelling”
    • “Stopping something”
    • “Success & failure”
    • “Task commands”
    • “Time”
    • “Useful interview expressions”
    • Topic-Specific Vocabulary Areas: These are areas that are likely to appear in the examination. Examples include:
    • “Architecture”
    • “The arts”
    • “Business & industry”
    • “Children & the family”
    • “Crime & the law”
    • “Education”
    • “The environment”
    • “Food & diet”
    • “Geography”
    • “Global problems”
    • “Healthcare”
    • “The media”
    • “Men & women”
    • “Money & finance”
    • “On the road”
    • “Science & technology”
    • “Sport”
    • “Town & country”
    • “Travel”
    • “Work”

    How to Use the Workbook for Vocabulary Building

    The workbook is structured to facilitate effective vocabulary acquisition:

    • Self-Contained Modules: Each vocabulary area is presented in its own module with task-based activities that place vocabulary items in context.
    • Contextual Learning and Review: Topic-specific modules typically feature two tasks that introduce vocabulary in context with practice exercises, followed by a third task for review through gap-fill exercises.
    • Productive Practice: Pages 105–119 contain exercises designed as IELTS-style speaking and writing tasks, giving students opportunities to actively use their acquired vocabulary. These are accompanied by sample answers for guidance.
    • Comprehensive Key: Pages 120–139 provide an answer key that also offers additional information on specific vocabulary items or general vocabulary areas, along with other useful words or phrases.
    • Flexible Study Approach: It is recommended not to go through the book linearly but rather to select areas that are unfamiliar or of particular interest or importance.

    Strategies for Enhancing and Retaining Vocabulary

    Beyond the workbook, several key habits are advised:

    • Record and Review: It is crucial to keep a record of new words, phrases, and expressions as they are learned. These new entries should be regularly reviewed to ensure they become part of your active vocabulary.
    • Extensive Reading: To acquire new vocabulary, students should read as much as possible from a variety of authentic reading materials, such as books, newspapers, magazines, and web-based articles.
    • Monolingual English Dictionary Use: Employing a good monolingual English dictionary is highly recommended for effective vocabulary development. Such a dictionary should:
    • Clearly explain word meanings.
    • Show pronunciation.
    • Provide various forms of words (e.g., noun form of an adjective).
    • Indicate collocations (words or phrases that commonly go together).
    • Offer sample sentences to illustrate word usage. The Macmillan English Dictionary for Advanced Learners (ISBN 978-1405026284) is specifically suggested, with a free online version available.

    It is important to note that while this workbook is a valuable preparation tool, it is not endorsed by the organizations that administer the IELTS exam (University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), the British Council, and IDP Education Australia).

    IELTS Vocabulary Practice Exercises Explained

    The “Check Your English Vocabulary for IELTS” workbook incorporates a variety of practice exercises designed to help students enhance their vocabulary for the IELTS examination. These exercises are integral to maximizing a student’s score across all four sections of the exam: Listening, Reading, Writing, and Speaking.

    Here’s a detailed discussion of the practice exercises:

    • Structure and Integration
    • Each vocabulary area within the workbook is presented as a self-contained module.
    • Within these modules, vocabulary items are introduced and practiced through task-based activities, which present words and phrases in context.
    • For the topic-specific vocabulary areas (found on pages 58–104), each module typically comprises three tasks: the first two introduce vocabulary in context with practice or recognition exercises, while the third provides an opportunity to review the learned vocabulary through a gap-fill exercise.
    • Types of Practice Exercises
    • General Vocabulary Exercises: Pages 1–57 focus on general vocabulary items, many of which are directly relevant to specific IELTS tasks, such as describing mechanisms, analyzing changes in data, or giving directions. Examples include exercises on:
    • “Addition, equation and conclusion”
    • “Changes 1” and “Changes 2”
    • “Confusing words & false friends”
    • “Context & meaning” (focusing on inferring meaning from context and word clues)
    • “How something works”
    • “Location & direction”
    • “Presenting an argument”
    • “Task commands” (explaining what common IELTS instructions like “Analyse” or “Evaluate” mean)
    • And many more, covering topics like Condition, Contrast and Comparison, Emphasis & Misunderstanding, Focusing Attention, Generalisations & Specifics, Groups, Joining or Becoming Part of Something Bigger, Likes & Dislikes, Modified Words, Objects & Actions, Obligation & Option, Opinion, Attitude & Belief, Opposites (adjectives and verbs), Ownership, Giving, Lending & Borrowing, Phrasal Verbs, Reason & Result, Shape & Features, Size, Quantity & Dimension, Spelling, Stopping Something, Success & Failure, Time, and Useful Interview Expressions.
    • Productive Practice Exercises (IELTS-style Tasks): A dedicated section (pages 105–119) contains “productive practice exercises” that allow students to practice using their acquired vocabulary in IELTS-style speaking and writing tasks. These are divided into specific “Practice tasks” based on broader topics:
    • Practice Tasks 1: Architecture includes Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, and a Writing task about preserving old buildings vs. building new ones. Sample answers are provided for guidance.
    • Practice Tasks 2: The Arts features Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, and a Writing task discussing government subsidies for the arts versus essential services. Sample answers are available.
    • Practice Tasks 3: Education covers Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, and a Writing task on the usefulness of skills learned in school versus outside school. Sample answers are included.
    • Practice Tasks 4: The Environment provides Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, and a Writing task on shared responsibility for environmental damage. Sample answers are given.
    • Practice Tasks 5: Food and Diet includes Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, and a Writing task on modern kitchen appliances versus eating out. Sample answers are provided.
    • Guidance on Usage
    • Students are advised not to work through the book mechanically from beginning to end. Instead, it is recommended to choose areas that are unfamiliar or those of specific interest or importance to the individual student.
    • A comprehensive key (pages 120–139) is available for checking answers and offers additional information about specific vocabulary items or general areas, including other useful words or phrases.

    These practice exercises, ranging from contextual vocabulary building to full IELTS-style tasks, are a fundamental part of the workbook’s approach to IELTS preparation, allowing students to learn, recognize, review, and actively apply the target vocabulary.

    IELTS Vocabulary for English Language Skills

    The sources indicate that the “Check Your English Vocabulary for IELTS” workbook is designed to help students maximize their scores across all four core language skills assessed in the IELTS examination: Listening, Reading, Writing, and Speaking. Vocabulary building is presented as a crucial foundation for developing and demonstrating proficiency in these areas.

    Here’s a discussion of how language skills are addressed within the context of the provided materials:

    • Comprehensive Skill Coverage The workbook’s primary goal is to equip students with the essential vocabulary needed to perform well in all sections of the IELTS exam. This implies that vocabulary is not an isolated skill but a tool that underpins successful performance in listening, reading, writing, and speaking.
    • Support for Productive Skills (Writing and Speaking) The workbook includes “productive practice exercises” specifically designed as IELTS-style speaking and writing tasks. These exercises, found on pages 105–119, give students direct opportunities to practise using their acquired vocabulary. For instance:
    • Writing Tasks: Examples include discussing arguments for and against preserving old buildings versus building new ones (Architecture), or debating government subsidies for the arts versus essential services (The Arts). The “Changes 1” module is highlighted as “particularly useful for Part 1 of the IELTS Writing Test, where you may be asked to write about changes shown in tables or graphs” [Answers, 3]. Similarly, the “Presenting an argument” module is noted for its utility in “Part 2 of the IELTS Writing Test” [Answers, 46].
    • Speaking Tasks: Integrated within the “Productive practice” section, these tasks mirror IELTS Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, allowing students to apply vocabulary in conversational and argumentative contexts [105, 396-398; 108, 408-410; 112, 422-424]. The “Useful interview expressions” module directly supports the Speaking Test [209; Answers, 56].
    • Vocabulary for Cohesion and Argumentation: Modules like “Addition, equation and conclusion” and “Reason & result” introduce linking words and phrases crucial for building coherent arguments in both speaking and writing.
    • Support for Receptive Skills (Listening and Reading) While the workbook primarily focuses on vocabulary, it implicitly and explicitly enhances receptive skills:
    • Reading Comprehension: The “Context & meaning” modules (e.g., “Context & meaning 1,” “Context & meaning 2,” “Context & meaning 3”) directly teach a “useful skill in the IELTS Reading Test” – inferring the meaning of unfamiliar words from their surrounding context.
    • Listening Comprehension: Vocabulary related to “How something works” and “Location & direction” is presented as “particularly useful for the IELTS Listening Test” [Answers, 24, 27]. This implies that understanding specific vocabulary in these contexts is key to comprehending spoken instructions or descriptions.
    • General Vocabulary: The “General vocabulary items” (pages 1–57), which include phrases for describing changes in graphs, are relevant to tasks encountered in reading and listening sections.
    • Fundamental Linguistic Components Effective language skills rely on a solid understanding of vocabulary’s various facets:
    • Word Forms and Usage: The recommendation to use a monolingual English dictionary emphasizes learning not just definitions but also pronunciation, various forms of words (e.g., noun form of an adjective), collocations (words that commonly go together), and sample sentences to illustrate word usage. These elements are vital for accurate and natural language production and comprehension across all skills.
    • Accuracy: Exercises like “Confusing words & false friends” directly address common errors, improving the accuracy of word choice in both speaking and writing, and aiding precise comprehension in reading and listening.
    • Understanding Task Commands: The “Task commands” module is fundamental, as understanding what instructions like “Analyse” or “Evaluate” mean is crucial for responding appropriately in all parts of the exam.
    • Strategies for Enhancement and Retention Beyond the exercises, the workbook promotes habits that broadly contribute to language skill development:
    • Active Vocabulary Acquisition: Students are encouraged to “keep a record of new words, phrases and expressions” and “review these on a regular basis so that they become part of your active vocabulary”. This active engagement reinforces learning, making vocabulary readily available for use in productive skills.
    • Extensive Reading: Reading “as much as possible from a variety of authentic reading materials” is advised for acquiring new vocabulary. This practice directly strengthens reading comprehension and indirectly builds passive vocabulary which can then be activated.

    In summary, the provided sources illustrate that vocabulary building is intricately linked to the development of specific language skills required for the IELTS. By focusing on relevant vocabulary in context, and providing opportunities for both receptive understanding and productive application, the workbook aims to holistically improve a student’s overall English language proficiency for the exam.

    IELTS Vocabulary: A Comprehensive Guide

    The “Check Your English Vocabulary for IELTS” workbook is specifically designed to address all four core exam sections of the International English Language Testing System (IELTS): Listening, Reading, Writing, and Speaking. The workbook aims to provide the main vocabulary areas students will need or encounter in these sections to help them maximize their score.

    Here’s how the workbook discusses and supports each exam section:

    • Overall Coverage: The workbook’s primary purpose is to cover vocabulary relevant to all four sections of the IELTS examination. Vocabulary building is presented as an essential foundation for demonstrating proficiency across these diverse linguistic skills.
    • General Vocabulary (Pages 1-57): This section focuses on general vocabulary items, many of which are directly relevant to specific tasks within the IELTS exam sections.
    • For the IELTS Writing Test, Part 1, modules like “Changes 1” are highlighted as “particularly useful” for describing changes shown in tables or graphs [2, Answers, 3].
    • For the IELTS Listening Test, vocabulary related to “How something works” and “Location & direction” is noted as “particularly useful” for comprehending descriptions or instructions [2, Answers, 24, 27].
    • For the IELTS Reading Test, the “Context & meaning” modules (e.g., “Context & meaning 1,” “Context & meaning 2,” “Context & meaning 3”) directly teach the “useful skill” of inferring the meaning of unfamiliar words from context [2, Answers, 12].
    • For both the IELTS Writing Test, Part 2, and Speaking Test, Part 3, the “Presenting an argument” module provides crucial vocabulary for constructing coherent arguments [7, Answers, 46].
    • The “Useful interview expressions” module directly supports the Speaking Test [7, Answers, 56].
    • The “Task commands” module is fundamental for understanding instructions in any part of the exam.
    • Topic-Specific Vocabulary (Pages 58-104): These modules cover specific subject areas that may be encountered across the various exam sections, ensuring a broad vocabulary base for diverse topics.
    • Productive Practice Exercises (Pages 105-119): This dedicated section provides IELTS-style speaking and writing tasks, allowing students to actively use the acquired vocabulary in contexts directly mirroring the exam. These tasks are divided into specific themes:
    • Practice Tasks 1: Architecture includes Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, and a Writing task on preserving old buildings. Sample answers are provided for guidance.
    • Practice Tasks 2: The Arts features Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, and a Writing task discussing government subsidies for the arts.
    • Practice Tasks 3: Education covers Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, and a Writing task on the usefulness of skills learned in and outside school.
    • Practice Tasks 4: The Environment provides Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, and a Writing task on shared responsibility for environmental damage.
    • Practice Tasks 5: Food and Diet includes Speaking Parts 1, 2, and 3, and a Writing task on modern kitchen appliances versus eating out.

    In essence, the workbook’s structure and content are meticulously aligned with the demands of each IELTS exam section, providing targeted vocabulary and practice opportunities to enhance performance in Listening, Reading, Writing, and Speaking.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • Complete English Grammar Rules

    Complete English Grammar Rules

    This grammar guide offers an extensive overview of English language components, covering everything from nouns—including concrete, abstract, predicate, and compound forms—to various types of verbs like transitive, intransitive, auxiliary, and phrasal verbs. It explores adjectives and their order, distinguishing between attributive, predicative, collective, and demonstrative uses, while also explaining the roles of adverbs in modifying other parts of speech and forming comparative or superlative structures. The text also clarifies the proper use of pronouns, prepositions in various phrases, and conjunctions for linking clauses, providing a foundational understanding of sentence construction, including simple, complex, and compound forms, and differentiating between active and passive voice.

    01
    Laptop Backpack,Business Travel Anti Theft Slim Durable Laptops Backpack with USB Charging Port,Water Resistant College Computer Bag for Women & Men Fits 15.6 Inch Laptop and Notebook – Black

    The Renaming Power of Predicate Nouns

    Predicate nouns, also sometimes referred to as predicative nouns, are nouns that follow linking verbs and serve a specific grammatical function: they rename or re-identify the subject of a sentence or clause.

    Here are the key aspects of predicate nouns:

    • Location and Verb Type:
    • Predicate nouns always appear after a linking verb.
    • The most common linking verb is “to be” (e.g., “is,” “was,” “are,” “seem,” “appears,” “become”). Unlike action verbs, linking verbs describe a state of being rather than an action.
    • Even though they describe the subject, they are dependent on the linking verb and are considered part of the predicate.
    • Function and Form:
    • Predicate nouns are a subset of subject complements. A subject complement is information that follows a linking verb to describe, identify, or rename the subject of the clause.
    • If the noun acting as a predicate noun is accompanied by modifiers, such as articles, adjectives, or prepositional phrases, the entire noun phrase functions predicatively.
    • Noun clauses can also serve as predicate nouns, functioning grammatically like nouns to rename or re-identify the subject.
    • Examples:
    • “Love is a virtue.” (Here, “a virtue” renames the subject “Love” after the linking verb “is”.)
    • “Tommy seems like a real bully.” (“a real bully” renames “Tommy” after the linking verb “seems”.)
    • “Maybe this is a blessing in disguise.” (“a blessing in disguise” renames “this” after the linking verb “is”.)
    • “She is a bully.” (“a bully” renames “She” after “is”.)
    • “They are a lost cause.” (“a lost cause” renames “They” after “are”.)
    • “I have been a mess lately.” (“a mess” renames “I” after “have been”.)
    • “Japan is where I want to go most.” (The noun clause “where I want to go most” acts as the predicate noun, renaming “Japan”.)
    • “The thing I wish for most is that people would all just get along.” (The noun clause “that people would all just get along” is the predicate noun, renaming “the thing I wish for most”.)
    • “Politicians are who create the laws.” (The noun clause “who create the laws” acts as the predicate noun, renaming “Politicians”.)

    In essence, predicate nouns clarify or specify what the subject is, but they do so through the mediating action of a linking verb, distinguishing them from nouns that directly perform the action of a verb as a subject.

    01
    MySmile Pap Natural Mint Non-Sensitive Teeth Whitening Powder Cavity Prevention Little Foam for Cleaning Tooth Fresh Breath Care Oral Alternative Fluoride Free Toothpaste -1.04 oz (Bright Purple)

    The Many Forms of English Verbs

    Verbs are fundamental components of English sentences, serving to describe actions, processes, conditions, or states of being of people or things. They are essential, as every sentence must include at least one verb and they form the root of the predicate. Verbs are subject to conjugation, which refers to the process of changing their form to reflect specific meanings, such as tense, aspect, mood, voice, and person.

    Here are the various types of verbs as described in the sources:

    • Finite and Non-finite Verbs
    • When discussing verbs’ role in the predicate, they are fundamentally divided into finite and non-finite verbs.
    • Finite verbs are verbs that have subjects and indicate grammatical tense, person, and number. They describe the action of a person, place, or thing in the sentence and do not require another verb to be grammatically correct. Examples include “I swim every day” or “The lion is the king of the jungle”. Finite verbs are crucial because sentences need a finite verb to be complete; without one, a sentence would be disjointed and fail to express a full action. Finite verbs are typically in their base form (infinitive without “to”), past tense form, or third-person singular form. Modal auxiliary verbs are always finite.
    • Non-finite verbs do not express a direct relationship with the subject and do not have tenses or subjects they correspond to. Instead, they are usually infinitives, gerunds, or participles. Non-finite verbs often require a finite verb to make a complete sentence.
    • Infinitives: These are the most basic construction of a verb, typically the uninflected base form of the verb plus the particle “to” (e.g., “to run,” “to be”). Infinitives do not actually function as verbs in a clause; instead, they can be used as nouns, adjectives, or adverbs to express an action as a concept. For example, “To err is human” uses “to err” as the subject (a noun function).
    • Participles: Words formed from verbs that can function as adjectives or gerunds, or be used to form continuous and perfect tenses.
    • Present Participle: The “-ing” form of a verb (e.g., “singing,” “running”). This form is always the same, regardless of whether the verb is regular or irregular.
    • Past Participle: Usually the same as a verb’s simple past tense form (ending in “-d” or “-ed” for regular verbs) but can be irregular (e.g., “worked,” “seen”). Past participles are used with the auxiliary “have” to form perfect tenses and can also function as adjectives.
    • Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
    • Every verb is classified as either transitive or intransitive.
    • Transitive verbs describe an action that happens to someone or something, known as the direct object of the verb. They “take one or more objects”. For example, in “He’s reading a book,” “book” is the direct object. Transitive verbs can also take indirect objects, which are the people or things receiving the direct object.
    • Monotransitive verbs are transitive verbs that only take one direct object. Most verbs fall into this category.
    • Ditransitive verbs take two objects: a direct object and an indirect object. The indirect object typically receives or benefits from the action as a result of the direct object.
    • “Tritransitive” verbs are an unofficial third type that takes (or seems to take) three objects, where the third “object” is usually a prepositional phrase or clause.
    • Intransitive verbs do not have objects; their action is not happening to anyone or anything. For example, in “Our dog ran away,” there is no object receiving the action.
    • “Ambitransitive Verbs”: Some action verbs can be both transitive and intransitive depending on the context or information the speaker wishes to include. For example, “She eats before going to work” (intransitive) vs. “She eats breakfast before going to work” (transitive).
    • Regular and Irregular Verbs
    • All English verbs are either regular or irregular.
    • Regular verbs form their past simple tense and past participle by adding “-d” or “-ed” to their base form. Their past tense and past participle forms are identical.
    • Irregular verbs have different forms for their past simple tense and past participle that do not adhere to a distinct or predictable pattern. These forms must be memorized individually (e.g., “sing,” “sang,” “sung”). The verb “be” is highly irregular, with eight different conjugations.
    • Auxiliary Verbs (Helping Verbs)
    • Auxiliary verbs are used to add functional meaning to other “main” verbs in a clause. They create different tenses, form negatives, ask questions, or add emphasis, but they do not have semantic meaning on their own.
    • Primary Auxiliary Verbs: These are “be,” “do,” and “have”. They are the most common auxiliaries and can also be used as main verbs. They conjugate to reflect plurality, tense, or aspect.
    • Modal Auxiliary Verbs (Modal Verbs): These include “can,” “could,” “will,” “would,” “shall,” “should,” “must,” “may,” and “might”. They express modality—possibility, likelihood, ability, permission, obligation, or future intention. Modals are unique because they cannot conjugate into different forms and are always followed by a main verb in its base form.
    • Semi-Modal Auxiliary Verbs (Semi-Modal Verbs, Marginal Modal Verbs): These verbs sometimes behave like modal auxiliaries but do not share all their characteristics. They include “ought to,” “used to,” “need,” and “dare”. “Dare” and “need” can also function as main verbs.
    • Action Verbs (Dynamic Verbs)
    • These verbs describe an active process that results in an effect. They show what the subject is “doing”. Examples include “run,” “walk,” “write,” or “sing”. Action verbs can convey nuances about how an action is performed (e.g., “collapsed” vs. “sat”).
    • Stative Verbs (State Verbs, Non-continuous Verbs, Non-progressive Verbs)
    • In contrast to action verbs, stative verbs describe states of being or conditions of a subject. They are usually unable to be used in continuous or progressive forms because they describe static conditions.
    • Categories of stative verbs include linking verbs (like “be” and verbs of the senses), and verbs that express emotions, possession, cognition, and general states or qualities. Examples are “I am hungry,” “She likes old movies,” “They own three cars,” or “I understand the issue”.
    • Linking Verbs (Copulas, Copular Verbs)
    • A subset of stative verbs, linking verbs are used to describe the state of being of the subject of a clause. They connect the subject to an adjective, noun, noun phrase, or pronoun (collectively called subject complements) that describes or renames it, without expressing any action.
    • The verb “to be” is the most common linking verb. Other linking verbs include “seem,” “feel,” “sound,” “appear,” “taste,” and verbs of progression like “become,” “get,” “grow,” “prove,” “remain,” and “turn”.
    • To identify if a verb is functioning as a linking verb, one can check if the predicate describes the subject, or try replacing the verb with “be” to see if the sentence still makes sense.
    • Light Verbs (Delexical Verbs, Thin Verbs, Semantically Weak Verbs, Empty Verbs)
    • Light verbs do not carry unique meaning on their own; instead, they rely on another word or words that follow them (usually a noun or noun phrase) to become meaningful.
    • Common examples include “do,” “have,” “make,” “get,” and “take”. For instance, in “I took a shower,” “took” gains its specific meaning from “shower”. Light verbs can have different meanings depending on the word they are paired with. Unlike auxiliary verbs, which work with other verbs, light verbs primarily get their meaning from nouns.
    • Phrasal Verbs
    • Phrasal verbs are verb phrases that have idiomatic meanings—their meaning is not obvious from the individual words that make up the phrase. They consist of a verb + a preposition or an adverbial particle.
    • Examples include “take up” (occupy space) or “give up” (stop trying). They are distinct from prepositional verbs, which use the literal meaning of the verb.
    • Conditional Verbs
    • These are verb constructions used in conditional sentences, which express something that might happen depending on whether a particular condition is met. The word “if” is commonly used to denote such conditions.
    • Causative Verbs
    • Causative verbs are used to indicate that a subject causes another action to be performed. They require another action to be mentioned, forcing the sentence to have at least one other verb. Examples include “force,” “make,” and “let”. For instance, “They let the light stay on”.
    • Factitive Verbs
    • Factitive verbs are used to indicate the resulting condition or state (object complement) of a direct object caused by the action of the verb. They answer how a person, place, or thing was changed. Examples include “elect,” “appoint,” “make,” and “choose”. For example, “The school appointed Mrs. McMillian principal”. They differ from linking verbs because they show a change in status, category, or characteristic, rather than just adding information about an existing state.
    • Reflexive Verbs
    • These are verbs whose subjects are also their direct objects; the action of the verb is both committed and received by the same person or thing. They are often identified by the use of reflexive pronouns (e.g., “myself,” “herself”) as direct objects. For instance, “I accidentally burned myself”.

    The Essential Guide to English Adverbs

    Adverbs are crucial components of English sentences, serving to modify or describe verbs, adjectives, other adverbs, or even entire clauses. They add descriptive meaning and can appear almost anywhere in a sentence, depending on what they modify and how.

    Here’s a comprehensive discussion of adverb usage:

    What Adverbs Modify

    Adverbs provide additional information by answering questions such as when, where, how, why, or to what extent an action occurs.

    • Verbs: “You write beautifully“.
    • Adjectives: “He owns the bright red car”.
    • Other Adverbs: “She ran very quickly”.
    • Entire Clauses: “She looked excited, as if she could jump up and dance at any moment“.

    Formation of Adverbs

    • Regular Adverbs: Most adverbs are formed by adding “-ly” to the end of an adjective. For example, “beautiful” becomes “beautifully”. There are specific spelling adjustments, such as “-ic” changing to “-ically” (e.g., “enthusiastic” to “enthusiastically”) or adjectives ending in “-y” changing to “-ily” (e.g., “happy” to “happily”).
    • Irregular Adverbs: Some adverbs do not follow these standard patterns and often have the same spelling as their adjectival counterparts. Examples include “fast,” “hard,” “late,” and “early”. The adverb form of “good” is “well”.

    Categories of Adverbs

    Adverbs are classified based on the specific kind of description they provide:

    • Adverbs of Time: Describe when or for how long something happens (e.g., now, tomorrow, still, yet). They are often placed at the end of a sentence, or at the beginning for emphasis.
    • Adverbs of Frequency: A subset of adverbs of time that describes how frequently something occurs (e.g., always, usually, sometimes, daily). Indefinite frequency adverbs usually come before the main verb, but after auxiliary verbs or the linking verb “be”.
    • Adverbs of Place: Indicate direction, distance, movement, or position related to a verb’s action (e.g., here, there, north, everywhere, upstairs). They are usually placed after the verb they modify.
    • Adverbs of Manner: Describe how something happens or is done, often formed by adding “-ly” to adjectives (e.g., beautifully, slowly, happily). They typically come after intransitive verbs or after the direct object of transitive verbs.
    • Adverbs of Degree: Indicate the intensity, degree, or extent of the word they modify (e.g., undoubtedly, very, quite, somewhat). They usually appear before the word they describe. These include mitigators (decrease intensity, e.g., slightly, a bit) and intensifiers (increase intensity, e.g., very, incredibly).
    • Adverbs of Purpose (or Reason): Tell why something happens (e.g., therefore, thus, consequently). These are often conjunctive adverbs, prepositional phrases, infinitive phrases, or adverbial clauses.
    • Focusing Adverbs: Draw attention to a particular part of a clause, often implying contrast (e.g., also, just, only, especially, mostly, notably). “Too” and “as well” usually take the final position in a clause.
    • Negative Adverbs: Modify meaning in a negative way (e.g., no, not, hardly ever).
    • Conjunctive Adverbs: Connect independent clauses and express a relationship between them (e.g., therefore, nevertheless, likewise).
    • Evaluative Adverbs (or Commenting Adverbs): Express the speaker’s opinion or attitude about something, modifying the entire clause (e.g., clearly, sadly, honestly, fortunately).
    • Viewpoint Adverbs: Indicate whose point of view is being expressed or specify an aspect of something (e.g., personally, scientifically, biologically, in my opinion). They typically appear at the beginning or end of a clause, set off by a comma.
    • Relative Adverbs: Introduce relative clauses that relate to a place, time, or reason (e.g., where, when, why).
    • Adverbial Nouns: Nouns or noun phrases that function grammatically as adverbs, usually specifying time, distance, weight, age, or monetary value (e.g., tomorrow, an hour, five dollars).

    Adverbial Phrases and Clauses

    Adverbs can be single words, phrases, or entire clauses. Phrases and clauses that function as adverbs are collectively called adverbials.

    • Adverbial Phrases: Groups of words functioning as an adverb. These can be:
    • An adverb modified by another adverb (e.g., “very quickly” where “very” intensifies “quickly”).
    • Prepositional Phrases functioning as adverbs (e.g., “at the park” modifying a verb like “playing”). They can describe time, location, manner, or reason.
    • Infinitive Phrases functioning as adverbs, primarily to express purpose or reason (e.g., “to get some lettuce” explaining why someone went to the store).
    • Adverbial Clauses: Dependent clauses that modify verbs, adjectives, or adverbs, introduced by subordinating conjunctions. They can express cause, comparison/manner, condition, place, reason, or time.

    Placement of Adverbs

    Adverbs are notably flexible in their sentence placement.

    • General Rule: While adverbs can appear almost anywhere, there’s a “royal order of adverbs” to follow when multiple adverbs describe the same verb: Manner, Place, Frequency, Time, Purpose.
    • Flexibility: Adverbs can appear at the beginning, middle, or end of a sentence, often for emphasis.
    • Transitive vs. Intransitive Verbs: Adverbs of manner usually follow intransitive verbs directly. For transitive verbs, they can come before the verb or after the direct object.
    • Adjectives: Adverbs modifying adjectives always come before the adjective.

    Degrees of Comparison

    Similar to adjectives, adverbs can be inflected (changed in form) to show degrees of comparison:

    • Positive Degree: The basic form of the adverb (e.g., “fast”).
    • Comparative Degree: Compares differences between two actions, usually formed by adding “-er” to one-syllable adverbs (e.g., “faster”) or “more/less” before longer adverbs (e.g., “more carefully”).
    • Superlative Degree: Identifies the highest or lowest degree of an action, usually formed by adding “-est” to one-syllable adverbs (e.g., “fastest”) or “most/least” before longer adverbs (e.g., “most carefully”).
    • Irregular Forms: Some adverbs have irregular comparative and superlative forms (e.g., “well” becomes “better,” “best”; “badly” becomes “worse,” “worst”).
    • Gradability: Adverbs must be “gradable” (able to move on a scale of intensity) to form comparative and superlative degrees.

    Important Usage Notes

    • “Good” vs. “Well”: “Good” is an adjective, used to describe nouns. “Well” is the adverb derived from “good” and describes how an action is performed. For example, “She sings well” (correct) versus “She sings good” (incorrect). However, “well” can also function as a predicative adjective meaning “healthy”.
    • Adverbials vs. Complements vs. Adjuncts: While “adverbial” is a broad term for any word or group of words functioning as an adverb, it’s important to distinguish between adverbial complements and adjuncts.
    • Adverbial complements are required to complete the meaning of the verb; removing them would make the sentence incomplete or fundamentally alter its meaning (e.g., “The teacher sent Tim home“).
    • Adverbial adjuncts elaborate on or modify the verb but can be removed without altering the grammatical integrity or core meaning of the sentence (e.g., “She walked to the park slowly“).
    • Squinting Modifiers: These are adverbs placed between two words where it’s unclear which word they modify, leading to ambiguity. For example, “The way he sings so often annoys me” could mean he sings frequently or that his frequent singing is annoying. Clarification requires rephrasing.
    • Particles in Phrasal Verbs: Particles, which are often identical in appearance to prepositions, function like adverbs to modify and uniquely expand the meaning of the verbs they are paired with in phrasal verbs. Unlike prepositions, particles do not introduce a prepositional phrase. For example, “ask out” (idiomatic phrasal verb) vs. “ask for” (prepositional verb using literal meaning).

    Understanding these various types and uses of adverbs allows for more precise and effective communication in both speech and writing.

    Understanding Clauses in English Grammar

    Clauses are fundamental grammatical units that always contain both a subject and a predicate. They form the basic building blocks for sentences in English .

    There are two main types of clauses:

    • Independent Clauses
    • Dependent Clauses

    Let’s discuss each type in detail:

    Independent Clauses

    An independent clause, also known as a main clause, is a group of words that forms a complete, independent thought. It does not require anything else to be considered complete and can therefore stand alone as a sentence. A single independent clause constitutes a simple sentence. It contains a subject and a predicate, both of which can have modifiers.

    Examples of independent clauses include:

    • “I refuse.”
    • “The wind blows.”
    • “Dogs bark.”
    • “Bees sting.”
    • “Cats meow.”

    Independent clauses can be joined together to form compound sentences (using coordinating conjunctions, conjunctive adverbs, or semicolons) or combined with dependent clauses to form complex sentences.

    Dependent Clauses

    A dependent clause, also called a subordinate clause, relies on information from an independent clause to form a complete, logical thought. As such, it cannot stand on its own as a sentence. Dependent clauses are typically marked by dependent words such as subordinating conjunctions, relative pronouns, or relative adverbs, which link them to independent clauses.

    Examples of dependent clauses include:

    • “Whenever I travel” (introduced by “whenever,” a subordinating conjunction)
    • “whom we met on the plane” (introduced by “whom,” a relative pronoun)
    • “that they like to eat sushi” (introduced by “that”)

    Dependent clauses serve a variety of grammatical functions within a sentence. There are three primary categories of dependent clauses:

    1. Noun Clauses
    2. Relative Clauses (also called Adjective Clauses)
    3. Adverbial Clauses (also called Adverb Clauses)

    1. Noun Clauses

    Noun clauses are dependent clauses that function grammatically like nouns. Because they behave like nouns, they can fulfill all the roles that a regular noun would in a sentence.

    Noun clauses commonly begin with words such as “that,” “how,” “if,” and “wh-” words (e.g., “what,” “where,” “when,” “why,” “who,” “whom,” “whether”). Like all clauses, they contain a subject and a predicate.

    Functions of noun clauses include:

    • Subject of the sentence: “What I decide will determine who gets the promotion”. (“What I decide” is the subject).
    • Direct object of a verb: “I want to see what is available before I make a purchase”.
    • Indirect object of a verb: “I’ll send whoever is responsible a strongly worded letter”.
    • Predicate noun (or subject complement): “The thing I wish for most is that people would all just get along“.
    • Object of a preposition: “This is the man to whom I owe my life“.
    • Adjective complement: “I’m thrilled that you are coming to visit!”.

    A sentence can contain multiple noun clauses functioning in different ways.

    2. Relative Clauses (Adjective Clauses)

    Relative clauses, also known as adjective clauses or adjectival clauses, are dependent clauses that provide descriptive information about a noun or noun phrase.

    They are introduced by either a relative pronoun (who, whom, which, whose, that) or a relative adverb (where, when, why). They always appear directly after the noun they modify.

    Relative clauses can be categorized into two types:

    • Restrictive clauses (defining clauses): Provide essential information that identifies the noun being modified. They are not set apart by commas. The relative pronoun “that” and relative adverb “why” can only introduce restrictive clauses.
    • Example: “The book that I wrote is being published in January”.
    • Non-restrictive clauses (non-defining clauses): Provide extra, nonessential information about a noun that is already clearly identified. They are separated from the rest of the sentence by commas. The relative pronoun “which” is normally reserved for non-restrictive clauses describing things or non-domestic animals.
    • Example: “The escaped giraffe, which had been on the loose for weeks, was finally captured”.

    3. Adverbial Clauses (Adverb Clauses)

    An adverbial clause, or adverb clause, functions like a regular adverb to modify verbs, adjectives, other adverbs, or sometimes entire clauses.

    Adverbial clauses use subordinating conjunctions to connect to an independent clause. The type of subordinating conjunction indicates the specific function or idea being modified.

    Functions of adverbial clauses, based on the subordinating conjunction, include:

    • Time: “I will arrive when dinner is ready“. (Other conjunctions: whenever, while, before, after, since, until, once).
    • Place: “Grandma and Grandpa want to go where their children live“. (Other conjunctions: wherever, everywhere, anywhere).
    • Reason or Purpose: “I am exhausted because I was working all night“. (Other conjunctions: as, since, so (that), in order that, for fear that, hence, lest).
    • Condition: “If it snows tonight, I’m not going to work tomorrow”. (Other conjunctions: unless, whether or not, in the event, provided).
    • Comparison or Manner: “I work better when I have total privacy“. (Other conjunctions: like, as, as…as, as if, the way, than).
    • Contrast: “Though the sun is out, the wind is very chilly”. (Other conjunctions: although, even though, whereas, even if).

    Clauses and Sentence Structure

    Clauses are the foundation of all sentence structures.

    • A simple sentence consists of a single independent clause.
    • A compound sentence joins two or more independent clauses.
    • A complex sentence contains one independent clause and at least one dependent clause.
    • A compound-complex sentence links a complex sentence to a simple sentence or another complex sentence.

    English Noun Inflection and Declension

    Noun inflection refers to the way nouns are changed in form to create new, specific meanings. In English grammar, the process of inflecting nouns is collectively known as declension. While verbs undergo conjugation, nouns, pronouns, adjectives, and adverbs undergo declension.

    In modern English, nouns are primarily declined to reflect two main aspects: plurality and, in some cases, gender.

    Plurality

    The most common reason nouns are inflected is to mark plurality, indicating when there is more than one person, place, or thing being discussed.

    • Regular Plurals:
    • The standard method for forming regular plurals is to add “-s” to the end of the noun (e.g., “one boy – two boys,” “one book – two books”).
    • If a noun ends in “-s,” “-x,” “-z,” or a consonant cluster like “-sh,” “-ch,” or “-tch,” we add “-es” (e.g., “one coach – two coaches,” “one box – two boxes,” “one watch – two watches”).
    • When a noun ends in a consonant followed by “-y,” the “y” is changed to “i” and “-es” is added (e.g., “one country – two countries,” “one city – two cities”).
    • Nouns ending in “-ff” or “-ffe” simply add “-s” (e.g., “one cliff – two cliffs”).
    • Irregular Plurals: Many nouns have irregular plural forms that do not follow these standard conventions. These are unique words that must be memorized.
    • Examples include: “person – people/persons” (though “persons” is often reserved for formal or legal contexts), “mouse – mice,” “child – children,” “foot – feet,” “man – men,” “woman – women”.
    • Some nouns maintain the same form for both singular and plural (e.g., “one deer – two deer,” “one fish – two fish,” “one sheep – two sheep”).
    • Certain nouns ending in “-f,” “-fe,” or “-lf” replace these endings with “-ves” (e.g., “one leaf – two leaves,” “one life – two lives”), but there’s no fixed rule, and these must also be memorized.
    • Nouns borrowed from Latin or Greek may retain their original plural forms (e.g., “fungus – fungi,” “criterion – criteria,” “thesis – theses”), though some may also have shifted to more conventional English plural forms (e.g., “index – indices/indexes,” “cactus – cacti/cactuses”).
    • Uncountable Nouns: Uncountable nouns (also known as mass nouns or non-count nouns), which refer to things that cannot be divided or counted as individual elements (like “water,” “furniture,” “love,” “news”), generally cannot be made plural. They cannot take indefinite articles like “a” or “an”. To quantify them, a unit of measure or specific phrasing must be added (e.g., “a piece of advice” instead of “an advice,” “a few pieces of advice” instead of “a few advices”).
    • Uncountable nouns are grammatically singular and must take singular forms of verbs (e.g., “The furniture in my living room is old,” not “are old”).
    • Some collective nouns, like “police,” are plural-only and always take plural verbs (e.g., “The police are investigating”).

    Gender

    In contrast to many other languages (like Romance languages), English nouns are generally gender-neutral. However, some instances of gender inflection still exist, mainly for nouns describing people who perform an action.

    • Making a Noun Feminine: Most gender-declined nouns indicate feminine gender, though this practice is becoming less common.
    • The most common suffix is “-ess,” used primarily for professional, noble, royal, or religious titles of women (e.g., “stewardess,” “waitress,” “actress,” “princess”). However, for professions, non-gendered alternatives are increasingly preferred (e.g., “flight attendant” over “stewardess”).
    • Other less common feminine suffixes include “-ine” (e.g., “heroine” from “hero”) and “-trix” (e.g., “executrix” from “executor”), often found in older or legalistic terms.
    • Making a Noun Masculine: Nouns distinguished by masculine gender are often in their basic form and tend to end in “-er” or “-or” to denote someone who performs a verb’s action.
    • Nouns with Inherent Gender Identity: A relatively small number of English nouns are inherently gendered without using suffixes, describing male or female individuals directly. These often include familial, social, or royal titles (e.g., “queen – king,” “girl – boy,” “mother – father,” “wife – husband”).
    • Specific gendered words also identify male and female members of animal types (e.g., “mare – stallion” for horses, “hen – rooster” for chickens).

    It is important to note that adjectives in English are never made plural to agree with plural nouns; only the noun itself is pluralized.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog